JP2020049351A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of providing a player with a suggestive presentation having a high ingenuity.SOLUTION: If a performance of a continuous notice presentation is determined, a value obtained by adding one (1) to the number of variation presentation for causing the continuous notice presentation is set in a continuous notice performance counter 223e. And, every time a variation pattern command that is a start instruction of the variation presentation is received, the continuous notice performance counter 223e is referred to, then if the referred value is greater than one (1), the continuous notice presentation is performed to the variation presentation and the value of the continuous notice performance counter 223e is subtracted by one (1). If the value is one (1), the continuous notice presentation is always caused not to be performed, and the value of the continuous notice performance counter 223e is subtracted by one (1). In this way, after the continuous notice presentation is finished, it is possible to suppress a continuous performance of the continuous notice presentation. Therefore, a decline of expectation a player has toward the continuous notice presentation, which is generated by continuous performances of the continuous notice presentation or a single notice presentation, can be suppressed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 33

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been configured to control the gaming machine by a main control unit and a sub-control unit. For example, the main control of the game is performed by the main control means, while the display control of the effect image on the image display means such as a liquid crystal display device provided in the game machine is performed by the sub-control means.

Japanese Utility Model Publication No. 7-24383

  However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the processing may be complicated and enormous with the diversification of effect images.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine capable of easily achieving a wide variety of display modes such as effect images displayed on image display means. It is intended to be.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a main control unit that performs main control of a game, a sub-control unit that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control unit, and a sub-control unit that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control unit. Image display means for displaying an image based on control by the control means, wherein the sub-control means draws an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means; A first image storage unit for storing a plurality of pieces of image information used for drawing an image by an image drawing unit, and a predetermined image for dynamically displaying identification information on the image display unit in response to a predetermined command received from the main control unit First display specifying means for specifying a display mode from among a plurality of display modes; and first specifying information for storing, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing of each display mode. Memory A first specifying unit that specifies the first specified information corresponding to the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying unit; an updating unit that is updated each time a predetermined time elapses; Drawing instruction for generating drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the updated drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated means each time Information generating means, and measuring means capable of measuring time, wherein the image drawing means uses one of the image information to generate an image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means. In the display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the image display means, the time required from the start of the dynamic display to the end thereof is predetermined for each display mode. And said The control means includes: a first rule used for dynamic continuation display of identification information, which is displayed continuously when the required time has elapsed since the start of the display in the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means. When the command transmitted from the main control means is the predetermined command, the sub-control means having received the predetermined command includes identification information of a time corresponding to the predetermined command. The dynamic display is executed in a specific display mode, there are a plurality of times corresponding to the predetermined command, and the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying unit is a display mode of any required time. Even if the required time has elapsed, the display mode of the dynamic continuation display of the identification information that is continuously displayed is the same display mode in which the identification information repeats a predetermined movement. The sub-control means includes: a predetermined display execution means for performing a predetermined display on the image display means in response to an operation means operable by a player being operated; and during a dynamic continuation display period of the identification information. When receiving a predetermined command from the main control means, without performing a dynamic display of the identification information that has been executed before the dynamic continuation display of the identification information, the received predetermined command Dynamic display control means for starting, by the image display means, dynamic display of identification information based on the predetermined display mode specified by the first display identification means, at least the image display means During the period in which the dynamic continuation display is performed, the predetermined display by the predetermined display execution means is not executed.
The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the main control means for performing main control of the game, the sub-control means which operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and the image based on the control by the sub-control means Image display means for displaying an image, wherein the sub-control means draws an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means, and an image display means for drawing an image by the image drawing means. A first image storage unit for storing a plurality of image information to be used, and a predetermined display mode for dynamically displaying identification information on the image display unit in response to a predetermined command received from the main control unit. First display specifying means for specifying from among the above, first specified information storage means for storing first specified information defining drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing of each display mode for each screen, and the first display Specific means A first specifying unit that specifies the first specified information corresponding to the specified display mode specified by the user, an updating unit that is updated every predetermined time, and an updating unit that updates the updating unit every time the updating unit is updated. Drawing instruction information generating means for generating drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updating means; Measuring means, and the image drawing means draws an image for one screen using image information based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means, In a display mode for dynamically displaying identification information on the image display unit, a required time from the start of the dynamic display to the end thereof is predetermined for each display mode, and the sub-control unit First display Second specifying means for specifying the first prescribed information used for the dynamic continuation display of the identification information when the required time has elapsed since the start of the display in the predetermined display mode specified by the specifying means. When the command transmitted from the main control unit is the predetermined command, the sub-control unit that has received the predetermined command sets the dynamic display of the identification information of the time corresponding to the predetermined command to a specific display. In this case, there are a plurality of times corresponding to the predetermined command, and the predetermined time specified by the first display specifying unit is a display mode of any required time, When the elapsed time has elapsed, the display mode of the dynamic continuation display of the identification information that is continuously displayed is the same display mode in which the identification information repeats a predetermined movement. A predetermined display execution unit for performing a predetermined display on the image display unit in response to an operation of an operation unit operable by a technician; and a predetermined command from the main control unit during a dynamic continuation display period of the identification information. Is received, the first display specifying unit specifies the received predetermined command without performing the fixed display of the dynamic display of the identification information executed before the dynamic continuous display of the identification information. Dynamic display control means for starting dynamic display of identification information based on the predetermined display mode performed by the image display means, and at least a period during which the dynamic continuous display of the identification information is performed on the image display means In the meantime, since the predetermined display by the predetermined display execution means is not executed, there is an effect that various kinds of display modes displayed on the image display means can be easily achieved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, reserved ball storage area, reserved ball execution area, 1st prefetch execution area, and 2nd prefetch execution area. (A) is a figure which showed typically an example of the big hit type table, (b) is a figure which showed typically the fluctuation pattern table for big hits, (c) is for the removal (normal) It is the figure which showed typically the fluctuation pattern table, (d) is the figure which showed typically the variation pattern table for deviation (probability change). FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating data included in a prefetch command. It is the figure which showed the structure of the prefetch information storage area typically. It is the figure which showed the content of the continuous notice determination table typically. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface B. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the display data table for change typically. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of an additional data table. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation process executed by an MPU in a main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a change start process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the vibration sensor input monitoring processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a pending ball count command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a fixed command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. FIG. 4C is a flowchart showing a demo command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing a continuous notice command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is. (A) is a flowchart showing a frame button operation command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a pending image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. FIG. 4C is a flowchart showing a frame button operation process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 6 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine according to a second embodiment. It is the figure which showed the content of the continuous notice determination table typically. It is the figure which showed the structure of the prefetch information storage area typically. (A)-(g) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the continuation determination information set in the continuation determination information storage area, and a continuation avoidance flag. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, a reserve ball storage area, and a reserve ball execution area. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation process executed by an MPU in a main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation start process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process executed by an MPU in the main control device.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 48. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis and the front frame The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have uniformity. In the present pachinko machine 10, three stages of “city stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage” are provided. There are two stages. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start-up prize), which will be described later, are performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage. Designed. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “the empty stage” → "Island stage" → "City stage" → ... repeatedly. Immediately after the power is turned on, the “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and when the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. When the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a fluctuation display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the fluctuation is performed in accordance with a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning), or a stop symbol after the fluctuation is completed. A symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the starting prize is indicated by a lighting state, or a ball (reserved ball) of which the variation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number, is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated with a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emitted colors.

  In this pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64, a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot is made (big hit lottery) is made. Is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 2R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but also indicates a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type if the jackpot is a jackpot.

  Here, "15R probability variable jackpot" is a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and "2R probability variable jackpot" means a maximum round number of two rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after the 15 rounds of jackpots and the time is reduced during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). .

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of hitting the second symbol described later increases and a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, the “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of change is not being changed, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of hit is lower than that in the case of probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) of the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state where a ball easily enters the ball 64. It should be noted that instead of changing the hit probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time during which the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 is opened or one time. It is good also as what changes the number of times that an electric accessory opens at a hit.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a liquid crystal display that performs a variable display of a third symbol while synchronizing with a variable display on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). (Hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”), and a second symbol constituted by an LED that variably displays the second symbol by using a ball passing through the second entrance 67 as a trigger. A display device 83 is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle and right Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, while the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. Decorative display is performed according to the display. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the back symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached patterns that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result by a main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a fluctuating display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after it is over. When shifting to the high-probability state (probable change state) after the end of the jackpot, a fluctuation display is performed in which main symbols (corresponding to “high-probability symbols”) to which odd-numbered numbers are added are prepared. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low-probability state after the end of the big hit, a fluctuation display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to “low-probability symbols”) to which even-numbered numbers are arranged are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and a lower two-thirds is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (retained balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or another character is displayed. The announcement production is performed.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each retained ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball in the 1st ball entrance 64 might be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, but three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol) are alternately turned on each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67. Is what you do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time (opening). ). The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit by the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. The processing may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and the number of passages through the second entrance 67 is three or less, or five or more (for example, , 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retaining lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 6) for storing various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 83. Used in.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol are set. And a stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection. In addition, a second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting an initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 25). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. As will be described in detail later, the RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203b composed of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). The values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the ball entry timing.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 25).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the RAM 203 Is stored in any of the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number to be the jackpot is set by a jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to the value of the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table. If it matches the random number value (hit value), it is determined to be a big hit. This jackpot random number table is divided into two types, one for a low probability (period not being probable) and another for a high probability (probable) with a higher probability of a bigger hit than the low probability. The number of jackpot random numbers is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the big hit, the probability of the big hit is changed between the time of the low probability and the time of the high probability.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In the first random number counter C1, the number of the random numbers (hit value) that is a big hit at the low probability is 3, and the value “7, 307, 582” is stored in the low probability big hit random number table. . On the other hand, the number of random numbers (hit value) that is a big hit at the time of high probability is 30, and the value is “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390”. , 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 833, 866, 892 "are stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table.

  In the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table and the winning value stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table are set so that the respective winning values do not overlap. You have set. Here, if there is a value that becomes a hit value regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility of illegally assigning a big hit may increase. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number that becomes a jackpot according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), the jackpot is determined. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the value of the random number to be predicted, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The first hit type counter C2 is for determining the type of a big hit in the case of a big hit. The first hit type counter C2 is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99) is obtained. In the case of a counter that can take a value, it returns to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins in the first entrance 64 (start winning), The information is stored in any of the first to fourth areas reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is lost, a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect. Also, the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “stop type”) is the one at the time of departure. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number with a large hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect are those at the time of the big hit. . In this case, the change pattern and stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The big hit type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type table stored in the ROM 202. Here, the big hit type table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot type table. As shown in FIG. 7A, the big hit type table is a table in which the big hit types are associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  As described above, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high-probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low-probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots. There is a “15R normal big hit” that is a time saving state during the number of times of change, and a “2R certain variable big hit” where the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after two rounds of big hits.

  In the big hit type table, the value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type is associated with each big hit type. In the example of FIG. 7A, the value “0-39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability change jackpot, and the value “40-39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot. 79 ", and the value" 80-99 "of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability change jackpot.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value that is a big hit, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table. For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20”, “15R probability change big hit” is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “60”, the big hit type is “20”. If the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90”, “2R probable big hit” is determined as the big hit type.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, a 15R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, a 15R normal jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, and a 2R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 20%. . In addition, the probability that each big hit type is selected in the case of a big hit is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each big hit type is defined in the big hit type table.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern at the time of the off-state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop pattern selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99), and "reach other than front and rear departure" (e.g., in a range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at positions other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after reaching. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, updated periodically (once every timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment), and the value of the RAM 203 is registered at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning). The ball is stored in any one of the first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  A plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random numbers from which the stop types are selected are provided in the ROM 202 corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is for changing the selection ratio of the stop type according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table in which the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as wide as 0 to 89 is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a jackpot is likely to occur, It becomes easy to select "completely out of order". In this table, the “reach out of front and rear” is narrowed to 98, 99 and the “reach other than front and rear out” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “reach out of front and back” or “reach other than front and rear out”. In the case of the low probability state, a table in which the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79 is selected in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64. And it becomes difficult to select “completely off”. In this table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front and rear out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front and back out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, a lot of reach displays with a long rendering time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach out of order” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 25).

  The variation type counter CS1 is used for determining a variation pattern. That is, the MPU 201 determines a variation pattern such as a so-called normal reach, a super reach, and a special reach based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202. The determination of the variation pattern is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 perform the reach type and the fine symbol of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1. Determine the variation mode.

  The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a jackpot variation pattern table used at the time of a jackpot and a detachment variation pattern table used at the time of a detachment as a variation pattern table. In addition, as a variation pattern table for deviation, a variation pattern table for deviation (probability variation) depending on whether the gaming state is a time reduction state or a high probability state at the time of probability change, or a normal low probability state excluding the time reduction state. A variation pattern table for deviation (normal) is prepared.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 7B, the jackpot variation pattern table is divided into groups based on the jackpot types. Specifically, it is divided into a 15R jackpot common referred to when the 15R probability variable jackpot and the 15R regular jackpot are determined as the jackpot type, and a 2R probability variable jackpot referred to when the 2R probability variable jackpot is determined. I have. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. If the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value (hit value) that is a big hit, the hold area is determined according to the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same hold area. Is determined from the jackpot variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in.

  There are various types of normal reach, super reach, and special reach in common with the 15R jackpot, and the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is as follows: normal reach various 0-10, super reach various 11-99, special reach various 100 to 198. The various types of super reach are referred to as various types of “nor-reach”, a reach having a short fluctuation time, a first symbol (or a third symbol) being aligned after the short reach (a so-called “bitter stop”). , A variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after reaching a variation time longer than the normal reach (for example, a reach developed from a long reach or a normal reach), and various types of special reach are variations that are longer than a super reach A variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the reach of time (for example, a reach that further develops after the super reach or a special reach whose development destination from the normal reach is different from the super reach). Since the table common to the 15R jackpots is selected in the case of the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot, various special reach types are easily selected in order to give the player a sense of expectation. However, by configuring so that various types of normal reach and various types of super reach can be selected, it is possible to provide a gaming ability that can expect a jackpot from any reach.

  In addition, "reach various" means that there is a large number of things with different production contents also in each reach, for example, in the super reach, reach that changes the back image quickly and displays, or a certain character There is a reach displayed suddenly, and in addition, a plurality of reaches having different production contents are included, such as a production to which a notice effect before the start of change is added and a production to be a big hit by re-change.

  2R fluctuations A to C are provided exclusively for the 2R probability change jackpot, and the association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is such that the 2R fluctuation A is 0 to 99, the 2R fluctuation B is 100 to 149, and the 2R fluctuation C is 150 to 198. The 2R variation A is, for example, an effect in which the final first symbol (or the third symbol) stops at a specific symbol with "chicken", and the 2R variation B does not normally appear. The final 1st symbol (or the 3rd symbol) stops at a specific symbol with the "girl". The 2R variation C is the final 1st symbol with the lighting of the one-shot notification lamp. This is an effect in which the symbol (or the third symbol) stops at a specific symbol.

  The change pattern at the time of the big hit is determined using only the change type counter CS1, but may be determined using another plurality of change type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect for notifying the start of a jackpot or a reach effect before the start of the change or during the change effect may be determined by another change type counter, or when reach is established, The number of symbols shifted to stop the first symbol (or the third symbol) to be stopped (for example, one symbol shifted before and after, etc.) may be determined by another variation type counter.

  FIG. 7C is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of an out-of-place (normal) variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 7 (c), the variation pattern table for deviation (normal) is used only for complete deviation, which is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the type of stop at the time of deviation, and other than reach-rear-reach and front-rear-rear-reach. The reach is referred to when the reach is determined, and is divided into groups (groups) based on the stop type at the time of departure, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. Have been. When the value of the first random number counter C1 is not a value (hit value) that is a big hit, that is, a value that is out of range, when the gaming state is in a normal low probability state excluding a time saving state, According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area as the first random number counter C1, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the hold area is: It is determined from the deviation pattern (normal).

  Dedicated to complete departure include a short departure in which the fluctuation ends in a short time and the reach is not established, and a long departure in which the fluctuation time is longer than the short departure but the reach is not established. The association is 0-148 for short deviation and 149-198 for long deviation. In addition, the reach is common, but reach is established but the fluctuation time is short, the normal reach is different, the super reach is longer than the normal reach, the super reach is different, and the super reach is longer than the super reach. There are various types of reach, and the association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 148 for various normal reach, 149 to 190 for various super reach, and 191 to 198 for various special reach.

  FIG. 7D is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a deviation (probable change) variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 7D, the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table is referred to when the complete departure is determined as the stop type at the time of departure, similar to the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table. It is referred to when exclusive reach with detachment and long detachment, and reach before and after detachment and reach other than before and after detachment are determined, and there are common reach with various detachable normal reach, detached super reach various and detached special reach various Are classified into groups (groups) based on the type of stop at the time of departure, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. If the value of the first random number counter C1 is a value that does not become a big hit, that is, a value that is out of range, and the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probable change, it is stored in the same holding area. In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved area is determined from the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern.

  The association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 dedicated to complete deviation is 0-190 for short deviation and 191-198 for long deviation. In addition, the association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the common reach is as follows.

  The out-of-place (probability change) variation pattern table is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of the probability change, so that the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. . Therefore, when the player is in a time-saving state or a high probability state, if a lot of deviations are performed, it takes time until the start of the next variable display, giving a waiting state to the player, and giving the player discomfort. there is a possibility. In addition, the operation rate of a hole is undesirably reduced because of a decrease in operation rate. Therefore, when the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of a probable change, it is configured such that short-off is easier to select than in other cases, and by starting the next fluctuation display early, The possibility of giving discomfort to the person can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extremely low operation rate.

  Note that the variation pattern at the time of departure is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters in combination (selection of presence / absence of notice, etc.). In addition, the selection of the type of miss is configured to be divided into a variation pattern table for the removal (normal) and a variation pattern table for the removal (probable variation), but even if the game state is normal, a plurality of holding balls (for example, In the case of a maximum of four, three or more), the fluctuation display may be terminated early, and may be selected with reference to the deviation (probable change) fluctuation pattern table, or the number of reserved balls May be configured to prepare a variation pattern table for normal or probable variation corresponding to.

  Further, in the variation pattern tables for deviations shown in FIGS. 7C and 7D, short deviations and long deviations are simply regarded as deviations, and when that deviation is selected, another table is referred to. Alternatively, a configuration may be employed in which short-range and long-range deviations are selected with a predetermined probability. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 250). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is performed, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Obtained when done. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and the symbol “○” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop symbol (second symbol). Is displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time. Note that the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is performed once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is performed. It is updated and updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 25).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the counter buffer illustrated in FIG. And a work area (work area) in which values such as. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 25), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 24). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , The NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further includes a reserved ball number counter 203a, a reserved ball storage area 203b, a reserved ball execution area 203c, a first prefetch execution area 203d, a second prefetch execution area 203e, a first prefetch processing flag 203f, and a second prefetch processing. It has at least a flag 203g, a look-ahead probable change flag 203h, and a predicted state probable change flag 203i.

  The number of retained balls counter 203a is a ball that enters the first entrance 64 (hereinafter referred to as a “start-up prize”) detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) up to four times. The number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a is set to zero as an initial value by an initial setting process (S613 in FIG. 24) of the RAM 203 after power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed displayed is increased, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4 (see S203 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by one each time a variable effect is executed (see S305 in FIG. 21).

  The value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the reserved ball number) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S204 in FIG. 20). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected and the reserved ball number counter 203a is incremented by one.

  The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of retained balls in the variable effect retained in the main control device 110 by the retained ball number command. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of times the variable effect is suspended without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, every time a start winning is detected, the main control device 110 transmits a reserved ball number command to the audio ramp control device 113, so that the retained ball count of the variable effect managed by the audio ramp control device 113 is reduced by noise. Even if the number of balls to be held deviates from the actual number of balls held in the fluctuation effect held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of the above, the difference can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

  It should be noted that the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display reserved ball number command to notify the reserved ball number to the display control device 114 every time the reserved ball number managed therein changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 6) in accordance with the detection of the start winning. This is a memory for storing each value. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won (starts winning) the first ball entrance 64 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19), the MPU 201 reads the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer. It is acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas so that data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to one starting prize can be stored (reserved) up to four times ( See FIG. 6).

  In addition, the reserved ball execution area 203c stores data (counters C1 to C3, CS1) to be referred to in a process such as a jackpot lottery or a display (variation pattern) setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Each value).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the start timing of the execution of the fluctuation effect, the MPU 201 executes the above-described holding ball in order to execute a process such as a jackpot lottery or display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1) corresponding to each start winning stored in the storage area 203b, the data corresponding to one start winning is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  Here, the details of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described with reference to FIG. 6 again. The reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

  To set the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first symbol type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type are set. And a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine a fluctuation pattern for stopping a stop symbol when the vehicle goes off, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for determining a fluctuation pattern for stopping the stop symbol when a big hit occurs. The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start winning).

  The reserved ball storage area 203b is composed of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) stores a first random number counter storage area 203b1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and a second random number counter C2 for storing the value of the first random counter C2. A per-type counter storage area 203b2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variation type counter storage area 203b4 are stored in one holding ball storage area. Although provided in 203b, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and four areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, and 203b4 may be provided in any of the reserved ball storage areas.

  As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 is up to four times. In this case, data is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). . In other words, data corresponding to an earlier start winning prize is stored in an area having a smaller area number, and data corresponding to an earliest start winning prize is stored in the reserved first area.

  On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. In the reserved ball execution area 203c, similarly to the reserved ball storage area 203b, a first random number counter storage area 203c1, a first collision type counter storage area 203c2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and a fluctuation type counter storage are stored. An area 203c4 is provided.

  When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the MPU 201 transfers the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203b to the reserved ball. Shift to the respective areas 203c1 to 203c4 of the execution area 203c. Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c is referred to in the change start process (see FIG. 22), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a change pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, a variation effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the determined variation pattern and the stop type are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Details of the data shift will be described. When determining that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the MPU 201 transfers the random number value in the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved first area to the first random number counter storage area 203c1 of the reserved ball execution area 203c. shift. Similarly, the random number value in the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 is shifted to the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, and the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3. Then, the random number value in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

  When the shift of the data to the reserved ball execution area 203c is completed, the reserved first area becomes empty, and is stored (reserved) in each area (second to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203b. A shift process is performed to pack the data into the areas (first to third) having the area number smaller by one. In the present embodiment, data is shifted only in the reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  Here, a data shift performed on each of the reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area 203b will be described. For example, when the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a when the start of the variable effect is determined is “4”, and data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203b. I do. In this state, the data of the reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c, and when the reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data of the other areas (second to fourth) to the respective areas. The area shifts to the area with the smaller number (first to third). That is, the data in the second reserved area is shifted to the first reserved area, the data in the third reserved area is shifted to the second reserved area, and the data in the fourth reserved area is shifted to the third reserved area.

  Further, for example, if the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a at the time when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined is “2”, the MPU 201 shifts only the data of the reserved second area to the reserved first area. , End the data shift. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the reserved areas (third and fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so that the number of data shifts can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control load.

  Note that, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the reserved area (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area having an area number smaller by one. In this case, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), so that the number of program steps can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free space of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The first look-ahead execution area 203d and the second look-ahead execution area 203e include a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b at the timing when the start winning is detected. C3 is a memory for storing the values of the variation type counter CS1 separately from the reserved ball storage area 203b for use in the "look-ahead" process.

  The "look-ahead" means that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are determined in advance before the jackpot lottery and the determination of the fluctuation pattern are performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the start timing of the variation effect. Reading. The pachinko machine 10 is configured to pre-read the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 by a "pre-reading" process and to predict a jackpot lottery result and a determination result of a variation pattern in advance. Based on the results of the jackpot lottery and the determination of the fluctuation pattern, various controls such as setting of a continuous announcement effect and destruction determination of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 are executed.

  Specifically, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer in accordance with the detection of the winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, the MPU 201 also stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e (S207 to S207 in FIG. 20). S214). At this time, if the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetching process (including waiting for the start of the prefetching process; the same applies hereinafter) are not stored in the first prefetching execution area 203d, the first prefetching execution area is set. 203d stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. The first prefetch execution area 203d stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during prefetch processing, and the second prefetch execution area 203e does not store the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during prefetch processing. If there is, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the second prefetching execution area 203e.

  On the other hand, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch processing are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch processing are stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e. Then, the execution of the storage process ends without storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e. In this case, the prefetch processing is not executed.

  The determination as to whether or not the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch processing in each of the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e is made based on the first prefetch processing flag 203f and the second prefetch processing. This is performed by referring to the in-process flag 203g. The first prefetching flag 203f indicates whether or not the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during prefetching are stored in the first prefetching execution area 203d, and the second prefetching flag 203g is This flag indicates whether or not the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during prefetch processing are stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e. When both the first pre-reading processing flag 203f and the second pre-reading processing flag 203g are on, the counter C1 during pre-reading processing (including waiting for the start of pre-reading processing) in the corresponding pre-reading execution areas 203d and 203e.オ フ C3, CS1 are stored, and when OFF, the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 during prefetch processing in the corresponding prefetch execution areas 203d, 203e are not stored.

  The first pre-reading flag 203f and the second pre-reading flag 203g are set to OFF as initial values in the RAM initial setting process (S613 in FIG. 24) executed when the power is turned on. When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, the first prefetch processing in progress flag 203f is set to ON, and the first prefetch execution area 203d is in the prefetch processing state (waiting). ) Indicates that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored (see S208 in FIG. 20). When the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e, the second prefetch processing flag 203g is set to ON, and the prefetch processing is being performed (waiting) in the second prefetch execution area 203e. ) Indicates that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored (see S211 in FIG. 20).

  When the first pre-reading processing flag 203f or the second pre-reading processing flag 203g is set to on, the pre-reading in the ON state is performed by the pre-reading processing (see FIGS. 25 and 26) repeatedly executed by the MPU 201 in the main processing. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e corresponding to the processing flags 203f and 203g are prefetched, and the result of the jackpot lottery and the determination result of the variation pattern are predicted.

  Then, from the predicted jackpot lottery result and the fluctuation pattern determination result, a prefetch command described later is generated and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. By receiving the look-ahead command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes control for setting the execution of the continuous announcement effect for the plurality of pending fluctuation effects. In addition, the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the look-ahead command and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c at the start of the variation effect, By comparing the result of the determination with the fluctuation pattern, a process of determining whether the command transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 has been destroyed due to the influence of noise or the like is executed.

  Here, the continuous announcement effect will be described. The continuous announcement effect is a type of announcement effect that suggests (notices) that there is a high possibility of a 15R probability change jackpot as a result of the fluctuation effect, and was suspended when a start winning prize corresponding to the fluctuation effect was detected. The same or related symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over a plurality of variable effects. In the present embodiment, the jellyfish image is displayed during the variable effect, including the variable effect that has triggered the execution decision of the continuous announcement effect, over a plurality of variable effects held at the time of the start winning corresponding to the variable effect. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This allows the player to continuously view the “jellyfish” image immediately after the fluctuation stops over a plurality of fluctuation displays, thereby giving the player an expectation that a big hit will be obtained after the continuous announcement effect, Interest in games can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, a case in which a continuous announcement effect is performed by displaying a “jellyfish” image on the third symbol display device 81 during the fluctuation effect over a plurality of fluctuation effects will be described. At the time, that is, immediately after the stop display of the third symbol, a “jellyfish” image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to perform the continuous announcement effect. In this case, the jellyfish image is displayed at the end of the variable production, over a plurality of variable productions held at the time of the start winning corresponding to the variable production, excluding the variable production that has triggered the execution of the continuous announcement production. May be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this way, by displaying the continuous announcement effect image (“jellyfish” image) at the end of the variable effect, even if the big hit symbol does not appear as a stop symbol of the variable effect and the big hit does not occur, the player By continuously viewing the “jellyfish” image immediately after the fluctuation stops over multiple fluctuation displays, it is possible to give the player the expectation that a big hit will be obtained after the continuous announcement performance, and give the player a game Motivation to continue.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 executes a look-ahead process prior to the timing of starting the execution of the variable effect, based on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the time of the start winning, and wins the jackpot lottery and the variable pattern. Predict the judgment result. Then, these prediction results are notified to the audio ramp control device 113 by a prefetch command. Upon receiving the look-ahead command, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the number of the variable effects held earlier from the number of the look-ahead reservations described later included in the look-ahead command, and predicts the jackpot lottery notified by the look-ahead command. From the result, it is determined whether or not to perform the continuous announcement effect for the pending fluctuation effect. Thereby, the process in the main control device 110 can be concentrated on the most important process of the pachinko machine 10, that is, the lottery process for randomly selecting a game state to be transitioned based on the start winning, while the sound lamp control device 113 If the MPU 221 having a high processing capability is used, the mode of the continuous announcement effect, the execution condition, and the like can be set in various modes.

  The setting of the continuous announcement effect by the audio lamp control device 113 and the details of the above-described command destruction determination processing will be described later.

  When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d are prefetched and the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination are predicted, and the prefetch command is set, the first prefetch processing flag 203f is set. It is set to OFF, and the first prefetch execution area 203d indicates that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during prefetch processing are not stored. Similarly, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e are prefetched, and the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination are predicted. When a prefetch command is set, the second prefetch processing is performed. The flag 203g is set to off, indicating that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch processing are not stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e. As a result, when the start winning is detected, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the reserved ball storage area for the prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e corresponding to the prefetch processing flags 203f and 203g set to off. 203b.

  In this manner, the first prefetching flag 203f and the second prefetching flag 203g determine whether or not the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during prefetching are stored in the corresponding prefetching execution area, If the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch processing are stored, it is determined that the corresponding prefetch execution area is overwritten by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired later at the start winning timing. Suppress. Therefore, when the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, the MPU 201 performs prefetch until the prefetch processing is completed even if a start winning prize occurs later. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution areas 203d and 203e continue to be held. Therefore, it is possible to reliably execute the prefetch process using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e.

  Here, the details of the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e will be described with reference to FIG. 6 again. The first read-ahead execution area 203d includes a first hit random number counter storage area 203d1 for storing the value of the first hit random number counter C1, a first hit type counter storage area 203d2 for storing the value of the first hit type counter C2, A stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided. The second prefetch execution area 203e includes a first random number counter storage area 203e1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1, and a first collision type counter storage area 203e2 for storing the value of the first collision type counter C2. And a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203e4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  Further, in each of the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the second look-ahead execution area 203e, the same value as each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in these execution areas is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The number-of-prefetch-holds storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 are provided for storing the number of times of continuous holding as the number of pre-read suspension. The number of times of prefetching suspension means the number of times of suspension of the variable effect to be prefetched.

  Upon detecting a winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64, the MPU 201 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the reserved ball storage area 203b, and at that time the first prefetching flag 203f. Is off, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b are also stored in the respective counter storage areas 203d1 to d4 of the first prefetching execution area 203d. Also, the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a at that time (the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a after adding 1 with the start winning) is stored as the number of prefetch reservations in the prefetch reservation number storage area 203d5. The pre-reading processing flag 203f is set to ON.

  If the first prefetching flag 203f is on while the second prefetching flag 203g is off at the time when the MPU 201 detects the start winning, the MPU 201 determines that the reserved ball storage area 203b Are stored in the counter storage areas 203e1 to e4 of the second prefetching execution area 203e, respectively. Further, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a at that time (the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after adding 1 with the start winning) is stored in the prefetch reserved number storage area 203e5 as the prefetch reserved number, and the second The pre-reading processing flag 203g is set to ON.

  As described above, when the first pre-reading processing flag 203f or the second pre-reading processing flag 203g is set to ON, the pre-reading processing (see FIGS. 26 and 27) repeatedly executed by the MPU 201 in the main processing. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch execution areas corresponding to the prefetching flags 203f and 203g in which the ON state is detected are prefetched, and the jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern determination results are predicted. . Then, based on the predicted jackpot determination result and the fluctuation pattern result, a look-ahead command including information on the look-ahead suspension count stored in the look-ahead suspension count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is set, and the set look-ahead command is transmitted to an audio lamp. Transmit to control device 113. The details of the prefetch command will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, at the start of the variable production, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the start prize detected after the start prize corresponding to the variable production are prefetched, thereby prefetching. Processing was being performed. In the timer interrupt process, a process of determining a start of a variable effect and executing a jackpot lottery, and detecting a start winning to acquire the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and executing a look-ahead process. It is also conceivable to configure to include processing.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the time when the start winning are detected are temporarily stored in either the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. Based on each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, prefetch processing is executed in the main processing. In the present embodiment, a jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of execution of the fluctuation effect is performed in a fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22) which is one of timer interruption processes executed prior to the main process. Run in.

  When the pachinko machine is configured to execute a look-ahead process for predicting the result of the jackpot lottery, separately from the jackpot lottery performed at the start of execution of the variable production, by pre-reading each counter value obtained and held at the time of starting prize winning. In the jackpot lottery, it is necessary to compare the counter value obtained by the start winning prize with each individual hit value one by one, and also in the pre-reading process, separately from the jackpot lottery, the pre-read value and the individual hit value are determined. It is necessary to compare the values one by one. Thereby, especially when the pachinko machine is in the high probability state, the comparison process between the counter value and the individual hit value is performed in both the jackpot lottery and the pre-reading process, for example, when the number of hit values in the high probability state is 30 or more. For example, it must be repeated up to 30 times. Therefore, it takes a long time to perform the comparison processing between the counter value and the winning value performed in each of the jackpot lottery and the prefetching process.

  In such a situation, as in the conventional gaming machine, at the start of the variable effect, each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the start prize detected after the start prize corresponding to the variable effect. If the pre-reading process is used, the result of the jackpot lottery associated with the pre-reading at the time of starting winning is predicted around the time when the jackpot lottery at the start of execution of the variable effect is performed, and the most in the game There is a possibility that the completion of the jackpot lottery, which is an important process, is delayed, thereby affecting the game.

  In the timer interrupt process, a process of determining a start of a variable effect and executing a jackpot lottery, and detecting a start winning to acquire the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and executing a look-ahead process. In the case where the processing is included, the jackpot lottery process and the prefetching process may be performed together in one timer interrupt process based on the determination of the start of the variable effect and the detection of the start winning. . As described above, since each process may require a long processing time, in this case, all the processes included in the timer interrupt process may not be completed before the next timer interrupt process is started. Can occur. Therefore, various controls required for the game are delayed, which may affect the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described above, while performing the pre-reading process in the main process, the jackpot lottery performed at the start of the execution of the variable effect and the like are determined by the timer interrupt process. It is configured to be executed in a change start process (see FIG. 22) which is one of the processes. Thus, even if the pre-reading process is being executed in the main process, the timer interrupt process is executed with priority, so that the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect. On the other hand, even if the timer interrupt processing is executed during the prefetch processing, the prefetch processing can be surely completed because the timer interrupt processing is executed continuously after the end of the timer interrupt processing. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the prefetching process is executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired when the start winning is detected, and the result of the jackpot lottery or the like is predicted. In addition, since the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect, the game can be controlled normally.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the time of the start winning are stored not only in the reserved ball count storage area 203b but also in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. The prefetching process is executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e.

  Here, in the case where the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball count storage area 203b are directly read and the pre-reading process is performed, when the execution start timing of the variable effect is reached during the pre-reading process, as described above. The counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) of the reserved sphere storage area 203b are shifted to the reserved sphere execution area 203c and another reserved area. Thus, every time the change start process (see FIG. 22) is executed, it is necessary to change the storage areas of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the prefetch process.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the prefetching process is executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetching execution area 203d or the second prefetching execution area 203e. Even when the execution start timing of the effect is reached and the variation start processing is executed, the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e is not changed without changing the storage areas of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the prefetch processing. , The processing can be simplified.

  In this embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the first prefetch processing flag 203f or the By setting the second pre-reading processing flag 203g to ON, even if a new starting winning is detected during the pre-reading processing, the counter acquired with the new starting winning is detected. With the values of C1 to C3 and CS1, overwriting of the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e during prefetch processing can be suppressed. Therefore, the prefetch processing can be executed reliably.

  In the present embodiment, when the start winning is detected, both the first pre-reading processing flag 203f and the second pre-reading processing flag 203g are on, and the first pre-reading execution area 203d and the second pre-reading execution area 203e. Are in the prefetching process, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b along with the start winning prize are also stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d. 203e. As a result, the pre-reading process is not performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning, but the pre-reading process is, as described above, the setting of the continuous announcement effect and the sound lamp control device. This is for performing the destruction determination processing of the command transmitted to 113 and does not directly affect the game, so there is no problem.

  In this embodiment, two prefetch execution areas, ie, a first prefetch execution area 203d and a second prefetch execution area 203e, are prepared, and one of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained at the time of the start winning is provided in one of them. Is configured to be stored. Therefore, if a new start winning is detected while the prefetch processing is being executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, the second prefetch execution area If the prefetch process is not being performed on the counter 203e, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired with this new start winning are stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e, and are stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e. The prefetching process can be executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Therefore, of the sets of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the winning start and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the set for which the prefetching process is not performed, and to set as many sets as possible. A pre-reading process can be executed for this.

  In the present embodiment, two prefetch execution areas are prepared, but one prefetch execution area may be used. In this case, of the sets of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the starting winning and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the set in which the prefetching process is not executed is compared with the case where two prefetching execution areas are prepared. Although this often occurs, the increase in the storage capacity required for the RAM 203 can be suppressed by using one prefetch execution area.

  Further, three or more (preliminary number of holdable balls or less) prefetching execution areas may be prepared. For example, in the case where three first to third prefetch execution areas are prepared as prefetch execution areas, the first prefetch execution area stores a counter value indicating that prefetch processing is being executed, and the second prefetch execution area is indicating that prefetch processing is being executed. If no counter value is stored, each counter value newly acquired by the start winning is stored in the second prefetch execution area, and both the first prefetch execution area and the second prefetch execution area are executing prefetch processing. If the counter value is stored and the counter value during the pre-reading process is not stored in the third pre-read execution area, each counter value newly acquired by the start winning is stored in the third pre-read execution area. You may. Alternatively, the values of the respective counters acquired by the winning start may be stored in the order of the first prefetch execution area → the second prefetch execution area → the third prefetch execution area. By preparing three or more prefetch execution areas, it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of a set in which the prefetch processing is not performed, as compared with the case of preparing two prefetch execution areas, and to perform the prefetch processing on more sets. Can be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e are provided with prefetch suspension count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5, respectively. When a winning start is detected, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are changed to the prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e. The value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a at the time of being stored in 203e (the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a after adding 1 in accordance with the starting prize) is stored in the number-of-prefetch-reserved times storage area 203d5, 203e5 as the number of pre-fetched reserved times. . Here, the prefetch suspension count stored in the prefetch suspension count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is the execution start timing of the variable effect while the prefetching processing flags 203f and 203g of the corresponding prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e are on. Each time the fluctuation start process is executed, the value is decremented by one (see S306 to S309 in FIG. 21).

  As a result, the number of prefetch suspensions stored in the prefetch suspension count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is the same value as the value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the corresponding execution area, and is reserved in the reservation sphere storage area 203b. It is an accurate representation of the number of holds to keep. Therefore, when generating a prefetch command based on the jackpot lottery result and the fluctuation pattern determination result predicted by the prefetch process, the prefetch command includes the prefetch suspension count stored in the prefetch suspension count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the prefetch command can accurately grasp the number of suspensions of the fluctuation effect executed according to the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination obtained by the prefetch processing.

  Therefore, in the case of setting the continuous announcement effect based on the result of the pre-reading process, the sound lamp control device 113 can set the counter C1 to C3 for which the pre-reading process has been performed and the start winning a prize which triggered the acquisition of CS1. A continuous announcement effect can be reliably set for a variable effect for a previous or previous start winning. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 holds the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command by the number of executions of the variation effect by the number of prefetch reservations indicated by the prefetch command. The prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command can be associated with the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted by the main control device 110 for the prefetched fluctuation effect. Therefore, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type command received from the main control device 110 matches the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the destruction of the command.

  Next, referring to FIG. 8, details of the prefetch command transmitted from main control device 110 to audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data included in the prefetch command. The data structure of the prefetch command will be described with the left side in FIG. 8A as the upper byte, the right side as the lower byte, the left side as the upper bit, and the right side as the lower bit.

  The look-ahead command is a command for notifying the jackpot lottery result and the fluctuation pattern determination result predicted by the look-ahead processing together with the number of times of the look-ahead reservation from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. This prefetch command is composed of 2 bytes as shown in FIG. 8A, and data indicating that the command is a prefetch command is stored in the upper 1 byte as a command type. In addition, data indicating the number of times of pre-reading suspension, the jackpot lottery prediction result (jackpot lottery prediction result), and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result (fluctuation pattern determination prediction result) are stored in the lower one byte. Specifically, the most significant two bits of the eight bits constituting the lower one byte indicate the number of prefetch suspensions, and the lower three bits following the uppermost two bits indicate the jackpot determination prediction result. The lower three bits indicate a fluctuation pattern determination prediction result.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b1), the number of prefetch suspensions is “1” if “00” is stored in the most significant two bits of the lower 1 byte, and “01” is stored. Indicates that the number of prefetch suspensions is two, if "01" is stored, it indicates that the number of prefetch suspensions is three, and if "11" is stored, the number of prefetch suspensions is two. Indicates that there are four.

  As described above, the pre-reading process predicts a jackpot lottery or the like based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 prior to the jackpot lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variable effect. On the other hand, if the number-of-prefetch suspension count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 become 0 during the prefetch processing, a jackpot lottery or the like at the start of the variable effect execution is performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 during the prefetch processing. Means that. Thus, in the present embodiment, if the prefetch suspension count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 are equal to or less than 0, the prefetch command is not transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113. Therefore, in the pre-read command, the case where the pre-read suspension count becomes 0 does not occur, and here, 1 to 4 times are represented by 2 bits as described above.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b2), the jackpot lottery prediction result is “out-of-front-out” that causes out-of-front-out reach if “000” is stored in the three bits following the two most significant bits of the lower byte. If “001” is stored, it indicates that it is a departure other than “front and rear departure”, that is, “other departure” meaning a departure that causes a reach other than front and rear departure or complete departure. ”Is stored to indicate“ 15R normal jackpot ”,“ 011 ”is stored to indicate“ 15 probable jackpot ”, and“ 100 ”is stored for“ 2R probable jackpot ”. Jackpot ".

  In the present embodiment, the main control device 110 does not notify the audio lamp control device 113 only of whether the game is a jackpot or a jackpot as a prediction result of the jackpot lottery by the prefetch command. , Or "other departures", and in the case of a big hit, "15R normal big hit", "15R certain variable big hit", or "2R certain variable big hit" is notified. Thereby, in comparison with the case where the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is simply notifying whether it is a miss or a jackpot, the sound lamp control device 113 can perform the execution determination of the continuous announcement effect under more detailed conditions, Further, it is possible to diversify the control that requires pre-reading, for example, it is possible to perform more detailed destruction determination of the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command received by the voice lamp control device 113 when starting the fluctuation effect. it can. Therefore, the control in the sound lamp control device 113 can be performed more variously.

  In the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the main control device 110 notifies the voice ramp control device 113 of the 15R regular jackpot, the 15R probability variation jackpot, and the 2R probability variation jackpot. Although the prefetch command is configured as described above, it is a matter of course that the prefetch command may simply be configured to notify that a big hit has occurred. In addition, according to the maximum number of rounds that occur during the jackpot, the main control device 110 is divided into “15R jackpot” (15R ordinary jackpot and 15R probability variable jackpot) and “2R jackpot” (2R probability variable jackpot). The pre-read command may be configured so as to notify the audio ramp control device 113 from the. Alternatively, depending on whether or not the gaming state to be shifted to after the jackpot is a high probability state, the game state is divided into “probable jackpot” (applicable to 15R jackpot and 2R jackpot) and “normal jackpot” (applicable to 15R jackpot). The pre-read command may be configured so that the main control device 110 notifies the audio ramp control device 113.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, the pre-read command is so divided as to be out of front and back and other out so that the main control device 110 notifies the audio ramp control device 113. Although it is configured, it is a matter of course that the pre-read command may be configured so as to simply notify that it is off. Further, the prefetch command may be configured to be divided into a case where the reach is generated before and after the reach, a case where the reach other than the front and rear is generated and a case where the reach is completely separated.

  In the jackpot lottery prediction result of the look-ahead command, if the information content to be notified to the audio ramp control device 113 is reduced as compared with the case of the present embodiment, such as simply “big hit” or “missing”, the audio ramp control device 113 The processing based on the jackpot lottery prediction result can be simplified as compared with the case of the present embodiment. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to suppress the increase in the load of the control related to the prefetch while causing the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the control related to the prefetch, and to direct the processing capability of the voice lamp control device 113 to the other control. . Therefore, it is possible to achieve a variety of effects that do not require prefetching, while performing control by prefetching.

  On the other hand, in the jackpot lottery prediction result of the look-ahead command, `` departure '' is notified separately as `` departure to generate reach out of front and rear reach '', `` departure to generate reach other than front and back departure '', or `` completely departure '', etc. If the information content to be notified is increased as compared with the case of the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 can perform the execution of the continuous announcement effect under more detailed conditions than in the present embodiment, and start the variable effect. In such a case, it is possible to further diversify the control requiring pre-reading, for example, the destruction determination of the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command received by the voice lamp control device 113 can be performed in more detail than in the present embodiment. it can. Therefore, the control in the sound lamp control device 113 can be performed more variously.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b3), the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination is out of range (short out, long out) if “000” is stored in the least significant 3 bits of the lower 1 byte of the prefetch command. When "001" is stored, it indicates normal reach. When "010" is stored, it indicates super reach. When "011" is stored, it is special reach. , And if “100” is stored, it indicates a 2R variation. In the present embodiment, the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach are configured to include both the case of the jackpot and the case of the miss, but each reach in the case of the jackpot and each reach in the case of the miss. And may be configured to be divided. When the reach in the case of the jackpot is separated from the reach in the case of the off, the number of bits allocated to the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination increases, but the sound ramp control device 113 starts the fluctuation effect. In this case, the destruction determination of the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command received by the voice lamp control device 113 can be performed in more detail. In addition, when the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to perform the execution of the continuous announcement effect in consideration of the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the type of the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination notified by the pre-read command is determined. By increasing the number, the execution of the continuous announcement effect can be determined under more detailed conditions. Therefore, diversification of the control requiring pre-reading can be achieved, so that the control in the sound lamp control device 113 can be performed more variously.

  Upon receiving the look-ahead command, the voice ramp control device 113 grasps the number of the previously held pending fluctuating effects from the look-ahead hold number included in the look-ahead command, and predicts the jackpot lottery indicated by the look-ahead command. , The execution of the continuous announcement effect is set for the pending variable effect that was previously suspended.

  In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 holds the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command for the number of executions of the variation effect by the number of prefetch reservations indicated by the prefetch command. Thereby, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command can be associated with the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted by the main control device 110 for the variation effect for which the prefetch has been performed. Since it is possible to determine whether the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110 match the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command, the prefetch command is included. It is possible to determine whether the received command has been destroyed.

  For example, when the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is deviated and the normal reach is various, and if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the pre-reading process is “15R probable changing big hit”, the fluctuation pattern command is It is determined that the predicted result does not match the predicted result of the jackpot lottery, and it can be determined that one or both of the pre-read command and the variation pattern command are destroyed. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is out of normal reach various types, even if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the pre-reading process is “other deviation”, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination is If it is "out", it is determined that the variation pattern command does not match the prediction result of the variation pattern determination predicted by the pre-reading process, and that one or both of the pre-read command and the variation pattern command are destroyed. Can be determined.

  Further, for example, when the stop type indicated by the stop type command is “completely out of order” and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the pre-reading process is “out of front and back”, the stop type command is It is determined that the predicted result does not match the predicted result of the jackpot lottery, and it can be determined that one or both of the pre-read command and the stop type command are destroyed. Further, when the stop type indicated by the stop type command is “completely out of order”, even if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the pre-reading process is “other out of place”, the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result is “ If "normal reach", it is determined that the stop type command does not match the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the pre-read process, and it is determined that one or both of the pre-read command and the stop type command are destroyed. it can.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning is detected, the main controller 110 executes the pre-reading process, and includes the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern judgment predicted by the pre-reading process in the pre-reading command. By transmitting the signal to the sound ramp control device 113, more various controls can be realized in the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The prefetching probability change flag 203h is a flag indicating a possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 that is predicted when an actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each prefetch target counter value when performing prefetching processing. . When the look-ahead probable change flag 203h is off, the predicted game state is in the low probability state, and when the look-ahead probable change flag 203h is on, the predicted game state is the high probability state (probable state). It indicates that there is.

  The main control device 110 refers to the prefetch certainty change flag 203h when executing prefetch processing based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. . If the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is off, it is predicted that the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 that is predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on the respective counter values of the look-ahead target is in the low probability state. Therefore, after setting the winning value to “7,307,582”, the result of the jackpot lottery is predicted. On the other hand, if the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is on, the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 that is predicted when an actual jackpot lottery is performed based on the respective counter values of the look-ahead target is a high probability state (probability state). Since it is predicted that there is, the hit value is set to “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596. , 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 833, 866, 892 ”, and predicts the result of the jackpot lottery (see S752, S762 in FIG. 26).

  The look-ahead probability change flag 203h is initialized to off in the RAM initialization (see S613) of the startup process (see FIG. 24) executed after the power is turned on. The settings are changed accordingly. That is, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery performed by the processes of S752 and S762 of the pre-reading process of FIG. 26 is the 15R probability change jackpot or the 2R probability change jackpot, the gaming state becomes the high probability state after the actual jackpot lottery is performed ( Since the transition to the “probable change state” is predicted, the prefetch certainty change flag 203h is set to ON (see S755 and S765 in FIG. 26). If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is other jackpots, that is, 15R regular jackpot, it is predicted that the gaming state will shift to the low probability state after the actual jackpot lottery is performed, so the look-ahead probability change flag 203h Is set to off (S757, S767 in FIG. 26). In addition, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, it is predicted that the gaming state is maintained as it is, and thus the value of the look-ahead probable change flag 203h is maintained as it is (S756 in FIG. 26: Yes branch, S766). : Branch of Yes).

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the prefetching process is not necessarily performed on the counter values corresponding to all the fluctuation effects, the prefetching probability change is performed based only on the prediction result of the jackpot type determination in the processes of S752 and S762. If the value of the flag 203h is set, there is a possibility that the prediction of the gaming state (mode) that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed may be largely shifted. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the value of the look-ahead certainty change flag 203h is set in consideration of the result of the original jackpot lottery, and the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted. .

  Specifically, if the original jackpot lottery result is “15R probability change jackpot” or “2R probability change jackpot”, and the game state shifts to the high probability state (probability change state), the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is off. For example, it can be inferred that the pre-reading process is not executed for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in which the original jackpot lottery has been performed. Therefore, in this case, when the prefetching probability change flag 203h is set to ON and the prefetching process is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is expected to be predicted when an actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value of the prefetching target. The game state to be obtained is set to the high probability state (probable change state) (see S406 in FIG. 22).

  In addition, when the original jackpot lottery result is another jackpot (15R normal jackpot) and the gaming state shifts to the low probability state, if the look-ahead probable change flag 203h is on, the original jackpot lottery is performed. It can be inferred that the pre-reading process has not been executed for the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Therefore, in this case, when the prefetching probability change flag 203h is set to off and the prefetching process is performed, the pachinko machine 10 which is predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on the counter value of the prefetching target is performed. The game state to be obtained is set to the low probability state (see S408 in FIG. 22). If the result of the original jackpot lottery is out of order, the value of the prefetch certainty change flag 203h is maintained as it is. Thereby, even when the pre-reading process is not necessarily executed for the counter values corresponding to all the fluctuation effects, the prediction of the gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed has higher accuracy. Can be done with

  The result of the original jackpot lottery is “15R probability change jackpot” or “2R probability change jackpot”, and when the gaming state shifts to the high-probability state (probability change state), the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is turned off. When the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to ON, or when the original jackpot lottery result is another jackpot (15R normal jackpot) and the gaming state shifts to the low probability state, the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is turned on. Accordingly, if the prefetching probability change flag 203h is set to OFF, it means that the prefetching process is not executed for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in which the original jackpot lottery has been performed. Until then, there is a high possibility that the look-ahead certainty change flag 203h indicates an incorrect prediction state. Therefore, the prediction result based on the look-ahead performed earlier, including the look-ahead being executed in the main process, is based on the prediction of the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed. It is likely that it was done.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in such a case, that is, when the result of the original jackpot lottery is “15R probability-change jackpot” or “2R probability-change jackpot” and the gaming state shifts to the high-probability state (probability-change state). When the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is off, the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to on, or the result of the original jackpot lottery is another jackpot (15R normal jackpot), and the gaming state is set to the low probability state. When the transition is made, when the look-ahead probable change flag 203h is turned on and the look-ahead probable change flag 203h is set off, the first look-ahead processing flag 203d and the second look-ahead processing flag 203e are set off and the prediction is performed. The status change flag 203i is set to ON (see S409 to S411 in FIG. 22).

  The prediction state change flag 203i is a flag indicating that in the ON state, there is a high possibility that the prefetch performed earlier including the current prefetch is performed based on the value of the false prefetch certainty change flag 203h. . The prediction state change flag 203i is initialized to off in the initialization of the RAM (see S613) in the startup process (see FIG. 24) executed after the power is turned on, and is normally kept off. Then, in the above case, the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON, which indicates that there is a high possibility that the previously performed prefetching is performed based on the value of the erroneous prefetching probability change flag 203h.

  The MPU 201 prefetches the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e in the prefetch processing (see FIG. 26) executed in the main processing. If it is detected that the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON while the pre-reading is in progress, the prefetching is stopped (see S758: Yes, S768: Yes). Thereby, it is possible to suppress the prefetching from being performed based on the incorrect value of the prefetching certainty change flag 203h.

  Further, when the MPU 201 detects that the predicted state change flag 203i has been set to ON in the pre-reading processing (see FIG. 26) executed in the main processing, the MPU 201 sets a predicted state change command and sets the voice lamp control device. The data is transmitted to the client 113 (see S772 in FIG. 27).

  The prediction state change command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 113 that there is a high possibility that the prediction result obtained by the pre-reading performed before that is incorrect. Although details will be described later, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the prediction result of the prefetch processing notified by the above-described prefetch command in the prefetch information storage area 223b, and uses the prefetched counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Until the actual jackpot lottery or the like is performed and the fluctuation is started, the prediction result is maintained. Upon receiving the prediction state change command, the sound ramp control device 113 invalidates all prediction results by the prefetching process stored in the prefetching information storage area 223b at that time. Thus, it is possible to prevent various controls based on prefetching from being performed based on an incorrect prediction result. For example, by performing the command destruction determination based on the incorrect prediction result, it is possible to suppress the determination that the command is destroyed in the command destruction determination even though the command is not destroyed.

  When receiving the prediction state change command, the sound lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of the continuous announcement effect execution set at that time. Although the details will be described later, the determination of the execution of the continuous announcement effect is that when the pre-read command is received, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the received pre-read command is a 15R probability change big hit or is out of order. In this case, it is performed at a predetermined ratio. Thereby, when the continuous announcement effect is performed, it is possible to make the player expect that the 15R certain change jackpot having the highest game value will be provided after the end of the continuous announcement effect. In addition, even if the change occurs after the end of the continuous announcement performance, the change pattern in the change is a front-rear reach that can keep the player expecting a big hit or not until the change change ends. Becomes Therefore, the expectation of the player by the continuous announcement effect can be continuously increased until the last variable effect in which the continuous announcement effect is set is stopped and displayed.

  However, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, there is a high possibility that the prediction result notified by the previously transmitted prefetch command is erroneous, and thus the audio lamp control device 113 is set based on the erroneous prefetch command. If the continuous announcement effect is performed to the end, there is a risk that the jackpot type will not be "15R probable variable jackpot" in the last variable effect, or even if it is off, it will not be "reach out of front and back" . As a result, the expectation of the player due to the continuous announcement performance is greatly different from the expectation, and the interest of the player may be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when receiving the predicted state change command, the sound lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of the continuous announcement effect execution set at that time, so that the player can perform the operation after the end of the continuous announcement effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a result different from the expected result.

  When the main control device 110 detects that the predicted state change flag 203i is set to ON in the prefetching process (see FIG. 26) executed in the main process, the counter held in the held ball storage area 203b. The pre-reading process is executed again based on the correct state that the pachinko machine 10 can take, using C1 to C3 and CS1. Specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 of one reserved area in which various counter values are reserved among the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d. The content is transcribed, and the number of times of suspension corresponding to the reserved area is stored as the number of times of prefetch suspension in the number of times of prefetch suspension storage area 203d5, and the first prefetch processing flag 203f is set to ON. In addition, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 of another reserved area where various counter values are retained are transcribed to the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the number of reservations corresponding to the reserved area is set as the number of prefetch reservations. It is stored in the storage area 203e5, and the second pre-reading processing flag 203g is set to ON (see FIG. 27).

  In the present embodiment, when the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 4, and the counter values corresponding to the four reserved balls are reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b, they are stored in the reserved third area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are transferred to the first prefetch execution area 203d, 3 is stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the first prefetch processing flag 203f is set. At the same time, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved fourth area are transcribed to the second prefetch execution area 203e, and 4 are stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e. Is stored, and the second prefetching processing flag 203g is set to ON.

  When the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 3, and the counter values corresponding to the three reserved balls are reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to C1 stored in the reserved second area are provided. The values of C3 and CS1 are transcribed to the first prefetch execution area 203d, 2 is stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the first prefetch processing flag 203f is set to ON. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved third area are transcribed to the second prefetch execution area 203e, and 3 is stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e. The second prefetching flag 203g is set to ON.

  When the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 2 and the counter values corresponding to the two reserved balls are reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to C1 stored in the reserved first area are provided. The values of C3 and CS1 are transcribed to the first prefetch execution area 203d, 1 is stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the first prefetch processing flag 203f is set to ON. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved second area are transcribed to the second prefetch execution area 203e, and 2 is stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e. The second prefetching flag 203g is set to ON.

  When the value (N) of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a is 1, and the counter value corresponding to one reserved ball is reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to C1 stored in the reserved first area are provided. The values of C3 and CS1 are transcribed to the first prefetch execution area 203d, 1 is stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the first prefetch processing flag 203f is set to ON. In this case, nothing is stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the second prefetch processing flag 203g is kept off. When the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 0, nothing is stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the first prefetch processing flag 203f and the second 2 The pre-reading processing flag 203g is kept off.

  As described above, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held in the held ball storage area 203b are transcribed to the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the first corresponding to the transcribed prefetch execution area. By setting the pre-reading processing flag 203f or the second pre-reading processing flag 203g to ON, in the next pre-reading processing, re-reading is performed based on the transcribed counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Can be. Therefore, for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203f, the correct value of the prefetch certainty change flag 203h, that is, the correct gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take is set. Based on this, the pre-reading process is executed, and the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination can be notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, the audio ramp control device 113 can execute more versatile control using more prediction results.

  In the present embodiment, among the plurality of reserved balls retained in the retained ball storage area 203b, the most recently retained ball and the retained ball retained immediately before the retained ball correspond to the retained ball. Re-reading is performed only on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. In this way, by limiting the target for re-reading to two reserved balls, the load of the process for re-reading can be reduced. In addition, since the processing time related to the re-reading can be shortened, when the start winning is detected, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained by the starting winning are pre-read again. It is possible to minimize the situation in which pre-reading is not performed.

  In addition, since the pre-reading is performed again for the most recently reserved ball, if the number of reserved balls is large, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the reserved ball that has been subjected to the re-reading are checked. Based on the value, there is a time margin before an actual jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, before the actual jackpot lottery is performed, it is possible to increase the possibility that the pre-reading is completed again, and it is possible to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the prediction results of many jackpot lotteries and fluctuation pattern determinations. Can be increased. Therefore, the audio ramp control device 113 can execute more versatile control using more prediction results.

  In the present embodiment, among the plurality of reserved balls retained in the reserved ball storage area 203b, it corresponds to the most recently retained ball and the retained ball retained immediately before the retained ball. Although the prefetching is performed again only for the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the counter values may be stored in the look-ahead execution area in order from the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved area having the smaller area number. As a result, the pre-reading process can be executed in order from the counter value immediately before the original lottery is executed. Therefore, it is possible to obtain a prediction result for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in which the original lottery is executed earlier. Can be enhanced.

  Further, when there are three or more holds in the hold ball storage area 203b, the read-ahead is executed again only for the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold first area and the hold second area. Is also good. As a result, the load of the process related to the rereading can be reduced. In addition, since the processing time related to the re-reading can be shortened, when the start winning is detected, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained by the starting winning are pre-read again. It is possible to minimize the situation in which pre-reading is not performed. Further, when there are three or more holds in the hold ball storage area 203b, the first and second counters C1 to C3 and CS1 of the hold first and second hold areas are once stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e. Is transferred, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the remaining reserved areas are transferred to the read-ahead execution area where the execution of the read-ahead processing is completed, and the read-ahead is executed again. You may. As a result, rereading can be executed again for all the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held in the held ball storage area 203b, so that the voice lamp control device 113 can use more prediction results to provide more diversified results. Control can be performed.

  The prediction state change flag 203i is set to off after setting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for performing prefetching again in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. On the other hand, the predicted state change flag 203i is referred to in a start winning process (see FIG. 20) which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 19) executed by the MPU 201. In the start winning process, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained by detecting the start winning are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b, if the predicted state change flag 203i is on, the reserved ball storage area 203b Are not stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the first prefetching flag 203e or the second prefetching flag 203f is turned on. The processing to be set is not executed (see S207: Yes in FIG. 20).

  Thereby, before storing the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for performing the prefetching again in the first prefetching execution area 203d or the second prefetching execution area 203e, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning are set to the first prefetching. The storage in the execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e can be suppressed. Therefore, when the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON, the read-ahead can be reliably executed again using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  Further, after setting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for prefetching again in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, the first state is set by turning off the prediction state change flag 203i. After the prefetching is performed again by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 set in the prefetching execution area 203d or the second prefetching execution area 203e, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired with the start winning are changed. The first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203 is stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the first prefetch processing flag 203e or the second prefetch processing flag 203g can be set to ON. Prefetching can be performed on the values of C3 and CS1.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 23) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). This controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a continuous announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 425 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 425, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, since the ball entering the entrance is an important factor in determining the game state, the flow of the ball is changed by the vibration, and the intentional entry into the entrance is prevented. There is a need. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that vibration has been applied to the pachinko machine 10 by a player or the like, an error command notifying the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and issues an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 has at least a continuous announcement determination table 222a. Further, the RAM 223 is provided with at least a reserved ball number counter 223a, a prefetch information storage area 223b, a continuous announcement lottery counter 223c, a single announcement lottery counter 223d, a continuous announcement execution counter 223e, and a single announcement execution flag 223d.

  The continuous notice determination table 222a is a table for determining the execution of the continuous notice effect together with the continuous notice lottery counter 223c when the prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. The details will be described later together with the description of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223c.

  The reserved ball number counter 223a is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) similarly to the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. This is a counter for counting up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable effect which are reserved in the control device 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the reserved ball number counter 223a manages the number of reserved balls.

  Specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 adds the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a in the main control device 110 by adding the retained ball number of the variable display by entering the first entrance port 64. When the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value after the addition of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the reserved The changed ball count is displayed in the ball count counter 223a (see S1016 in FIG. 31).

  In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and in accordance with the reception, the third symbol When the mode of the variable display on the display device 81 is set, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 (see S1108 in FIG. 33). As described above, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is updated in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control device 110. Therefore, the value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. .

  The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the reserved ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, or stores the retained ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the stored or updated reserved ball number counter 223a at the timing of updating the value of the stored ball number.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball count command, it displays the reserved ball count value indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball count symbol corresponding to the value of the reserved ball count counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113. The image drawing is controlled so as to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see S1751 in FIG. 44A). As described above, the value of the reserved ball counter 223a is changed in synchronization with the reserved ball counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The pre-read information storage area 223b is predicted by the main control device 110 by pre-reading each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired with the start winning, and is indicated by a pre-read command transmitted by the main control device 110. This is an area for storing information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination.

  The prefetch information storage area 223b is used by the sound lamp control device 113 to determine whether the command received from the main control device 110 has been destroyed. The sound ramp control device 113 compares the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the information stored in the pre-read information storage area 223b with the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, If they do not match, it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the variation pattern command have been destroyed, and the variation effect is switched to a special effect. Further, the sound ramp control device 113 compares the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b with the stop type indicated by the stop type command received from the main control device 110. However, if they do not match, it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the stop type command have been destroyed, and the variable effect is switched to a special effect.

  Here, the details of the prefetch information storage area 223b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the prefetch information storage area 223b. The prefetch information storage area 223b has five areas of prefetch information 0th to 4th areas. In each of the prefetch information 0 to 4 areas, at least a jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, a fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area, and a prefetch information valid flag are provided. The jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area are areas for storing information indicating the above-described jackpot lottery prediction result and information indicating the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result, respectively. The prefetch information valid flag is a flag indicating whether or not the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern judgment stored in each of the prefetch information Nos. 0 to 4 is valid. Indicates that the prediction result is valid. All of the prefetch information valid flags in the prefetch information Nos. 0 to 4 are set to off as initial values in the RAM initial value setting process (see S810 in FIG. 28) executed when the power is turned on.

  The same data as the data indicating the jackpot lottery prediction result included in the prefetch command (see FIG. 8B2) is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area. That is, if the jackpot lottery prediction result of the pre-read command is out of order, “000” is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area. "001" is stored in the prediction result storage area, and if the jackpot lottery prediction result of the prefetch command is 15R normal jackpot, "010" is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, and the jackpot lottery prediction of the prefetch command is performed. If the result is a 15R probability variable jackpot, “011” is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, and if the jackpot lottery prediction result of the prefetch command is a 2R probability variable jackpot, “01” is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area. 100 "is stored.

  Also, in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area, the same data as the data indicating the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result included in the prefetch command (see FIG. 8B3) is stored. That is, when the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result of the prefetch command is out of range (short deviation, long deviation), “000” is stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area, and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result of the prefetch command is normally reached. In this case, “001” is stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area, and “010” is stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area if the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result of the prefetch command is super reach. If the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result of the prefetch command is stored, “011” is stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area, and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result of the prefetch command is 2R probable. , "100" is stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area.

  In the present embodiment, in the big hit lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area, the same data as the big hit lottery prediction result and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result included in the pre-read command is displayed. It is stored as information indicating the prediction result and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination, but is not necessarily limited to this. Data indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the pre-read command and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination are stored in another After being converted into data, the converted data may be stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area as information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination. .

  Alternatively, of the contents of the jackpot lottery prediction result indicated by the look-ahead command, only the information used for the command destruction determination may be extracted and stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area. For example, in the command destruction determination, when the jackpot lottery prediction result is not distinguished between "outside and out" and "other out" and is simply referred to as "out", "outside and out" and "other out" May be combined and stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area as “missing”. Similarly, from among the contents of the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result indicated by the pre-read command, only the information used for the destruction determination of the command may be extracted and stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area. For example, when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination does not distinguish “super reach” and “special reach” and simply refers to the reach other than the normal reach, “super reach” and “special reach” are collectively referred to as “super reach”. It may be stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area as “special reach”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pre-read command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the execution of the continuous announcement effect based on the information notified by the pre-read command, and notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the execution by the pre-read command. The stored information is stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b, and the destruction determination of the command transmitted from the main control device 110 is performed. The prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination used in the determination of the execution of the continuous announcement effect is performed. The information to be used may differ from the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination used in the destruction determination of the command. For example, a part of the information of the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination used in the determination of the execution of the continuous announcement effect may not be used in the destruction determination of the command. Therefore, in such a case, if only information necessary for the destruction determination of the command among the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination notified by the prefetch command is stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b, the destruction determination of the command is performed. The memory capacity of the prefetch information storage area 223b can be kept small while reliably performing the operation.

  By the way, among the pre-reading information 0th to 4th areas, in the pre-reading information 4th area, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the pre-reading process for the fluctuation effect with the number of suspensions of 4 times is shown. Are stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area, respectively. That is, the jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern prediction predicted by pre-reading the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved fourth area of the reserved ball storage area 203b provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. Is stored in the prefetch information fourth area.

  Similarly to the pre-reading information fourth area, the pre-reading information first to third areas each have a jackpot lottery predicted by pre-reading and a fluctuation pattern determination prediction for fluctuation productions in which the number of times of suspension is one to three. Information indicating the result is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area, respectively. That is, information indicating a prediction result of a jackpot lottery and a fluctuation pattern determination predicted by pre-reading each counter value stored in the reserved third area of the reserved ball storage area 203b provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Is stored in the pre-reading information third area, and the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by pre-reading each counter value stored in the reserved second area of the reserved ball storage area 203b is The information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by prefetching each counter value stored in the prefetch information second area and stored in the reservation first area of the reservation ball storage area 203b is prefetch. The information is stored in the first area.

  On the other hand, in the pre-read information 0 area, information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the pre-reading for the fluctuation effect immediately before or during the execution are stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern, respectively. It is stored in the judgment prediction result storage area. That is, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by pre-reading the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are shown. Information is stored in the prefetch information 0 area.

  Upon receiving the prefetch command from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 receives a jackpot lottery prediction result storage area of an area corresponding to the number of times of prefetch suspension included in the prefetch command, among the prefetch information first to fourth areas. The information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the pre-read command and the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination are stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area. In addition, the pre-read information validity flag of the area storing the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination is set to ON, and the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination stored in the area are valid. Is shown.

  In the present embodiment, the data indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the pre-read command is directly copied to the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, and the data indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination included in the pre-read command is used as the variation pattern By copying to the judgment prediction result storage area, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination are easily stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area. .

  In addition, data different from the data indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination included in the pre-read command are used as information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination. When storing in the prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area, a process of converting data indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination included in the prefetch command into the other data was performed. Then, the information indicating the predicted result of the jackpot lottery after the conversion and the information indicating the predicted result of the variation pattern determination are stored in the large jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area.

  The number of times of prefetching suspension included in the prefetching command accurately represents the number of times of suspension of the variable effect that has been prefetched by the main controller 110 as described above. Therefore, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination included in the prefetch command are stored in an area corresponding to the number of times of prefetching of the prefetch command among the prefetch information first to fourth areas, whereby these results are predicted. The prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination can be reliably stored in the area corresponding to the number of times the variation effect is suspended.

  On the other hand, when the sound ramp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 converts the data of the pre-read information first to fourth areas provided in the pre-read information storage area 223b into the pre-read information 0-th. A process for shifting to three areas is executed. In this shift process, first, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area of the prefetch information first area, and the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area. By storing the information indicating the prediction result and the value of the prefetch information valid flag in the big hit lottery prediction result storage area, fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area, and prefetch information valid flag of the prefetch information 0 area, respectively, the prefetch information is stored. The data in the first area is shifted to the prefetch information 0 area.

  When the shift of the data to the prefetch information 0 area is completed, the prefetch information 1 area becomes empty. Therefore, the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the prefetch information 2nd to 4th areas. The information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination and the value of the prefetch information valid flag are respectively stored in the large hit lottery prediction result storage areas of the first to third areas of the prefetch information having the smaller area number, and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area. By storing the data in the prefetch information valid flag, the data in the prefetch information second to fourth areas are shifted to the prefetch information first and third areas, respectively. Further, the fourth look-ahead information area becomes empty, and the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern stored in the fourth look-ahead information area is not valid (that is, invalid). In order to indicate that, the prefetch information valid flag in the prefetch information fourth area is set to off.

  When the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, it means that the execution of one variation effect on hold is started. Specifically, in main controller 110, a shift process is performed between the reserved first to fourth areas of reserved ball execution area 203c and reserved ball storage area 203b, and counter C1 stored in reserved ball execution area 203c. Based on the values of ~ C3 and CS1, a change pattern and a stop type in a jackpot lottery and a change effect are determined.

  Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the above-described shift processing between the prefetch information 0th to the 4th areas of the prefetch information storage area 223b every time the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, In the pre-reading information first to fourth areas, it is possible to always store information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted for the fluctuation effects of 1 to 4 suspension times, respectively, The information indicating the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination predicted for the variation effect corresponding to the received variation pattern command can be stored in the prefetch information 0 area.

  Therefore, after the sound ramp control device 113 executes a process of shifting each data of the pre-read information Nos. 0 to 4 provided in the pre-read information storage area 223b in response to the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect indicated is compared with the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern judgment predicted by the pre-reading for the fluctuation effect indicated by the information stored in the prefetch information 0 area, and they are matched. By determining whether or not the command is received, it is possible to determine whether or not the command received from main controller 110 has been destroyed. If the two do not match, it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the variation pattern command among the commands received from the main control device 110 have been destroyed, and the mode of the variation effect is switched to the special variation effect. .

  When the sound ramp control device 113 receives the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 after the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type of the symbol after the fluctuation effect indicated by the stop type command and the pre-read information 0 The main control device compares the fluctuation performance indicated by the information stored in the area with the jackpot lottery predicted by the look-ahead and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination, and determines whether or not they match. It is possible to determine whether the command received from 110 has been destroyed. If the two do not match, it is determined that one or both of the pre-read command and the stop type command among the commands received from the main control device 110 have been destroyed, and the mode of the variable effect is switched to the special variable effect. .

  In the present embodiment, the special fluctuation effect that is switched when it is determined that the command is destroyed is a fixed command transmitted from the main control device 110 (a stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the fluctuation effect). Until a command for confirming the display is received, the third symbol display device 81 displays the third symbol at a high speed. Further, in the special fluctuation effect, a special stop symbol indicating a departure as a stop symbol (for example, a symbol displayed as “3”, “4”, “1” in order from the left column) is confirmed and displayed in accordance with the reception of the determination command. .

  When it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 has been destroyed, the third symbol display device 81 correctly reflects the result of the jackpot lottery performed in the display control device 114 to change the performance and stop symbols. May not be displayed. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, in such a case, a special fluctuation effect is performed, and after the fluctuation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special departure is fixedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the result of the lottery at 110 is out of order, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from erroneously performing a jackpot confirmation display effect.

  Even if the special stop symbol is fixedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result in the main control device 110 is a big hit, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state. Can continue the game with peace of mind. Furthermore, by making the finalized display a special stop symbol, even if the finalized display is off, it is possible to indicate to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in a big hit state, The pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state despite the fact that the finalized display is out of the way, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy.

  In the present embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not the command is destroyed in response to the reception of the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type command, prior to the determination, the prefetch information It is determined whether or not the prefetch information valid flag of area 0 is on. Only when the prefetch information valid flag is ON, the command is destroyed based on the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot determination stored in the prefetch information 0 area or the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern. It is configured to determine whether or not it has been performed.

  The use of the prefetch information valid flag in this manner is based on the following reason. That is, in the main control device 110, the pre-reading process is not performed in the timer interrupt process for executing processes such as the detection of the start winning prize and the jackpot, but is performed in the main process over time. It is. As a result, depending on the detection timing of the start winning, there is a case where the pre-reading process is not performed for the variable effect suspended by the starting winning. Therefore, when the pre-reading process is not performed on the fluctuation effect in which the fluctuation pattern or the stop type is indicated by the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type command, the reception of the fluctuation pattern command causes the pre-read information to be stored in the 0th to 4th areas. On the other hand, after the shift is performed, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery to be predicted by the prefetching and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination are not stored in the prefetch information 0 area.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the prefetch information validity flag of the prefetch information fourth area which has become empty due to the shift is temporarily set to off, and when a prefetch command is received, the prefetch information 0 to 4 In the area corresponding to the number of times of pre-reading indicated by the pre-reading command, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the pre-reading command is stored in the big hit determination storage area and the like, and the pre-reading information valid flag is set to ON. . Then, every time the variation pattern command is received, the value of the prefetch information valid flag is shifted among the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas together with the information included in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the like.

  Thereby, when a fluctuation pattern command or a stop type command is received, the result of the jackpot lottery or the fluctuation pattern determination is predicted by pre-reading for the fluctuation effect corresponding to the received command, and information indicating the prediction result is displayed. Can be easily determined based on the prefetch information valid flag in the prefetch information 0 area. Therefore, it can be easily suppressed that the determination as to whether or not the command is destroyed is made based on invalid information, and the determination can be made easily and reliably.

  Further, upon receiving the prediction state change command from main control device 110, voice lamp control device 113 determines that there is a high possibility that the prediction result by the prefetch indicated by the prefetch command received so far is erroneous. It is determined that the notification has been made, and processing for invalidating each prediction result stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b at that time is executed (see S1021 and S1022 in FIG. 31). Specifically, the prefetch information validity flags of all the prefetch information 0 to 4 areas provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b are set to off. This makes it possible to invalidate all the various prediction results stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b at that time, so that the voice lamp control device 113 performs prefetching such as command destruction determination based on an incorrect prediction result. That various controls are performed. For example, by performing the command destruction determination based on the incorrect prediction result, it is possible to suppress the determination that the command is destroyed in the command destruction determination even though the command is not destroyed.

  In the present embodiment, the pre-reading information valid flag is used to indicate whether or not the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the pre-reading information Nos. 0 to 4 is valid. However, by storing data other than the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, the prediction of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the pre-read information 0th to fourth areas are performed. The information indicating the result may not be valid, or data other than the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination may be stored in the change pattern determination prediction result storage area, so that the pre-read information may be stored. The information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the change pattern determination stored in the 0th to fourth areas may not be valid.

  For example, the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination does not specify data of “111”. Therefore, "111" is stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area of the prefetch information fourth area which has become empty due to the shift, and when it is determined whether the command is destroyed, If the data of “111” is stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area of the prefetch information 0 area, the information about the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination are stored in the prefetch information 0 area. It may be determined that the information is not stored effectively.

  As described above, the data other than the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is stored in the big hit lottery prediction result storage area, and the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination is stored in the change pattern determination prediction result storage area. If the information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the change pattern determination stored in the prefetch information Nos. 0 to 4 is not valid by storing data other than the prefetch information, a prefetch information valid flag is newly added. It is not necessary to provide the prefetch information storage area 223b, so that an increase in the storage capacity of the RAM 223 can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The continuous announcement lottery counter 223c is a counter used to determine the execution of the continuous announcement effect, and is set to zero as an initial value by an initial setting process (S810 in FIG. 28) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Then, the continuous announcement lottery counter 223c is repeatedly updated in the main processing (see FIG. 29) of the audio lamp control device 113 (S914). The continuous announcement lottery counter 223c is updated by, for example, adding one by one in the range of 0 to 127, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127).

  When receiving the pre-read command from main controller 110, voice lamp control device 113 executes a continuous announcement determination process (S1020 in FIG. 31) for determining execution of a continuous announcement effect. In this continuous announcement determination processing, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the received pre-read command is 15R sure-change jackpot or out of order, the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223c at that time and the continuous announcement determination described below will be described. Based on the table 222a, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined at a predetermined ratio (see FIG. 32).

  Note that the determination of the execution of the continuous announcement effect is made when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the look-ahead command is 15R probability change jackpot or out of order, so that the 15R probability change jackpot with the highest game value after the end of the continuous announcement effect is completed. Can be expected. In addition, even if the change occurs after the end of the continuous announcement performance, the change pattern in the change is a front-rear reach that can keep the player expecting a big hit or not until the change change ends. Becomes Therefore, the expectation of the player by the continuous announcement effect can be continuously increased until the last variable effect in which the continuous announcement effect is set is stopped and displayed.

  The continuous announcement determination table 222a is a table for setting the “continuous announcement determination probability” when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the prefetch command received from the main control device 110 is a 15R sure-change big hit or out of order. . Here, the continuous announcement determination probability is a probability of determining that the third symbol display device 81 executes the continuous announcement effect. The sound ramp control device 113 compares the continuous announcement determination table 222a with the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223c, and when the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223c is in the range indicated by the continuous announcement determination table 222a, the third It is determined that the symbol display device 81 is to execute the continuous announcement effect (see S1038 and S1039 in FIG. 32).

  Here, the details of the continuous announcement determination table 222a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous announcement determination table 222a. As shown in FIG. 10, the continuous announcement determination table 222a has two tables, a big hit continuous announcement determination table 222a1 and an out-of-office continuous announcement determination table 222a2. The sound ramp control device 113 receives the pre-read command from the main control device 110, and when the predicted result of the jackpot lottery included in the pre-read command is a 15R probability change or a big hit, the predicted result of the jackpot lottery is 15R One table to be used for setting the continuous announcement determination probability is selected from the two tables in the continuous announcement determination table 222a in accordance with the jackpot or the out of order. In other words, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is 15R probability change big hit, the continuous hitting announcement notice determination table 222a1 is selected, and when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, the consecutive announcement notice determination table 222a2 is selected. (See S1033 to S1036 in FIG. 32). This makes it possible to change the continuous announcement determination probability according to the game state (“big hit” or “missing”) after the end of the continuous announcement effect.

  Both the jackpot continuous announcement determination table 222a1 and the out-of-office continuous announcement determination table 222a2 correspond to the possible values “1” to “4” that can be taken by the number of prefetch suspensions of the prefetch command (the number of suspensions of the prefetched variable effect). In addition, the range of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223c that determines the start of the continuous announcement effect (hereinafter, referred to as “continuous announcement determination range”) is defined.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 10, the jackpot continuous announcement determination table 222a1 defines “0 to 7” as the continuous announcement determination range in association with the prefetch suspension count “1”, and sets the prefetch suspension count “2”. Correspondingly defines "0 to 15" as the continuous notice determination range, and defines "0 to 39" as the continuous notice determination range in association with the number of prefetch suspension times "3", corresponding to the number of prefetch suspension times "4". In addition, “0 to 63” is defined as the continuous announcement determination range.

  In addition, the continuous announcement notice determination table 222a2 at the time of departure defines a continuous announcement determination range of “0 to 3” in association with the number of prefetch suspensions “1”, and associates a continuous announcement determination with the number of prefetch suspensions “2”. The range is defined as “0 to 9”, the number of prefetching reservations is set to “3”, and the continuous announcement determination range is set to “0 to 25”. "0-39" is defined as the range.

  When one of the jackpot continuous announcement determination table 222a1 and the out-of-box continuous announcement determination table 222a2 is selected as a table for setting the continuous announcement determination probability, the voice lamp control device 113 reads ahead from the selected continuous announcement determination table. The continuous notice determination range associated with the value of the number of times of prefetch suspension included in the command is specified, and when the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c at that time is included in the continuous notice determination range, execution of the continuous notice effect is determined. I do.

  Now, in the example of FIG. 10, both the jackpot continuous announcement determination table 222 a 1 and the out-of-office continuous announcement determination table 222 a 2 are defined such that the larger the value of the number of times of pre-reading is, the wider the continuous announcement determination range becomes. If the continuous announcement determination range is wide, it is easy to determine that a continuous announcement effect is to be performed, and the continuous announcement determination probability increases. Therefore, the jackpot continuous announcement determination table 222a1 and the off-state continuous announcement determination table 222a2 are It can be said that the larger the number of times the variable display is suspended in the main control device 110, the higher the continuous announcement determination probability is defined.

  Here, since the continuous announcement effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects that are suspended when the continuous announcement effect is determined, the continuous announcement determination probability is set to be higher as the number of times of suspension is increased. Is likely to increase in the number of variable effects included in the continuous notice effect of the above. Thereby, the player can recognize that the effect different from the normal effect has been performed as the continuous notice effect is performed over many continuous variable effects. Expectation can be given. In addition, since the number of times the variable display is held often takes a small value, when the number of times of holding is small, it is possible to suppress the continuous announcement effect from being performed frequently, while the number of times of holding is reduced. When it becomes large, it is possible to make the continuous announcement effect easy to be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the continuous announcement determination probability is defined so that the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined even when the number of times of prefetching suspension is 1 (that is, the number of variable effects in which the continuous announcement effect is performed is 1). Have been. Here, when the number of times of pre-reading is 1, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined as it is, the variable effect in which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set is changed to the variable effect in which the pre-reading process is performed to generate the pre-read command. Therefore, the “jellyfish” image that is the image of the continuous announcement effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variation effect. Therefore, in this case, a “15R jackpot” may be displayed after one “jellyfish” image is displayed, and the expectation of the player for the continuous announcement effect on the “jellyfish” image may be diluted. There is.

  On the other hand, although details will be described later, when the one-time notice execution flag 223f is on, the execution of the one-time notice effect is started in the fluctuation effect that is started or executed at that time, or in the last performed fluctuation effect. Means that it is set. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the number of times of prefetching suspension is one (that is, when the number of the variable effects in which the continuous announcement effect is performed is one), the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, and the single announcement at that time is performed. When the execution flag 223f is ON, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set for the variable effect for which the pre-reading process has been performed. This makes it possible to display the “jellyfish” image in the single announcement announcement effect in the earlier fluctuation effect of the two consecutive fluctuation effects, and to display the “jellyfish” image in the continuous announcement effect in the later fluctuation effect. . Therefore, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the continuous announcement effect has been performed over two continuous variable effects, and to give the player a sense of expectation that the 15R certainty big hit will be achieved.

  On the other hand, even if the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined when the number of reading suspensions is one (that is, the number of the variable effects in which the continuous announcement effect is performed), the single-shot announcement execution flag 223f at that time is off. In this case, in the present embodiment, the “jellyfish” image, which is the image of the continuous announcement effect, is not displayed for the variable effect subjected to the pre-reading process. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation where the continuous announcement effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the continuous announcement effect that the player has on the “jellyfish” image from being diluted.

  In addition, when comparing the jackpot continuous announcement determination table 222a1 and the out-of-office consecutive announcement determination table 222a2 in the example of FIG. 10, the continuous announcement determination range associated with the same value of the number of times of prefetch suspension is the jackpot continuous announcement It is defined that the judgment table 222a1 is the same as or wider than the continuous notice judgment table 222a2 at the time of departure. That is, the continuous announcement determination probability in the case where the gaming state after the end of the continuous announcement effect is "big hit" is the same as or higher than the continuous announcement determination probability in the case where the game state after the end of the continuous announcement effect is "out". Is also set to be high.

  Thereby, when the continuous announcement effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to indicate to the player that the game state is likely to be "big hit" after the end of the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a high sense of expectation. Also, the probability that the game state after the end of the continuous announcement effect (that is, the result of the determination made when the ball enters the first entrance 64) is “big hit” is usually smaller than the probability of being “out”. Is also set to be small, so that if the game state after the end of the continuous announcement effect is “out of place”, it can be suppressed so that the continuous announcement effect is not performed frequently, while if the game state is “big hit”, Thus, it is possible to easily perform the continuous announcement effect.

  As described above, in the main control device 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery based on the look-ahead performed when the ball is won in the first entrance 64 is not only the jackpot, but also in the case of the front and rear deviation, and in the case of the front and rear deviation. Also, the execution of the continuous announcement effect can be determined. That is, the execution of the continuous announcement effect can be performed under various conditions. Thereby, when a continuous announcement effect is performed, various expectations can be given to the player. Further, even if the lottery results in a loss, the continuous announcement effect is provided, thereby preventing the player from being bored.

  The one-time announcement lottery counter 223d is a counter used to determine the execution of the one-time announcement effect. The single announcement effect is an effect in which a “jellyfish” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the fluctuation effect, similarly to the continuous announcement effect. However, while the continuous announcement effect is performed over a plurality of fluctuation effects, the single announcement effect is performed only by one fluctuation effect.

  The one-off notice lottery counter 223d is set to zero as an initial value by an initial setting process (S810 in FIG. 28) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Then, the one-off notice lottery counter 223d is repeatedly updated in the main processing (see FIG. 29) of the sound lamp control device 113 (S914). The one-off notice lottery counter 223c is updated by, for example, adding one by one in the range of 0 to 14 and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 14).

  When the sound ramp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command notifying the start of the fluctuation effect from the main control device 110, the value of the one-time announcement lottery counter 223d at that time is 10 in the fluctuation display process (see FIG. 33). If so, the execution of the single announcement effect is determined (see S1111). That is, when the one-time announcement lottery counter 223d is updated within the range of 0 to 14, the execution of the one-time announcement effect is determined with a probability of 1/15. Then, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines the execution of the one-time announcement effect, the same “jellyfish” image as that of the continuous announcement effect is displayed in the fluctuation effect for the variable effect in which the execution of the single announcement effect is determined. Thus, the display control device 114 is notified. Specifically, a continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Thereby, under the control of the display control device 114, the “jellyfish” image is displayed in the variation effect of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, paying attention to the one variable effect, in both the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect, the jellyfish image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variable effect. Thereby, when the “jellyfish” image that was not displayed in the at least one previous variable effect is displayed in the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is displayed in the continuous announcement effect. It is possible for the player to continue the game while thinking about whether the image is a "jellyfish" image displayed by a single announcement effect. Then, when the “jellyfish” image is displayed again in the next fluctuation effect, it is possible to strongly make the player recognize that it is a continuous announcement effect, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game. .

  In the present embodiment, even when the execution of the single announcement effect is determined, a continuous announcement command which is a command for displaying the “jellyfish” image for the variable effect in which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set is displayed on the display control device. Send to 114. In other words, the same command is used to change the “jellyfish” image on the display control device 114 regardless of whether the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set for one fluctuation effect or whether the execution of the single announcement effect is determined. An instruction to display the effect is given. This is because the present embodiment is configured to transmit the continuous announcement command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 for each variable effect in which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set. Is configured to display a “jellyfish” image for a variable effect in the same manner as in the continuous announcement effect. In this way, by giving the instruction of the continuous announcement effect and the instruction of the single announcement effect using the same continuous announcement command, the number of commands transmitted by the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced, and the type of the command can be stored. It is possible to reduce the capacity of the ROM to be used, and to simplify the program used in the sound lamp control device 113 and the program used in the display control device 114 that receives the continuous notice command.

  Further, when the variation pattern command is received, if it is determined by the destruction determination of the command that one or both of the pre-read command and the variation pattern command are destroyed, the execution of the one-off notice effect is determined. Instead, a single-shot announcement effect is not performed in the fluctuation effect started by the fluctuation pattern command (see S1110: Yes, S1121 in FIG. 33). Further, when the stop type command is received, if it is determined by the destruction determination of the command that one or both of the pre-read command and the stop type command have been destroyed, execution of the one-off notice effect is determined. However, the display of the “jellyfish” image is not notified to the display control device 114 (see S1009: No in FIG. 31).

  Here, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, or the prefetch command is destroyed and the above-described special fluctuation effect is performed, when the “jellyfish” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, usually, Because it is a rare effect that the "jellyfish" image is displayed in the special fluctuation effect that is not displayed, it is unknown what the game state that will be given after the end of the special fluctuation effect Nevertheless, there is a risk of giving the player an excessive sense of expectation that a big hit will occur. Then, in the event that the game is lost, the player may be discouraged and the interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in such a case, the “jellyfish” image is configured not to be displayed, so that the game can be performed without giving the player an expectation of a big hit. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the user.

  In addition, at the end of the fluctuation effect, that is, when the “Jellyfish” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the stop display of the third symbol, the continuous announcement effect is performed. It is preferable that the “jellyfish” image be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the fluctuation effect, that is, immediately after the stop display of the third symbol. That is, in the single announcement effect, it is preferable that the same effect as the continuous announcement effect is performed only for one variable effect. With this, when a single announcement effect is performed or a continuous announcement effect set over a plurality of variable effects is started, the player is expected to expect whether or not it will develop into a continuous announcement effect. Can be.

  The continuous announcement execution counter 223e is a counter for counting the number of variable productions in which the continuous announcement production is performed when the execution of the continuous announcement production is determined. The initialization process of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on (see FIG. 28) By S810), zero is set as an initial value. Then, when determining the execution of the continuous announcement effect, the sound lamp control device 223e sets the number of prefetch suspensions (ie, the number of variable effects for executing the continuous announcement effect) included in the prefetch command that triggered the execution determination to be one. The added value is stored in the continuous announcement execution counter 223e (see S1042 in FIG. 32). Also, when receiving the fluctuation pattern command for notifying the start of the fluctuation effect from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 refers to the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e in the fluctuation display processing.

  As a result, if the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is larger than 1, the continuous announcement command is sent to the display control device 114 so that the “jellyfish” image is displayed for the variation effect that is started by the variation pattern command. Is transmitted (S1114 in FIG. 33). Then, the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is decremented by 1 (S1116 in FIG. 33).

  That is, if the number of times of pre-reading is "4" when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, "5" is set in the continuous announcement execution counter 223e as a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of times of pre-reading suspension. Similarly, if the number of times of pre-reading is "1" to "3" when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the continuous notice execution counter 223e sets "2" to "2" as a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of times of pre-reading reservation. 4 "is set. Then, every time the variation pattern command is received, the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is checked. Is repeated.

  Thereby, if the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is set to "5" when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the "jellyfish" image is displayed for the four variable effects. Similarly, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined and the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is set to any of “2” to “4”, the jellyfish for the fluctuation effect for one to three times is determined. "Image is displayed. In other words, the “jellyfish” image can be displayed over all the variable effects that have been suspended before the variable effect in which the prediction result of the prefetch is notified by the prefetch command. Therefore, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform the continuous announcement effect.

  When the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e confirmed when the variation pattern command is received is 1, the execution of the new continuous announcement effect is not performed, and the execution of the single announcement effect is determined. Even if it has been performed, the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1 without transmitting the continuous notice command to the display control device 114. Further, when the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e confirmed when the variation pattern command is received is 0, the execution of the continuous announcement command to the display control device 114 is performed unless execution of the single announcement announcement effect is determined. No transmission is performed, and the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is also kept at 0. When the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is 0, when the execution of the new continuous notice effect is determined, the continuous notice execution counter 223e gives the execution decision of the execution so that the continuous notice effect is executed. A value obtained by adding 1 to the number of times of prefetch suspension (ie, the number of variable effects for executing the continuous announcement effect) included in the prefetch command that has become a trigger is set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the number of prefetch suspensions included in the prefetch command that has triggered the execution determination (that is, the number of the variable effects for executing the continuous announcement effect) ) Is not set as it is in the continuous announcement execution counter 223e, but a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of times of pre-reading suspension (the number of variable effects for executing the continuous announcement effect) is set in the continuous announcement execution counter 223e. Each time a variation pattern command, which is an instruction to start a variation effect, is received, the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is referred to, and if the value is greater than 1, a “jellyfish” image is displayed for the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to be displayed on the screen, and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1. If the value is 1, the continuous notice execution counter 223e is transmitted without transmitting the continuous notice command. Is subtracted by 1. In addition, as long as the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is 0, the continuous announcement command is not transmitted, and the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is also held at 0, except for the case where the execution of the single announcement effect is determined. .

  As a result, a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of times of prefetching suspension (the number of variable effects for performing the continuous notification effect) is set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e, and the value is decremented by one each time the variable effect is started. In accordance with the value, the display of the image related to the continuous announcement effect is set for the variable effect in which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, or after the end of the continuous announcement effect, the 1st variable effect is It is possible to easily perform control such that an image related to the continuous announcement effect is not displayed, or release the control. Therefore, since a program for performing such control can be easily constructed, it is possible to prevent the overall configuration of the program from being complicated by performing such control.

  The effect of configuring the continuous announcement execution counter 223e in this manner will be described below. In the conventional pachinko machine, when setting the execution of the continuous announcement effect, the number of times of the variable effect of performing the continuous announcement effect is set as it is in the continuous announcement execution counter, and if the continuous announcement execution counter is greater than 0 when performing the variable effect, The continuous announcement effect is executed for the initially set number of variation effects by subtracting 1 from the value of the continuous announcement execution counter while performing the continuous announcement effect in the variation effect. In the case of such a configuration, after the one continuous announcement effect ends, the continuous announcement effect may start again, that is, the continuous announcement effect may occur continuously.

  As a result, for example, if the last variable production in the first continuous preview production is out of order in the special reach, and the last variable production in the subsequent second continuous production production is out of front and back in the normal reach, the player: You will have the thought of. That is, the special reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the first continuous announcement effect is displayed over a plurality of variable effects, so that the player can play the game with an expectation that the 15R probability will be a big hit. continue. Then, if the result of the special reach is a back and forth, the player will be disappointed once, but the second consecutive announcement effect will be displayed continuously, so that the player will have a stronger expectation of a 15R probability change big hit Become. However, as a result, if the front and rear sides are shifted in the normal reach, the player may be strongly given a feeling of being downgraded compared to the front and rear separation in the special reach displayed earlier.

  Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, after the last variable effect in the first continuous preview effect is out of order, a single-shot advance effect may be performed in the subsequent variable effect. In this case, as a result of the first continuous announcement effect, the player is displaced before and after and is disappointed. Although there is a possibility that the image for the continuous announcement effect is not displayed thereafter, there is a possibility that the betrayal of the player's feeling may be consequently betrayed. In this way, with the configuration described above, there is a possibility that the expectation of the continuous announcement effect held by the player is eventually reduced.

  Further, the following problems may occur in the conventional pachinko machine. For example, it is assumed that a new starting prize (ball entry into the first entrance 64) occurs during the variable effect, and the variable effect associated with the starting prize is suspended. When a pre-reading process is performed for this start winning prize and a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a continuous announcement effect, and a determination is made not to perform the continuous announcement effect, and the continuous announcement effect is not performed in the next variable effect. Further, even if a single announcement notice effect is performed in the next variable effect, if the image of the continuous notice effect is not displayed in the first variable effect performed after the detection of the start winning, a new start winning effect is not detected thereafter. As long as it is, there is a possibility that the player may easily guess that the image of the single announcement effect displayed in the subsequent variable effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's sense of expectation for the one-off notice effect may also be reduced.

  On the other hand, the configuration as in the present embodiment has the following special effects. That is, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of prefetch suspensions included in the prefetch command (that is, the number of variable effects for executing the continuous announcement effect) included in the prefetch command that triggered the execution decision is given. The continuous announcement execution counter 223e is set, and every time a variation pattern command that is a variation production start instruction is received, the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is referred to. If the value is greater than 1, the “jellyfish” image is produced in the variation production. A continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1. If the value is 1, the continuous notice command is transmitted. By subtracting 1 from the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e without fail, after the continuous announcement effect has been performed, "jellyfish" is always included in one fluctuation effect. Image can be prevented from being displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, after the continuous announcement effect is completed, it is possible to suppress that the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect are continuously performed, so that the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect are continuously performed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in a sense of expectation of the continuous announcement effect held by the player.

  In addition, after the continuous announcement effect is completed, the start is performed by setting the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect in accordance with the rule that the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variation effect. Even if the image of the continuous announcement effect, that is, the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first variable effect performed after the detection of the winning, the “jellyfish” image is the third symbol in the next variable effect. With the display device 81, the player can have a sense of expectation that the image is a “jellyfish” image displayed as a continuous announcement effect.

  Thus, by configuring the continuous announcement execution counter 223e as in the present embodiment, the player can continue the game while enjoying the continuous announcement effect.

  In addition, at the end of each fluctuation effect, that is, immediately after the stop display of the third symbol, by displaying the “jellyfish” image on the third symbol display device 81, the continuous announcement effect is performed. Is determined, the number of prefetch suspensions included in the prefetch command that has triggered the execution decision may be set as it is in the continuous advance execution counter 223e. In this case, since the “jellyfish” image is not displayed in the variable effect that has triggered the execution of the continuous announcement effect, the number of the variable effects for executing the continuous announcement effect is one less than the number of times of prefetch suspension. Therefore, also in this case, what is set in the continuous announcement execution counter 223e can be said to be a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of variable effects for executing the continuous announcement effect.

  Also, when the variation pattern command is received, by determining whether or not one or both of the pre-reading command and the variation pattern command is destroyed by the destruction determination of the command, and when it is determined to perform the special variation effect, Regardless of the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e, the continuous announcement effect is not set, and the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect started by the variation pattern command. (See S1110: Yes in FIG. 33).

  In this case, only the process of updating the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is executed (S1120). That is, if the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is 1 or more, the value is decremented by 1. If the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is 0, the value of 0 is held. Thereby, even if the “jellyfish” image relating to the continuous announcement effect is not displayed in the variable effect, the number of the variable effects for performing the continuous announcement effect can be reliably counted by the continuous announcement execution counter 223e. Therefore, even if the destruction of the command is determined and the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in some of the variable effects of the variable effects for which the continuous notice effect is set, the continuous The continuous announcement effect can be continuously performed for the variable effect that has triggered the execution decision of the announcement effect.

  Also, when a stop type command is received, it is determined that one or both commands of the pre-read command and the stop type command are destroyed by the destruction determination of the command, and a special notice is also given when a special fluctuation effect is performed. Based on the value of the execution counter 223e, even if the continuous announcement effect is set for the variable effect related to the stop type command (that is, even if the continuous announcement execution flag is on), the “jellyfish” image The display is not notified to the display control device 114 (see S1009: No in FIG. 31).

  Here, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, or the prefetch command is destroyed and the above-described special fluctuation effect is performed, when the “jellyfish” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, usually, Because it is a rare effect that the "jellyfish" image is displayed in the special fluctuation effect that is not displayed, it is unknown what the game state that will be given after the end of the special fluctuation effect Nevertheless, there is a risk of giving the player an excessive sense of expectation that a big hit will occur. Then, in the event that the game is lost, the player may be discouraged and the interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in such a case, the “jellyfish” image is configured not to be displayed, so that the game can be performed without giving the player an expectation of a big hit. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the user.

  When receiving the prediction state change command, the sound lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of the continuous announcement effect execution set at that time. Specifically, the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is set to 0 (see S1023 in FIG. 31). As described above, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the received prefetch command when the prefetch command is received is a 15R probability variable jackpot or is out of order. Is performed at a predetermined rate. Thereby, when the continuous announcement effect is performed, it is possible to make the player expect that the 15R certain change jackpot having the highest game value will be provided after the end of the continuous announcement effect. In addition, even if the change occurs after the end of the continuous announcement performance, the change pattern in the change is a front-rear reach that can keep the player expecting a big hit or not until the change change ends. Becomes Therefore, the expectation of the player by the continuous announcement effect can be continuously increased until the last variable effect in which the continuous announcement effect is set is stopped and displayed.

  However, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, there is a high possibility that the prediction result notified by the previously transmitted prefetch command is erroneous, and thus the audio lamp control device 113 is set based on the erroneous prefetch command. If the continuous announcement effect is performed to the end, there is a risk that the jackpot type will not be "15R probable variable jackpot" in the last variable effect, or even if it is off, it will not be "reach out of front and back" . As a result, the expectation of the player due to the continuous announcement performance is greatly different from the expectation, and the interest of the player may be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when receiving the predicted state change command, the sound lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of the continuous announcement effect execution set at that time, so that the player can perform the operation after the end of the continuous announcement effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a result different from the expected result.

  The one-time announcement effect flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the one-time announcement effect is executed. When ON, it means that the execution of the one-time announcement effect is set, and when OFF, the execution of the one-time announcement effect is set. Means not. The one-time notice execution flag 223f is set to an initial value of off by the initial setting process (S810 in FIG. 28) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command notifying the start of the fluctuation effect from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 refers to the value of the single announcement lottery counter 223d at that time in the fluctuation display process (see FIG. 33). I do. If the value is 10, the execution of the one-time announcement effect is determined, and the one-time announcement execution flag 223f is set to ON. If the value of the one-time announcement lottery counter 223d is a value other than 10, the continuous announcement effect is performed. It is determined not to execute, and the one-time notice execution counter 223f is set to off (see S1111 to S1113).

  Then, when the single announcement execution flag 223f is set to ON, the continuous announcement command is transmitted to the display control device 114 only when the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is 0. Thereby, even if the setting of the execution of the continuous announcement effect is not made, the “jellyfish” image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one shot by the control of the display control device 114 in one variable effect. .

  When the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is greater than 1 in the variation display process, the continuous announcement effect is set to be executed over a plurality of variation effects including the variation effect, as described above. Regardless of whether the one-time announcement execution flag 223f is on or off, the control is performed such that the “jellyfish” image relating to the continuous announcement effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, in this embodiment, in this case, the continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114 without considering the setting of the single-shot notice execution flag 223f.

  In the variable display process, when the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is 1, the variable effect is a variable effect performed next to the last variable effect in which the continuous advance effect is set, as described above. This means that the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous announcement effect is controlled not to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of whether the one-time announcement execution flag 223f is on or off.

  This makes it possible to prevent the “jellyfish” image from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variation effect after the continuous announcement effect has been performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress continuous announcement effects and single-shot announcement effects from being performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the expectation of the continuous announcement effect held by the player caused by the continuous announcement effect or the single announcement effect being performed continuously.

  In addition, after the continuous announcement effect is completed, the start is performed by setting the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect in accordance with the rule that the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variation effect. Even if the image of the continuous announcement effect, that is, the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first variable effect performed after the detection of the winning, the “jellyfish” image is the third symbol in the next variable effect. With the display device 81, the player can have a sense of expectation that the image is a “jellyfish” image displayed as a continuous announcement effect. Therefore, the player can continue the game while enjoying the continuous announcement effect.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed, and a fluctuating effect to be started in an ON state. , A special fluctuation flag (not shown) indicating that the fluctuation production is switched to the special fluctuation production in the ON state, and a continuous announcement production for the fluctuation production in which the fluctuation starts to be started in the ON state. , And a continuous notice execution flag (not shown) for setting the execution.

  The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The fluctuation start flag is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned ON when a fluctuation pattern command output from main controller 110 is received (see S1002 in FIG. 31). Then, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1102 in FIG. 33).

  The special fluctuation flag is set as an initial value at the time of power-on, and is set to off as an initial value. The results are compared, and if they do not match, they are set to ON (S1106 in FIG. 33). Then, when the special fluctuation effect is set as the fluctuation display setting in the third symbol display device 81, the display is turned off (S1006 in FIG. 31).

  The continuous announcement execution flag is set as an initial value when the power is turned on, and when the variation pattern command is received, the special variation flag is not turned on (that is, the variation pattern of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command is not changed). If the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is greater than 1, the continuous announcement execution flag is set to "0". It is set to ON (S1115 in FIG. 33). Then, when a stop type command that defines a stop type of the variable effect whose start is instructed by the change pattern command is received, a stop type of the variable effect indicated by the stop type command and a prefetch for the variable effect If the continuous announcement execution flag is set to ON in a state where the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination predicted in the process match, the “jellyfish” image is varied on the third symbol display device 81. After setting to transmit a continuous notice command to be displayed in the effect to the display control device 114, the continuous notice execution flag is set to OFF (see S1009, S1011 to S1014 in FIG. 31).

  Further, when the stop type command is received, the stop type of the variable effect indicated by the stop type command does not match the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or the change pattern determination predicted in the pre-reading process for the variable effect. In this case, in the variable effect related to the stop type command, the setting of the execution of the continuous notice effect is invalidated, and the continuous notice execution flag is set to OFF without setting the continuous notice command (S1009, S1010 in FIG. 31). reference).

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a fluctuation effect or a continuous effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. This is to control the notice effect. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having the same design as that of the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having different jackpot lottery probabilities and different numbers of prize balls paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM (for example, a conventional game machine). Instead of providing and storing the above-mentioned Patent Document 1, the ROM 22) is stored in a character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 187, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The character ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 described later in To the video RAM 235 for normal use and the video RAM 236 for normal use.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without being stored in the dedicated program ROM (for example, the ROM 22 of Patent Document 1 described above) unlike a conventional gaming machine. Since the image data to be stored can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided to store the data, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of components can be reduced. Increase can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a bad data block. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 187a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 181 after the system reset is released, within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the NOR type ROM 234d are included in the boot program. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. A fixed amount of data (for example, a display data table, an additional data table, a transfer data table, etc., to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) by the work RAM 233. Is programmed to be transferred to the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233c according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot program, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, an additional data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization processing (see S1202 in FIG. 34) executed after the end of the boot processing by the boot program (see S1201 in FIG. 34) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  When the MPU 231 executes the remaining boot program, all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. , MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading a control program from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 187a2 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list described later (see FIG. 18) transmitted from the MPU 231, and outputs one of the frames of a first frame buffer 236 b and a second frame buffer 236 c described later. Expand the image drawn in the buffer. Further, by outputting the image information of one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, an image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 is provided with a buffer RAM 237a. The buffer RAM 237a functions as a buffer memory for data transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, and has a storage capacity for one block of the NAND flash memory 234a provided in the character ROM 234 (for example, 132 kilobytes). ) Is configured by an SRAM (Static RAM).

  Here, the transfer instruction of the image data performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 includes the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), Transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the start address of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  When the image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, the read data is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. The image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 during an unused period (a period during which no read operation or write operation is performed). Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  If the buffer RAM 237a is not provided and the image data is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a and the reading speed is low. Therefore, during the transfer of image data of a desired size, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 formed of a one-port type DRAM is occupied by one port by the image data transfer from the character ROM 234, and has a long length. Time or other data access cannot be performed. Thus, during this time, the image controller 237a can read out the image data from the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 and draw the image, or transfer the drawn image data to the third symbol display device 81. And the image display of the third symbol display device 81 may be delayed. Even when a multi-port type (type having a plurality of input / output ports) DRAM is used for the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, one port is occupied by image data transfer from the character ROM 234. Therefore, control using the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 in the image controller 237a is restricted, and the control may be complicated.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, since the image controller 237 is provided with the buffer RAM 237a constituted by the SRAM capable of operating at high speed, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 436 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The display of the image on the third symbol display device 81 is periodically performed at regular time intervals (in the present embodiment, every 20 milliseconds), and the image controller 237 uses the third symbol display device. Image drawing and drawing image data must be transferred to the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the image display timing. Therefore, when accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, it is necessary to give priority to reading of image data necessary for drawing and writing and reading of drawn image data.

  Here, usually, the scanning area in a display device such as the third symbol display device 81 is set to be larger than the display region where the image is actually displayed, and the image is displayed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the case of display, while driving each pixel constituting the screen from the left to the right toward the screen and from above to below on the scanning area set larger than the display area (so-called raster scan), Scanned. At this time, since the drawing image data is actually set only in the display area where the image is displayed, the period during which scanning is performed on the blank area which is a scanning area other than the display area (so-called blank period) The image controller 237 does not transfer the drawing image data to the third symbol display device 81.

  That is, during the blank period, even when the image is displayed by scanning the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The drawing image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is not read and transferred to the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, during the blank period, there is always a period in which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not used. Therefore, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed as follows. By using the unused period of each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period, the operation can be reliably performed.

  The resident video RAM 235 is constituted by a DRAM having one input / output port (hereinafter, referred to as “one-port type”), and the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is not overwritten during power-on. Used to be retained. As a result, the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is resident in the resident video RAM 235. The resident video RAM 235 stores, in the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81, data corresponding to the image displayed when the power is turned on, data corresponding to the frequently displayed image, and the main control. Data corresponding to an image to be displayed immediately among the images determined to be displayed by the device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, or the display control device 114 is transferred from the character ROM 234 and is resident.

  On the other hand, the normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is configured by a one-port DRAM (Dynamic RAM). When the image controller 237 draws an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image read from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236 in advance. This is for temporarily storing image data. The image data (drawn image data) drawn by the image controller 237 is alternately stored in the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c provided in the normal video RAM 236, and the image controller 237 stores the third symbol. By transmitting the drawing image data stored in the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c to the third symbol display device 281 in accordance with the display timing of the display device 281, the drawing image data is transmitted to the third symbol display device 281. An image corresponding to the data is displayed.

  The resident video RAM 189 has at least a power-on main image area 235a, a power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a rear image area 235c, a third symbol area 235d, a character symbol area 235e, and an error message image area 235f. .

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 164 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed. Hereinafter, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are collectively referred to as a power-on image.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1203 and S1204 in FIG. 34).

  Here, the power-on image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a beforehand, as shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display control unit 114 receives the display change pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control unit 113 based on the change pattern command from the main control unit 110, which is the change start instruction command, the display control unit 114 proceeds to FIG. As shown in FIG. 12, on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a power-on fluctuation image of a symbol “「 ”is provided at a lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. The result is determined, and if it is “big hit”, the image shown in FIG. 12B is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and if “out”, the image shown in FIG. Display for a certain period after stopping.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs drawing of the main image at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. it can.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 264, the power-on variable image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident at 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 12B and 12C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 264 while the main time image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 such as a third symbol or a character symbol. Here, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 13 and 14 are explanatory diagrams illustrating three types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each of the back images. FIG. 13B is for the back surface B corresponding to the “sky stage”, and FIG. 14 is for the back surface C corresponding to the “island stage”. Respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 13, among the backs A to C, the back images corresponding to the backs A and B each include an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the character. It is provided in the ROM 234. The display control device 114 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed with a proper connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the “city stage” or the “empty stage”, the MPU 231 changes the initial position of the display area from the first position a to the position a ′ of the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the region reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display region is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14, the back image on the back surface C is displayed in the third order in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the device 281. Specifically, the back C is a third pattern in which the image of the mountain towering on the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed in the displayed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of an image of the sky spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage” by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the back image shown in FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 14A, an orange sky indicating morning dawn is displayed. Then, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue with the elapse of time, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 14B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 14B, a bright blue sky indicating the day is displayed. Next, as the time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 14C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 14C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. Thereafter, as the time elapses, the color of the sky begins to gradually change from black to white and further changes to orange. After a lapse of a predetermined time, the display returns to the back image shown in FIG. 14A, and the back images of FIGS. 14A to 14C are displayed again on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 13A, the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the rear surfaces of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. In general, a game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage, which is frequently displayed, is displayed in the rear image area. By resident in the 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage stores only a part of the rear surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, in the resident video RAM 235. Is stored in the back image area 235c. The back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 14A, and image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 14A and 14B except for FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process and is resident. The area (range) of the screen image stored in the resident video RAM 235 is not limited to the above-described area (range), and may be set as appropriate.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the intention of the player, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. However, in such a case, a very large capacity RAM must be used as the resident video RAM 235, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a 'or in FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 since the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b or the image between FIGS. Even when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, even when the stage is changed by the player operating the frame button 22, even when the stage is changed to the NAND type flash memory 234 a having the slow reading speed, it is resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data, the initial positions of the back surface B and the back surface C are immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or the color tone with the passage. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the partial range of images is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the operation. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the back surface C, the images shown in FIGS. 14A so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 14B to 14C and FIGS. 14C to 14A can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. To (b) are set. Thus, while displaying the images of FIGS. 14A and 14B, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 14B and 14C and FIGS. 14A and 14B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the back image, the images of FIGS. 14B to 14C and FIGS. 14C to 14A can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes. it can.

  The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 on the rear surface B and the rear surface C is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 11) of the normal video RAM 236. Thereby, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be displayed reliably.

  On the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image corresponding to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so as to display the image between the position c and the position d as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow leftward in a smooth connection.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 435, the image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numerals “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 187 each time. A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box, or a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, or the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one fluctuation effect. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Accordingly, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of the vibration sensor 228 attached to the back of the game board 213, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the occurrence of the vibration error by a display control device by an error command. Notify 114. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving an error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, since it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 435, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  As described above, the normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in each of the sub-areas is predetermined.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c while alternately replacing them.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, an additional data table buffer 233e, a transfer data table buffer 233f, a pointer 233g, a drawing list area 233h, and a clock counter. 233i, a stored image determination flag 233j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 , Diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, For an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to one effect based on a command from the device 110, an additional data table describing display contents to be displayed with time and a display data table are displayed. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in a certain effect, and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a fluctuation effect, a demo effect A display data table corresponding to a fixed display effect and a restart effect is provided.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that a game is not being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the final display effect is a third symbol display device when the stop symbol is finally displayed by receiving a final command (display final command) from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113 after the variable effect. It is an effect displayed on 81. For example, when the stop symbol is a departure symbol, an effect that emphasizes the departure is performed, and when the stop symbol is any one of a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 15R normal jackpot, and a 2R probability variable jackpot, each of the jackpots is emphasized. Direction is performed. By visually recognizing the confirmed display effect, the player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol.

  In addition, the restart effect is a case where the final command transmitted from the main control device 110 is not received even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the fluctuation effect indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image in which the third symbol is vibrated (oscillated) around a predetermined position. When the player visually recognizes that the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and then the third symbol vibrates and is displayed, the stopped symbol is not determined at that time. Can be recognized.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the demonstration effect, the fixed display effect, and the restart effect. Further, as for the display data table for fluctuation which is the display data table for the fluctuation effect, if there are 32 fluctuation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables. The variation display data table also includes a special variation display pattern table that is set when the voice lamp controller 113 determines that the command received from the main controller 110 has been destroyed.

  Here, the display data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the display data table for fluctuation among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for designating an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed with being enlarged from a standard size. When the enlargement ratio is smaller than 100%, the sprite is displayed with a smaller size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each address, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the display data table for fluctuation. This back type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “town stage”, the “sky stage”, and the “island stage”) selected by the player, or Information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by the back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  The position information is information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of an image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81) was started. Is also good. In this case, the MPU 231 starts drawing the image based on the display data table (or displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table) with the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame. On the basis of the position of the back image displayed at the stage where the image is displayed and the time elapsed since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the image on the third symbol display device 81) is started. To identify.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table (or an image based on the display data table) according to the rear type. May be any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the third symbol display device 81), or the type information of the position information (for example, the back type and the position information). The information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed, or drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of an image based on the display data table of the third symbol display device 81). (Information indicating whether or not the information indicates the elapsed time from the start of the display) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. In the display data table, instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the current symbol. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect to be performed. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the difference between the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to the address as the symbol offset information at each address and the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is provided. Is described. Thus, the variable effect can be started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the change, the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to the address as symbol offset information at each address, and the main controller 110 via the voice lamp controller 113 The difference from the stop symbol set according to the received stop type command (display stop type command) is described. Thereby, the third symbol to be variably displayed in the variable effect can be stopped and displayed in the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a change symbol in the immediately preceding change effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing with the numbers attached to the symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 15) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233g is initialized. Each time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233g is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233g is added based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller is instructed to draw the image. As a result, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233g, so that the image specified by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the additional data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the additional data table. As described above, the additional data table describes the display contents to be displayed with the passage of time for the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the one effect based on the command from the main control device 110. It was done. Here, “add to one effect” means to change the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, an image that is not normally displayed in one effect is displayed. And the effect of superimposing another effect on the one effect, changing the color tone of part or all of the one effect, and changing the image displayed in the one effect. .

  That is, the additional data table is a drawing content necessary for adding an image that is not normally displayed to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110 and displaying the additional effect. Or the drawing content necessary to change the color tone of part or all in one production, and the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in one production It is.

  In the present embodiment, the continuous notice additionally displayed for the fluctuation effect displayed by the fluctuation display data table selected based on the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) from the main controller 110. A case where display contents for displaying an effect are defined by an additional data table will be described.

  That is, the additional data table is prepared, for example, in correspondence with the continuous announcement effect that is additionally set for the variable effect, and specifically, an additional data table corresponding to the display mode of the continuous announcement effect, “jellyfish”. The data table is stored in the data table storage area 233b.

  In this additional data table, the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address is specified in detail in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object to be additionally displayed on the image of one frame, the type of the sprite is defined, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, Drawing information, such as a translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 16, two effects (effect 1 and effect 2) and two characters (character 1 and character 2) are respectively associated with the address “0097H” defined in the display data table. (Split type (effect type, character type)), display position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. On the other hand, when there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to the address in the additional data table. Null data is defined (address “0001H” in FIG. 16 corresponds).

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the head address “0000H” of the additional data table, and the final address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. 16, “00FDH”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the additional data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 receives the continuous advance command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 adds additional data according to the continuous advance mode indicated by the continuous advance command (in the present embodiment, the mode in which the “jellyfish” image is displayed during the fluctuation display). The table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the additional data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233g is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g is read from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. Then, the image content to be drawn next is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later is created.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 16, when the pointer 233g becomes “0097H”, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0097H” of the additional data table in the various sprites specified in the address “0097H” of the display data table. A drawing list is created by adding the sprites of Effect 1, Effect 2, Character 1, and Character 2, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 233g is “0001H”, since null data is defined in the address “0001H” of the additional data table, it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and the address “ 0001H ”, a drawing list is generated based on various sprites. When the information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional data table is “End” information, or when the pointer 233g indicates an address not specified in the additional data table (for example, Also, in the example of FIG. 16, when the pointer 233g indicates the address after “00FEH”), it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and the drawing is performed based on various sprites defined in the display data table. Generate a list.

  Then, by transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is issued. With this, according to the update of the pointer 233g, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table, and the drawing content specified in the additional data table is added. The specified image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 should display on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When an additional effect image (for example, a continuous announcement effect image) is displayed in addition to the effect image (for example, a fluctuation effect image), an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image to be additionally displayed is added. By setting the data in the data table buffer 233e, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. Thus, for example, in the case where there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, a provisional display of an image in which another effect image is superimposed on each original effect image is provided. If a data table is separately prepared, 32 × (1 + 5) = 192 types of display data tables must be prepared. However, a data table corresponding to another effect image, such as the pachinko machine 10, is used as an additional data table. By separately defining, 32 + 5 = 37 types of display and additional data tables may be prepared, and an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store data tables corresponding to various types of presentation modes in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 233b, and it is possible to easily further diversify the presentation images.

  Also, as in the present pachinko machine 10, by defining another effect image to be additionally displayed as an additional data table, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233d, Even if the display of another effect image to be additionally displayed is determined, the additional data table corresponding to the other effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. By simply setting the effect image in the data table buffer 233e, another effect image to be additionally displayed can be easily displayed in addition to the original effect image.

  Further, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 233e are stored. From the table, while updating the pointer 233g every time, it is possible to easily specify the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer, and easily draw one drawing list corresponding to one frame from these. Can be generated. Therefore, even if the display of other effects is determined by the sound lamp control device 113 or the like in addition to the effect performed based on the command from the main control device 110, the effects to be additionally displayed are displayed. By defining the display content in the additional data table, various effects can be easily displayed from a small number of data tables.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effects defined in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  Note that if all image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 17 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 17 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) (Storage start address).

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the head address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 17, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113, the MPU 231 selects the display data table. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Then, every time the pointer 233g is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g is read from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. Specifically, a drawing list (see FIG. 18), which will be described later, is created, and transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is obtained from a transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f. And adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 17, when the pointer 233g becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table to the display data table and the additional data table. The drawing list created based on the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233g is “0002H”, since null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113 or the like. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table 344d in accordance with the setting of the table in the display data table buffer 233d. Can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the timing shown in FIG.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. In this way, the transfer start timing can be instructed. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1205 in FIG. 34). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S2115 in FIG. 46B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S1401 in FIG. 36). When 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S1408 in FIG. 36B) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 36B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ) Is performed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 113 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 37 to 41) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 42 to 45) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S2001 in FIG. 46A), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47) for transferring image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233g by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sets the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later, which describes the contents of an instruction to draw an image with respect to. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The additional data table buffer 233e causes the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to additionally display the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like from the sound lamp control device 113. This is a buffer for storing an additional data table corresponding to an effect (such as a continuous announcement effect). The MPU 231 writes the Null data, which means that there is no display object to be added and displayed in the additional data table buffer 233e, at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Clear the contents.

  After that, based on a command or the like from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 uses the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to display in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is determined whether or not there is an effect to be additionally displayed, and an additional data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. Store.

  Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233g by one, and stores the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table buffer 233e. A drawing list (see FIG. 18) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 is generated for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional data table. . Thereby, the effect corresponding to the additional data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. When the additional data table is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, the null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, so that the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed as it is.

  The transfer data table buffer 233f stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233f. If all image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the content by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233f.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233g one by one, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 18) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233g indicates a corresponding drawing content or a transfer target image from the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d, the additional data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data table buffer 233f. This is for specifying an address from which data transfer data information should be obtained. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233g to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (S1403 in FIG. 36) 42), a pointer update process (see S1709 in FIG. 42) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233g is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233g is performed, the MPU 231 reads the address indicated by the pointer 233g from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. Is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) to be described later is created, and a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is to be started from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f. The transfer data information of the image data is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

  Thus, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, the effect is displayed. The effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. . Therefore, various effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233h is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g and other images to be drawn. (E.g., a reserved image for displaying a reserved ball number design, a warning image for notifying of the occurrence of an error, and the like), and detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image for one frame. ) Is generated and the drawing list is created by rearranging the detailed information for each sprite.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) are specified from the sprite type defined in the display data table and the additional data table, and other image contents. Generated according to the type of sprite. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 displays the display data table and the additional data on other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. The information specified in the table is copied as it is.

  When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and generates detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And the effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Characters (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  The drawing list includes transfer data information. This information is image data transfer instruction information to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information. The transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the storage destination where the transfer target image data is to be stored. It is configured to include information (information indicating whether it is the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and a start address (storage start address).

  For example, in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f, if the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233g, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). Transfer data information corresponding to the drawing list is generated from the storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address where the transfer target image data is to be stored, and added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and transferred to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 indicated by the storage destination information (the area indicated by the storage destination head address).

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The time counter 233i is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed (see FIG. 36) Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233i is decremented by one (see S1711 in FIG. 42). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233i becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image determination flag 233j indicates whether the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not the storage state is present.

  The stored image determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S1202 in FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 231. . In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, all the image data of the sprite that is to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Then, the storage states corresponding to all the sprites in the unstored state are set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image discrimination flag 233j when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines whether the image data of the transfer target sprite is present. Then, it is determined whether or not it is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S2216 in FIG. 47). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S2217 in FIG. 47). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S2302 in FIG. 48).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 36) is executed (see S2302 in FIG. 48).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up processing started upon power-on and a main processing executed after the start-up processing, and is started periodically (in the present embodiment, at a period of 4 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the startup process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes the timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interruption process and the main process, a command to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the sound ramp control device 113, and the like is generated based on various processes, and is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. . In the external output process of S101, the output data such as the command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

  For example, a command for the number of retained balls set in the start winning process (see FIG. 20) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, a determination command, and the like set in the variation process (see FIG. 21) and the variation start process (FIG. 22), which is one of the variation processes, are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, a ball firing signal set when a ball is fired in the process of S111 described below is transmitted to the firing control device 112.

  Next, the prize ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the case of the jackpot state. (S103). In other words, the specific winning opening 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “○” or “X”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). In brief, on condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 267, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of passing, and the second symbol display device 83 The variable display of the second symbol is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol hits, the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

  Next, reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S106). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information). Further, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of obtained balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (899 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the stop type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are set to the maximum value. When they reach (899, 99, 99, 198, 250 in this embodiment, respectively), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Further, when the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the first random number counter C1 or The initial value of the second random number counter C2 is read, and the initial value is set in the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C2. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the counter of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109). A start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning of the No. 64 (S110). The details of the fluctuation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, and the details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S111), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. Then, when the launch of the sphere is on, the information of the sphere launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the sphere launch signal to the launch control device 112. Thereby, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing executed next.

  Next, the start winning process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S110). The start winning process determines whether or not there is a ball (start win) in the first ball entrance 64, and if there is a start win, stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the reserved ball storage area 203b. In order to prefetch the held counters C1 to C3 and CS1 before the execution start timing of the variable effect, the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area is executed. The processing to be stored in 203e is executed.

  After executing the start winning process, the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start win) (S201). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entry opening 64 (there is a start winning) (S201: Yes), the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a (reservation of the variable effect retained in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the number of balls N) is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S202).

  Then, is there no prize in the first entrance 64 (S201: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the number of active balls is not N <4 (S202: No). Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S201: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N <4 (S202: Yes), the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) is changed. One is added (S203), and the reserved ball number command is provided in the RAM 203 in order to transmit the reserved ball number command including the value of the retained ball number counter 203a (retained ball number N) to the sound ramp control device 113. To the specified command transmission ring buffer. As a result, the retained ball count command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

  Next, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read out from the counter buffer, and are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Of the first to fourth areas, the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1, the first per-type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter 203b3, and the fluctuation type counter storage of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a. Each is held (stored) in the area 203b4 (S205).

  Specifically, if the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a after the addition in the process of S203 is “1”, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the reserved first area. If the value of the added ball count counter 203a is “2”, the storage area of the reserved second area is “2”. If the value of the added ball counter 203a is “3”, the reserved third area is “3”. If the value of the added ball count counter 203a after addition is "4" in each storage area, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the respective storage areas of the fourth reserved area.

  When the MPU 201 detects that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held in the held ball storage area 203b by the processing of S205 are stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the order of being held. Shift to Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, a jackpot lottery, a determination of a variation pattern, and the like are executed. In this way, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b are used in a jackpot lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect and determination of the variation pattern.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S206 to S214 performed subsequent to the processing of S205, the prefetch processing of prefetching the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 suspended in the processing of S205 is performed prior to the execution start timing of the variable effect. For this purpose, these values are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e.

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the predicted state change flag 203i is on (S206). If it is off (S206: No), then, it is determined whether or not the first prefetching flag 203f is on. Is determined (S207). Here, if the first prefetching process flag 203f is off (S207: Yes), even if the prefetching process is being executed by the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetching execution area 203d, the start of the prefetching process execution is started. It means that you are not waiting. Therefore, the first prefetching flag 203d is set to ON (S208), and the first random number counter storage area 203d1, the first type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter 203d3, and the first hit random number storage area 203d1 of the first prefetch execution area 203d are set. In the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored last in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the processing of S205, respectively. The value is stored (S209).

  Thus, in the main control device 110, in the prefetching process (see FIG. 26) executed in the main process described later, the first prefetching execution area is independent of the execution interval (4 milliseconds) of the timer interrupt process. By reading the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the register 203d in advance, it is possible to predict the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination in advance. Then, the prediction result is notified to the audio ramp control device 113 by a prefetch command.

  Also, by turning on the first prefetching process flag 203f, it is possible to notify the first prefetching execution area 203d that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are newly stored for the prefetching process. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 newly stored in the one prefetch execution area 203d can be prefetched. Further, by maintaining the first pre-reading processing flag 203f on until the pre-reading processing is completed, it is possible to prevent another counter value from being overwritten in the first pre-reading execution area 203d.

  After the processing in S209, the value of the reserved ball number command 203a (reserved ball number N) added by the processing in S203 is stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d (S210). Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S207, if it is determined that the first prefetching processing flag 203f is ON (S207: Yes), the prefetching processing is performed by the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetching execution area 203d. Is being executed or is waiting for the execution of the prefetching process. Therefore, the processes of S208 to S210 are not executed, and the process proceeds to S211. As a result, the values of the various counters stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d are maintained.

  In the process of S211, it is determined whether or not the second pre-reading process flag 203g is on (S211). If the second pre-reading processing flag 203g is off (S211: Yes), even if the pre-reading processing is being executed by the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second pre-reading execution area 203e, the standby of the start of the pre-reading processing is started. Means nothing else. Therefore, the second prefetching processing flag 203e is set to ON (S212), and the first random number counter storage area 203e1, the first hit type counter storage area 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter 203e3, and the first hit random number counter storage area 203e of the second prefetch execution area 203e are set. In the fluctuation type counter storage area 203e4, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 last stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the processing of S205, respectively. The value is stored (S213).

  Thereby, in main control device 110, in the prefetching process (see FIG. 26) executed in the main process described later, regardless of the execution interval (4 milliseconds) of the timer interrupt process, the second prefetching execution area By reading the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the register 203e in advance, it is possible to predict the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination in advance. Then, the prediction result is notified to the audio ramp control device 113 by a prefetch command.

  Further, by turning on the second prefetching process flag 203g, it is possible to notify the second prefetching execution area 203e that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are newly stored in the prefetching process. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 newly stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e can be prefetched. In addition, by maintaining the second pre-reading processing flag 203g on until the pre-reading processing is completed, it is possible to prevent another counter value from being overwritten in the second pre-reading execution area 203e.

  After the processing of S213, the value of the number-of-reserved-balls command 203a (reserved-ball number N) added by the processing of S203 is stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e (S214). Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second prefetching processing flag 203g is ON as a result of the process of S211 (S211: Yes), the data is stored not only in the first prefetching execution area 203d but also in the second prefetching execution area 203e. Each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicates that the prefetching process is being executed or that the execution of the prefetching process is waiting. Therefore, the process of S212 to S214 is not executed, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. As a result, the values of the various counters stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e are maintained. In this case, the pre-reading process is not executed for the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the process of S205 in the main prize winning process.

  Also, as a result of the processing of S206, when it is determined that the predicted state change flag 203i is ON (S206: Yes), the processing of S207 to S214 is skipped and the processing is not executed, and the start winning processing is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. When the predicted state change flag 203i is ON, as described above, in order to perform prefetching again for the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the prefetching is performed again. This is a state before the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. Therefore, when the value of the predicted state change flag 203i is ON, the processes of S207 to S214 are not executed, so that the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for prefetching again are set to the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area. Before storing in the prefetch execution area 203e, it is possible to prevent the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the winning start from being stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. Therefore, when the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON, the read-ahead can be reliably executed again using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, according to the main winning award process, the prefetching process is performed by the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the corresponding prefetching execution area by the first prefetching process flag 203f and the second prefetching process flag 203g. It is determined whether the process is being executed or waiting for the start of the prefetching process. If the prefetch processing is being performed or the execution is waiting, the corresponding prefetch execution area is overwritten by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer later at the timing of detecting the start winning. Can be suppressed. Therefore, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, the MPU 201 wins a prize (start prize) in the first entrance 64 later. Even in this case, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e are maintained until the prefetch processing is completed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably execute the prefetch process using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e.

  When the first pre-reading processing flag 203f or the second pre-reading processing flag 203g is set to ON, the pre-reading processing (see FIGS. 25 and 26) repeatedly executed in the main processing executed by the MPU 201 is performed. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch execution areas corresponding to the prefetching processing flags 203f and 203g in which the ON state is detected are prefetched, and the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination are predicted. . Then, based on the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination, a prefetch command including information on the number of prefetch suspensions stored in the prefetch suspension count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is set, and the set prefetch command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. I do.

  In this way, instead of prefetching and prefetching the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the start winning detected after the start winning corresponding to the variable effect at the start of the variable effect, In the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the time when the start winning is detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) are temporarily stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, the prefetch processing is executed in the main processing. . In the present embodiment, on the other hand, a jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of execution of the fluctuation effect is a fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22) which is one of timer interruption processes executed prior to the main process. Run in.

  Here, as in the present embodiment, separately from the jackpot lottery performed at the start of execution of the variable effect, a prefetch process for prefetching each counter value acquired and held at the time of starting winning and predicting the result of the jackpot lottery or the like. When the pachinko machine is configured to execute the win, in the jackpot lottery, it is necessary to compare each of the counter values obtained by the start winning prize with each individual winning value, and also in the look-ahead processing, the read-ahead value is used. And the individual hit values must be compared one by one. As a result, the comparison process between the counter value and each winning value must be repeatedly performed up to the number of winning values in both the big hit lottery and the pre-reading process. In particular, when the pachinko machine is in the high probability state, for example, if the number of hits in the high probability state is 30, the above-described comparison processing is repeated up to 30 times for each of the jackpot lottery and the prefetching processing. Therefore, it takes a long time to perform the comparison processing between the counter value and the winning value performed in each of the jackpot lottery and the prefetching process.

  In such a situation, as in the conventional pachinko machine, at the start of the variable production, each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the start prize detected after the start prize corresponding to the variable production. In the case of performing the pre-reading processing using the, the jackpot lottery at the start of the execution of the variable effect is about the same as the jackpot lottery is performed, and if the result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the pre-reading at the time of the start winning is predicted, There is a possibility that the completion of the jackpot lottery, which is an important process, may be delayed, thereby affecting the game.

  In the timer interrupt process, a process of determining a start of a variable effect and executing a jackpot lottery, and detecting a start winning to acquire the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and executing a look-ahead process. In the case where the processing is included, the jackpot lottery process and the prefetching process may be performed together in one timer interrupt process based on the determination of the start of the variable effect and the detection of the start winning. . As described above, since each process may require a long processing time, in this case, all the processes included in the timer interrupt process may not be completed before the next timer interrupt process is started. Can occur. Therefore, various controls required for the game are delayed, which may affect the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the pre-reading process is executed in the main process, and the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of execution of the variable effect is performed by the variable process, which is one of the timer interrupt processes. It is configured to be executed during the start processing (see FIG. 22). Thus, even if the pre-reading process is being executed in the main process, the timer interrupt process is executed with priority, so that the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect. On the other hand, since the prefetching process is continuously executed after the end of the timer interrupt process, the prefetching process can be surely completed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the prefetching process is executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired when the start winning at the first entrance 64 is detected. In addition, the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect while predicting the result of the jackpot lottery or the like, so that the game can be controlled normally.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the time of the start winning are stored not only in the reserved ball count storage area 203b but also in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. The prefetching process is executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. Here, in the case where the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball count storage area 203b are directly read and the pre-reading process is performed, when the execution start timing of the variable effect is reached during the pre-reading process, as described above. The counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) of the reserved sphere storage area 203b are shifted to the reserved sphere execution area 203c and another reserved area. Thus, every time the change start process (see FIG. 22) is executed, it is necessary to change the storage areas of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the prefetch process.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the prefetching process is executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetching execution area 203d or the second prefetching execution area 203e. Even when the execution start timing of the effect is reached and the variation start processing is executed, the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e is not changed without changing the storage areas of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the prefetch processing. , The processing can be simplified.

  In this embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the first prefetch processing flag 203f or the By setting the second pre-reading processing flag 203g to ON, even if a new starting winning is detected during the pre-reading processing, the counter acquired with the new starting winning is detected. With the values of C1 to C3 and CS1, overwriting of the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e during prefetch processing can be suppressed. Therefore, the pre-reading process can be executed reliably.

  In the present embodiment, when the start winning is detected, both the first pre-reading processing flag 203f and the second pre-reading processing flag 203g are on, and the first pre-reading execution area 203d and the second pre-reading execution area 203e. Are in the prefetching process, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b along with the start winning prize are also stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d. 203e is not stored. As a result, the pre-reading process is not performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning, but the pre-reading process is, as described above, the setting of the continuous announcement effect and the sound lamp control device. This is for performing the destruction determination processing of the command transmitted to 113 and does not directly affect the game, so there is no problem.

  In this embodiment, two prefetch execution areas, ie, a first prefetch execution area 203d and a second prefetch execution area 203e, are prepared, and one of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained at the time of the start winning is provided in one of them. Is configured to be stored. Therefore, even if a new start winning is detected while the first prefetch execution area 203d stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are executing prefetch processing, the prefetch is executed in the second prefetch execution area 203e. If the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are executing the processing are not stored, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired with this new start winning are stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e. Thus, the prefetching process can be executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e. Therefore, of the sets of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the winning start and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the set for which the prefetching process is not performed, and to set as many sets as possible. A pre-reading process can be executed for this.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the prefetch execution count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 are provided in the prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e, and the start winning is detected, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are used for the prefetch execution. The value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a at the time of being stored in the areas 203d and 203e (the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a after adding 1 in accordance with the start winning) is set as the number of prefetched reserved times 203a, 203e5. Is stored in Further, the number of times of prefetching reservation stored in the number of prefetching reservations storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is the execution start timing of the variable effect while the prefetching processing flags 203f and 203g of the corresponding prefetching execution areas 203d and 203e are on. Each time the start process is executed, it is decremented by one (see S306 to S309 in FIG. 21).

  As a result, the number of prefetch suspensions stored in the prefetch suspension count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 accurately represents the number of suspensions of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the corresponding prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e. Become. Therefore, when a prefetch command is generated based on the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern judgment predicted by the prefetch process, the prefetch command includes the prefetch suspension count stored in the prefetch suspension count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5. Accordingly, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the prefetch command can accurately grasp the number of suspensions of the fluctuation effect executed according to the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination obtained by the prefetch processing.

  Therefore, in the case of setting the continuous announcement effect based on the result of the pre-reading process, the sound lamp control device 113 can set the counter C1 to C3 for which the pre-reading process has been performed and the start winning a prize which triggered the acquisition of CS1. A continuous announcement effect can be reliably set for a variable effect for a previous or previous start winning. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 holds the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command by the number of executions of the variation effect by the number of prefetch reservations indicated by the prefetch command. The prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command can be associated with the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted by the main control device 110 for the prefetched fluctuation effect. Therefore, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main controller 110 match the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the destruction of the command.

  Next, the fluctuation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S109). The fluctuation process (S109) is for controlling the fluctuation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  In this fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently occurring (S301). The term “big hit” includes the middle of the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit and the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is being hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No) Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 has stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation (S303: No), the present process is terminated as it is. As a result, the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation (S303: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of retained balls N of the variable display retained in the main control device 110). Is greater than or equal to 0 (S304). As a result, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved ball number N) is not 0 (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, and first, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved) The number of balls N) is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because the execution of one variation effect of the suspended variation effects is started by the variation start process (S311), and the number of reserved balls is reduced by one.

  Further, it is determined whether or not the first prefetching flag 203f is ON (S306). If it is ON (S306: Yes), the flag is stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d. The number of times of prefetch suspension is decremented by 1 (S307), and the process proceeds to S308. On the other hand, if the first pre-reading processing flag 203f is off (S306: No), the process of S307 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S308.

  Further, in the processing of S308, it is determined whether or not the second prefetching processing flag 203g is ON (S308). If it is ON (S308: Yes), the prefetch suspension count storage area of the second prefetching execution area 203e is determined. The prefetch suspension count stored in 203e5 is decremented by 1 (S309), and the process proceeds to S310. On the other hand, if the second pre-reading processing flag 203g is off (S308: No), the process of S309 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S310.

  As described above, the number of times of prefetching reservation stored in the number of prefetching pending times storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is determined by the timing of starting execution of the variable effect while the prefetching processing flags 203f and 203g of the corresponding prefetching execution areas 203d and 203e are on. Each time the change start process (S311) is executed, the value is decremented by one.

  As a result, the number of prefetch suspensions stored in the prefetch suspension count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 accurately represents the number of suspensions of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the corresponding prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e. Become. Therefore, by including the number of times of prefetching reservation stored in the number of prefetching reservation times storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 in the prefetching command, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received this prefetching command can determine the jackpot lottery and variation pattern obtained by the prefetching process. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of suspensions of the variable effect executed according to the prediction result of the determination.

  Therefore, in the case of setting the continuous announcement effect based on the result of the pre-reading process, the sound lamp control device 113 can set the counter C1 to C3 for which the pre-reading process has been performed and the start winning a prize which triggered the acquisition of CS1. A continuous announcement effect can be reliably set for a variable effect for a previous or previous start winning. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 holds the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command by the number of executions of the variation effect by the number of prefetch reservations indicated by the prefetch command. The prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command can be associated with the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted by the main control device 110 for the prefetched fluctuation effect. Therefore, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main controller 110 match the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the destruction of the command.

  After the processing of S309 or after a negative determination (S308: No) in the processing of S308, the data stored in the reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S310). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b toward the reserved ball execution area 203c, and executes the reserved first area → reserved ball execution. The data in each area is shifted, for example, the area 203c, the reserved second area → the reserved first area, the reserved third area → the reserved second area, the reserved fourth area → the reserved third area, and so on.

  After the data shift process of S310, the variation start process for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of the various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the data shift process. (S311), and returns to the timer interrupt processing. The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S304, when it is determined that the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (reserved ball number N) is 0 (S304: No), the demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. It is determined whether or not the demonstration is being performed (S312). In this determination process, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the reserved ball number N) is determined to be larger than 0. It is determined that the interval is under demonstration.

  When it is determined that the demonstration is not being performed (S312: No), a demonstration command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S313), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S312: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The demo command set in the process of S313 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S101 in FIG. 19) of the next timer interrupt process. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the demo command to the display control device 114 as it is, and the display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display a demonstration effect according to the demo command.

  Here, as described above, the demonstration command is set when there is no pending ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop. Therefore, if the fluctuation display is not started even after the lapse of the predetermined time after the fluctuation stop, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the changing time has elapsed (S314). The display time during the fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time elapses. If not (S314: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S315), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Note that the fluctuation process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the fluctuation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is turned on. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S314: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S316). The stop symbol is set in advance by a change start process (S311) described later with reference to FIG. In the change start process, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the process of S310. Depending on the value of, a pattern that becomes a 15R probability variable jackpot after the jackpot (the maximum number of rounds changes to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots) or a 2R probability variable jackpot (the maximum number of rounds changes to the high probability state after 2 rounds of jackpots) It is determined whether the symbol is a symbol that becomes a transitional jackpot to be shifted or a symbol that becomes a 15R regular jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds).

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the 15R probability change hits after the big hit, the red LED is turned on when the 2R probability change hit occurs, and the red LED and the blue LED is turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S316, the stop symbol of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED on the first symbol display device 37. Then, in order to confirm and display, a decision command is set (S317), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. When receiving the confirmation command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. In this way, the display control device 114 is configured to stop the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the finalization command, and to finally display the stopped symbol.

  Next, a variation start process (S311), which is one process of the variation process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S311). In the change start process (S311), a lottery of "big hit" or "missing" (big hit lottery) is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, and the first symbol display device 37 is used. And the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the fluctuation start process, first, a jackpot lottery (hit / fail judgment) process for determining whether or not a jackpot is based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is performed (S401). Whether or not a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the normal low-probability state, “7,307,582” among the numerical values 0 to 899 of the first random number counter C1 is the winning value. (Hit value). When the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the high probability state, “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420 , 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, and 892 "are the hit values (hit values). In the process of S401, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is compared with these winning values, and if they match, it is determined that a big hit has occurred. .

  Then, when it is determined as a jackpot as a result of the process of S401 (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the jackpot shown in FIG. Based on the type table, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S402).

  In this process, the jackpot type table associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the jackpot type table, that is, the maximum round number is changed to the high probability state after the 15 round jackpot. It is determined whether the 15R probable jackpot shifts, the 15R regular jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, or the 2R probable jackpot which shifts to the high probability state after the 2 rounds of jackpot. Is done. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of the jackpot (the lighting state of the LED 37a) on the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  In addition, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type, the jackpot type (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is set as the stop type as it is. The display mode at the time of the big hit in the three symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, based on the jackpot variation pattern table shown in FIG. 7B, the jackpot type determined by the processing of S402 from among various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, various types of special reach, and 2R variations A to C, and A fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit, which is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the ball execution area 203c, is determined (S403). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S403, the variation time is determined in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 until the variation pattern stops at the big hit symbol. The relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  In the subsequent processing of S404 to S411, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead probable change flag 203h correctly indicates the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 that is predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on the counter value of the look-ahead. If it is determined that it is not correctly indicated, the game state that is considered to be correct is set for the prefetching certainty change flag 203h, the prefetching process currently being performed is interrupted, and the prefetching process performed before that is performed. Then, a process for invalidating the prediction result by the prefetching process is executed.

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type determined in the process of S402 is a probable change jackpot (S404). Here, when the jackpot type is a 15R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot, it is determined to be a probability variable jackpot. Then, if it is a probability change jackpot (S404), it is determined whether or not the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is off (S405). If the look-ahead probable change flag 203h is not off, that is, if it is on (S405: No), the predictive probabilistic change flag 203h predicts when an actual jackpot lottery will be performed based on each counter value of the look-ahead target. It is determined that the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is correctly predicted to be in the high probability state (probable change state) based on the current jackpot lottery, and the process proceeds to S414.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S405, when the prefetch probability change flag 203h is OFF (S405: Yes), it is predicted in the prefetch probability change flag 203h when an actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value of the prefetch target. It can be determined that the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be correctly predicted to be in the high probability state (probable change state) based on the current jackpot lottery. Then, the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to ON (S406), and when the look-ahead processing is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is expected to be able to pick up a game that is predicted when an actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value of the look-ahead. The state is set to the high probability state (probable change state), and the process proceeds to S409.

  Further, as a result of the processing in S404, when it is determined that the probability change is not a jackpot (S404: No), it is then determined whether or not the prefetching probability change flag 203h is ON (S407). If the look-ahead probable change flag 203h is not on, that is, if it is off (S407: No), the predictive probable change flag 203h predicts when an actual jackpot lottery will be performed based on the counter value of the look-ahead target. It is determined that the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be correctly predicted to be in the low-probability state based on the current jackpot lottery, and the process proceeds to S414.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S407, when the prefetch probability change flag 203h is ON (S407: Yes), it is predicted in the prefetch probability change flag 203h when an actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value of the prefetch target. It can be determined that the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be correctly predicted to be in the low probability state based on the current jackpot lottery. Therefore, the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to OFF (S408), and when performing the look-ahead processing, the pachinko machine 10 is expected to be able to play when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value of the look-ahead target. The state is set to the low probability state, and the process proceeds to S409.

  Here, originally, the setting of the prefetch certainty change flag 203h may be performed only based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery performed in the prefetch processing. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the prefetching process is not necessarily performed on the counter values corresponding to all the variable effects, the prefetching probability change flag 203h is determined only based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery performed in the prefetching process. Is set, there is a possibility that the prediction of the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed may be greatly shifted.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in addition to the prediction result of the jackpot lottery performed in the pre-reading process, the processing of S404 to S408 sets the value of the prefetch certainty change flag 203h in consideration of the original jackpot lottery result, and The game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the lottery is performed is predicted. Thereby, even if the pre-reading process is not necessarily executed for the counter values corresponding to all the variable effects, the prediction of the gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is higher. Can be done with precision.

  In the processing of S409, the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON (S409). Then, the first prefetching flag 203f is set to off (S410), the second prefetching flag 203g is set to off (S411), and the process proceeds to S414.

  As described above, when it is determined by the processing of S404 to S407 that the look-ahead probable change flag 203h indicates an incorrect prediction state (that is, when the affirmative (Yes) determination is made in the processing of S405 or the processing of S407). ) Indicates that the prediction result based on the previous look-ahead including the current look-ahead is predicted based on an incorrect game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed. Means high. Therefore, by setting the prediction state change flag 203i to ON, the prediction result based on the pre-reading performed before, including the currently performed pre-reading, is determined by the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed. Is incorrectly predicted, and the following processing is executed in the prefetching processing (see FIGS. 26 and 27) executed in the main processing described later.

  First, in the prefetching process, the MPU 201 sets the prediction state change flag 203i while prefetching the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. If it is determined to be on, the prefetching being executed is stopped (see S758: Yes, S768: Yes). Thus, it is possible to suppress the advance of the prefetch as it is based on the value of the erroneous prefetch certainty flag 203h.

  Also, the MPU 201 sets a prediction state change command (see S772 in FIG. 27), and transmits the prediction state change command to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the prediction state change command, the sound ramp control device 113 invalidates all prediction results by the prefetching process stored in the prefetching information storage area 223b at that time.

  As described above, when it is determined by the processing of S404 to S407 that the prefetch certainty change flag 203h indicates an incorrect prediction state (that is, when a positive (Yes) determination is made in the processing of S405 or the processing of S407). ) Means that the prediction result based on the look-ahead performed before that is likely to be a result of incorrectly predicting the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed. I do. Therefore, a prediction state change command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and all the prediction results by the pre-reading process stored in the pre-read information storage area 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 are invalidated. Based on this, it is possible to suppress various controls by prefetching from being performed. For example, by performing the command destruction determination based on the incorrect prediction result, it is possible to suppress the determination that the command is destroyed in the command destruction determination even though the command is not destroyed.

  Further, when receiving the prediction state change command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e to 0 (see S1023 in FIG. 31), and executes the continuous announcement effect execution set at that time. Cancel the setting. As described above, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the received prefetch command when the prefetch command is received is a 15R probability variable jackpot or is out of order. Is performed at a predetermined rate. Thereby, when the continuous announcement effect is performed, it is possible to make the player expect that the 15R certain change jackpot having the highest game value will be provided after the end of the continuous announcement effect. In addition, even if the change occurs after the end of the continuous announcement performance, the change pattern in the change is a front-rear reach that can keep the player expecting a big hit or not until the change change ends. Therefore, the expectation of the player by the continuous announcement effect can be continuously increased until the last variable effect in which the continuous announcement effect is set is stopped and displayed.

  However, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, there is a high possibility that the prediction result notified by the previously transmitted prefetch command is erroneous, and thus the audio lamp control device 113 is set based on the erroneous prefetch command. If the continuous announcement effect is performed to the end, there is a risk that the jackpot type will not be "15R probable variable jackpot" in the last variable effect, or even if it is off, it will not be "reach out of front and back" . As a result, the expectation of the player due to the continuous announcement performance is greatly different from the expectation, and the interest of the player may be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when receiving the predicted state change command, the sound lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of the continuous announcement effect execution set at that time, so that the player can perform the operation after the end of the continuous announcement effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a result different from the expected result.

  Further, when the MPU 201 determines that the prediction state change flag 203i is on in the pre-reading process, the pachinko machine 10 can use the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held in the held ball storage area 203b. The pre-reading process is executed again based on the correct state (see FIG. 27). Thereby, for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203f, the correct value of the prefetch certainty flag 203h, that is, the correct game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take , The pre-reading process is executed, and the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination can be notified to the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, the audio ramp control device 113 can execute more versatile control using more prediction results.

  If it is determined in the processing of S401 that the hit is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of departure is set (S412). In the process of S412, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and the third pattern is displayed based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, one of the reach out of front and rear, the reach other than the back and forth out of reach, and the complete out of reach is set. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state. The tables are set differently.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S413), and the process proceeds to S414. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop symbol is displayed in the off symbol is determined. At this time, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state at normal time excluding the time reduction state, the short-range, long-range, At the time of disconnection, which is associated with the stop type set by the process of S412 and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, from among the various types of the normal reach, the various types of the super reach, and the various types of the special special reach. Is determined.

  In addition, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time reduction state or the high probability state at the time of a probability change, the short reach, the long distance, and the normal reach are determined based on the variation pattern table for the deviation (probability) shown in FIG. From the various types, the various types of super reach, and the various types of special reach, the variation at the time of disconnection associated with the stop type set by the process of S412 and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. The pattern is determined. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance by a table or the like.

  In the process of S414, based on the variation pattern determined by the processes of S403 and S413, a variation pattern command for notifying the variation type to the display control device 114 via the audio ramp control device 113 is set (S414). Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S402 or S412 is set (S415), and the process returns to the fluctuation process. These fluctuation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are converted into voice in the process of S101 of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 19). Sent to lamp control device 113. When receiving the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, the sound ramp control device 113 generates a display fluctuation pattern command and a display type command based on the command, and transmits them to the display control device 114.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S501). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S604). If it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605). Since the processing at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the processing also shifts to S611 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S611 in such a case. As will be described later in the processing of S708 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S611, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S611). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S612, S613).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S612, S613) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S612, S613) is performed also when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S612, S613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S612), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S613). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S605: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S604: No), S607: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S610, an interrupt is permitted (S610). Then, the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In the main processing, pre-reading processing, counter updating processing, and power-off processing are roughly performed.

  In the main process, first, a prefetch process is executed (S701). Here, the details of the prefetching process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 26 and FIG. 27 are flowcharts showing the prefetch processing. This look-ahead process pre-reads each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired in response to the detection of the start winning prize before referring to the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the execution start timing of the variable effect, and pre-reads the jackpot lottery. This is a process of predicting the result or the determination result of the fluctuation pattern.

  First, a description will be given with reference to FIG. In this pre-reading process, first, it is determined whether or not the first pre-reading process flag 203f is ON (S751). As a result, if the first prefetching flag 203f is ON (S751: Yes), the counter stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b in response to the detection of the start winning in the starting winning process (see FIG. 20). The values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are also stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, which means that the first prefetch execution area 203d is waiting for the execution of prefetch processing.

  Therefore, in this case, the processes of S752 to S760 are executed, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d are prefetched. First, in the process of S752, the result of the jackpot lottery is predicted from the value of the prefetch probability change flag 203h and the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first prefetch execution area 203d. I do. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C1 in the first prefetch execution area 203d matches the above-mentioned hit value, and if it matches one of the hit values, it is predicted that a big hit has occurred. If all the hit values do not match, it is predicted to be out of range.

  The winning value is a possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery (the jackpot lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variable effect) is performed based on the counter value to be read ahead indicated by the look-ahead probability change flag 203h. (Mode). That is, the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is off, and the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the look-ahead counter value is predicted to be a normal low probability state. In this case, the winning value is set to “7, 307, 582”. On the other hand, when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is on and the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the counter value to be read ahead is predicted to be in the high probability state Indicates that the hit value is "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 826, 866, 892 ".

  In the process of S752, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is predicted to be a jackpot, the first hit type counter C2 stored in the first hit type counter storage area 203d2 of the first prefetch execution area 203d is further checked. Read ahead and predict the result of the jackpot type determination. The prediction of the jackpot type determination result is performed by specifying the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 of the first prefetch execution area 203d according to the jackpot type table shown in FIG. 7A. .

  In addition, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, the third symbol display device is further based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first prefetch execution area 203d. At 81, the type of stop to be displayed is predicted from among the front and rear reach, the reach other than front and rear reach, and the complete stop. At this time, similarly to the process of S412 of the variation start process (see FIG. 22), it is predicted when the original jackpot lottery (the jackpot lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect) is performed based on the pre-read counter value. A table is set in which the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type differs depending on whether the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is the low probability state or the high probability state.

  Then, in the process of S752, finally, the prediction result of the jackpot type determination and the prediction result of the stop type determination at the time of departure are included as prediction results of the jackpot lottery. It is classified into five patterns of “15R probability variable jackpot” and “2R probability variable jackpot”.

  In the subsequent process of S753, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d are prefetched, and the result of the fluctuation pattern determination is predicted (S753). Specifically, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the processing of S752 is a jackpot, based on the jackpot variation pattern table shown in FIG. 7B, various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, various types of special reach, From the fluctuations A to C, the result of the jackpot type determination predicted by the processing of S752 is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first prefetch execution area 203d. The expected fluctuation pattern.

  Further, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the processing of S752 is out of order, the original jackpot is determined based on the stop type (reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, complete out) based on the stop type predicted by the processing of S752. A variation pattern table for deviation (normal) shown in FIG. 7 (c) or a variation pattern for deviation (probable variation) shown in FIG. 7 (d), depending on the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when a lottery is performed. The determination result of the variation pattern is predicted based on one of the tables. That is, when the gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted to be the normal low probability state excluding the time saving state, the out-of-position (normal) state shown in FIG. Based on the fluctuation pattern table, short stop, long stop, departure normal reach, departure super reach, departure special reach, predicted stop type and stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d. The fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection associated with the fluctuation type counter CS1 thus predicted is predicted.

  In addition, when the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted to be a time-saving state or a high-probability state at the time of a probability change, a variation for deviation (probability) shown in FIG. Based on the pattern table, the predicted stop type is selected from among short, long, out of normal reach, out of super reach, and out of special reach, and stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d. The variation pattern at the time of disconnection associated with the variation type counter CS1 is predicted.

  In the process of S753, finally, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination is classified into five patterns of “outside”, “normal reach”, “super reach”, “special reach”, and “2R probability change”. In other words, if the predicted variation pattern is “short off” or “long off”, it is classified as “off”. If the predicted fluctuation pattern is “various normal reach” or “variable normal reach”, it is classified as “normal reach”. If the predicted fluctuation pattern is “various super reach” or “various super reach”, it is classified as “super reach”. If the predicted variation pattern is “various special reach” or “various special reach”, it is classified as “special reach”. If the predicted variation pattern is “2R variation A” to “2R variation C”, it is classified as “2R variation”.

  In the process of S753, when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is ON, it is predicted when the original jackpot lottery (the jackpot lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variable effect) is performed based on the pre-read counter value. The game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take is determined to be a high probability state, various tables used for prediction are set, and when the look-ahead probable change flag 203h is off, the game state is determined to be a low probability state and prediction is performed. Set various tables to be used.

  In the subsequent process of S754, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery by the process of S752 is a probability change jackpot (S754). Here, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a 15R certain-change big hit or a 2R certain-change big hit, it is determined that the large-change big hit is a positive change big hit. If it is a probability change jackpot (S754: Yes), the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to ON (S755), and the process shifts to S758. As a result, in the prefetching process performed thereafter, the game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as the high probability state.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S754, if it is determined that the jackpot is not a probability variable jackpot (S754: No), then it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery by the processing of S752 is out of place (S756). If it is not outside (S756: Yes), the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is 15R normal jackpot, so the prefetch certainty change flag 203h is set to off (S757), and the process shifts to S758. As a result, in the prefetching process performed thereafter, the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of performing the original jackpot lottery is predicted as the low probability state. If it is determined as a result of the processing of S756 that the connection is out of the range (S756: Yes), the process directly proceeds to S758. As a result, the value of the prefetch certainty change flag 203h is maintained.

  In the processing of S758, it is determined whether or not the predicted state change flag 203i is on (S758). As a result, if the prediction state change flag 203i is on, it means that there is a high possibility that the previous look-ahead including the current look-ahead is performed based on the value of the wrong look-ahead probability change flag 203h. I do. That is, at the time when the process of S758 is executed, the prefetching performed on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetching execution area 203d is performed when the original big hit lottery is performed. It also means that it is highly likely that the game has been performed after the game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take is incorrectly recognized. Therefore, in this case, the current prefetching is stopped (S758: Yes), and the process proceeds to S772 (see FIG. 27). By canceling the prefetching that is currently being performed, prefetching is performed based on the value of the erroneous prefetching probability change flag 203h, and it is possible to prevent the prediction result from being notified to the sound lamp control device 113. The process of shifting to S772 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The determination of whether or not the prediction state change flag 203i is on may be made at any time in the processing of S752 to S759 as well as the processing of S758. If the prediction state change flag 203i is on, the process may be stopped at that stage, and the process may proceed to S772. By performing the determination at any time, when the prefetching is performed based on the value of the erroneous prefetching probability change flag 203h, the prefetching can be stopped earlier. Further, it is possible to prevent the processing from being uselessly advanced based on the value of the erroneous prefetching certainty change flag 203h.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S758, if the prediction state change flag 203i is not on, that is, is off (S758: No), the process proceeds to S759, and the jackpot lottery prediction result predicted by the processing of S752 And the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the processing of S753 and the number of prefetch suspensions stored in the number of prefetch suspensions storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, FIG. Is set (S759). The pre-read command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and the pre-read command is transmitted to the voice lamp control in the processing of S101 of the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 19). It is transmitted to the device 113.

  In the process of S759, if the number of prefetch suspensions stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d indicates 0 or a negative value, the prefetch command is not set and the processing of S760 is not performed. Move on to processing. As described above, this look-ahead process is performed in the main process regardless of the execution interval of the timer interrupt process. As a result, the timer interrupt process is executed at an interval of 4 milliseconds even while one prefetch process is being executed. Then, in the fluctuation processing (FIG. 21), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing, when the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect is detected, regardless of whether or not the prefetch processing is being executed, the suspended 1 Is started. Therefore, there may be a case where the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed before the completion of the prefetching process based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 performing the prefetching process.

  Here, when the execution timing of the variation effect is detected, in the variation process described above, a process of subtracting 1 from the number of reserved prefetches is performed (S306 to S309). Therefore, if the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 performing the prefetching process before the prefetching process is completed, the prefetching suspension count is 0 or a negative value. Will be shown. On the other hand, if the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed prior to the pre-reading process, the pre-reading command is transmitted to the voice lamp control unit 113 because the setting of the continuous announcement effect that can be performed by the pre-reading and the destruction of the command cannot be performed. No need to do.

  Therefore, in the processing of S759, if the number of times of prefetching suspension stored in the number of prefetching suspensions storage area 203d4 of the first prefetching execution area 203d indicates 0 or a negative value, the prefetching command is not set and the processing of S760 is not performed. By shifting to the processing, it is possible to suppress the prefetch command from being unnecessarily transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113, and useless communication is performed between the main control device 110 and the sound ramp control device 113. Can be suppressed. Further, since it is not necessary for the sound ramp control device 113 to process the result of the pre-reading process for the one in which the variable effect has already been started, it is possible to suppress imposing an excessive processing load on the sound ramp control device 113.

  It should be noted that whether or not the number of prefetch suspensions stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d indicates 0 or a negative value is determined not only by the processing of S759 but also by the processing of S752 to S759. It may be performed at any time during the process. Then, when the number of times of prefetch suspension indicates 0 or a negative value, the process may be stopped at that stage, and the process may proceed to S760.

  When the processing in S759 is completed, the first prefetching flag 203f is set to OFF (S760), and the counters C1 to C3 in the first prefetching execution area 203d are in the prefetching processing or waiting for the start of the execution of the prefetching processing. , CS1 are not stored, and the flow shifts to the process of S761.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S751, if it is determined that the first prefetching processing flag 203f is not on, that is, it is off (S751: No), the execution of the prefetching is started in the first prefetching execution area 203d. This means that the values of the waiting counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are not stored. Therefore, skipping the prefetching of the first prefetching execution area 203d in S752 to S760, and proceeds to the processing of S761.

  In the processing of S761, it is determined whether or not the second pre-reading processing flag 203g is on (S761). As a result, if the second pre-reading processing flag 203g is on (S761: Yes), in the start winning processing (see FIG. 20), the counter stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b in response to the detection of the start winning. The values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are also stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e, which means that the second prefetch execution area 203e is waiting for the execution of the prefetch process.

  Therefore, in this case, the processes of S762 to S770 are executed, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e are prefetched. Among them, the processing of S762 is the same as the processing of S752, except that the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second prefetch execution area 203e, This is performed for the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the storage area 203e2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3.

  At this time, the setting of the winning value is also performed based on the prefetch certainty change flag 203h, as in the process of S752. That is, the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is off, and the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the look-ahead counter value is predicted to be a normal low probability state. In this case, the winning value is set to “7, 307, 582”. On the other hand, when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is on and the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the counter value to be read ahead is predicted to be in the high probability state Indicates that the hit value is "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 826, 866, 892 ".

  Then, in the process of S762, finally, the prediction result of the jackpot type determination and the prediction result of the stop type determination at the time of departure are included in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the “departure before and after”, “other departure”, “15R normal jackpot” "15R probability change jackpot" and "2R probability change jackpot".

  The process of S763 is the same as the process of S753 except that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery by the process of S762, the prediction result of the jackpot type determination, the prediction result of the stop type determination at the time of departure, and the variation type counter storage area This is performed based on the value of the stop type counter CS1 stored in 203e5. At this time, as in the process of S753, when the prefetch certainty change flag 203h is ON, prediction is performed when the original big hit lottery (big hit lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variable effect) is performed based on the counter value to be prefetched. The game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take is determined to be a high-probability state, various tables used for prediction are set, and when the look-ahead probable change flag 203h is off, the game state is determined to be a low-probability state. Various tables used for prediction are set. Then, in the process of S763 as well, the classification result is finally classified into five patterns of “outside”, “normal reach”, “super reach”, “special reach”, and “2R probable change” as prediction results of the fluctuation pattern determination.

  The subsequent processes of S764 to S767 execute the same processes as those of S754 to S767, respectively, based on the prediction result of the jackpot type obtained by prefetching in the process of S762. That is, if the prediction result of the jackpot type predicted by the processing of S762 is the 15R probability-change jackpot or the 2R probability-change jackpot (S764: Yes), the prefetching probability change flag 203h is set to ON (S765), and the process proceeds to S768. . As a result, in the prefetching process performed thereafter, the game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as the high probability state.

  If the jackpot type predicted by the process of S762 is another jackpot, that is, 15R normal jackpot (S764: No and S766: No), the prefetch certainty change flag 203h is set to OFF (S767), and the process of S768 is performed. Move to. As a result, in the prefetching process performed thereafter, the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of performing the original jackpot lottery is predicted as the low probability state. If the jackpot type predicted by the process of S762 is out of the range (S764: No and S766: Yes), the process directly proceeds to S768. As a result, the value of the prefetch certainty change flag 203h is maintained.

  In the process of S768, similarly to the process of S758, it is determined whether or not the prediction state change flag 203i is on (S758). As a result, if the prediction state change flag 203i is on, it means that there is a high possibility that the previous look-ahead including the current look-ahead is performed based on the value of the wrong look-ahead probability change flag 203h. I do. That is, at the time when the process of S768 is executed, the prefetching performed on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetching execution area 203e is the same as when the original jackpot lottery is performed. It also means that it is highly likely that the game has been performed after the game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take is erroneously recognized. Therefore, in this case, as in the case of the processing of S758, the prefetching currently being performed is stopped (S768: Yes), and the process proceeds to S772 (see FIG. 27). By canceling the prefetching that is currently being performed, prefetching is performed based on the value of the erroneous prefetching probability change flag 203h, and it is possible to prevent the prediction result from being notified to the sound lamp control device 113.

  The determination of whether or not the prediction state change flag 203i is on may be made at any time in the processing of S762 to S769 as well as the processing of S768. If the prediction state change flag 203i is on, the process may be stopped at that stage, and the process may proceed to S772. By performing the determination at any time, when the prefetching is performed based on the value of the erroneous prefetching probability change flag 203h, the prefetching can be stopped earlier. Further, it is possible to prevent the processing from being uselessly advanced based on the value of the erroneous prefetching certainty change flag 203h.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S768, if the prediction state change flag 203i is not on, that is, is off (S768: No), the process proceeds to S769, and the prediction is performed by the process of S762 similarly to the process of S759. The predicted result of the determined jackpot lottery, the predicted result of the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the processing of S763, and the number of prefetch suspensions stored in the number of prefetch suspensions storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e are the voice lamp control device. The pre-read command shown in FIG. 8 to be notified to the client 113 is set (S769). The prefetch command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in the same manner as the processing of S759, and is executed in the processing of S101 of the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 19) to be executed. This look-ahead command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S769, similarly to the process of S759, when the number of times of prefetch suspension stored in the number of prefetch suspension times storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e indicates 0 or a negative value, the setting of the prefetch command is performed. Then, the process proceeds to S770. Whether or not the number of prefetch suspensions stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e indicates 0 or a negative value is determined not only in the processing of S769 but also in the processing of S762 to S769. It may be performed at any time. When the number of times of prefetch suspension indicates 0 or a negative value, the process may be stopped at that stage, and the process may proceed to S770.

  Thereafter, the second prefetching process flag 203g is set to off (S760), and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetching process or waiting for the execution of the prefetching process are stored in the second prefetching execution area 203e. The process proceeds to S771.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S761, if it is determined that the second prefetching processing flag 203g is not on, that is, it is off (S761: No), the execution of the prefetching processing is started in the second prefetching execution area 203e. This means that the values of the waiting counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are not stored. Therefore, the process skips the prefetching process for the second prefetching execution area 203e in S762 to S769, and shifts to the process in S771.

  In the process of S771, it is determined whether or not the prediction state change flag 203i is on (S771). This processing is performed when the predicted state change flag 203i is set to ON by the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 19) after the processing of S758 or S768, or the first prefetching processing flag 203f or the second prefetching processing is performed. When the flag 203g is not set to ON and the prefetching is not performed because the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during prefetching are not stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. This is a process for detecting a case where the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON.

  Then, if the prediction state change flag 203i is off (S771: No), the pre-reading process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if the prediction state change flag 203i is on (S771: Yes), there is a possibility that the prefetching performed previously, including the currently performed prefetching, is performed based on the value of the incorrect prefetching certainty change flag 203h. Therefore, the process proceeds to the process of S772 (see FIG. 27), the setting of the predicted state change command, and the first pre-reading of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. A process for storing the data in the execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e is executed.

  Here, the processing after S772 in the prefetch processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the process of S772, the predicted state change command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission (S772). The prediction state change command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S101) when the timer interrupt process is next executed. Upon receiving the prediction state change command, the sound ramp control device 113 invalidates all prediction results by the prefetching process stored in the prefetching information storage area 223b at that time. Thus, it is possible to prevent various controls based on prefetching from being performed based on an incorrect prediction result. For example, by performing the command destruction determination based on the incorrect prediction result, it is possible to suppress the determination that the command is destroyed in the command destruction determination even though the command is not destroyed.

  Further, when receiving the prediction state change command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e to 0 (see S1023 in FIG. 31), and executes the continuous announcement effect execution set at that time. Cancel the setting. When the prediction state change command is received, there is a high possibility that the prediction result notified by the previously transmitted look-ahead command is incorrect, so the continuous announcement effect set based on the incorrect look-ahead command is performed to the end. In the last fluctuation effect, there is a possibility that the type of the jackpot does not become “15R sure change jackpot” that should occur after the continuous announcement effect, or even if it is off, it does not become “reach out of front and rear”. As a result, the expectation of the player due to the continuous announcement performance is greatly different from the expectation, and the interest of the player may be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when receiving the predicted state change command, the sound lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of the continuous announcement effect execution set at that time, so that the player can perform the operation after the end of the continuous announcement effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a result different from the expected result.

  In the processing of S771, if it is detected that the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON by the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) after the processing of S758 or S768, the processing of S758 or S768 Since the prediction result based on the pre-reading based on the game state that is likely to be erroneously predicted is set as the pre-reading command, the pre-reading likely to indicate the erroneous prediction result to the sound lamp control device 213. Command. However, even if the prefetch command is transmitted, the prediction state change command is set by the processing of S772 after the prefetch command, so that the prediction command is set later than the prefetch command that is likely to indicate an incorrect prediction result. A state change command can be sent to the audio lamp controller 213. Therefore, the prediction result stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reliably invalidated based on the prefetch command that is likely to indicate an incorrect prediction result.

  After the process of S772, in the subsequent processes of S773 to S783, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is larger than 1 (S773).

  As a result, when the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is larger than 1 (S773: Yes), first, the reserved (N-1) th area (N is the reserved ball number) provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d (S774). Then, the value of (N-1) is stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d (S775). The values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved Nth area provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b are stored in the second. It is stored in the prefetch execution area 203e (S776), and then the value of N is stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e (S777). Then, the first pre-reading processing flag 203f is turned on, and the second pre-reading processing flag 203g is turned on (S778), and the flow shifts to the processing of S779.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S773, if the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is not larger than 1, that is, if it is 0 or 1 (S733: No), then the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a ( It is determined whether or not N) is 1 (S780). If the value is 1 (S780: Yes), the first random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved area provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the first type counter C2, and the stop pattern are selected. Each value of the counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d (S774), and then "1" is stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d (S775). Then, the first pre-reading processing flag is set to ON (S783), and the process shifts to S779.

  Also, as a result of the processing in S780, if the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a is not 1, that is, if it is 0 (S780: No), each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is completely stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Since it means that it is not suspended, the flow directly proceeds to the processing of S779.

  According to the processing of S773 to S783, if the value (N) of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a is 4, and the counter values corresponding to the four reserved balls are reserved in the reserved-ball storage area 203b, the reserved third area Is transferred to the first prefetch execution area 203d, and 3 is stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the first prefetch processing is being performed. The flag 203f is set to ON, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved fourth area are transcribed to the second prefetch execution area 203e. 4 is stored in 203e5, and the second prefetching flag 203g is set to ON.

  When the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 3, and the counter values corresponding to the three reserved balls are reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to C1 stored in the reserved second area are provided. The values of C3 and CS1 are transcribed to the first prefetch execution area 203d, 2 is stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the first prefetch processing flag 203f is set to ON. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved third area are transcribed to the second prefetch execution area 203e, and 3 is stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e. The second prefetching flag 203g is set to ON.

  When the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 2 and the counter values corresponding to the two reserved balls are reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to C1 stored in the reserved first area are provided. The values of C3 and CS1 are transcribed to the first prefetch execution area 203d, 1 is stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the first prefetch processing flag 203f is set to ON. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved second area are transcribed to the second prefetch execution area 203e, and 2 is stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e. The second prefetching flag 203g is set to ON.

  When the value (N) of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a is 1, and the counter value corresponding to one reserved ball is reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to C1 stored in the reserved first area are provided. The values of C3 and CS1 are transcribed to the first prefetch execution area 203d, 1 is stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the first prefetch processing flag 203f is set to ON. In this case, nothing is stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the second prefetch processing flag 203g is kept off. When the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 0, nothing is stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the first prefetch processing flag 203f and the second The 2nd pre-reading flag 203g is kept off.

  As described above, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held in the held ball storage area 203b are transcribed to the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the first corresponding to the transcribed prefetch execution area. By setting the pre-reading processing flag 203f or the second pre-reading processing flag 203g to ON, in the next pre-reading processing, re-reading is performed based on the transcribed counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Can be. Therefore, for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203f, the correct value of the prefetch certainty change flag 203h, that is, the correct gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take is set. Based on this, the pre-reading process is executed, and the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination can be notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, the audio ramp control device 113 can execute more versatile control using more prediction results.

  Also, from among the plurality of reserved balls retained in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to C3 corresponding to the most recently retained ball and the retained ball held immediately before the retained ball. Pre-reading is performed again only for the value of CS1. In this way, by limiting the target for re-reading to two reserved balls, the load of the process for re-reading can be reduced. In addition, since the processing time related to the re-reading can be shortened, when the start winning is detected, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained by the starting winning are pre-read again. It is possible to minimize the situation in which pre-reading is not performed.

  In addition, since the pre-reading is performed again for the most recently reserved ball, if the number of reserved balls is large, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the reserved ball that has been subjected to the re-reading are checked. Based on the value, there is a time margin before an actual jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, before the actual jackpot lottery is performed, it is possible to increase the possibility that the pre-reading is completed again, and it is possible to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the prediction results of many jackpot lotteries and fluctuation pattern determinations. Can be increased. Therefore, the audio ramp control device 113 can execute more versatile control using more prediction results.

  In the process of S779, the prediction state change flag 203i is set to off (S779), the prefetch process ends, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, after re-reading is performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 set in the first pre-reading execution area 203d or the second pre-reading execution area 203e, the counters C1 to C3 acquired with the start winning prize. , CS1 can be stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203, and the first prefetch processing flag 203e or the second prefetch processing flag 203g can be set to ON. Pre-reading can be performed on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that have been set.

  As described above, when the MPU 201 executes the pre-reading process, the pre-reading execution area (the first pre-reading execution area 203d, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are prefetched from the second prefetch execution area 203e), and the results of the jackpot lottery and the change pattern determination are predicted. Then, based on the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination, a prefetch command including information on the number of prefetch suspensions stored in the prefetch suspension count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is set. You.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the time when the start winning is detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) are temporarily stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second readout area. After being stored in any of the prefetch execution areas 203e, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, in the main processing, This look-ahead process is executed regardless of the time interval at which the timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, on the other hand, a jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of execution of the fluctuation effect is a fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22) which is one of timer interruption processes executed prior to the main process. Run in.

  Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, at the start of the variable production, the look-ahead is performed using the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the start prize detected after the start prize corresponding to the variable production. When the process is performed, the prediction of the result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the look-ahead at the time of the start winning prize is performed immediately before and after the jackpot lottery at the start of the execution of the variable effect, as described above, , There is a possibility that the completion of the jackpot lottery, which is the most important process, may be delayed, thereby affecting the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, while performing the prefetching process in the prefetching process, the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of the execution of the variable effect is determined by a variation of the timer interruption process. It is configured to be executed during the start processing (see FIG. 22). Thus, even if the pre-reading process is being executed in the main process, the timer interrupt process is executed with priority, so that the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect. On the other hand, since the prefetching process is continuously executed after the end of the timer interrupt process, the prefetching process can be surely completed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the prefetching process is executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired when the start winning at the first entrance 64 is detected. The jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect while predicting the results of the jackpot lottery and the like, so that the game can be controlled normally.

  In this pre-reading process, the first pre-reading process flag 203f and the second pre-reading process flag 203g are referred to in one main process, and if both flags are on, the first pre-read execution area 203d With reference to both the second prefetch execution area 203e and the second prefetch execution area 203e, prefetch is executed for each. As a result, the prefetching can be executed earlier than in the case where the prefetching is executed by referring to only one of the prefetching execution storage areas in one prefetching process. Therefore, prefetching can be executed for more values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 before the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed.

  In the prefetching process according to the present embodiment, the first prefetching flag 203f is referred to first (S751), and if it is on (S751: Yes), the counter stored in the first prefetching execution area 203d. The values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are prefetched (S752 to S760), and then the second prefetching processing flag 203g is referred to (S761). If it is on (S761: Yes), the second prefetch execution area The case in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter 203e are prefetched (S762 to S770) has been described. After referring to both the first prefetching processing flag 203f and the second prefetching processing flag 203g, the prefetching processing in the ON state is performed. Each counter C1~C3 from prefetch execution area corresponding to the intermediate flag, and prefetching the values of CS1, may be a process corresponding to S752～S760.

  In this case, when it is determined that both the first pre-reading processing flag 203f and the second pre-reading processing flag 203g are on, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first pre-reading execution area 203d are determined. The prefetching and the prefetching of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetching execution area 203e may be performed in parallel.

  For example, the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second prefetch execution area 203e. The hit random number counter C1 is read in advance, and then the process of reading the hit value of 1 from the ROM 202, and comparing the read hit value with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 of each prefetch execution storage area. The process may be repeatedly executed until it is determined that the first hit random number counter C1 of at least one of the prefetch execution storage areas is a big hit.

  Further, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first prefetch execution area 203d and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second prefetch execution area 203e are read in advance. Then, a process of reading a determination value for determining a variation pattern from the variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 7B to 7D, and the read determination value and a variation type counter CS1 of each prefetch execution storage area. May be repeatedly executed until the variation type is determined with respect to the variation type counter CS1 of at least one of the prefetch execution storage areas.

  Further, in the prediction of the judgment by other pre-reading, for example, the prediction of the judgment of the jackpot type and the prediction of the judgment of the stop type at the time of departure, similarly to the determination of the variation pattern, the first pre-read execution area 203d and the second pre-read At least one of a process of reading a corresponding counter value from the execution area 203e in advance and a process of reading a determination value and a process of comparing the read determination value with a counter value of each prefetch execution storage area is performed. May be repeatedly executed until the prediction of the determination is completed for the counter value in the prefetch execution storage area.

  Accordingly, it is not necessary to separately read the winning value and the determination value for the prefetching for the first prefetching execution area 203d and the prefetching for the second prefetching execution area 203e, and to perform the prediction of the jackpot lottery and the prediction of the variation pattern. Therefore, the number of times of reading the hit value and the determination value can be reduced, and the speed of the pre-read process can be increased.

  In this case, for example, after the first hit random number counter C1 of at least one of the prefetch execution storage areas is determined to be a big hit, the first random number counter C1 of the remaining prefetch execution storage areas not determined to be a big hit is used. , The jackpot lottery prediction process may be continuously executed. Similarly, for at least one of the counter values of the prefetch execution storage area, after the prediction of one determination is completed, only for the counter values of the remaining prefetch execution storage areas for which the prediction of the determination is not completed, The prediction process of the one determination may be continuously performed. As a result, the counter value for which the prediction of the jackpot lottery or the determination has been completed is not compared with the winning value or the determination value, so that the waste of the processing can be omitted, and the speed of the prefetching processing can be further increased. Can be.

  On the other hand, for example, even after it is determined that the first random number counter C1 of at least one of the prefetch execution storage areas is a big hit, the first random number counter C1 of the two prefetch execution storage areas is determined to be a big hit lottery. The prediction process may be continuously performed. Similarly, even after the prediction of one determination is completed for the counter value of at least one prefetch execution storage area, the prediction processing of the one determination is performed for the counter values of the two prefetch execution storage areas. It may be executed continuously. Thus, although there is a possibility that the processing may be wasted, it is determined whether the prediction of the jackpot lottery or the prediction of the determination has been completed for any of the prefetch execution storage areas, and the prefetch execution storage area used for the prediction is changed. Since no processing is required, the processing can be simplified. Therefore, an increase in the capacity related to the control program caused by performing the prefetching process can be suppressed to a small value.

  The prefetching of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetching execution area 203d and the prefetching of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetching execution area 203e are simultaneously performed in parallel. In this case, the value of the prefetch certainty changing flag 203h is first set based on the jackpot lottery result predicted by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetching execution area 203d. The setting may be performed, and subsequently, the prefetch certainty change flag may be set based on the jackpot lottery result predicted by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e.

  At this time, based on the jackpot lottery results predicted by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, the setting of the prefetch certainty flag 203h is changed from off to on or from off to on. Or the counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e, which are performed simultaneously with the prefetching of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d. This means that the look-ahead of the value is performed based on the wrong look-ahead probability change flag 203h. Therefore, in such a case, the prefetching of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetching execution area 203e is performed again based on the value of the newly set prefetching certainty flag 203h. You may. Thereby, the prefetching of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetching execution area 203d and the prefetching of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetching execution area 203e are simultaneously performed. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e can be correctly prefetched.

  Returning to FIG. 25, the description of the main processing will be continued. In the main process, when the pre-reading process in S701 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S702). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S702: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power failure signal SG1, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous prefetching process (S703), and if the predetermined time has already elapsed (S703: Yes), the process proceeds to S701, and the prefetch process is repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the previous prefetching process (S703: No), the first prefetching process is performed until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next prefetching process execution timing is reached. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S704, S705).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S704). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S108 (S705), and the process proceeds to S702.

  Here, since the execution time of the prefetching process in S701 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next execution timing of the prefetching process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 ( That is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the processing of S702, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S702: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 23 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S706 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S706), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S707). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S708), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S709), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the processing of S702 is executed at the timing when the pre-reading processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S701 ends, or when one cycle of the processing of S704 and S705 performed within the remaining time ends. I have. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S701, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S701. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described where, in the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, the prefetching processing (S701) is executed as the processing executed every 4 milliseconds. May be configured. For example, in the present embodiment, a prize ball counting signal, a payout abnormality signal reading process (S102), a large opening opening / closing process (S103), and a second symbol control process (S105) executed in the timer interrupting process (see FIG. 19). ) And part or all of the switch reading process (S106) may be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

  Also, the pre-reading process (S701) is not executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process, but the remaining time until the next timing at which the process executed every 4 milliseconds should be executed in the main process. In such a case, a pre-reading process may be executed. That is, the pre-reading process may be performed at any timing after a negative determination is made in the process of S703, through the processes of S704, S705, and S702, and before returning to the process of S703 again. By executing the prefetching process within the remaining period, in the start winning process (see FIG. 20), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired in accordance with the detection of the start winning are set in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution region. The fact that the data is stored in the prefetch execution area 203e can be determined earlier in the main processing. Therefore, since the prediction of the result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination by the prefetching process can be performed earlier, it is less likely that the actual lottery is performed first based on each counter value of the prefetching target during the prefetching process. can do.

  If the prefetching process is not executed every 4 milliseconds and there is no process to be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process, the process of S703 is omitted and the processes of S701 to S705 are repeatedly executed. You may comprise so that it may be. In this case, the concept of the remaining time disappears, but the execution time of the pre-reading process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the timer interrupt process in which the first random number counter C1 and the second random number counter C2 are updated is performed. The execution time of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated with respect to the execution interval (4 milliseconds in this embodiment). Therefore, in this case as well, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using the fluctuation time, whereby the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 are updated. The value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random. it can.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 28, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current start-up processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S918 (see FIG. 29). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S915 in FIG. 29), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S918. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S918 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S802: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off processing in S918 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S803).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S803: Yes), the process proceeds to S804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S803: No), the process proceeds to S808.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S803: Yes), and the flow shifts to S804. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S918 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S803: No), and the process proceeds to S808.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S802: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S918, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S804, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S804). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that it is normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S806). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S918 (see S917 in FIG. 29). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S918 is executed. Therefore, the process of S808 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S918 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S810), and the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S811), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S808 is performed with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, and the process of step S808 is performed via the processes of steps S804 to S806. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S808: No), the process skips S809, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S810, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S810), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S811), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process of S809 is skipped is that when the process from S804 to the process of S808 is performed via the process of S806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S804. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing of S901 was executed (S901). If not (S901: No), the process proceeds to S912 without performing the processes of S902 to S911. In the processing of S901, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. S902 to S911 are processing related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display processing in S912 and the command determination processing in S913 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S913 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S912 in a short cycle, a command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S901 (S901: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S903 to S913 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S902). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S909 described later (S903), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S904). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S905 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the processing of S905, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a held number display updating process is executed (S906). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed. Sent to 114. In the pending number display update process, a process of turning on the pending lamp 285 according to the value of the pending ball number counter 223a is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S907). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and instead of the frame button operation command, the rear image change for the display control device 114 is performed. Set the command. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or the frame button 22 is pressed during the reach effect to display the expectation of the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S907 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring and effect processing is completed, a vibration sensor input monitoring processing is performed (S908). This vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring an input signal from the vibration sensor 228 and detecting whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is vibrated.

  Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S908) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S908) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S908), first, the output value (vibration level) of the vibration sensor 228 is read from the vibration sensor 228 (S951), and it is determined from the read output value whether the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level. (S952). As a result, if the vibration level is lower than the predetermined level (S952: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process ends, and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 29).

  On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than the predetermined level (S952: Yes), it is determined that vibration has been applied to the pachinko machine 10, and the sound output device 226 is set to output an alarm sound (S953) and displayed. An error command for notifying the control device 114 that a vibration error has occurred is set (S954), and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 29). Accordingly, the display control device 31 performs a process of displaying an error message image for notifying the vibration error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 29, the description of the main processing will be continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S908) is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S909), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S910). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting. When the output of the alarm sound is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring processing (see FIG. 30) (see S953), the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by this sound editing / output processing, and the alarm sound is sounded. Output from the output device 226.

  After the processing in S910, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S911), and the flow shifts to the processing in S912. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process in S909 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S910 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S912, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. A variable display process, which is a process set for transmission, is executed. Details of the variable display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the fluctuation display process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S913). Details of the command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S913 ends, next, an update process of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223c and the one-time announcement lottery counter 223d is executed (S914). The update of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223c is performed such that each time the update process is performed, one is added in order within the range of 0 to 127, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). The update of the one-off notice lottery counter 223d is performed in such a manner that each time the update process is performed, one is sequentially added within the range of 0 to 14, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 14). The value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223c and the value of the single announcement lottery counter 223d updated by the update process of S914 are referred to by the variable display process (S912) executed in the next loop, and the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined. It is used to determine the execution of a one-time announcement effect.

  When the processing in S913 ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S915). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S915 (S915: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S917), and the power-off processing is executed (S918). After the power-off processing is performed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S919), and then the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off information is not stored in the process of S915 (S915: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S916), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S916: No), the process returns to S901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S916: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S913) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S913). This command determination processing (S913) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . In addition, when the pre-read command is received from the main control device 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the pre-read command is stored in the pre-read information storage area 223b, and the third symbol display device 81 The decision of the execution of the continuous announcement effect by is made. Further, this process is to perform a destruction determination of a command when a stop type command is received from the main control device 110, or to switch to a special variation effect as a variation effect mode when it is recognized that the command is destroyed. Set the stop symbol to a special stop symbol. Hereinafter, the details of the command determination processing will be described.

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read and analyzed from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S1001). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1001: Yes), the variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1002), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1003). Then, the processing returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in a later-described variation display process (see FIG. 33), the display variation pattern for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type. Used to set a command.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1001: No), it is next determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1004). Then, when it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1004: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special variation flag stored in the RAM 233 is ON (S1005). This special fluctuation flag is set to ON when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect indicated by the fluctuation pattern command does not match the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern judgment predicted by the pre-reading process for the fluctuation effect. Is a flag to be executed. That is, the special variation flag is set to ON when it is determined that one or both of the pre-read command and the variation pattern command have been destroyed. The comparison between the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command and the prediction result by the pre-reading processing is performed in the fluctuation display processing (FIG. 33) by detecting the reception of the fluctuation pattern command by this command determination processing (S1001: Yes). This is performed (see S1104).

  As a result of the determination in S1005, if the special variation flag is on (S1005: Yes), the special variation flag is set to off (S1006), and then the display variation pattern command indicating the special variation effect as the variation pattern of the variation effect. Further, a stop type command for display indicating a special stop symbol (for example, a symbol displayed as “3”, “4”, “1” in order from the left column) is received as a stop symbol of the variable effect. The setting is made regardless of the content of the stop type command (S1007), and the process returns to the main process.

  Each command set in the process of S1007 is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (S902).

  If the result of the determination in S1005 is that the special variation flag is not on but off (S1005: No), then a stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1008). If the prefetch information valid flag provided in the prefetch information 0 area of the prefetch information storage area 223b is on, the stop type extracted in the process of S1008 is the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area of the prefetch information 0 area. It is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the storage area matches the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area (S1009).

  For example, when the stop type extracted in the process of S1008 is “reach other than front and rear deviation”, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the prefetch information 0 area is “other deviation”, and the fluctuation pattern determination is performed. Are "normal reach", it is determined that they match. On the other hand, when the stop type extracted in the process of S1008 is “completely out of order”, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the prefetch information 0 area is “15R normal jackpot” or the variation pattern If the prediction result of the determination is “normal reach”, it is determined that they do not match.

  If the stop type matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination as a result of the determination in S1009, it can be determined that the stop type command has not been destroyed, and the stop type extracted in the process of S1009 is displayed. A display stop type command for notifying the control device 113 is set (S1011). In the process of S1009, when the prefetch information valid flag provided in the prefetch information 0 area of the prefetch information storage area 223b is off, the prediction of the jackpot lottery and the change pattern determination stored in the prefetch information 0 area is performed. Since the result is invalid and the destruction of the command cannot be determined, the process directly proceeds to the process of S1011 and a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 113 of the stop type extracted in the process of S1009 is set.

  The display stop type command set in the process of S1011 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (S902). .

  After the processing in S1011, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice execution flag is on (S1012). Although the details will be described later, the continuous announcement execution flag is set to the execution of the continuous announcement effect for the variation effect started by the variation pattern command in the variation display process executed when the variation pattern command is received. This flag is set to ON when the execution of the single announcement effect is determined (ie, when the value of the continuous announcement execution counter is greater than 1) or when the execution of the single announcement effect is determined. If the continuous notice execution flag is off (S1012: No), the process returns to the main process. If the continuous announcement execution flag is on (S1012: Yes), a continuous announcement command is set (S1013), the continuous announcement execution flag is set off (S1014), and the process returns to the main process.

  The continuous advance command set in the process of S1013 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (S902).

  As described above, when the variation pattern command is received, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set for the variation effect started by the variation pattern command, or when the execution of the single announcement effect is determined, the variation After receiving the stop type command paired with the pattern command, unless the stop type command is destroyed, the "jellyfish" image is used as the image of the continuous announcement effect or the single announcement effect, and the third design is used for the variable effect. A continuous notice command to be displayed on the display device 81 is transmitted to the display control device 114. Thereby, the “jellyfish” image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the variable effect in which the execution of the continuous announcement effect or the single announcement effect is set.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1009, if the stop type does not match the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination (S1009: No), it is determined that one or both of the pre-read command and the stop type command have been destroyed. After making a determination and setting the continuous announcement execution flag to OFF (S1010), the process proceeds to S1007. Then, a variation pattern command for display indicating a special variation effect is set as a variation pattern of the variation effect, and a special stop symbol (for example, “3”, “4”, “1” in order from the left column) is set as a stop symbol of the variation effect. (S1007), and the process returns to the main process.

  Each command set in the process of S1007 is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (S902).

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 performs the destruction determination of the command using the result of the pre-read processing performed by the main control device 110, and when it is determined that the command is destroyed, the destruction is determined. The variation effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern command or the stop type command is switched to the special variation effect. As described above, the special fluctuation effect is performed until the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 (the command for confirming and displaying the stop symbol on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the fluctuation effect) is received. This is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to change and display the third symbol at high speed. Further, in the special fluctuation effect, a special stop symbol indicating a departure as a stop symbol (for example, a symbol displayed as “3”, “4”, “1” in order from the left column) is confirmed and displayed in accordance with the reception of the determination command. .

  When it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 has been destroyed, the third symbol display device 81 correctly reflects the result of the jackpot lottery performed in the display control device 114 to change the performance and stop symbols. There is a possibility that the fixed display may not be performed. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 performs a special fluctuation effect in such a case, and a special stop symbol indicating a special departure is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the fluctuation display. Since the final display is made, even if the result of the jackpot lottery in the main control device 110 is out of order, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from erroneously performing the jackpot final display effect.

  Even if the special stop symbol is fixedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the original jackpot lottery result in the main controller 110 is a jackpot, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state. Therefore, the player can continue the game with peace of mind. Furthermore, by making the finalized display a special stop symbol, even if the finalized display is off, it is possible to indicate to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in a big hit state, The pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state despite the fact that the finalized display is out of the way, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 can perform more various controls by performing the pre-reading process.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the command is destroyed, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured not to transmit the continuous announcement command to the display control device 114. Specifically, when the stop type command does not match the information of the prefetch information No. 0 area and it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the stop type command are destroyed, the continuous notice execution is performed. Regardless of the state of the flag, the process corresponding to S1013, that is, the continuous announcement execution flag is set to OFF without executing the continuous announcement command setting process. Although the details will be described later, when the special variation flag is ON, that is, the variation pattern command does not match the information stored in the prefetch information 0 area, and either or both of the prefetch command and the variation pattern command are provided. When the command is determined to be destroyed, the setting of the execution of the continuous announcement effect or the execution of the single announcement effect is not performed in the variable display process (see FIG. 33).

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the “jellyfish” image from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the special fluctuation effect executed when it is determined that the command is destroyed. If the “jellyfish” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the special fluctuation effect is performed, a rare effect in which the “jellyfish” image is displayed in the special fluctuation effect that is not normally displayed may occur. In spite of the fact that it is unclear what the state of the game to be given after the end of the special fluctuation effect is, it is possible to give the player an excessive sense of expectation that a big hit will occur. There is. Then, in the event that the game is lost, the player may be discouraged and the interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in such a case, the “jellyfish” image is configured not to be displayed, so that the game can be performed without giving the player an expectation of a big hit. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the user.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the setting of the execution of the continuous announcement effect or the execution of the single announcement effect is determined in the variation display process executed when the variation pattern command is received, the continuous announcement command is immediately executed. Instead of performing the setting, it waits for the stop type command paired with the fluctuation pattern command to be received, and then sets the continuous advance command. This is because when it is determined that one or both of the pre-read command and the stop type command are destroyed as a result of the command destruction determination for the stop type command, the setting of the execution of the continuous announcement effect or the one-shot This is to prevent the setting of the continuous notice command regardless of the decision to execute the notice effect.

  In this embodiment, the continuous announcement command is not set when it is determined that the command is destroyed. In addition, the currently set continuous announcement effect is executed. All may be cleared. For example, a process of setting the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e to 0 may be performed before and after the process of S1007 executed in a state where it is determined that the command is destroyed.

  If you do not set the continuous announcement command only for the variable production where the destruction of the command is determined, the situation in which the “jellyfish” image temporarily disappears during the continuous production production will occur, A player who understands that the effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects may be suspicious of whether the jackpot lottery is correctly performed. Therefore, if it is determined that the command has been destroyed and the execution of the currently set continuous announcement effect is cleared, the "jellyfish" image will not be displayed temporarily during the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type indicated by the stop type command match the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the prefetch information 0 area. Is determined, and if they do not match, it is determined that one or both of the variation pattern command or the stop type command and the prefetch command are destroyed, and the mode of the variation effect is switched to the special variation effect. In addition, the case where the stop symbol is set to the special stop symbol has been described. In addition, in the case where it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command matches the stop type indicated by the stop type command, And either or both of the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command Determine as being destroyed, it may be configured to switch the mode of variation effect special variation effect.

  For example, when the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is “short deviation” and the stop type indicated by the stop type command is “complete deviation”, it can be determined that they match. The variation pattern and the stop type indicated by the pattern command and the stop type command may be set as they are. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is “short deviation” and the stop type indicated by the stop type command is “rear-and-rear reach”, it can be determined that these do not match. Alternatively, it may be configured that it is determined that one or both of the variation pattern command and the stop type command are destroyed, and the mode of the variation effect is switched to the special variation effect.

  The determination as to whether or not the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command matches the stop type indicated by the stop type command may be performed, for example, after an affirmative determination (S1009: Yes) is made in the process of S1009. . If the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command matches the stop type indicated by the stop type command, the process may proceed to S1011; otherwise, the process may proceed to S1010.

  As a result of the processing in S1004, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1004: No), it is next determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1015). When it is determined that the command for retaining the number of balls is received (S1015: Yes), the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the command for retaining number of balls (that is, when the command is retained by the main controller 110). The number of retained balls for the variable effect) is extracted and stored in the retained ball number counter 223a of the audio ramp control device 113 (S1016).

  Here, since the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, the process of S1017 is performed every time there is a winning start. The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, at the time of starting winning detection, the audio lamp control device 113 The value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223a can be corrected to match the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a of the main controller 110.

  After the processing of S1016, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a updated by the processing of S1016 is set (S1017), and the process returns to the main processing. The display reserved ball count command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (S902). As a result, the display control device 114 executes a process to display the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls on the third symbol display device 81.

  As a result of the processing in S1015, when it is determined that the pending ball count command has not been received (S1015: No), it is next determined whether or not a prefetch command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1018). When it is determined that the prefetch command has been received (S1018: Yes), the prefetch included in the prefetch command among the prefetch information first to fourth areas provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b (FIG. 9). In the big hit lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area of the area corresponding to the number of suspensions, information indicating the prediction result of the big hit lottery indicated by the look-ahead command and information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination, respectively Then, the prefetch information valid flag of the area in which the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination are stored is set to ON (S1019).

  For example, if the number of times of prefetching of the prefetching command is four, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the prefetching command is shown in the big hit lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area of the fourth prefetch information. The information and the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination are stored, and the prefetch information valid flag in the prefetch information fourth area is set to ON. Similarly, if the number of times of pre-reading of the pre-reading command is any one of 1 to 3, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the pre-reading command is stored in the pre-reading information first to third areas corresponding to the number of times of pre-reading. The information and the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination are stored, and the prefetch information valid flags of the prefetch information first to third areas in which the information is stored are set to ON.

  Here, since the number of times of prefetching suspension included in the prefetching command accurately represents the number of times of suspension of the variable effect that has been prefetched by the main control device 110, the processing of S1019 causes the prefetching information first to fourth. The prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the determination of the variation pattern can be reliably stored in the area corresponding to the number of suspensions of the variation effect that has been subjected to the look-ahead processing. On the other hand, each time the sound ramp control device 113 receives the change pattern command from the main control device 110, in the change display process (FIG. 33), the sound ramp control device 113 stores the pre-read information first to fourth areas provided in the pre-read information storage area 223b. A process of shifting the included data to the pre-read information 0th to 3rd areas is executed. Thereby, in the pre-read information first to fourth areas, it is possible to always store the information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted for the fluctuation effects of 1 to 4 times of suspension, respectively. At the same time, information indicating the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted for the fluctuation effect corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command can be stored in the prefetch information 0 area.

  Therefore, after the sound ramp control device 113 executes a process of shifting each data of the pre-read information Nos. 0 to 4 provided in the pre-read information storage area 223b in response to the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect indicated is compared with the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern judgment predicted by the pre-reading for the fluctuation effect indicated by the information stored in the prefetch information 0 area, and they are matched. By determining whether or not the command is received, it is possible to determine whether or not the command received from main controller 110 has been destroyed.

  After the processing of S1019, a continuous announcement determination processing is executed (S1020). Then, the process returns to the main processing. In this continuous announcement determination process, the acquisition timing of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for which the prefetch process has been performed is obtained from the number of times of prefetch suspension indicated by the prefetch command and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the prefetch process. It is determined whether or not to perform a continuous announcement effect of continuously displaying an announcement effect image over a variable effect before or after the start winning prize.

  Here, the details of the continuous announcement determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating a continuous announcement determination process performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In the continuous notice determination processing, first, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice execution counter 223e is 0 (S1031). If the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is not 0 (S1031: No), the subsequent processing is skipped, and the process returns to the command determination processing. If the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is not 0, it is set so that the execution of the continuous announcement effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects at that time. In this state, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is newly determined and the value corresponding to the variable effect number for performing the newly determined continuous announcement effect is set in the continuous announcement execution counter 223e, the continuous announcement that has been set up to that time is set. Following the effect, a newly set continuous announcement effect is performed, and the continuous announcement effect is generated continuously.

  Here, if the continuous preview production is performed continuously, for example, the last variable production in the first continuous preliminary production will be out of order in the special reach, and the last fluctuation production in the second consecutive preliminary production will be the normal reach. , The player will have the following feelings: That is, the special reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the first continuous announcement effect is displayed over a plurality of variable effects, so that the player can play the game with an expectation that the 15R probability will be a big hit. continue. Then, if the result of the special reach is a back and forth, the player will be disappointed once, but the second consecutive announcement effect will be displayed continuously, so that the player will have a stronger expectation of a 15R probability change big hit Become. However, as a result, if the front and rear sides are shifted in the normal reach, the player may be strongly given a feeling of being downgraded compared to the front and rear separation in the special reach displayed earlier. There is a possibility that the player's expectation of the continuous announcement effect may be reduced as a result.

  On the other hand, as long as the continuous notice execution counter 223e is not 0 (S1031: No) by the processing of S1031, the subsequent processing is skipped and the execution of the continuous notice effect is not determined. It is possible to suppress a continuous announcement performance. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the sense of expectation of the continuous announcement effect held by the player, which is caused by the continuous announcement effect being performed continuously.

  If the result of the processing in S1031 indicates that the continuous notice execution counter 223e is 0 (S1031: Yes), execution of the continuous notice effect is not set for all of the fluctuating effects suspended at that time. The process of S1042 is executed, and the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined.

  First, in the process of S1032, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is extracted from the received prefetch command (S1032). Then, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the extracted jackpot lottery is a 15R probability-change jackpot (S1033). If the prediction result is a 15R probability-change jackpot (S1033: Yes), the continuous preview determination used to determine the execution of the continuous preview effect is performed. The big hit continuous announcement determination table 222a1 is selected as the table (S1034), and the process shifts to S1037. In addition, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery extracted in the process of S1032 is not the 15R certainty-variable jackpot (S1033: No), it is then determined whether the extracted prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of order (S1035). As a result, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of order (S1035: Yes), the out-of-office continuous announcement determination table 222a2 is selected as the continuous announcement determination table (S1036), and the process shifts to S1037. If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery extracted in the process of S1032 is neither 15R probability change jackpot nor out of order (S1035: No), the subsequent process is skipped and the process returns to the command determination process.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined only when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the prefetch command is the 15R certain-change jackpot or is out of order. Thereby, when the continuous announcement effect is performed, it is possible to make the player expect that the 15R certain change jackpot having the highest game value will be provided after the end of the continuous announcement effect. In addition, even if the change occurs after the end of the continuous announcement performance, the change pattern in the change is a front-rear reach that can keep the player expecting a big hit or not until the change change ends. Becomes Therefore, the expectation of the player by the continuous announcement effect can be continuously increased until the last variable effect in which the continuous announcement effect is set is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, as a continuous announcement determination table used in the determination of the execution of the continuous announcement effect, a different continuous announcement determination table is set depending on whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a 15R probability change large hit and a case where it is out of front and rear. Thus, the probability of determining the execution of the continuous announcement effect (continuous announcement determination probability) can be made different. In particular, in the present embodiment, when comparing the jackpot continuous announcement determination table 222a1 selected in the case of the 15R probability variation big hit and the out-of-time consecutive announcement determination table 222a2 selected in the case of the out-of-order variation, the 15R probability variation The continuous announcement determination probability in the case of the jackpot is set to be equal to or higher than the continuous announcement determination probability in the case of the deviation.

  Thereby, when the continuous announcement effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is suggested to the player that the game state is highly likely to be “15R certain change big hit” after the end of the continuous announcement effect. Since it is possible, a high sense of expectation can be given to the player. Also, the probability that the game state after the end of the continuous announcement effect (that is, the result of the determination made when the ball enters the first entrance 64) is “big hit” is usually smaller than the probability of being “out”. Is also set to a small value, so that when the game state after the end of the continuous announcement effect is “out of order”, it is possible to prevent the continuous announcement effect from being performed frequently, while the “15R probable big hit” In this case, the continuous announcement effect can be easily performed.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 10, both the jackpot continuous announcement determination table 222a1 and the out-of-office consecutive announcement determination table 222a2 increase the consecutive announcement determination probability as the value of the number of times of prefetch suspension increases. Stipulated. Here, since the continuous announcement effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects that are suspended when the continuous announcement effect is determined, the continuous announcement determination probability is set to be higher as the number of times of suspension is increased. Is likely to increase in the number of variable effects included in the continuous notice effect of the above. Thereby, the player can recognize that the effect different from the normal effect has been performed as the continuous notice effect is performed over many continuous variable effects. Expectation can be given. In addition, since the number of times the variable display is held often takes a small value, when the number of times of holding is small, it is possible to suppress the continuous announcement effect from being performed frequently, while the number of times of holding is reduced. When it becomes large, it is possible to make the continuous announcement effect easy to be performed.

  When the continuous notice determination table is selected by the processing of S1033 to S1036, the number of prefetch suspensions (that is, the number of times the variable effect is suspended in which the prefetch processing has been performed to generate the prefetch command) is determined from the received prefetch command. It is extracted (S1037). Then, from the selected continuous preview determination table (big hit continuous preview determination table 222a1 or missed continuous preview determination table 222a2), the continuous preview determination range associated with the prefetch suspension count extracted in the process of S1037 is specified. The execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined by comparing the continuous announcement determination range with the continuous announcement lottery counter 223c (S1038).

  Then, based on the determination of the continuous announcement effect, it is determined whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined (S1039). If it is determined not to execute the continuous announcement effect (S1039: No), the subsequent processing Is skipped and the process returns to the command determination processing. As a result, the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is maintained at 0, so that the process proceeds without setting the continuous announcement effect.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1039, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined (S1039: Yes), it is determined whether the number of times of prefetch suspension extracted in the process of S1037 is 1 (S1040). As a result, if the prefetch suspension count is not 1, that is, if it is 2 or more (S1040: No), a value obtained by adding one to the prefetch suspension count is set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e (S1042), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In this way, by setting a value obtained by adding one to the number of times of prefetch suspension (that is, the number of variable effects for executing the continuous announcement effect) in the continuous announcement execution counter 223e, the variable display process (to be described later with reference to FIG. 33). By S912), the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set for all the variable effects suspended before that, including the variable effects that have been prefetched to generate the prefetch command.

  Also, as a result of the process of S1040, if the number of times of prefetch suspension (that is, the number of variable effects for executing the continuous announcement effect) is 1 (S1040: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the one-time announcement execution flag 223f is on. It is determined (S1041), and if the one-time notice execution flag 223f is ON (S1041: Yes), the value obtained by adding one to the number of times of prefetch suspension (that is, "2" because the number of times of prefetch suspension is 1) is continuously executed. The value is set in the counter 223e (S1042), and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1041, if the single-shot notice execution flag 223f is not on, that is, is off (S1041: No), the processing of S1042 is skipped, and the process returns to the command determination processing. As a result, the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is maintained at 0.

  Here, when the number of times of pre-reading is 1, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined as it is, the variable effect in which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set is changed to the variable effect in which the pre-reading process is performed to generate the pre-read command. Therefore, the “jellyfish” image that is the image of the continuous announcement effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variation effect. Therefore, in this case, there is a case where “15R probability change jackpot” is obtained after one “jellyfish” image is displayed, and the expectation of the player for the continuous announcement effect for the “jellyfish” image is diluted. There is a risk.

  On the other hand, when the one-time announcement execution flag 223f is on, it means that the execution of the one-time announcement effect is set in the fluctuation effect that is started or being executed at that time, or in the fluctuation effect executed last. I do. Thus, as in the present embodiment, when the number of times of prefetching suspension is one, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, and if the single-shot announcement execution flag 223f at that time is on, one is added to the number of times of prefetching suspension. By setting the value in the continuous announcement execution counter 223e, the “jellyfish” image in the single announcement announcement effect is displayed in the earlier variation production of the two consecutive variation productions, and the continuous announcement production is performed in the subsequent variation production. A "jellyfish" image can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the continuous announcement effect has been performed over two continuous variable effects, and to give the player a sense of expectation that the 15R certainty big hit will be achieved.

  On the other hand, even if the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined when the number of times of reading suspension is one, if the single announcement announcement execution flag 223f at that time is off, the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is set as in the present embodiment. By maintaining the value at 0, it is possible to prevent the “jellyfish” image, which is an image of the continuous announcement effect, from being displayed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation where the continuous announcement effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the continuous announcement effect that the player has on the “jellyfish” image from being diluted.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set only when the one-time announcement execution flag 223f is ON when the number of times of pre-reading is 1 in the continuous announcement determination process (S1040) -1042). On the other hand, the processes of S1040 and S1041 are omitted, and even if the number of times of prefetching suspension is 1, the continuous announcement is performed based on only the lottery result of the continuous announcement effect execution in S1038 regardless of the state of the single announcement execution flag 223f. The execution of the effect may be set. Further, when the number of times of pre-reading is 1, the execution of the continuous announcement effect may be set.

  This often results in “15R probable jackpot” after one “jellyfish” image is displayed, and diminishes the player's expectation of the continuous announcement effect on the “jellyfish” image. On the other hand, if the player visually recognizes the “jellyfish” image that has not been displayed for the previous variable effect in a certain variable effect, the player It is possible to have a strong sense of expectation that the 15R probable jackpot will be achieved with the “jellyfish” image. Therefore, various expectations can be given by the appearance of the “jellyfish” image, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 executes the prefetching process based on each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the time of starting winning, prior to the timing of starting the execution of the variable effect, and The lottery and fluctuation pattern determination results are predicted. Then, these prediction results are notified to the audio ramp control device 113 by the prefetch command, and the audio ramp control device 113 grasps the number of the variable effects suspended first from the prefetch suspension frequency included in the prefetch command. From the jackpot lottery notified by the look-ahead command, it is determined whether or not to perform the continuous announcement effect for the pending variable effect. Thereby, the process in the main control device 110 can be concentrated on the most important process of the pachinko machine 10, that is, the lottery process for randomly selecting a game state to be transitioned based on the start winning, while the sound lamp control device 113 If the MPU 221 having a high processing capability is used, the mode of the continuous announcement effect, the execution condition, and the like can be set in various modes.

  In addition, at the end of each fluctuation effect, that is, when displaying the “jellyfish” image on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the stop display of the third symbol, the continuous announcement effect is performed. Then, the number of times of prefetch suspension may be set as it is in the continuous notice execution counter 223e. In the process of S1040, it may be determined whether or not the number of times of prefetch suspension is two. In this case, since the “jellyfish” image is not displayed in the variable effect that has triggered the execution of the continuous announcement effect, the number of the variable effects for executing the continuous announcement effect is one less than the number of times of prefetch suspension. Therefore, also in this case, what is set in the continuous announcement execution counter 223e can be said to be a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of variable effects for executing the continuous announcement effect. Also, in this case, determining whether or not the number of times of pre-reading is 2 means that the number of variable effects in which the continuous announcement effect is executed is 1, as in the present embodiment.

  Returning to FIG. 31, the description of the command determination processing will be continued. As a result of the processing in S1018, when it is determined that the prefetch command has not been received (S1018: No), it is next determined whether or not a prediction state change command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1021). If it is determined that the prediction state change command has been received (S1021: Yes), the prefetch information validity flags of all the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b are set to off. Then, the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is set to 0 (S1023). Then, the process returns to the main processing.

  Here, in the main control device 110, as described above, when the original jackpot lottery result is “15R probable change jackpot” or “2R probable change jackpot” and the gaming state shifts to the high probability state (probable change state). If the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is off, it is determined that the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is erroneously set, and the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to on. Based on the value, the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, which is predicted when an actual jackpot lottery is performed, is set to a high probability state (probable change state) (see S406 in FIG. 22).

  In addition, when the original jackpot lottery result is another jackpot (15R regular jackpot) and the game state shifts to the low probability state, if the look-ahead probable change flag 203h is on, the pre-read probable change flag 203h is incorrectly set. When the prefetching probability change flag 203h is set to OFF and the prefetching process is performed, when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each prefetch target counter value, the pachinko machine 10 The possible gaming state is set to the low probability state (see S408 in FIG. 22).

  When the main control unit 110 determines that the look-ahead probable change flag 203h is incorrectly set as described above, the main control unit 110 transmits a prediction state change command to the voice lamp control unit 113, and the voice lamp control unit The audio lamp control device 113 is notified that the prediction based on the prefetch indicated by the prefetch command received by the 113 is highly likely to have been performed based on the erroneous prefetch probability flag 203h. Therefore, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the predicted state change command, the prefetch information validity flags of all the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b are set to off. At that point, all the prediction results based on the prefetching stored in the prefetching information storage area 223b can be invalidated.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice lamp control device 113 from performing various controls based on pre-reading such as command destruction determination based on an incorrect prediction result. For example, by performing the command destruction determination based on the incorrect prediction result, it is possible to suppress the determination that the command is destroyed in the command destruction determination even though the command is not destroyed.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e to 0, thereby canceling the setting of the continuous announcement effect execution set at that time. When the prediction state change command is received, there is a high possibility that the prediction result notified by the previously transmitted look-ahead command is incorrect, so the continuous announcement effect set based on the incorrect look-ahead command is performed to the end. In the last fluctuation effect, there is a possibility that the type of the jackpot does not become “15R sure change jackpot” that should occur after the continuous announcement effect, or even if it is off, it does not become “reach out of front and rear”. As a result, the expectation of the player due to the continuous announcement performance is greatly different from the expectation, and the interest of the player may be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when receiving the predicted state change command, the sound lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of the continuous announcement effect execution set at that time, so that the player can perform the operation after the end of the continuous announcement effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a result different from the expected result.

  As a result of the processing in S1021, when it is determined that the prediction state change command has not been received (S1021: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed. Then (S1024), and shifts to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114. The demo command and the confirmation command received from the main control device 110 are set as the display demonstration command and the display confirmation command by the process of S1024, and are temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing.

  Next, the variable display process (S912) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the variable display processing (S912).

  This fluctuation display processing (S912) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and displays the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81 as described above. In order to cause the display control device 114 to generate a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the display control device 114 executes the variation display process.

  In the variation display processing, the variation pattern of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination predicted by prefetching for the variation effect indicated by the prefetch command Command destruction determination is performed based on the prediction result. Hereinafter, the details of the variable display processing will be described.

  Further, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is updated with the display of the fluctuation effect, and the display reserved ball number command is set to notify the updated reserved ball number to the display control device 114. When it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is to be made for the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display variation pattern command, after receiving the stop type command paired with the variation pattern command, The continuous notice execution flag is set to ON so that the notice command is set. Also, in the variable effect, the execution of the single announcement effect is determined in the variable display process. When the execution of the single effect effect is determined, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined in the same manner as when the continuous effect effect is determined. , The continuous announcement execution flag is set to ON.

  In the variation display processing, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S1101: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from main controller 110, so that the fluctuation display processing is performed. End and return to the main processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag is on (S1101: Yes), the variation start flag is turned off (S1102), and then the first to fourth areas of the prefetch information provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b are stored. The included data is shifted to the pre-read information 0th to 3rd areas, respectively (S1103).

  Specifically, first, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area of the pre-reading information first area, and the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area. By storing the information indicating the prediction result and the value of the prefetch information valid flag in the big hit lottery prediction result storage area, fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area, and prefetch information valid flag of the prefetch information 0 area, respectively, the prefetch information is stored. The data in the first area is shifted to the prefetch information 0 area.

  When the shift of the data to the prefetch information 0 area is completed, the prefetch information 1 area becomes empty. Therefore, the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the prefetch information 2nd to 4th areas. The information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination and the value of the prefetch information valid flag are respectively stored in the large hit lottery prediction result storage areas of the first to third areas of the prefetch information having the smaller area number, and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area. By storing the data in the prefetch information valid flag, the data in the prefetch information second to fourth areas are shifted to the prefetch information first and third areas, respectively. Further, the fourth look-ahead information area becomes empty, and the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern stored in the fourth look-ahead information area is not valid (that is, invalid). In order to indicate that, the prefetch information valid flag in the prefetch information fourth area is set to off.

  When the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, it means that the execution of one variation effect on hold is started. Specifically, in main controller 110, a shift process is performed between the reserved first to fourth areas of reserved ball execution area 203c and reserved ball storage area 203b, and counter C1 stored in reserved ball execution area 203c. Based on the values of ~ C3 and CS1, a change pattern and a stop type in a jackpot lottery and a change effect are determined.

  Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the above-described shift processing between the prefetch information 0th to the 4th areas of the prefetch information storage area 223b every time the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, In the pre-reading information first to fourth areas, it is possible to always store information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted for the fluctuation effects of 1 to 4 suspension times, respectively, The information indicating the predicted result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination predicted for the variation effect corresponding to the received variation pattern command can be stored in the prefetch information 0 area.

  Accordingly, after the sound ramp control device 113 executes the process of shifting each data of the pre-read information 0th to 4th areas provided in the pre-read information storage area 223b by the process of S1103 triggered by the reception of the fluctuation pattern command. In the subsequent processing of S1104 and S1105, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect indicated by the fluctuation pattern command and the jackpot lottery predicted by prefetching for the fluctuation effect indicated by the information stored in the prefetch information 0 area By comparing the prediction results of the fluctuation pattern determination and determining whether or not they match, it is possible to determine whether or not the command received from main controller 110 has been destroyed.

  In the process of S1104, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command in the process of S1003 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1104). If the prefetch information valid flag provided in the prefetch information 0 area of the prefetch information storage area 223b is ON, the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S1104 is the big hit lottery prediction result storage of the prefetch information 0 area. It is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the area and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area match (S1105).

  For example, when the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S1104 is “variable normal reach”, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the prefetch information 0 area is “other deviation”, and the variation pattern determination is performed. Are "normal reach", it is determined that they match. On the other hand, when the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S1104 is “out of length”, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the prefetch information 0 area is “15R normal jackpot”, or If the prediction result of the pattern determination is “normal reach”, it is determined that they do not match.

  Then, as a result of the determination in S1105, when the variation pattern type matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination, the display variation for notifying the display control device 113 of the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S1104. The pattern command is set (S1106), and the process proceeds to S1108. In the process of S1105, when the prefetch information valid flag provided in the prefetch information 0 area of the prefetch information storage area 223b is off, the prediction of the jackpot lottery and the change pattern determination stored in the prefetch information 0 area is performed. Since the result is invalid, the process directly proceeds to the process of S1106, sets a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 113 of the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S1104, and proceeds to the process of S1108. I do.

  The display variation pattern command set in the process of S1106 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (S902). . The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1105, if the variation pattern type does not match the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination (S1105: No), one or both of the pre-read command and the variation pattern command are destroyed. Is determined, the special fluctuation flag provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1107), and the process proceeds to S1108. Thereby, when the reception of the stop type command is detected in the above-described command determination process (FIG. 31) (S1004: Yes), an affirmative determination is made by the process of S1005, and the special fluctuation is made as the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect. A display variation pattern command indicating an effect is set (S1007), and a special stop symbol (for example, a symbol displayed as "3", "4", "1" in order from the left column) is displayed as a stop symbol for the variable effect. The displayed stop type command is set regardless of the content of the received stop type command.

  Therefore, a special fluctuation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device, and a special stop symbol indicating a special departure is fixedly displayed after the fluctuation display. It is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from erroneously performing a jackpot confirmation display effect due to the destruction of the command. Even if the special stop symbol is fixedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the original jackpot lottery result in the main controller 110 is a jackpot, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state. Therefore, the player can continue the game with peace of mind. Furthermore, by making the finalized display a special stop symbol, even if the finalized display is off, it is possible to indicate to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in a big hit state, The pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state despite the fact that the finalized display is out of the way, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 can perform more various controls by performing the pre-reading process.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that one or both of the pre-reading command and the variation pattern command are destroyed, as described later, the configuration of the continuous announcement effect is not performed. However, in addition to that, all of the currently set continuous announcement effects may be cleared. For example, a process of setting the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e to 0 may be performed before and after the process of S1107 executed in a state where it is determined that the command is destroyed.

  If you do not set the continuous announcement command only for the variable production where the destruction of the command is determined, the situation in which the “jellyfish” image temporarily disappears during the continuous production production will occur, A player who understands that the effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects may be suspicious of whether the jackpot lottery is correctly performed. Therefore, if it is determined that the command has been destroyed and the execution of the currently set continuous announcement effect is cleared, the "jellyfish" image will not be displayed temporarily during the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the process of S1108, the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223a is set in accordance with the setting of the display variation pattern command, in which the reserved balls are consumed (ie, the variable display corresponding to the reserved balls is set). Is reduced by one (S1108), and a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number indicated by the updated value of the reserved ball number counter 223a (S1109). The display reserved ball count command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (S902). Then, the display control device 114 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the number of retained spheres corresponding to the number of retained spheres indicated by the display reserved sphere number command. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of the retained balls by counting the number of the retained ball symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special variation flag is on (S1110). If it is on (S1110: Yes), then, it is determined whether or not the value of the single announcement lottery counter 223d is 10 (S1111). Then, if the value of the one-time announcement lottery counter 223d is 10 (S1111: Yes), execution of the one-time announcement effect is determined, the one-time announcement execution flag 223f is set to ON (S1112), and the process proceeds to S1114. . If the value of the one-time announcement lottery counter 223d is not 10, the one-time announcement execution flag 223f is set to off (S1113), and the process proceeds to S1114.

  Since the one-time announcement lottery counter 223d is a counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 14, the execution of the one-time announcement production is determined by the processing of S1111 to S1113 with a 1/15 probability, and the one-time announcement execution flag 223f is set. Set to on. When the one-time notice execution flag 223f is set to ON, as described later, the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set for the change effect that is set by the change display process, or the change effect is set. If the continuous announcement effect has not been performed in the variable effect performed immediately before the above, the “jellyfish” image, which is the image of the single announcement effect for the variable effect, is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the continuous notice execution flag is set to ON, and thereafter, when a stop type command is received, control is performed so as to transmit the continuous notice command to the display control device 113.

  Next, in the processing of S1114, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is greater than 1 (S1114). If the value is greater than 1 (S1114: Yes), the fluctuation display is performed by this fluctuation display processing. In order to set the execution of the continuous notice effect for the variable effect for which the start process is being performed, the continuous notice execution flag is turned on (S1115). Thereby, when the stop type command is received thereafter, control is performed so as to transmit the continuous announcement command to the display control device 113, and the “jellyfish” image, which is the image of the single announcement announcement effect, is displayed in the third symbol for the variable effect. It is displayed on the display device 81. Then, the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is decremented by 1 (S1116), and the process returns to the main processing.

  As described above, in the variation display process, the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is checked each time the variation pattern command is received. And the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is decremented by one.

  Here, as described above, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the consecutive announcement execution counter 223e has a value obtained by adding one to the number of times of prefetch suspension included in the prefetch command that triggered the execution decision. Is set. Therefore, while the value of the continuous notice counter 223e indicates the value of 2 to “the number of times of pre-reading hold + 1”, the setting of the execution of the continuous notice effect is performed. Will be performed. Therefore, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is performed for all the variable effects suspended before that, including the variable effect in which the look-ahead processing has been performed to generate the look-ahead command that has triggered the execution of the continuous announcement effect. Can be set.

  Also, as a result of the processing in S1114, when the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is 1 or less (S1114: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter 223e is 1 (S1117). If the value is 1 (S1117: Yes), the process of S1115 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1116, the value of the continuous notice counter 223e is decremented by 1 (S1116), and the process returns to the main process. Accordingly, if the value of the continuous announcement counter 223e is 1, the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is transmitted without transmitting the continuous announcement command even if the single announcement execution flag 223f is set to ON. Subtract one.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the number of prefetch suspensions included in the prefetch command that triggered the execution determination (that is, the variable effect of executing the continuous announcement effect) ) Is not set as it is in the continuous announcement execution counter 223e, but a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of times of prefetch suspension (the number of variable effects for executing the continuous announcement effect) is set in the continuous announcement execution counter 223e. Each time a variation pattern command, which is an instruction to start a variation effect, is received, the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is referred to, and if the value is greater than 1, a “jellyfish” image is displayed for the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to be displayed on the screen, and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1. If the value is 1, the continuous notice execution counter 223e is transmitted without transmitting the continuous notice command. Is subtracted by 1.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set, the number of times of the variable effect of performing the continuous announcement effect is set as it is in the continuous announcement execution counter, and the continuous announcement execution counter is set to 0 when the variable effect is executed. If it is large, the continuous announcement effect is executed over the initially set number of variation effects by subtracting 1 from the value of the continuous announcement execution counter while performing the continuous announcement effect in the variation effect. In the case of such a configuration, after the one continuous announcement effect ends, the continuous announcement effect may start again, that is, the continuous announcement effect may occur continuously.

  As a result, for example, if the last variable production in the first continuous preview production is out of order in the special reach, and the last variable production in the subsequent second continuous production production is out of front and back in the normal reach, the player: You will have the thought of. That is, the special reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the first continuous announcement effect is displayed over a plurality of variable effects, so that the player can play the game with an expectation that the 15R probability will be a big hit. continue. Then, if the result of the special reach is a back and forth, the player will be disappointed once, but the second consecutive announcement effect will be displayed continuously, so that the player will have a stronger expectation of a 15R probability change big hit Become. However, as a result, if the front and rear sides are shifted in the normal reach, the player may be strongly given a feeling of being downgraded compared to the front and rear separation in the special reach displayed earlier.

  Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, after the last variable effect in the first continuous preview effect is out of order, a single-shot advance effect may be performed in the subsequent variable effect. In this case, as a result of the first continuous announcement effect, the player is displaced before and after and is disappointed. Although there is a possibility that the image for the continuous announcement effect is not displayed thereafter, there is a possibility that the betrayal of the player's feeling may be consequently betrayed. In this way, with the configuration described above, there is a possibility that the expectation of the continuous announcement effect held by the player is eventually reduced.

  Further, the following problems may occur in the conventional pachinko machine. For example, it is assumed that a new starting prize (ball entry into the first entrance 64) occurs during the variable effect, and the variable effect associated with the starting prize is suspended. When a pre-reading process is performed for this start winning prize and a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a continuous announcement effect, and a determination is made not to perform the continuous announcement effect, and the continuous announcement effect is not performed in the next variable effect. Further, even if a single announcement notice effect is performed in the next variable effect, if the image of the continuous notice effect is not displayed in the first variable effect performed after the detection of the start winning, a new start winning effect is not detected thereafter. As long as it is, there is a possibility that the player may easily guess that the image of the single announcement effect displayed in the subsequent variable effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's sense of expectation for the one-off notice effect may also be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, one is added to the number of prefetch suspensions included in the prefetch command that triggered the execution determination (that is, the number of variable effects for executing the continuous announcement effect). The value is set in the continuous announcement execution counter 223e, and every time a variation pattern command that is a variation production start instruction is received, the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is referred to. A continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1. If the value is 1, the continuous notice command is transmitted. By subtracting 1 from the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e without transmitting, after the continuous announcement effect has been performed, always in one variation effect Jellyfish "image can be prevented from being displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, after the continuous announcement effect is completed, it is possible to suppress that the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect are continuously performed, so that the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect are continuously performed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in a sense of expectation of the continuous announcement effect held by the player.

  In addition, after the continuous announcement effect is completed, the start is performed by setting the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect in accordance with the rule that the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variation effect. Even if the image of the continuous announcement effect, that is, the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first variable effect performed after the detection of the winning, the “jellyfish” image is the third symbol in the next variable effect. With the display device 81, the player can have a sense of expectation that the image is a “jellyfish” image displayed as a continuous announcement effect. Therefore, the player can continue the game while enjoying the continuous announcement effect.

  As a result of the processing in S1117, when it is determined that the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is not 1 (S1117), it means that the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e at that time is 0. Therefore, it is next determined whether or not the one-time notice execution flag 223f is on (S1118). If it is on (S1118: Yes), the continuous notice execution flag is set on (S1119), and the main process is started. Returning, if the one-time notice execution flag 223f is not on, that is, is off (S1118: No), the process of S1119 is skipped and the process returns to the main process.

  Thereby, even if the setting of the execution of the continuous announcement effect is not made, the “jellyfish” image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one shot for one variable effect. Here, paying attention to the one variable effect, the jellyfish image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the variable effect in both the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect. Thereby, when the “jellyfish” image that was not displayed in the at least one previous variable effect is displayed in the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is displayed in the continuous announcement effect. It is possible for the player to continue the game while thinking about whether the image is a "jellyfish" image displayed by a single announcement effect. Then, when the “jellyfish” image is displayed again in the next fluctuation effect, it is possible to strongly make the player recognize that it is a continuous announcement effect, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game. .

  The image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the single announcement effect is the same “jellyfish” image as in the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, it is only necessary to instruct the display control device 114 to display the “jellyfish” image for the variable effect without distinguishing between the single effect effect and the continuous effect effect. Also in the case of setting the continuous preliminary effect, the continuous preview execution flag is set to ON in this variation display process. Thus, after the continuous announcement execution flag is turned on, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are set whether the execution of the single announcement effect or the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set. In the same processing flow, a “jellyfish” image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the variable effect. Therefore, the programs in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be simplified.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the execution of the one-time announcement effect is determined each time the variation pattern command is received, but instead, the execution of the one-time announcement effect is determined each time the prefetch command is received. It may be configured as follows. For example, in the command determination process (FIG. 31), when it is determined that the prefetch command has been received (S1018: Yes), if the value of the single announcement lottery counter 223d is, for example, 10, the prefetch indicated by the prefetch command is performed. May be set to the execution of a single announcement effect with respect to the variable effect performed. In this case, in each of the pre-read information 0th to 4th areas, a single-shot notice execution flag indicating that a single-shot notice effect is to be executed when the information is on is provided. If the execution of the one-time announcement effect is set as an initial value in the one-time announcement execution flag, and the execution of the one-time announcement effect is set, the one-shot advance of the area corresponding to the number of times of the pre-reading of the pre-reading command among the pre-reading information Nos. 0 to 4 is performed. Set the notice execution flag to ON. In the variable display processing, the shift processing is performed between the prefetch information 0th to the 4th areas including the one-time notice execution flag by the processing of S1103, and the one-time notice of the prefetch information 0 area is performed in the processing of S1118. It is determined whether or not the execution flag is on. Also, in the process of S1041 of the continuous announcement determination process (FIG. 32), it is also determined whether or not the single announcement execution flag in the prefetch information 0 area is on. In the shift processing of S1103, the one-time announcement execution flag of the prefetched information fourth area that has become empty is set to off. In this case, the processing of S1111 to S1113 and the processing of S1121 in the variable display processing can be omitted.

  In this way, by determining the execution of the one-time announcement effect each time the pre-read command is received, the determination of the execution of the continuous announcement effect also performed each time the pre-fetch command is received is also determined. It can be considered whether or not the effect execution is set. For example, when the execution of the single announcement effect is set for the pending fluctuation effect, it is possible to determine that the execution of the continuous announcement effect is not set. By making such a determination, the one-time announcement effect is more likely to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, when the “jellyfish” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is determined by the one-time announcement effect. It is possible to make the player more strongly consider whether the event is due to a continuous announcement effect. As described above, in determining the execution of the continuous announcement effect performed each time the prefetch command is received, by considering whether or not the execution of the single announcement effect is set for the pending fluctuation effect, more Since the execution of the effect can be determined in consideration of the conditions, the interest for the player can be further improved.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a MPU 231 that detects a V interruption signal. There is a V interrupt process that is executed in the event of the above. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the image controller 237 to the MPU 231. The image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. I do.

  The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting the execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S1201), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start Here, the boot process (S1201) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1201) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in a dedicated program ROM (for example, the ROM 22 of Patent Document 1 described above) as in a conventional gaming machine. Instead, it is stored in a character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even when a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, a boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is used. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1211). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1212). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1211.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1212, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S1212, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data, which have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a, are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1213). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are transferred to the program storage area 233a, and the various data tables (display data table and transfer data table) described above are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S1214), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S1201 in FIG. 34). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization processing to be performed (see S1202 in FIG. 34) (S1215), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot processing ends.

  By executing the boot process (S1201) in this manner, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a2, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 35, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1211 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1211 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1212. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and further specifies the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this transfer. A process for setting the pointer 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S1213 to S1215 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S1211 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then transfers the part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this transfer. Processing for setting the start address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part to the program storage area 233a. The processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a, is performed in S1211. After the processing is repeated a plurality of times including the processing of S1212 and S1212, the processing of S1213 to S1215 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from the boot program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1213 to S1215 without performing the processes of S1211 and S1212. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Returning to FIG. 34, the description will be continued. When the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1202). Specifically, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation has started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S1203). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transmits the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main power of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. Transfer to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1203, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1204). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is included. The image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1204, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1205). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 46A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 434 to perform the transfer is performed (see S2002 in FIG. 46A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is kept on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 36 (b)), the simple command such that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 12 is drawn. The determination process (see S1408 in FIG. 36B) and the simple display setting process (see S1409 in FIG. 36B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 314. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some sort of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball in the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main controller 110 issues a voice lamp control instruction to start a variable effect. In the case where the change pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the display change pattern command is received, the power-on change images shown in FIGS. 12B and 12C are immediately displayed during the change effect period. A simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can easily confirm the result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning by the simple variable effect. it can.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, it takes time to transfer the data, and after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1205, interruption permission is set (S1206), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S1206, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36A, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 36A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1301), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 36B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 18) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 36B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S1401), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S1401: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S1402) is performed, and then a display setting process (S1403) is performed.

  In the command determination processing (S1402), the contents of the command stored in the command buffer area are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. When a display demonstration command or a display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. If the continuous preview command has been stored, an additional data table for continuous preview corresponding to the continuous preview image type is set in the additional data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, the continuous notice command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area within 20 milliseconds. . Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect or the continuous announcement effect selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 is quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. Can be controlled so that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S1403), based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table buffer 233e by the command determination process (S1402) and the like, the third symbol display device 81 Next, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed is specifically specified. In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S1404). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting process (S1403) or the simple display setting process (S1409). The type of sprite (display object) is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S1405). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233b is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. A transfer instruction to transfer the image data to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set. Further, when the simple image display flag 233b is off and a continuous advance command or a back image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the continuous advance image used in the continuous advance effect is transmitted to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the rear image and the image data of the rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S1406). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S1404), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S1405) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S1407). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S1407, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (other than the 15R certain change big hit, 2R certain change big hit, 15R normal big hit, front-rear reach, and front-rear miss) The stop type table corresponding to (reach, complete departure) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the simple image display flag is ON (S1401: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. In order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 12 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S1408) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S1409) is executed, and the process of S1404 is executed. Move to.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination processing (S1402), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing. The command interruption process is executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114.

  In this command determination processing, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S1501). If there is no unprocessed new command (S1501: No), the command determination processing is terminated. The process returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S1501: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S1403) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S1502), and then, The command type of all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (S1503).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display reserved ball number command among the unprocessed commands (S1504). If there is a display reserved ball number command (S1504: Yes), the reserved ball number command processing is performed. Is executed (S1505), and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 38 (a), details of the reserved ball count command processing (S1505) will be described. FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing the pending ball count command processing. The reserved ball count command process executes a process corresponding to the display reserved ball count command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the reserved ball count command processing, first, a new reserved ball count command flag is turned on (S1601). The display hold series command flag is a flag that notifies the display setting process (S1403) that the display hold ball count command has been processed in the ON state. Next, information on the number of reserved balls included in the display reserved ball number command is acquired (S1602). In the process of S1602, if two or more display reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the reserved ball number information is acquired from the last stored display reserved ball number command. Thereby, the latest information on the number of reserved balls can be obtained.

  Then, among the number discrimination flags provided for each number of reserved balls, the number discrimination flag corresponding to the number of reserved balls acquired in the processing of S1602 is turned on, and the number discrimination flag corresponding to the number of other reserved balls is turned off. (S1603), and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the new reserved ball count command flag is ON, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of retained balls corresponding to the set number determination flag is set to the third by referring to the number determination flag. The reserved image data is developed so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 37, if it is determined in the processing of S1504 that there is no display pending ball number command (S1504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display confirmation command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display confirmation command (S1506: Yes), a confirmation command process is executed (S1507), and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, the details of the determination command processing (S1507) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing the fixed command processing. This determination command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display determination command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the confirmation command processing (S1507), the confirmation command flag is set to ON (S2611), and this processing ends. The confirmation command flag is a flag that notifies the display setting process (S1403) that the display confirmation command has been received in the ON state. In the display setting process, the state of the confirmed command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is executed so that the display of the confirmed display effect on the third symbol display device 81 is started. . In addition, after processing the display setting of the variable effect, if the confirmed command flag is not turned on even after the effect time set for the variable effect has elapsed, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the display setting process is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 37, if it is determined in the processing of S1506 that there is no display confirmation command (S1506: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display demonstration command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display demo command (S1508: Yes), a demo command process is executed (S1509), and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, the demo command processing (S1509) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 38C is a flowchart showing the demo command processing. This demo command process executes a process corresponding to the display demo command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the demonstration command processing (S1509), first, a demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is selected from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S1621). Next, Null data is written to the additional data table buffer 233e to clear its contents, and Null data is also written to the transfer data table buffer 233f to clear its contents (S1622).

  In the demonstration display data table, it is not necessary to newly transfer image data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and therefore, a corresponding transfer data table is not prepared in the data table storage area 233b. Therefore, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233f in the process of S1622, it is possible to indicate that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring while the image is drawn by the demonstration display data table. it can.

  Next, time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the time counter 233i (S1623), and the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S1624). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to off, the demonstration display flag is set to on, the confirmation display flag is set to off (S1625), and the process returns to the command determination process. The demonstration display flag is a flag indicating that a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ON state. The confirmed display flag is a flag indicating that the confirmed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ON state.

  By executing the demo command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233g initialized in the process of S1624, the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S1621 is updated. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified. In the display setting process, the time of the demonstration effect specified in the demonstration display data table is measured using the time counter 233i in which the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set by the process of S1623, and the process of S1625 is performed. When the demonstration setting in the demonstration display data table is determined to have ended by the timing of the display setting control timing counter 233i based on the state of the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag set by the Is controlled so that the demonstration effect is displayed again.

  Also, at the start of the execution of the command determination process, if both the confirmed command and the demonstration command are stored in the command buffer area, the above-described confirmed command process (S1507) is executed first, and the confirmed command flag is turned on. The demo command processing (S1509) is then executed, and the confirmed command flag is turned off by the processing of S1625.

  Thus, in such a case, the demonstration effect is displayed without performing the final display effect. The main control device 110 is configured to transmit the demonstration command unless the start timing of the fluctuation effect is reached after a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed after transmitting the confirmation command. At the start of the execution of the command determination process, it is impossible that both the determination command and the demonstration command are stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, if all of these commands are stored in the command buffer area at the start of the execution of the command determination processing, there is a high possibility that the command transmission / reception is not performed normally. In such a case, the display control device 114 preferentially displays a demonstration effect not directly related to the game on the third symbol display device 81, so that an erroneous confirmed display effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress giving the player a misunderstanding of the game result. In addition, by starting the demonstration effect without performing the final display effect, the player can easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the player can immediately call the person in charge of the hall and request a coping.

  Returning to FIG. 37, if it is determined in the processing of S1508 that there is no display demo command (S1508: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. (S1510) If there is a display variation pattern command (S1510: Yes), a variation pattern command process is executed (S1511), and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S1511) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 39A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is read. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S1631). If the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is a special fluctuation effect, the display data table for special fluctuation effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S1631, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is used. The table is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a display data table for fluctuation corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually performed by the main control. When instructed by the device 110, the main controller 110 sends a confirmation command (display confirmation command) while displaying the variation effect according to the set variation display data table on the third symbol display device 81. ) Is received, and the changing third symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may give a sense of incongruity to the player.

  On the other hand, by setting the display data table for fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the display data table is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having the fluctuation time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the confirmation command from the main controller 110 is issued. Until the (display confirmation command) is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed. Therefore, the player visually recognizes the restart effect as a part of the variable effect. Thus, it is possible to continue watching the fluctuation of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 without feeling uncomfortable until the stop display of the third symbol is determined.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S1631 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233f (S1632). Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the additional data table buffer 233e (S1633).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S1631, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233i (S1634). . Then, the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S1635), and the set command flag, the demonstration display flag, and the set display flag are all turned off (S16376).

  By setting the demonstration display flag and the definite display flag to OFF, the third symbol display device 81 can display a variable effect instead of the demonstration effect or the definite display effect being displayed. Also, when the execution of the command determination processing is started, if both the confirmed command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area, the above-described confirmed command processing (S1507) is executed first, and the confirmed command flag is executed. Is set to ON, then the variation pattern command processing (S1511) is executed, and the fixed command flag is turned off by the processing of S1625.

  Upon completion of the process in S1636, the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S1637), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233g initialized by the process of S1635, the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S1631 is updated. Then, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified. Also, the transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f by the processing of S1632, and the sprite information necessary for the set fluctuation display data table is set. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in advance.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233i in which the fluctuation time data is set by the process of S1635, and the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is measured. Is determined to have ended, a finalization display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a finalization command (a finalization command for display) is received from the main controller 110. If a confirmation command (confirmation command for display) is not received within a predetermined time after the end of the fluctuation effect, the display setting is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, if both the display determination command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display determination command is prioritized, the display Since the fluctuation effect accompanying the fluctuation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command. On the other hand, in the present command determination process, the determination of the presence or absence of the display determination command is performed first, so that the determination command process, which is a process corresponding to the display determination command, is always executed first. The processing corresponding to the use variation pattern command is executed later, and the determination command flag set by the display determination command can be turned off by overwriting as in the processing of S1637. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with priority.

  Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display demo command is prioritized, the display Since the fluctuation effect accompanying the fluctuation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command. On the other hand, in this command determination processing, the presence / absence of the display demonstration command is determined first, so that the demonstration command processing corresponding to the display demonstration command is always executed first, while the display demonstration command is always executed first. The process corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed later, and the demonstration display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the display demonstration command is rewritten to the variation display data table by overwriting, as in the process of S1631. Can be. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demonstration command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with priority.

  Returning to FIG. 37, if it is determined in the processing of S1510 that there is no display variation pattern command (S1510: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display stop type command (S1511: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S1513), and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S1513) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display stop type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any of 15R certain jackpot, 2R certain jackpot, 15R regular jackpot, reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, complete out, special stop symbol) ) Is determined (S1641), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 36B) is executed. Then, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S1642).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S1642 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S1643), and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, in the drawing content corresponding to the address after the predetermined time, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the process of S1642 is performed. The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by (1) is described. In the above-described task processing (S1404), after the above-described predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S1642 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S1643, and the identification is performed. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol, a third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the change at least several seconds apart, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S1641, in order to prepare for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely off, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S1642. In such a case, the stop type table may be determined on the assumption that the stop type is a special stop symbol even when the stop type is completely off.

  Here, if the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, even if it is actually off, the stop symbol of the jackpot will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. However, the player may be mistaken for the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 to be a big hit, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced. On the other hand, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol that is completely deviated is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the case of a big hit in practice. Also, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the big hit state, the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 37, if it is determined in the processing of S1512 that there is no display stop type command (S1512: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a continuous advance command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a continuous advance command (S1514: Yes), the continuous advance command processing is executed (S1515), and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, the details of the continuous announcement command processing (S1515) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40A is a flowchart showing the continuous notice command processing. This continuous notice command processing executes processing corresponding to the continuous notice command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the continuous preview command processing, first, a new continuous preview command flag for notifying the transfer setting processing (S1405) that the continuous preview command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S1651). Next, a continuous preview additional data table corresponding to the continuous preview image type (in this embodiment, “jellyfish” image) indicated by the continuous preview command is determined, and the determined continuous preview additional data table is stored in the data table. The data is read from the area 233b and set in the additional data table buffer 233e.

  Thereby, in the display setting process, for the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the sequence corresponding to the continuous announcement additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e by the process of S1652. The display content of the image for the next one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is specified so that the notice effect is additionally displayed.

  After that, among the continuous preview image determination flags provided for each continuous preview image type, the continuous preview determination flag corresponding to the continuous preview image type (“jellyfish” image) included in the continuous preview command is turned on, and other continuous preview images are set. The continuous announcement determination flag corresponding to the image type is set to off (S1653), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the new continuous advance command flag set in the process of S1651 is turned on, it is determined that a predetermined additional data table for continuous advance notice has been set in the additional data table buffer 233e by the continuous advance command command process. Judgment is made, and the continuous notice type corresponding to the continuous notice additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e is specified from the continuous notice determination flag set by the processing of S1653. Then, the image controller 237 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer image data necessary for displaying the specified continuous notice type.

  Returning to FIG. 37, if it is determined in the processing of S1514 that there is no continuous advance command (S1514: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S1516). If there is a back image change command (S1516: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S1517), and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S1517) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the transfer setting processing (S1405) of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to on (S1661). Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each of the back image types (back A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S1662), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set in the process of S1661 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image determination flag set in the process of S1662. When the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing, if it is specified to display any of the back surfaces A to C by the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S1662 indicates that The type of the rear image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) which stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is specified. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there is no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously interpreted as a rear image change command. Could be done. In the process of S1662, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. 37, if it is determined in the processing of S1516 that there is no rear image change command (S1516: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a frame button operation command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a frame button operation command (S1518: Yes), a frame button operation command process is executed (S1519), and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, the details of the frame button operation command processing (S1519) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the frame button operation command processing. The frame button operation command processing executes processing corresponding to the frame button operation command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the frame button operation command, a frame button operation flag indicating that the frame button has been operated in the ON state is set to ON (S1671), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, based on the frame button operation flag set by the process of S1671, the frame button is operated while the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the display data table for variation. Is detected, the type of the super reach displayed later is updated. This allows the player to select a favorite super reach effect.

  Returning to FIG. 37, if it is determined in the processing of S1518 that there is no frame button operation command (S1518: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S1520). If there is an error command (S1520: Yes), error command processing is executed (S1521), and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S1521) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S1681). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S1682), and the command determination is performed. Return to processing.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S1681, the type of error that occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S1682, and the error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process proceeds to S1682 to set the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Returning to FIG. 37, if it is determined in the processing of S1520 that there is no error command (S1520: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is performed (S1522), and the processing returns to S1501.

  In the processing of S1501 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S1501: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S1502 to S1522 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S1501 to S1522 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S1501 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S1408) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary to display the image at power-on shown in FIG. 12, that is, the display table fixing command, the display variation pattern, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only the command and the display stop type command are extracted, and the processing corresponding to each command is defined command processing (see FIG. 38B), variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 39A), and stop type. A command process (see FIG. 39B) is executed, and a process of discarding other commands without executing a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 39 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S1631. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S1632, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S1403), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIGS. 42 and 43 are flowcharts showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 42, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S1701), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S1701: No), In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the process of S1702 to S1708 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1709. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S1701: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S1702), and then S1703 to S1708. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S1703, it is determined whether or not the new pending ball count command flag is ON (S1703). If the new pending ball count command flag is ON (S1703: Yes), the display command is displayed in the previous command determination process. It is determined that the reserved ball number command has been processed, and a reserved image setting process is executed (S1704).

  Here, the details of the reserved image setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44A is a flowchart showing the reserved image setting processing. In the reserved image setting process, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls notified from the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the processing of the display reserved ball number command. Therefore, this is a process for expanding the image data.

  In the reserved image setting process, first, referring to the number discrimination flag, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of retained balls corresponding to the number discrimination flag set to ON is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4). ) Is developed (S1751). In the task processing, based on the expanded reserved image data, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the reserved image is specified, and the drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle is specified for each sprite. Determine necessary parameters.

  In the reserved image setting process, after the process of S1751, the new reserved ball count command is set to off (S1752), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Referring back to FIG. 42, after the pending image setting process (S1704) or in the process of S1703, if it is determined that the new pending ball number command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S1703: No), then Then, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is ON (S1705). If the error occurrence flag is on (S1705: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S1706).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 44B is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. In order to display an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81, the warning image data is developed (S1761).

  In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed for each sprite. Determine necessary parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S1761, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S1762), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Referring back to FIG. 42, after the warning image setting process (S1706) or in the process of S1705, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S1705: No), then the frame button It is determined whether or not the operation flag is on (S1707). Then, if the frame button operation flag is on (S1707: Yes), a frame button operation process is executed (S1708).

  Here, the details of the frame button operation processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44B is a flowchart showing the frame button operation processing. In this processing, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen for selecting the super-reach display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the super-reach to be displayed according to the operation is performed. This is a process for selecting an aspect.

  In the frame button operation processing, first, after setting the frame button operation flag to OFF (S1771), it is determined whether or not the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1772). The super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 233d. Based on the display data table for variation set, the previously executed V In the interrupt processing, when drawing the sprite for the super reach selection screen to the image controller 237 is determined, it is determined that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, in the process of S1772, when it is determined that the super reach selection screen is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1772: No), the frame button operation process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a result of the process of S1772 (S1772: Yes), the super reach type flag provided for each super reach display mode is reset. Update (S1773), and return to the display setting process. The super reach type is updated by turning on only the super reach type flag corresponding to one display mode and turning off the other super reach type flags so that a plurality of super reach display modes are selected in a predetermined order. Set to.

  In the present embodiment, when the display of the super reach of the mode selected by the player is specified in the display data table for fluctuation, the drawing content corresponding to the display mode of each super reach is specified for each address. I have. Then, in the display setting process, when the content of the display data table is expanded in the process of S1710 to be described later, only the drawing content corresponding to the display mode of the super reach with the super reach type flag turned on is extracted. Thereby, in the task processing, the type of the sprite (display object) corresponding to the display mode of the selected super reach is specified, and for each sprite, a display coordinate position, an enlargement factor, a rotation angle, and the like required for rendering are displayed. Since various parameters are set, a super reach effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the selected display mode.

  Referring back to FIG. 42, after the frame button operation process (S1708) or in the process of S1707, if it is determined that the frame button operation flag is not on, that is, it is off (S1707: No), then, S1709 Move to the processing of.

  In S1709, a pointer update process is performed (S1709). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process is performed by using the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the additional data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data table buffer 233f, respectively, from the corresponding drawing contents or transfer. This is a process of updating the pointer 233g specifying the address from which the transfer data information of the target image data should be obtained.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233g (S1781). That is, the pointer 233g is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233e, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233g is updated by the processing of S1781, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233g is End information or not. Is determined (S1782). As a result, if it is End information (S1782: Yes), it means that the pointer 233g has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table (S1783), and the demonstration display data table or the restart display data is determined. If it is a table (S1783: Yes), the pointer 233g is set to 1 (S1784), and further corresponds to the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is set in the time counter 233i (S1785), and the flow shifts to the process of S1787. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 repeats the demonstration effect or the restart effect. Can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1783, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is neither the demonstration display data table nor the restart display data table (S1783: No), the pointer 233g is displayed. The value is subtracted by 1 (S1786), and the flow shifts to the process of S1787. Thereby, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table and the restart display data table, for example, a fluctuation display data table and a fixed display data table are set in the display data table buffer 233d, , And End information are always rendered, so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to.

  As a result of the process of S1782, when it is determined that the data at the address indicated by the pointer 233g updated by the process of S1781 is not End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S1782: No) ), Skip the processing of S1783 to S1786, and proceed to the processing of S1787.

  In the process of S1787, it is determined whether or not the confirmed command flag is on (S1787). If the confirmed command flag is not on but off (S1787: No), the pointer update process is terminated and the display setting is performed. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is ON (S1787: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113, and the display data table buffer The value of the pointer 233g is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the End information is stored in the display data buffer set to 233d (S1788), and the value of the time counter is set to 1. (S1789), and returns to the display setting process. Thus, when the confirmation command is received, in the display setting process, the drawing content specified at the end of the set display data table can be developed and the start of the confirmation display effect can be controlled.

  Referring back to FIG. 42, after the pointer update processing, the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table buffer 233e are used to determine the address indicated by the pointer 233g updated by the pointer update processing. The drawing content is developed (S1710). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S1710 along with the previously expanded holding image, warning image, and the like. , Various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle. If Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed on the assumption that there is no sprite to be added. When the additional data table buffer 233e is cleared with Null data, Null data is always developed from the additional data table buffer 233e.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233i is subtracted by 1 (S1711), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233i after the subtraction is 0 or less (S1712). Then, when the value of the time counter 233i is 1 or more (S1712: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233i is 0 or less (S1712: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the display data table for fluctuation is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a determination command (display determination command for display) is issued from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113 in accordance with the end of the effect. ) Should be transmitted, and in the subsequent process of S1713, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed command flag is ON (S1713).

  As a result, if the determination command flag is ON (S1713: Yes), it means that the determination command (display determination command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. The mode of the final display effect according to the stop symbol indicated by the symbol discrimination flag is determined, and the final display data table of that mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f. Null data is written, and the contents are cleared (S1714). Next, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display is set in the time counter 233i (S1715), and the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S1716). Then, the set command flag is set to off (S1717), and then the set display flag indicating that the set display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S1718), and the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly used as the work RAM 233. (S1719), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the case where a display data table for fluctuation is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a determination command (determination for display) is issued from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113 in accordance with the end of the effect. Command), the drawn content can be set so that the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S1719 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, since the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is started from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, in the variable display data table, the change based on the data table starts. Until a predetermined time elapses from this time, symbol offset information from the stopped symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is defined. In the task process (S1404), the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S1719 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation. Then, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information defined in the above-described display data table for fluctuation to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1713, if the confirmed command flag is not on but off (S1713: No), the process proceeds to S1720 shown in FIG. 43, and it is determined whether the confirmed display flag is on (S1720). ). If the confirmed display flag is on (S1720: Yes), the result of the determination in the processing of S1712 (S1712: Yes) indicates that the confirmed display effect has been completed, so the confirmed display flag is set to off. After that (S1721), the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S1722), and the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the data display is set in the time counter 233i (S1723). Then, the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S1724), a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S1725), and the V interrupt processing ends.

  By this, by the end of the final display effect, if the display fluctuation pattern command indicating the start of the next fluctuation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect has not been received, automatically, The drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The branch condition of S1720: Yes is satisfied when the confirmed display effect is performed. In this case, the contents of both the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f are determined by the processing of S1714. It has been cleared. Therefore, in the process of S1722, the process of clearing those data table buffers is omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

  In the process of S1720, if the confirmed display flag is not on but off (S1720: No), then it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S1726). If the demonstration display flag is on (S1726: Yes), the result of the determination in the process of S1712 (S1712: Yes) indicates that the demonstration effect has ended, and the display setting process ends as it is, and V Return to the interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1726, if the demonstration display flag is not on but off (S1726: No), the result of the determination in the process of S1712 (S1712: Yes) means that the variable effect has ended. Therefore, if a fixed command is not received even after a lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the fluctuation effect, a display data table for fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d in order to start a restart effect. At the same time, 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S1727), and it is determined whether or not the value of the restart timer counter after the addition has reached a predetermined value (S1728).

  Then, when the restart timer counter is not the predetermined value (S1728: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. If the restart timer counter is a predetermined value (S1728: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f are set to Null data respectively. Is written to clear those contents (S1729). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the time counter 233i (S1730), the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S1731), and the process returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Accordingly, the display controller 114 transmits the finalization command transmitted from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113 even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect. When the (determination command for display) is not received, the content of the drawing can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the restart effect is an effect in which an image obtained by vibrating the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By visually checking that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the change of the symbol is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the stopped symbol is not fixed at that time.

  After the last drawing content specified by the restart display data table is developed, the drawing content is developed again from the beginning of the restart display data table by the pointer update processing described above. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a display confirmation command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 or a new display variation pattern command is received. Here, in the restart effect, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a manner of vibrating (swinging) the third symbol around a predetermined position. In the restart display data table, the third symbol is displayed. Only the drawing contents necessary for swinging and displaying at least once are specified. Then, by repeatedly developing the drawing content from the top of the restart display data table, a restart effect in which the third symbol is repeatedly vibrated is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the restart effect is an effect in which the third symbol is vibrated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the restart symbol data table is swung at least once by the third symbol. Since only the drawing content necessary for display needs to be stored, the capacity required to store the restart display data table can be reduced.

  Also, when the display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the processing of S1714 shown in FIG. 42 is performed, and the display data table buffer is executed. A confirmed display data table is set in 233d. Thereby, even during the restart effect, the stop display of the third symbol is performed with the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol discrimination flag in accordance with the reception of the display confirmation command, and the final display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

  When the display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the start display data table, the process of S1631 of FIG. The display data table for fluctuation is set in the table buffer 233d, and the fluctuation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, when the display demonstration command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the start display data table, the process of S1621 in FIG. A display data table for demonstration is set in the buffer 233d, and a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the restart effect, even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed along with the end of the variable effect, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 that should have been received is not received. Since the effect is displayed in such a case, there is a possibility that the confirmation command is not received even while the restart effect is displayed due to the influence of noise, malfunction, or the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the display variation pattern command or the display demonstration command is received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Various effects on the third symbol display device 81 can be performed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  The simple display setting process (S1409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B) is the same as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the end of the fluctuating effect by the fluctuating image at the time of power-on, when a finalization command (displaying finalization command) is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113, It is specified that one image (one of FIGS. 12B and 12C) of the power-on fluctuation image corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time. A process of setting the display data table in the display data table buffer 233i is performed. Further, after the end of the fluctuating effect time by the fluctuating image at the time of power-on, when the confirmation command (display confirmation command) to be received from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113 is not recognized. Performs a process of setting in the display data table buffer 233d a display data table that specifies that the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation image at power-on is restarted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46 and FIG. 47, details of the transfer setting process (S1405), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2001). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2001: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S2002), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S2001, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S2001: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is read from the character ROM 234 from the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S1603), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S2002), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S1405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S2002).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S2111). If the transfer instruction is transmitted (S2111: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S2112). In the process of S2112, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process has not been completed by the process of S2112 (S2112: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S2112: Yes), the process proceeds to S2113. Also, as a result of the process of S2111, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S2111: No), the process proceeds to S2113.

  In the processing of S2113, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S2113). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S2114), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address (storage start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, and the transfer destination information (storage destination information. , The resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident image data to be transferred is to be stored) (the storage destination start address). The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. At the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S2113, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S2113: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S2115), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 36B), the command is not used in the simple command determination processing (see S1408 in FIG. 36B) and the simple display setting processing (see S1409 in FIG. 36B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 37 to 41) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 42 to 45) are executed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47) (see S2001: No in FIG. 46A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 282.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S2003), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S1405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S2003).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233g updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f by the pointer update process (S1709) of the previously executed display setting process (S1403). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S2201). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S2202). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S2202: Yes), transfer target image data (a sprite for which transfer is to be started) is determined from the transfer data information. The work RAM 233 extracts the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). (S2203). Further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S2204), and the process proceeds to S2205.

  In the process of S2202, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data (S2202: No), the process of S2203 and S2204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2205.

  In the process of S2205, after the image data transfer in the image controller 237 is completed, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 (S2205), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S2205: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S2206).

  In the process of S2206, when an image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237, and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S2206 (S2206: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S2206: Yes), the process proceeds to S2207. Also, as a result of the process of S2205, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S2205: No), the process proceeds to S2207.

  In the process of S2207, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S2207). If the transfer start flag is on (S2207: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S2208), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S2203 is set as the transfer target image, and the process proceeds to S2216. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S2207: No), then it is determined whether or not the new continuous advance command flag is on (S2209).

  If the new continuous announcement command flag is ON (S2209: Yes), it means that the continuous announcement command has been processed and the additional data table for continuous announcement for the continuous announcement effect has been set in the additional data table buffer 733e. Therefore, after setting the new continuous notice command flag to OFF (S2210), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the continuous notice image corresponding to the continuous notice discrimination flag in the ON state is stored. Then, the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are specified (S2211), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the specified various information is set as the transfer target image. The process moves to S2216.

  In the process of S2209, if the new continuous notice command flag is not on but off (S2209: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S2212). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S2212: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S2212: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S2213), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the discrimination flags, the head address (storage source head address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state are stored, and the transfer is performed. The head address of the destination (the normal video RAM 236) is specified (S2214), the image data of the sprite indicated by the specified various information is set as the transfer target image, and the process proceeds to S2216.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is stored. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S2214, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer process ends.

  In the process of S2216, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S2216). The determination in the process of S2216 is performed by referring to the stored image determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image is read from the stored image determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236. It is determined that the image data is stored, and if the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S2216 (S2216: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process ends as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2216, if the transfer target image is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S2216: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image is set (S2217). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Then, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (storage destination information; in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination. The start address (storage start address) of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and temporarily stores the image data in the unused period of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the specified address of the normal video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S2217, the stored image determination flag 233j is updated (S2218), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the stored image discrimination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image to “ON”, and storing the image in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be turned off to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process for the continuous advance command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and the process corresponds to the continuous advance image indicated by the continuous advance command. When the additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the image data of the continuous preview image used in the additional data table can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113. , The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to transfer the image data to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233g of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Since the transfer instruction of the target image is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. .

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The image of each sprite specified in the data table can be immediately drawn by using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, details of the above-described drawing process (S1406), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S1404) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information The drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated from the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S1405) (S2301). That is, in the processing of S2301, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S1404). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S1405), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And a final address (storage source final address), storage destination information (information indicating whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) to store the transfer target image data, and a start address (storage destination address). .

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S2302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored. ), Storage destination information (information indicating whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is to be stored) in which the transfer target image data is to be stored, and a head address (storage destination head address) are extracted and stored from the storage source head address. After the image data stored up to the original final address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 indicated by the storage destination information is in an unused state. Then, store it in the buffer RAM 237a. Image data sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the storage destination head address of the resident video RAM235 or normal video RAM236 indicated by the storage destination information. Then, the image data stored here is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously performed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S2302, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S2303). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 36) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read are alternately switched between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, apart from the jackpot lottery performed at the start of execution of the variable effect, each counter value obtained and retained at the time of the start winning is read in advance, A look-ahead process for predicting the result of the jackpot lottery is executed. The pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute the pre-reading process in the main process, and execute the jackpot lottery and the like in a timer interrupt process executed with priority over the main process. .

  Here, when the pachinko machine is configured to execute the look-ahead processing separately from the jackpot lottery, the jackpot lottery needs to compare the counter value obtained by the start winning prize with each individual win value. On the other hand, also in the pre-reading process, it is necessary to compare the pre-read value and the individual winning values one by one separately from the big hit lottery. Thereby, especially when the pachinko machine is in the high probability state, the comparison process between the counter value and the individual hit value is performed in both the jackpot lottery and the pre-reading process, for example, when the number of hit values in the high probability state is 30 or more. For example, it must be repeated up to 30 times. Therefore, it takes a long time to perform the comparison processing between the counter value and the winning value performed in each of the jackpot lottery and the prefetching process.

  In such a situation, as in the conventional gaming machine, at the start of the variable effect, each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the start prize detected after the start prize corresponding to the variable effect. If the pre-reading process is used, the result of the jackpot lottery associated with the pre-reading at the time of starting winning is predicted around the time when the jackpot lottery at the start of execution of the variable effect is performed, and the most in the game There is a possibility that the completion of the jackpot lottery, which is an important process, is delayed, thereby affecting the game.

  In the timer interrupt process, a process of determining a start of a variable effect and executing a jackpot lottery, and detecting a start winning to acquire the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and executing a look-ahead process. In the case where the processing is included, the jackpot lottery process and the prefetching process may be performed together in one timer interrupt process based on the determination of the start of the variable effect and the detection of the start winning. . As described above, since each process may require a long processing time, in this case, all the processes included in the timer interrupt process may not be completed before the next timer interrupt process is started. Can occur. Therefore, various controls required for the game are delayed, which may affect the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the prefetching process is executed in the main process, while the jackpot lottery is executed in the timer interrupt process. Even during the middle, the timer interrupt processing is executed with priority, so that the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect. On the other hand, even if the timer interrupt processing is executed during the prefetch processing, the prefetch processing can be surely completed because the timer interrupt processing is executed continuously after the end of the timer interrupt processing. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the pre-reading process is executed using the value of each counter acquired when the start winning is detected, and the result of the jackpot lottery or the like is predicted while the jackpot lottery is predicted. Can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect, so that the game can be controlled normally.

  In the first embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the time of the start winning are stored not only in the reserved ball count storage area 203b but also in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. The prefetching process is executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e.

  Here, in the case where the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball count storage area 203b are directly read and the pre-reading process is performed, when the execution start timing of the variable effect is reached during the pre-reading process, as described above. The counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) of the reserved sphere storage area 203b are shifted to the reserved sphere execution area 203c and another reserved area. Thus, every time the change start process (see FIG. 22) is executed, it is necessary to change the storage areas of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the prefetch process.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the prefetching process is executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetching execution area 203d or the second prefetching execution area 203e. Even when the execution start timing of the effect is reached and the variation start processing is executed, the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e is not changed without changing the storage areas of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the prefetch processing. , The processing can be simplified.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the number of prefetch suspensions included in the prefetch command that has triggered the execution determination (that is, the number of variable effects for executing the continuous announcement effect) ) Is not set as it is in the continuous announcement execution counter 223e, but a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of times of prefetch suspension (the number of variable effects for executing the continuous announcement effect) is set in the continuous announcement execution counter 223e. Each time a variation pattern command, which is an instruction to start a variation effect, is received, the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is referred to, and if the value is greater than 1, a “jellyfish” image is displayed for the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to be displayed on the screen, and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1. If the value is 1, the continuous notice execution counter 223e is transmitted without transmitting the continuous notice command. Is subtracted by 1. In addition, as long as the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is 0, the continuous announcement command is not transmitted, and the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is also held at 0, except for the case where the execution of the single announcement effect is determined. .

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set, the number of times of the variable effect of performing the continuous announcement effect is set as it is in the continuous announcement execution counter, and the continuous announcement execution counter is set to 0 when the variable effect is executed. If it is large, the continuous announcement effect is executed over the initially set number of variation effects by subtracting 1 from the value of the continuous announcement execution counter while performing the continuous announcement effect in the variation effect. In the case of such a configuration, after the one continuous announcement effect ends, the continuous announcement effect may start again, that is, the continuous announcement effect may occur continuously.

  As a result, for example, if the last variable production in the first continuous preview production is out of order in the special reach, and the last variable production in the subsequent second continuous production production is out of front and back in the normal reach, the player: You will have the thought of. That is, the special reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the first continuous announcement effect is displayed over a plurality of variable effects, so that the player can play the game with an expectation that the 15R probability will be a big hit. continue. Then, if the result of the special reach is a back and forth, the player will be disappointed once, but the second consecutive announcement effect will be displayed continuously, so that the player will have a stronger expectation of a 15R probability change big hit Become. However, as a result, if the front and rear sides are shifted in the normal reach, the player may be strongly given a feeling of being downgraded compared to the front and rear separation in the special reach displayed earlier.

  Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, after the last variable effect in the first continuous preview effect is out of order, a single-shot advance effect may be performed in the subsequent variable effect. In this case, as a result of the first continuous announcement effect, the player is displaced before and after and is disappointed. Although there is a possibility that the image for the continuous announcement effect is not displayed thereafter, there is a possibility that the betrayal of the player's feeling may be consequently betrayed. In this way, with the configuration described above, there is a possibility that the expectation of the continuous announcement effect held by the player is eventually reduced.

  Further, the following problems may occur in the conventional pachinko machine. For example, it is assumed that a new starting prize (ball entry into the first entrance 64) occurs during the variable effect, and the variable effect associated with the starting prize is suspended. When a pre-reading process is performed for this start winning prize and a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a continuous announcement effect, and a determination is made not to perform the continuous announcement effect, and the continuous announcement effect is not performed in the next variable effect. Further, even if a single announcement notice effect is performed in the next variable effect, if the image of the continuous notice effect is not displayed in the first variable effect performed after the detection of the start winning, a new start winning effect is not detected thereafter. As long as it is, there is a possibility that the player may easily guess that the image of the single announcement effect displayed in the subsequent variable effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's sense of expectation for the one-off notice effect may also be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined as in the first embodiment, the number of prefetch suspensions included in the prefetch command that triggered the execution determination (that is, the continuous announcement effect is executed) The value obtained by adding 1 to the number of fluctuation effects is set in the continuous announcement execution counter 223e, and every time a fluctuation pattern command that is an instruction to start a fluctuation effect is received, the value is incremented from 1 by referring to the continuous announcement execution counter 223e. If it is larger, the continuous announcement command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the “jellyfish” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the fluctuation effect, and the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is decremented by one. If it is 1, the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1 without transmitting the continuous notice command, and after the continuous notice effect is performed, It can be made to the image of the continuous announcement attraction and single announcement attraction in one variation effect ( "jellyfish" images) are not displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, after the continuous announcement effect is completed, it is possible to suppress that the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect are continuously performed, so that the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect are continuously performed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in a sense of expectation of the continuous announcement effect held by the player.

  Further, after the end of the continuous announcement effect, the continuous announcement effect is always performed in accordance with the rule that the image (“jellyfish” image) relating to the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variation effect. Or by setting the single announcement effect, even if the image of the continuous announcement effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first fluctuation effect performed after the detection of the start winning, the continuous announcement is performed in the next fluctuation effect. If the effect image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can have a sense of expectation that the image is displayed as a continuous announcement effect.

  Thus, by configuring the continuous announcement execution counter 223e as in the present embodiment, the player can continue the game while enjoying the continuous announcement effect.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, the number of prefetch suspensions included in the prefetch command that triggered the execution determination (that is, A value obtained by adding 1 to the number of variable effects in which the notice effect is performed is set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e, and each time a change pattern command that is a start instruction of the change effect is received, the continuous notice execution counter 223e is referred to. The continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1. If the value is 1, the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1 without transmitting the continuous notice command. It was configured to be. Then, by this, a continuous preview effect is performed over all the variable productions held before the variable production in which the prediction result by the prefetch is notified by the prefetch command, and after the continuous preview production has been performed, the continuous preview production is always performed once. In the fluctuating effect, the images of the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect (“jellyfish” image) are not displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, among the variable effects suspended before the variable effect in which the prediction result by the prefetch is notified by the prefetch command, the continuous effect is selected. The continuous announcement effect is executed by determining the number of the variable effects for displaying the images related to the announcement effect, and displaying the images relating to the continuous announcement effect for the determined number of the variable effects. That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment does not necessarily perform the continuous announcement effect over all the variable effects that have been suspended before the variable effect in which the prediction result of the prefetch is notified by the prefetch command, but is suspended. The number of the variable effects in which the continuous announcement effect is performed among the variable effects is set arbitrarily.

  FIG. 49 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a continuous notice range table 222b is provided as a continuous notice determination table stored in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 instead of the continuous notice determination table 222a in the first embodiment. . Further, a prefetch information storage area 223g is provided instead of the prefetch information storage area 223b in the first embodiment, and a prefetch information execution counter 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is replaced with a prefetch information. A continuation determination information storage area and a continuation avoidance flag are provided in each of the prefetch information 0 area to the prefetch information fourth area provided in the information storage area 223g.

  Further, in the second embodiment, of the various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, a part of the variable display process (S912) executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) and the same main process Part of the command determination processing (S913) executed in (see FIG. 29) and part of the continuous notice determination processing (S1025), which is one of the command determination processing, of the first embodiment are described. It is different from the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, other components of the pachinko machine 10, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 And various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  Similar to the continuous announcement determination table 222a (see FIG. 10) in the first embodiment, the continuous announcement determination table 222b indicates that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the prefetch command received from the main control device 110 is a 15R probability change large hit or out of order. Is a table for setting a “continuous notice determination probability” which is a probability of determining that the third symbol display device 81 executes the continuous notice effect. However, the continuous announcement determination table 222b also determines the number of variable productions (hereinafter, referred to as the “continuous announcement count”) in which the continuous announcement production is performed when the execution of the continuous announcement production is determined, together with the continuous announcement determination probability. This is different from the continuous announcement determination table 222a in the first embodiment. The sound ramp control device 113 compares the continuous announcement determination table 222a with the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223c, and when the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223c is in the range indicated by the continuous announcement determination table 222b, the third It is determined that the symbol display device 81 is to perform the continuous announcement effect, and the number of continuous announcements is determined from the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223c (see S1051 and S1039 in FIG. 54). When the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the sound lamp control device 113 performs control such that the continuous announcement effect is performed over the variable effect corresponding to the determined number of continuous announcements.

  Here, the details of the continuous announcement determination table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous announcement determination table 222b. As shown in FIG. 50, the continuous announcement determination table 222b has two tables, a big hit continuous announcement determination table 222b1 and a missed continuous announcement determination table 222b2. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command from the main control device 110, and if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the prefetch command is the 15R certainty-variable jackpot, selects the jackpot continuous announcement notice determination table 222b1 and performs the jackpot lottery. If the prediction result is out of order, the out-of-out-time consecutive notice determination table 222b2 is selected (see S1033 to S1036 in FIG. 54). This makes it possible to change the continuous announcement determination probability according to the game state (“big hit” or “missing”) after the end of the continuous announcement effect.

  Both the jackpot continuous announcement notice determination table 222b1 and the out-of-office continuous announcement determination table 222b2 use only the values “1” to “4” that can be taken by the number of prefetch suspensions of the prefetch command (the number of suspensions of the prefetched variable effect). In addition, the range of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223c for determining the start of the continuous announcement effect (hereinafter, referred to as “continuous announcement determination range”) is defined in association with the number of consecutive announcements.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 50, the jackpot continuous announcement determination table 222b1 associates the prefetch suspension count “1” with the continuous announcement count “1” and sets “0 to 7” as the continuous announcement determination range. Stipulate. Further, for the number of pre-reading suspensions “2”, “0 to 7” is defined as the continuous notice determination range in association with the continuous notice number “1”, and the continuous notice is determined in association with the continuous notice number “2”. "8 to 15" is defined as the range. Further, for the number of pre-reading suspensions “3”, “0 to 12” is defined as a continuous notice determination range in association with the continuous notice number “1”, and continuous notice is determined in association with the continuous notice number “2”. “13 to 25” is defined as the range, and “26 to 38” is defined as the continuous announcement determination range in association with the continuous announcement count “3”. In addition, for the number of pre-reading suspensions “4”, “0 to 15” is defined as the continuous notice determination range in association with the continuous notice number “1”, and the continuous notice is determined in association with the continuous notice number “2”. The range is defined as "16 to 31", the continuous notice count is set to "3", the continuous notice determination range is set to "32 to 47", the continuous notice count is set to "4", and the continuous notice count is determined. "48 to 63" is defined as the range.

  In addition, the continuous announcement notice determination table 222b2 at the time of departure defines the continuous announcement determination range “0 to 3” in association with the number of consecutive announcements “1” with respect to the number of times of pre-reading suspension “1”. Further, for the number of prefetching suspensions “2”, “0 to 4” is defined as the continuous notice determination range in association with the continuous notice number “1”, and the continuous notice is determined in association with the continuous notice number “2”. "5 to 9" is defined as the range. Further, for the number of pre-reading suspensions “3”, “0 to 8” is defined as a continuous notice determination range in association with the continuous notice number “1”, and continuous notice is determined in association with the continuous notice number “2”. A range of “9 to 17” is defined, and a range of “18 to 26” is defined as a continuous preview determination range in association with the number of continuous previews “3”. In addition, for the number of pre-reading suspensions “4”, “0 to 9” is defined as the continuous notice determination range in association with the continuous notice number “1”, and the continuous notice is determined in association with the continuous notice number “2”. The range is defined as “10 to 19”, the continuous notice count is set to “3”, the continuous notice determination range is set to “20 to 29”, and the continuous notice count is set to “4”, and the continuous notice decision is set. "30 to 39" is defined as the range.

  In both the jackpot continuous announcement determination table 222b1 and the uninterrupted continuous announcement determination table 222b2, if the number of times of pre-reading is “1”, the pre-reading command indicates that the pre-reading command notifies the predicted result by the pre-reading that the suspension has been performed before the fluctuation effect. There is only one fluctuating effect, and thus there is only one fluctuating effect for which the execution of the continuous announcement effect can be set. Therefore, the continuous announcement determination tables 222b1 and 222b2 define the continuous announcement determination range only for the continuous announcement count “1”. Similarly, when the number of times of prefetching suspension is “2” to “4”, there are only two to four variable productions which are suspended before the fluctuation productions in which the prediction result by the prefetching is notified by the prefetching command, respectively. Therefore, there are only two to four variable effects in which the execution of the continuous announcement effect can be set. Therefore, when the number of times of pre-reading suspension is “2”, the continuous preliminary notice determination tables 222b1 and 222b2 define the continuous preliminary notice determination range only for the number of continuous preliminary notices “1” to “2”. Is "3", the continuous notice determination range is defined only for the continuous notice number "1" to "3", and when the prefetch suspension number is "4", the continuous notice number "1" to "3" A continuous notice determination range is defined for all of “4”.

  Note that the number of continuous announcements specified in the present embodiment is the number of variable announcements in which the continuous announcement effect is performed, including the variable announcement prefetched to generate the look-ahead command that triggered the execution of the continuous announcement effect. It is. Here, in the present embodiment, since the continuous announcement effect is performed by displaying the “jellyfish” image during the fluctuation effect, the number of continuous announcements determined in the present embodiment is a trigger for determining the execution of the continuous announcement effect. The “jellyfish” image is actually the number of variable effects displayed during the variable effect, including the variable effect read ahead to generate the prefetch command.

  On the other hand, at the end of the fluctuation effect, that is, when the jellyfish image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the stop display of the third symbol, the continuous announcement effect is performed. Except for the variable effect that triggered the determination, the “jellyfish” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variable effect over a plurality of variable effects held at the time of the start winning corresponding to the variable change. It must be configured to display. Therefore, in this case, the number of continuous announcements is a variable effect in which the continuous announcement effect is performed by the time the variable effect is performed, except for the variable effect read in advance to generate the look-ahead command that has triggered the execution of the continuous announcement effect. What is necessary is just to prescribe the number of. By specifying in this manner, the number of continuous announcements in the case where the continuous announcement effect is made by displaying the “jellyfish” image on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the stop display of the third symbol is actually reduced. The “jellyfish” image is the number of variable effects displayed during the variable effect.

  Therefore, in the continuous announcement determination table in this case, when the number of times of pre-reading is “1”, there is no variable effect capable of displaying the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous announcement effect, so There is no need to define the continuous notice decision range. That is, when the number of times of pre-reading is “1”, the continuous announcement determination table may be configured so that execution of the continuous announcement effect is not determined. In addition, when the number of times of prefetching is “2” to “4”, there are only one to three variable effects that are held before the variable effect in which the prediction result by the prefetch is notified by the prefetch command, respectively. Therefore, there are only one to three variable effects in which the execution of the continuous announcement effect can be set, and the continuous announcement determination table in this case indicates that the number of consecutive announcements is “1” when the number of times of prefetching suspension is “2”. When the number of pre-reading reservations is “3”, the number of continuous notices is defined only for the number of consecutive notices “1” to “2”, and the number of times of pre-reading reservation is “ In the case of "4", the continuous announcement determination range may be defined for the number of consecutive announcements "1" to "3".

  When one of the jackpot continuous announcement determination table 222b1 and the out-of-box continuous announcement determination table 222b2 is selected as a table for setting the continuous announcement determination probability, the voice lamp control device 113 reads ahead from the selected continuous announcement determination table. For the value of the number of times of prefetch suspension included in the command, the continuous notice determination range associated with each successive notice number is specified. Then, when the value of the continuous preview lottery counter 223c at that time is included in the continuous preview determination range associated with any of the continuous preview times, the execution of the continuous preview effect is determined, and further, the continuous preview lottery is performed. The number of continuous notices associated with the continuous notice determination range including the value of the counter 223c is specified and determined from the selected continuous notice determination table.

  For example, when the number of times of pre-reading indicated by the pre-reading command is “4” and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “15R sure-change big hit”, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the continuous notification judgment table as the continuous notification judgment table. Select the table 222b1. Then, with respect to the number of times of pre-reading suspension “4”, “0 to 15”, “16 to 31”, and “32 to 47” are respectively set as the continuous notice determination ranges associated with the respective continuous notice numbers “1” to “4”. , ”And“ 48 to 63 ”.

  Here, if the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223c is "20", the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined because it is included in the continuous announcement determination range "16 to 31" associated with the continuous announcement count "2". Then, the number of consecutive notices is determined to be “2”. If the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223c is "60", it is included in the continuous announcement determination range "48 to 63" associated with the continuous announcement count "4", so that the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined. , The number of continuous notices is determined to be “4”. On the other hand, if the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223c is “65”, it is not included in the continuous announcement determination range associated with any of the continuous announcement counts, and thus a determination is made not to execute the continuous announcement effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the prefetch command, the execution is suspended before the variable effect in which the prediction result by the prefetch is notified by the prefetch command. Instead of performing the continuous announcement effect over all the variation effects, the number of the variation effects in which the continuous announcement effect is performed among the suspended variation effects is determined based on the value of the continuous announcement lottery counter 223c at that time. . And, as will be described in detail later, the continuous announcement production is performed for the determined number of the variation productions, including the variation production in which the prediction result by the pre-reading is notified by the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision of the continuous announcement production. Is configured to be set.

  As described above in the first embodiment, the conventional pachinko machine has the following problems. For example, it is assumed that a new starting prize (ball entry into the first entrance 64) occurs during the variable effect, and the variable effect associated with the starting prize is suspended. When a pre-reading process is performed for this start winning prize and a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a continuous announcement effect, and a determination is made not to perform the continuous announcement effect, and the continuous announcement effect is not performed in the next variable effect. Further, even if a single announcement notice effect is performed in the next variable effect, if the image of the continuous notice effect is not displayed in the first variable effect performed after the detection of the start winning, a new start winning effect is not detected thereafter. As long as it is, there is a possibility that the player may easily guess that the image of the single announcement effect displayed in the subsequent variable effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's sense of expectation for the one-off notice effect may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, each time a continuous announcement effect is determined, the number of the variable effects (the number of continuous announcements) in which the continuous announcement effect is determined is determined, and the look-ahead command that triggers the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined. By setting the execution of the continuous preview effect for the determined number of variable effects, including the variable effect in which the prediction result by the pre-reading is notified, the execution of the continuous preview effect is determined according to the detection of the start winning. Also, there may be a case where the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous announcement effect is not displayed from the fluctuation effect immediately after the start winning. Therefore, even if the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous announcement effect is not displayed from the fluctuation effect immediately after the start winning prize, and the “jellyfish” image is displayed in the subsequent fluctuation effect, it is an image related to the single-shot announcement effect. Instead, the player can expect that the image is related to the continuous announcement effect, so that the sense of expectation for the single announcement effect is further increased, and the interest of the player can be further enhanced.

  By the way, in the example of FIG. 50, in the case of the jackpot continuous announcement determination table 222b1 and the out-of-office continuous announcement determination table 222b2, the continuous announcement determination range becomes wider as the value of the number of times of prefetch suspension increases, as in the first embodiment. However, if the continuous notice determination range is wide, it is easy to determine that the continuous notice effect is to be performed, and the continuous notice determination probability increases, so the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222b1 and the continuous It can be said that both of the preliminary determination tables 222b2 are defined such that the greater the number of times the variable display is suspended in the main control device 110, the higher the continuous preliminary notification determination probability.

  Here, since the continuous announcement effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects that are suspended when the continuous announcement effect is determined, the continuous announcement determination probability is set to be higher as the number of times of suspension is increased. Is likely to increase in the number of variable effects included in the continuous notice effect of the above. Thereby, the player can recognize that the effect different from the normal effect has been performed as the continuous notice effect is performed over many continuous variable effects. Expectation can be given. In addition, since the number of times the variable display is held often takes a small value, when the number of times of holding is small, it is possible to suppress the continuous announcement effect from being performed frequently, while the number of times of holding is reduced. When it becomes large, it is possible to make the continuous announcement effect easy to be performed.

  In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the continuous announcement determination probability is defined so that the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined even when the number of times of pre-reading is one. Here, when the number of times of pre-reading is 1, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined as it is, the variable effect in which the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set is changed to the variable effect in which the pre-reading process is performed to generate the pre-read command. Therefore, the “jellyfish” image that is the image of the continuous announcement effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variation effect. Therefore, in this case, a “15R jackpot” may be displayed after one “jellyfish” image is displayed, and the expectation of the player for the continuous announcement effect on the “jellyfish” image may be diluted. There is.

  On the other hand, the second embodiment is also configured to perform a single announcement notice effect, and when the single announcement execution flag 223f is on, the execution is started at that time or the fluctuation effect during execution, or finally, In the executed variable effect, it means that the execution of the single announcement effect is set. Therefore, also in the second embodiment, when the number of times of prefetching suspension is one, execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, and when the single announcement execution flag 223f at that time is on, the prefetching process is performed. The execution of the continuous announcement effect is set for the changed effect. This makes it possible to display the “jellyfish” image in the single announcement announcement effect in the earlier fluctuation effect of the two consecutive fluctuation effects, and to display the “jellyfish” image in the continuous announcement effect in the later fluctuation effect. . Therefore, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the continuous announcement effect has been performed over two continuous variable effects, and to give the player a sense of expectation that the 15R certainty big hit will be achieved.

  On the other hand, even if the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined when the number of times of reading suspension is one, if the single-shot notice execution flag 223f at that time is off, in this embodiment, the variable effect in which the look-ahead process is performed is performed. On the other hand, it is configured to suppress a situation where the continuous announcement effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the continuous announcement effect that the player has on the “jellyfish” image from being diluted.

  In addition, when comparing the jackpot continuous announcement notice determination table 222b1 and the out-of-office continuous announcement determination table 222b2 in the example of FIG. The determination range is defined so that the jackpot continuous announcement determination table 222b1 is the same as or wider than the off-time continuous announcement determination table 222b2. That is, the continuous announcement determination probability in the case where the gaming state after the end of the continuous announcement effect is "big hit" is the same as or higher than the continuous announcement determination probability in the case where the game state after the end of the continuous announcement effect is "out". Is also set to be high.

  Thereby, when the continuous announcement effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to indicate to the player that the game state is likely to be "big hit" after the end of the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a high sense of expectation. Also, the probability that the game state after the end of the continuous announcement effect (that is, the result of the determination made when the ball enters the first entrance 64) is “big hit” is usually smaller than the probability of being “out”. Is also set to be small, so that if the game state after the end of the continuous announcement effect is “out of place”, it can be suppressed so that the continuous announcement effect is not performed frequently, while if the game state is “big hit”, Thus, it is possible to easily perform the continuous announcement effect.

  As described above, in the main control device 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery based on the look-ahead performed when the ball is won in the first entrance 64 is not only the jackpot, but also in the case of the front and rear deviation, and in the case of the front and rear deviation. Also, the execution of the continuous announcement effect can be determined. That is, the execution of the continuous announcement effect can be performed under various conditions. Thereby, when a continuous announcement effect is performed, various expectations can be given to the player. Further, even if the lottery results in a loss, the continuous announcement effect is provided, thereby preventing the player from being bored.

  In the present embodiment, the continuous announcement determination range is defined so that the continuous announcement determination probability of each consecutive announcement number is the same among the respective prefetch suspension times. As a result, the number of continuous notices is set evenly, so that the third symbol display device 81 can be evenly displayed from a continuous notice effect with a small number of continuous notices to a continuous notice effect with a large number of consecutive notices. On the other hand, the continuous notice determination range may be defined so that the continuous notice determination probability of each continuous notice number differs among the respective prefetch suspension times. For example, the continuous announcement determination range may be defined so that the continuous announcement determination probability increases as the number of consecutive announcements increases. In the case where the continuous notice determination probability is increased as the number of continuous notices increases, the third symbol display device 81 can display more continuous notice effects with a large number of continuous notices than with continuous notice effects with a small number of consecutive notices. Therefore, the continuous announcement effect is often displayed over more variable effects. Thus, the expectation of the 15R certainty change jackpot held by the player each time the continuous announcement effect is displayed in each of the variable effects can be continued for a longer time, so that the interest of the player can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the continuous announcement determination range is defined in association with the continuous announcement frequency “1” in the jackpot continuous advance announcement determination table 222b1 and the off-time continuous advance announcement determination table 222b, so that the number of continuous advance announcements is one. Is determined in some cases, but if the number of continuous announcements is one, the "jellyfish" image, which is an image of the continuous announcement effect, is displayed in the third symbol only for one fluctuating effect. It will not be displayed on the device 81. Therefore, in this case, a “15R jackpot” may be displayed after one “jellyfish” image is displayed, and the expectation of the player for the continuous announcement effect on the “jellyfish” image may be diluted. There is also. Therefore, in the jackpot continuous announcement determination table 222b1 and the out-of-office continuous announcement determination table 222b, the continuous announcement determination range may not be associated with the continuous announcement count “1”, and one continuous announcement count may not be determined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the number of times of pre-reading is one, the execution of the continuous announcement effect in which the number of continuous announcements is one is determined only when the one-time announcement execution flag 223f is ON. With this configuration, it is possible to make it appear that a continuous announcement effect has been performed over two consecutive variable effects. Therefore, in the jackpot continuous announcement determination table 222b1 and the out-of-office continuous announcement determination table 222b, when the number of times of prefetch suspension is two or more, the number of continuous announcements is not associated with the number of continuous announcements “1”, and the number of consecutive announcements is 1 The time may not be determined.

  As a result, when performing the continuous announcement effect, the “jellyfish” image is displayed at least twice consecutively, so that the player keeps the expectation for the continuous announcement effect that the player has on the “jellyfish” image Can be done.

  Similar to the prefetch information storage area 223b in the first embodiment, the prefetch information storage area 223g is predicted by the main control device 110 by prefetching the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired with the start winning. In addition, it is an area for storing information indicating a prediction result of a jackpot lottery and a fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command transmitted by the main control device 110. On the other hand, the look-ahead information storage area 223g further includes continuous determination information that is information for determining whether or not to set the execution of the continuous announcement effect for the pending fluctuation effect, and avoids the execution of the continuous announcement effect. This is different from the prefetch information storage area 223b in the first embodiment in that information indicating whether or not to be read is stored.

  Here, the details of the prefetch information storage area 223g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the prefetch information storage area 223g. The prefetch information storage area 223g is different from the prefetch information storage area 223b in the first embodiment in that the prefetch information Nos. 0 to 4 are further provided with a continuation determination information storage area and a continuation avoidance flag, respectively. Is a point. The other configurations and functions in the prefetch information storage area 223g are the same as those of the prefetch information storage area 223b in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the information stored in the continuation determination information storage area of each of the pre-read information first to fourth areas and the value of the continuous notice avoidance flag are: Together with the information stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, the information stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area, and the value of the prefetch information valid flag, each of the prefetch information 0 to the third area having the smaller area number. Is stored in the continuous determination information storage area, the continuous avoidance flag, the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area, and the prefetch information valid flag, thereby performing the shift process.

  The continuation determination information storage area is an area for storing continuity determination information that is information for determining whether or not to set the execution of a continuous announcement effect for a suspended variable effect. This continuous determination information specifically indicates, when the corresponding variable effect performs a continuous announcement effect, how many consecutive remaining variable effects including the variable effect are to be set to the execution of the continuous advance effect. It is composed of information. In addition, the continuous announcement determination information includes “0” as information indicating that the corresponding variable effect does not perform the continuous announcement effect.

  For example, when “3” is stored as the continuity determination information in the continuity determination information storage area of the first area of the pre-reading information, the continuity determination information “3” is a variable effect in which the number of suspensions is one (the next This indicates that the continuous announcement effect is to be set for the remaining three variable effects including the variable effect. When “0” is stored as continuity determination information in the continuity determination information storage area of the fourth look-ahead information area, in a variable effect in which the number of suspensions is four (a variable effect performed after three variable effects). Indicates that the continuous announcement effect will not be performed.

  As described above, of the pre-reading information first to fourth areas, the variable effect corresponding to the pre-reading information first area is executed first, and thereafter, the pre-reading information second area, the pre-reading information third area, A corresponding variable effect is executed in the order of the prefetch information fourth area. Therefore, when “3” is stored as the continuity determination information in the continuity determination information storage area of the first area of the pre-reading information, the continuity determination information “3” includes the remaining three including the fluctuation effect in which the number of suspensions is one. In view of the fact that the execution of the continuous announcement effect is to be set for the fluctuation effect of the batch, “2” is stored as the continuous judgment information in the continuous judgment information storage area of the prefetch information second area, and the prefetch information This means that “1” is stored as continuity determination information in the continuity determination information storage area of the third area.

  That is, the continuous determination information “2” stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information second area includes the remaining repetitions including the fluctuating effect of which the number of suspensions is two (the fluctuating effect executed after one fluctuating effect). This shows that the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set for two variable effects. On the other hand, the continuation determination information “1” stored in the continuation determination information storage area of the third area of the pre-reading information is the remaining continuation information including the fluctuation effect whose number of suspensions is three (the fluctuation effect executed after the two fluctuation effects). Setting the execution of the continuous announcement effect for one variation effect, that is, indicating that the variation effect with the number of suspensions being three is the last variation effect in which the continuous announcement effect is executed. That is, of the first to fourth areas of the prefetch information, the area in which the consecutive judgment information “1” is stored in the continuous notice consecutive judgment information storage area is included in the prefetch command that has triggered the execution of the continuous announcement effect. This means that it is an area for storing information.

  The continuous avoidance flag is a flag indicating whether or not to avoid the execution of the continuous notice effect for the variable effect corresponding to each area for each of the prefetch information 0th to fourth areas including the continuous avoidance flag. is there. When the continuous avoidance flag is on, for the variable effects corresponding to the pre-read information 0th to 4th areas including the continuous avoidance flag in the on state, regardless of the information stored in the continuous determination information storage area. Therefore, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is avoided. On the other hand, when the continuous avoidance flag is off, if the continuous determination information stored in the continuous determination information storage areas of the prefetch information Nos. 0 to 4 including the off continuous avoidance flag is a value of 1 or more. The execution of the continuous announcement effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the pre-read information 0th to fourth areas.

  Here, the details of the continuation determination information storage area and the continuation avoidance flag will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for describing the continuation determination information set in the continuation determination information storage area and the continuation avoidance flag. FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (g) show the contents of the continuity determination information stored in each of the continuation determination information storage areas of the prefetch information Nos. 0 to 4 in accordance with the progress of the game. The setting status and the status of the continuous announcement effect performed based on the content of the continuity determination information and the setting status of the continuation avoidance flag are shown. 52 (a) to 52 (g), the contents of the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information fourth area are shown on the leftmost side, and the prefetching is sequentially performed on the right side. The contents of the continuous determination information storage areas of the information third area, the prefetch information second area, and the prefetch information first area are shown. On the rightmost side, the contents of the continuous determination information storage area in the prefetch information 0 area are shown.

  First, FIG. 52A shows the storage of the continuous determination information of the prefetch information Nos. 0 to 4 in the initial state immediately after the initialization of the RAM 223 (S810 in FIG. 28) executed after the power is turned on. Shows the contents of the area. As shown in FIG. 52 (a), in the initial setting process of the RAM 223 (S810 in FIG. 28), all of the continuous determination information storage areas of the prefetch information No. 0 to No. 4 area correspond to the variable effect corresponding to that area. Stores "0" which is information indicating that the continuous announcement effect is not performed. In the initial state in which the initial setting process of the RAM 223 has been performed, the state is a state before the prefetch command is received from the main control device 110, and thus the execution of the continuous announcement effect is not determined. Therefore, by storing “0” in the continuous determination information storage area of all the prefetch information Nos. 0 to 4 in this initial state, it is possible to indicate a state in which the execution of the continuous announcement effect has not been determined. .

  It should be noted that the continuous avoidance flags of the prefetch information Nos. 0 to 4 are all turned off by the initialization process (S810 in FIG. 28) of the RAM 223 executed after the power is turned on. That is, in the initial state shown in FIG. 52 (a), the continuous avoidance flags of all the prefetch information Nos. 0 to 4 are turned off. Thereby, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined in the subsequent processing, it is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous announcement effect from being suddenly avoided.

  Next, FIG. 52 (b) shows the prefetch in which the number of prefetch suspensions is 3, after the voice lamp control device 113 receives some prefetch commands from the main control device 110 from the initial state shown in FIG. 52 (a). When the command is received and the execution of the continuous announcement effect over the two variable effects is determined from the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the look-ahead command based on the continuous announcement determination table of FIG. The content of the continuity determination information storage area in the fourth area is shown.

  Here, when the execution of the continuous notice effect over Y variable effects is determined from the content of the look-ahead command in which the number of times of the look-ahead reservation is X, the respective continuous determination information storage areas of the pre-read information first to fourth areas are Then, the continuous determination information is stored in the following procedure. The 0th look-ahead information area is an area in which information on the variable effect immediately before the start of the execution, during the execution, or immediately after the execution is stored, and the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined based on the reception of the prefetch command. In this case, the continuity determination information is not newly stored in the continuity determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area. This is because the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set for the pending variable effect.

  As a procedure for storing the continuation determination information, first, as a first procedure, the continuation determination information storage area in the prefetch information X area corresponding to the number of prefetch suspensions of the prefetch command that has triggered the execution of the continuous announcement effect is stored as “ 1 "is stored. Thus, it is possible to indicate that the variable effect corresponding to the look-ahead command that has triggered the execution of the continuous announcement effect is the last variable effect in which the continuous announcement effect is set. Here, if the number of continuous announcements Y, which is the number of variable announcements that execute the continuous announcement presentation, is “1”, the storage of the continuity determination information ends in the first procedure.

  On the other hand, if the number of continuous announcements Y, which is the number of variable productions that execute the continuous announcement production, is equal to or more than “2”, as a second procedure, the prefetch information (XA) area (1 ≦ A <Y) (A + 1) is stored in the continuation determination information storage area. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (b), since the number of times of prefetch suspension X is 3 and the number of consecutive notices Y is 2, "2" is set in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information second area (A = 1). Store. On the other hand, when the number of times of pre-reading suspension X is 3 and the number of continuous notices Y is 3, "3" is further stored in the continuation determination information storage area of the first area of pre-reading information (A = 2).

  When the number X of pre-reading suspensions is 4 and the number Y of consecutive notices is 4, “1” is set in the continuation determination information storage area of the pre-reading information fourth area in the first procedure, and then the second procedure is performed. Then, "2" is stored in the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information third area (A = 1), and "3" is stored in the continuity determination information storage area of the prefetch information second area (A = 2). “1” is stored in the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information first area (A = 3).

  Therefore, according to this procedure, the continuity determination information of the area corresponding to the prefetch command that triggered the determination of the execution of the continuous preview effect is stored in the respective continuation determination information storage areas of the prefetch information first to fourth areas. While setting to “1”, from that area toward the area corresponding to the fluctuating effect held earlier (that is, in the direction in which the area number becomes smaller in the first to fourth areas of the pre-reading information), The continuity determination information is set by the number of the variable effects (ie, the number of continuous notices) in which the continuous notice effect is executed so that the value sequentially increases by one. In this way, when the corresponding variable effect performs a continuous announcement effect on the continuous determination information storage area of each of the prefetch information 1st to 4th areas, the remaining variable effects including the variable effect are performed for the remaining several times. It is possible to store continuation determination information indicating whether to set the execution of the continuous announcement effect.

  However, in this procedure, if the information “1” is stored in the continuity determination information storage area of any of the pre-read information first to fourth areas in which the continuity determination information is to be set, the area before the area is set. The new stored continuous determination information is not stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the area corresponding to the fluctuating effect held in the above, but the information already stored is left. When the information “1” is stored in the continuous determination information storage area of any of the areas, the execution of the continuous announcement effect has already been set for the variable effect suspended before that area. Therefore, by not storing new continuation determination information in these areas, the previously set continuation announcement effect can be executed with priority.

  In addition, when the continuous announcement effect is performed by displaying the “jellyfish” image on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the end of the fluctuation effect, that is, immediately after the stop display of the third symbol, a trigger for determining the execution of the continuous announcement effect is provided. In order to display the “jellyfish” image on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variable effect, over a plurality of variable effects held at the time of the start winning corresponding to the variable change, except for the variable effect that became However, the procedure for storing the continuity determination information needs to be slightly different from that described above.

  Execution of a continuous announcement effect from the content of the look-ahead command with the number of times of prefetching being X to the variation effect of Y times (however, the “Y-time variation effect” includes a variation effect that has triggered the execution decision of the continuous announcement effect. Is not included, and indicates a fluctuating effect in which a “jellyfish” image is actually displayed.) First, as a first procedure, the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information (X-1) area "1" is stored. Thus, the variable effect that is held immediately before the variable effect corresponding to the number of times of pre-reading suspension of the look-ahead command that has triggered the execution determination of the continuous advance effect is the last variable effect in which the continuous advance effect is set. I can show you. Here, if the number of continuous announcements Y, which is the number of variable announcements that execute the continuous announcement presentation, is “1”, the storage of the continuity determination information ends in the first procedure.

  On the other hand, if the number of continuous announcements Y, which is the number of variable productions for executing continuous announcement productions, is “2” or more, as a second procedure, the prefetch information (X-1-A) area (1 ≦ A < (A + 1) is stored in the continuous determination information storage area of Y).

  For example, when the number of times X of pre-reading is 4 and the number of consecutive notices Y is 4, "1" is set in the continuation determination information storage area of the third area of pre-reading information in the first procedure, and in the second procedure, “2” is stored in the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information second area (A = 1), and “3” is stored in the continuity determination information storage area of the prefetch information first area (A = 2).

  Therefore, according to this procedure, for each continuous determination information storage area of each of the first to fourth areas of the prefetch information, one area before the area corresponding to the prefetch command that triggered the determination of the execution of the continuous announcement effect is provided. While setting the continuous determination information of the area corresponding to the variable effect to “1”, the area is moved from the area to the area corresponding to the variable effect held earlier (that is, in the pre-read information first to fourth areas). In the direction of decreasing the area number), the continuous determination information is set by the number of the variable effects (ie, the number of continuous notices) in which the continuous notice effect is executed so that the value sequentially increases by one. In this way, when the corresponding variable effect performs a continuous announcement effect on the continuous determination information storage area of each of the prefetch information 1st to 4th areas, the remaining variable effects including the variable effect are performed for the remaining several times. It is possible to store continuation determination information indicating whether to set the execution of the continuous announcement effect.

  In this procedure, if the information “1” is stored in the continuity determination information storage area of any one of the pre-read information first to fourth areas in which the continuity determination information is to be set, the area is determined. The new continuation determination information is not stored in the continuity determination information storage area of the area corresponding to the fluctuating effect suspended previously, but the information already stored is left. Thus, the previously set continuous announcement effect can be executed with priority.

  In the state of FIG. 52 (b), the continuous avoidance flags of the first to fourth areas of the prefetch information are all kept off.

  Next, FIG. 52 (c) shows a state in which a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 in the state of FIG. 52 (b) and the sound effect control device 113 starts a fluctuation effect. As described above, when receiving the variation pattern command from main controller 110, sound ramp control device 113 transfers various information stored in prefetch information first to fourth areas to prefetch information 0th to 3rd areas. Perform shift processing. At this time, the continuity determination information stored in the continuity determination information storage area of each of the prefetch information first to fourth areas and the value of the continuation avoidance flag are also the prefetch information 0 to third having the smaller area number. The shift processing is performed by storing the information in the area for determining the continuity of the area and the continuation avoidance flag.

  That is, in the example of FIG. 52C, the continuity determination information “2” stored in the continuity determination information storage area of the prefetch information second area in the state of FIG. The continuity determination information “1” stored in the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information third area in the state of FIG. 52B is shifted to the determination information storage area, and the continuity determination information storage of the prefetch information second area is performed. Shifted to the area.

  Further, the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information fourth area that has become empty due to the shift processing is in a stage where execution of the continuous preview effect has not yet been determined for the corresponding variable effect, so that “continuous determination information is“ "0" is stored. In addition, the continuous avoidance flag in the prefetch information fourth area is set to off.

  Here, the sound ramp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command, performs a shift process on the prefetch information storage area 223g, and then refers to the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area. Then, if the information is other than “0”, the display control device 114 is instructed to display the “jellyfish” image, which is the image of the continuous announcement effect, on the third symbol display device 81 for the fluctuating effect to be started from now on. Send a continuous notice command. On the other hand, if the continuous determination information is “0”, the continuous announcement effect is not performed in the variable effect. In FIG. 52 (c), the information of the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area is “0”. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 determines not to perform the continuous announcement effect for the fluctuating effect to be started.

  In the state of FIG. 52 (b), the information of the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area is “0” at the stage of FIG. The reason why the continuous announcement effect is not performed is that, in the present embodiment, when the continuous announcement effect is determined to be executed in the state of FIG. This is because it is determined whether to perform over the effect, and the continuity determination information is stored in the continuity determination information storage area of the pre-read information first to fourth areas in accordance with the determination.

  As described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, it is assumed that a new starting prize (ball entry to the first entrance 64) occurs during the variable effect, and the variable effect accompanying the starting prize is suspended. . When a pre-reading process is performed for this start winning prize and a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a continuous announcement effect, and a determination is made not to perform the continuous announcement effect, and the continuous announcement effect is not performed in the next variable effect. Further, even if a single announcement notice effect is performed in the next variable effect, if the image of the continuous notice effect is not displayed in the first variable effect performed after the detection of the start winning, a new start winning effect is not detected thereafter. As long as it is, there is a possibility that the player may easily guess that the image of the single announcement effect displayed in the subsequent variable effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's sense of expectation for the one-off notice effect may also be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, each time a continuous announcement effect is determined, the number of variable effects (the number of continuous announcements) for performing the continuous announcement effect is determined, and the read-ahead information of the first to fourth areas is determined accordingly. Since the continuity determination information is stored in the continuity determination information storage area, even if the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the “jellyfish” image relating to the continuous announcement effect may not be displayed from the fluctuation effect immediately after the determination. Therefore, even if the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous announcement effect is not displayed from the fluctuation effect immediately after the start winning prize, and the “jellyfish” image is displayed in the subsequent fluctuation effect, it is an image related to the single-shot announcement effect. Instead, the player can expect that the image is related to the continuous announcement effect, so that the sense of expectation for the single announcement effect is further increased, and the interest of the player can be further enhanced.

  When the setting of the execution of the continuous announcement effect is performed by the continuous announcement execution counter as in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, any of the fluctuation effects among the pending fluctuation effects is determined. It cannot be specified until a continuous notice effect is set. Therefore, in this case, even if the number of the variable effects (the number of continuous announcements) for performing the continuous announcement effect is determined each time the continuous announcement effect is determined, the variable effect that has triggered the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined. The execution of the continuous announcement effect cannot be set for the variable announcement for the number of continuous announcement times including the above. In this way, after determining the number of the variable productions that perform the continuous announcement production each time the continuous announcement production is determined, the number of the variable productions that includes the continuous production production is determined. The execution of the continuous notice effect can be set for the variable effect of the continuous notice number of times because the continuous determination information storage area is provided in the pre-read information 0th to fourth areas as in the present embodiment. . In other words, with such a configuration, the execution of the continuous announcement effect can be set individually for each of the pending fluctuation effects, so that the continuous announcement effect is determined each time the continuous announcement effect is determined. After determining the number of fluctuating effects (number of continuous notices) to be performed, the execution of the continuous notice effect is performed for the fluctuating effects for the number of continuous notices including the variable effect that triggered the execution decision of the continuous notice effect. Can be set.

  Next, FIG. 52 (d) shows the state of FIG. 52 (c) in which a prefetch command whose prefetch suspension count is 4 is received from the main control device 110, and the jackpot lottery prediction result included in the prefetch command is shown in FIG. It shows the contents of the continuous determination information storage area in each of the prefetch information Nos. 0 to 4 when the execution of the continuous preview effect over three variable effects is determined based on the continuous preview determination table.

  At this time, the continuity determination information is stored in the continuity determination information storage areas of the prefetch information first to fourth areas according to the procedure described with reference to FIG. In the example of FIG. 52 (d), “1” is set in the continuity determination information storage area of the prefetch information fourth area in the first procedure, and the prefetch information third area (A = 1) is further set in the second procedure. Is stored in the continuation determination information storage area. However, in the example of FIG. 52 (d), since the information “1” is stored in the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information second area, the prefetch which is an area corresponding to the fluctuation effect held before that area is performed. No new continuation determination information is stored in the information second area and the prefetch information first area, and the information already stored is left. For example, new continuation determination information “3” is not stored in the continuity determination information storage area of the prefetch information second area (A = 3), and the already stored information “1” is left as it is. As a result, the previously set continuous announcement effect is executed with priority.

  Next, FIG. 52 (e) shows a state in which a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 in the state of FIG. 52 (d), and a fluctuation effect is started by the sound lamp controller 113. In the state of FIG. 52 (e), various information stored in the pre-read information first to fourth areas in the state of FIG. 52 (d) are shifted to the pre-read information 0 to third areas and stored. You. Further, “0” is stored as continuity determination information in the continuity determination information storage area of the prefetch information fourth area that has become empty due to the shift processing, and the continuation avoidance flag of the fourth prefetch information area is set to off. You.

  Then, after the shift processing is performed, the sound ramp control device 113 refers to the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area. In the example of FIG. 52 (e), since the information is “2”, the sound ramp control device 113 responds to the “jellyfish” which is an image of the continuous announcement effect for the variable effect which is to be executed by the variable pattern command. The control to transmit the continuous notice command to the display control device 114 so that the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  Next, FIG. 52 (f) shows a state when the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 in the state of FIG. 52 (e) and the sound effect control device 113 starts the fluctuation effect. In the state of FIG. 52 (f), various information stored in the pre-read information first to fourth areas in the state of FIG. 52 (e) are shifted to the pre-read information 0 to third areas and stored. You. Further, “0” is stored as continuity determination information in the continuity determination information storage area of the prefetch information fourth area that has become empty due to the shift processing, and the continuation avoidance flag of the fourth prefetch information area is set to off. You.

  Then, after the shift processing is performed, the sound ramp control device 113 refers to the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area. In the example of FIG. 52 (f), since the information is “1”, the sound ramp control device 113 responds to the fluctuation effect whose execution is to be started by the fluctuation pattern command from the “jellyfish” image which is a continuous announcement effect. The control to transmit the continuous notice command to the display control device 114 so that the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is performed. When the continuity determination information stored in the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information No. 0 area is “1”, the continuous announcement effect to be set for the variable effect to be executed from now on is one or more. Means the continuous announcement effect performed for the last variation effect among the continuous announcement effects performed over the variation effect. Therefore, in this case, the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information first area is always set to ON. Here, the meaning of setting the continuous avoidance flag to ON will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 52 (g) shows a state when a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 in the state of FIG. In the state of FIG. 52 (g), various information stored in the pre-read information first to fourth areas in the state of FIG. 52 (f) are shifted and stored in the pre-read information No. 0 to third area. You. Among these, the state of the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information first area set to ON in the state of FIG. 52 (g) is also shifted to the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information 0 area in FIG. 52 (f). That is, in the state of FIG. 52 (f), the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information 0 area is set to ON. Further, “0” is stored as continuity determination information in the continuity determination information storage area of the prefetch information fourth area that has become empty due to the shift processing, and the continuation avoidance flag of the fourth prefetch information area is set to off. You.

  Here, normally, after the shift processing is performed, the sound ramp control device 113 refers to the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area, and executes the continuous announcement effect according to the continuity determination information. Make settings. However, in the state of FIG. 52 (f), the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch 0th area is set to ON. As described above, when the continuation avoidance flag of the prefetch 0th area is set to ON, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the content of the continuation determination information stored in the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area. Regardless (although it is “2” in the example of FIG. 52 (g)), the execution of the continuous announcement effect is avoided.

  The ON state set in the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information 0 area is originally the state set in the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch first area in the state of FIG. Here, the state of FIG. 52 (f) is a state at the time when the variable effect performed immediately before the variable effect started in FIG. 52 (g) is started. Then, in FIG. 52 (f), a continuous announcement effect performed for the last variation effect among the continuous announcement effects performed over one or more variation effects up to that time is set. In other words, as shown in FIG. 52 (f), when the continuous announcement effect performed for the last variation effect among the continuous announcement effects performed over one or more variation effects until then is set, the first look-ahead first area By always setting the continuous avoidance flag to ON, the execution of the continuous announcement effect can be avoided in the next variable effect. Thus, it is possible to easily suppress the continuous announcement effect from being continuously executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the continuous avoidance flag of the pre-reading 0th area is set to ON, the execution of the single announcement effect is also avoided. Subsequent announcement of one-shot announcements is also suppressed.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as described in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set, the number of the variable effects for performing the continuous announcement effect is set in the continuous announcement execution counter as it is, and the variation is performed. If the continuous notice execution counter is greater than 0 when the effect is executed, the continuous notice effect is performed in the variable effect, and the value of the continuous notice execution counter is decremented by one to continuously notify the variable effect for the first set number of times. It is configured to execute a production. In the case of such a configuration, after the one continuous announcement effect ends, the continuous announcement effect may start again, that is, the continuous announcement effect may occur continuously.

  As a result, for example, if the last variable production in the first continuous preview production is out of order in the special reach, and the last variable production in the subsequent second continuous production production is out of front and back in the normal reach, the player: You will have the thought of. That is, the special reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the first continuous announcement effect is displayed over a plurality of variable effects, so that the player can play the game with an expectation that the 15R probability will be a big hit. continue. Then, if the result of the special reach is a back and forth, the player will be disappointed once, but the second consecutive announcement effect will be displayed continuously, so that the player will have a stronger expectation of a 15R probability change big hit Become. However, as a result, if the front and rear sides are shifted in the normal reach, the player may be strongly given a feeling of being downgraded compared to the front and rear separation in the special reach displayed earlier.

  Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, after the last variable effect in the first continuous preview effect is out of order, a single-shot advance effect may be performed in the subsequent variable effect. In this case, as a result of the first continuous announcement effect, the player is displaced before and after and is disappointed. Although there is a possibility that the image for the continuous announcement effect is not displayed thereafter, there is a possibility that the betrayal of the player's feeling may be consequently betrayed. In this way, with the configuration described above, there is a possibility that the expectation of the continuous announcement effect held by the player is eventually reduced.

  Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, as described above, for example, a new starting prize (entering the first entrance 64) occurs during the variable effect, and the variable effect accompanying the starting prize is suspended. Assume the case. When a pre-reading process is performed for this start winning prize and a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a continuous announcement effect, and a determination is made not to perform the continuous announcement effect, and the continuous announcement effect is not performed in the next variable effect. Further, even if a single announcement notice effect is performed in the next variable effect, if the image of the continuous notice effect is not displayed in the first variable effect performed after the detection of the start winning, a new start winning effect is not detected thereafter. As long as it is, there is a possibility that the player may easily guess that the image of the single announcement effect displayed in the subsequent variable effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's sense of expectation for the one-off notice effect may also be reduced.

  On the other hand, by configuring as in the second embodiment, it is possible to avoid setting the execution of the continuous announcement effect or the single announcement effect in the single variable effect after the continuous announcement effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress a decrease in the expectation of the continuous announcement effect held by the player, which is caused by the continuous announcement effect or the single announcement effect being performed continuously.

  In addition, after the continuous announcement effect is completed, the start is performed by setting the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect in accordance with the rule that the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variation effect. Even if the image of the continuous announcement effect, that is, the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first variable effect performed after the detection of the winning, the “jellyfish” image is the third symbol in the next variable effect. With the display device 81, the player can have a sense of expectation that the image is a “jellyfish” image displayed as a continuous announcement effect.

  Thus, by configuring the continuous announcement execution counter 223e as in the present embodiment, the player can continue the game while enjoying the continuous announcement effect.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which the continuous avoidance flag storage areas are provided in the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas of the prefetch information storage area 223g. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be provided. In this case, when the continuity determination information stored in the continuity determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area is “1” when the variable effect is started (for example, FIG. 52 (f)), it is provided in the RAM 223. What is necessary is just to set the continuous avoidance flag to ON. Further, when the variable effect is started, the continuous avoidance flag provided in the RAM 223 is referred to, and if it is on, control is performed so that the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect are not performed, and the continuous avoidance flag is controlled. May be set to off. This makes it possible to avoid setting the execution of the continuous announcement effect or the single announcement effect in one variable production after the continuous announcement effect is completed, so that the continuous announcement effect or the single announcement effect is continuously performed. It is possible to easily suppress a decrease in a sense of expectation of the continuous announcement effect held by the player, which is caused by being played.

  By the way, in the second embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, or the prefetch command is destroyed in the destruction determination of the command performed when the fluctuation pattern command is received or when the stop type command is received. If it is determined that it is determined, similar to the first embodiment, the continuous announcement effect is not set regardless of the continuous determination information stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area. The “jellyfish” image is configured not to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command or the stop type command (S1009: No in FIG. 53, S1110: Yes in FIG. 55). reference).

  Here, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, or the prefetch command is destroyed and the above-described special fluctuation effect is performed, when the “jellyfish” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, usually, Because it is a rare effect that the "jellyfish" image is displayed in the special fluctuation effect that is not displayed, it is unknown what the game state that will be given after the end of the special fluctuation effect Nevertheless, there is a risk of giving the player an excessive sense of expectation that a big hit will occur. Then, in the event that the game is lost, the player may be discouraged and the interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in such a case, the “jellyfish” image is configured not to be displayed, so that the game can be performed without giving the player an expectation of a big hit. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the user.

  Further, when receiving the prediction state change command, the audio lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of the continuous announcement effect execution set at that time, as in the first embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, the setting of the continuous announcement effect is canceled by storing “0” in all the continuous determination information storage areas of the prefetch information 0th area to the fourth area (see S1025 in FIG. 53). As described above, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the received prefetch command when the prefetch command is received is a 15R probability variable jackpot or is out of order. Is performed at a predetermined rate. Thereby, when the continuous announcement effect is performed, it is possible to make the player expect that the 15R certain change jackpot having the highest game value will be provided after the end of the continuous announcement effect. In addition, even if the change occurs after the end of the continuous announcement performance, the change pattern in the change is a front-rear reach that can keep the player expecting a big hit or not until the change change ends. Becomes Therefore, the expectation of the player by the continuous announcement effect can be continuously increased until the last variable effect in which the continuous announcement effect is set is stopped and displayed.

  However, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, there is a high possibility that the prediction result notified by the previously transmitted prefetch command is erroneous, and thus the audio lamp control device 113 is set based on the erroneous prefetch command. If the continuous announcement effect is performed to the end, there is a risk that the jackpot type will not be "15R probable variable jackpot" in the last variable effect, or even if it is off, it will not be "reach out of front and back" . As a result, the expectation of the player due to the continuous announcement performance is greatly different from the expectation, and the interest of the player may be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when receiving the predicted state change command, the sound lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of the continuous announcement effect execution set at that time, so that the player can perform the operation after the end of the continuous announcement effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a result different from the expected result.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53 to FIG. 55, a command determination process (S913), a continuous announcement determination process (S1020), and a variation display process (S912) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. ) Will be described. The other processes executed by the MPU 221, namely, the start-up process (see FIG. 28), the main process (see FIG. 29), and the vibration sensor input monitoring process (FIG. 30) are the respective processes of the first embodiment. Therefore, illustration and description are omitted here.

  First, FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process (S913) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment. This command determination process (S913) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, similarly to the first embodiment, and the command received from the main control device 110 Is determined.

  In this command determination process, the processes in S1001 to S1023 and S1024 are the same as the processes in S1001 to S1023 and S1024 in the first embodiment, respectively.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1021 that the predicted state change command has been received (S1021: Yes), all the prefetch information 0th area to the prefetch information storage area 223b provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b as in the first embodiment. After setting the prefetch information validity flag of the fourth area to OFF (S1022), in the second embodiment, the process of S1025 is executed instead of the process of S1023 in the first embodiment, and thereafter, the process returns to the main process.

  In the process of S1025, “0” is stored as continuity determination information in all the continuity determination information storage areas of the pre-read information 0th to fourth areas. Thereby, when the prediction state change command is received, it is possible to cancel all the setting of the execution of the continuous announcement effect which has been set so far for the pending fluctuation effect.

  When the prediction state change command is received, the prediction result notified by the previously transmitted prefetch command is likely to be incorrect, so the continuous announcement effect set based on the incorrect prefetch command is performed to the end. If this is done, in the last variable production, the jackpot type may not be “15R probable variable jackpot” that should occur after the continuous announcement performance, or even if it is off, it may not be “front and rear outreach” . As a result, the expectation of the player due to the continuous announcement performance is greatly different from the expectation, and the interest of the player may be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when receiving the predicted state change command, the sound lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of the continuous announcement effect execution set at that time, so that the player can perform the operation after the end of the continuous announcement effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a result different from the expected result.

  In the command determination process, when it is determined that the command is destroyed (S1005: Yes or S1009: No), the process of S1013 is skipped and the setting of the continuous advance command is not performed. However, similarly to the first embodiment, in addition to the above, all of the currently set continuous announcement effects may be cleared. For example, a process of setting the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e to 0 may be performed before and after the process of S1007 executed in a state where it is determined that the command is destroyed.

  If you do not set the continuous announcement command only for the variable production where the destruction of the command is determined, the situation in which the “jellyfish” image temporarily disappears during the continuous production production will occur, A player who understands that the effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects may be suspicious of whether the jackpot lottery is correctly performed. Therefore, if it is determined that the command has been destroyed and the execution of the currently set continuous announcement effect is cleared, the "jellyfish" image will not be displayed temporarily during the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, details of the continuous announcement determination process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the continuous announcement determination process (S1020) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment. This continuous notice determination process (S1020) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (FIG. 53) that a prefetch command has been received (S1018: Yes). From the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the look-ahead processing, to the fluctuation effect for the start prize before or before the start prize that triggered the acquisition of each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 subjected to the look-ahead processing, It is determined whether or not to perform a continuous announcement effect for displaying an announcement effect image continuously. Further, in the continuous announcement determination process in the second embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the number of continuous announcements, which is the number of the variable effects to be performed, is determined.

  In the continuous notice determination processing, the processing of S1032 to S1037 and S1039 to S1041 is the same as the processing of S1032 to S1037 and S1039 to S1041 in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, in this continuous announcement determination process, when this process is started, first, the process of S1032 is executed without performing the process of S1031 performed in the continuous announcement determination process in the first embodiment. After the process of S1037, the process of S1051 is executed instead of the process of S1038 in the first embodiment.

  In the process of S1051, the number of prefetch suspensions extracted in the process of S1037 is extracted from the continuous announcement determination table selected in the processes of S1033 to S1036 (the jackpot continuous advance announcement determination table 222b1 or the off-going continuous advance announcement determination table 222b2 shown in FIG. 50). With respect to the value of (that is, the number of prefetch suspensions included in the received prefetch command), a continuous announcement determination range associated with each continuous announcement frequency is specified. Then, when the value of the continuous preview lottery counter 223c at that time is included in the continuous preview determination range associated with any of the continuous preview times, the execution of the continuous preview effect is determined, and further, the continuous preview lottery is performed. The number of continuous notices associated with the continuous notice determination range including the value of the counter 223c is specified and determined from the selected continuous notice determination table. Then, control goes to a step S1039.

  Thereafter, in the process of S1039, it is determined whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined based on the result of the process in S1051 (S1039). If it is determined not to execute the continuous announcement effect (S1039: No) ), Skip the subsequent processing and return to the command determination processing. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1039, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined (S1039: Yes), it is determined whether the number of times of prefetch suspension extracted in the process of S1037 is 1 (S1040). As a result, if the prefetch suspension count is not 1, that is, if it is 2 or more (S1040: No), the process proceeds to S1052. Also, as a result of the processing in S1040, if the number of times of pre-reading is 1 (S1040: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the one-time notice execution flag 223f is ON (S1041), and the one-time notice execution flag 223f is ON. If there is (S1041: Yes), the process proceeds to S1052, and if the one-time notice execution flag 223f is off (S1041: No), the subsequent process is skipped and the process returns to the command determination process.

  The processing of S1052 is executed in place of the processing of S1042 in the first embodiment. FIG. 52 is based on the number of prefetch suspensions extracted by the processing of S1037 and the number of continuous notices determined by the processing of S1051. According to the procedure described with reference to, information “1” to “4” is stored as continuity determination information in the continuity determination information storage area of the prefetch information area corresponding to each fluctuation effect. Then, after the processing of S1052 ends, the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Thereby, when the continuous announcement effect is performed by displaying the “jellyfish” image during the fluctuation effect, the continuous announcement effect is executed for each of the continuous determination information storage areas of the first to fourth areas of the prefetch information. While setting the continuity determination information of the area corresponding to the look-ahead command that triggered the determination to “1”, the area is moved from the area to the area corresponding to the variation effect that was held earlier (ie, the look-ahead information In the first to fourth areas, in the direction in which the area number decreases (in the direction in which the area number decreases), the continuous determination is performed by the number of the variable effects (that is, the number of continuous notices) in which the continuous notice effect is executed so that the value increases by one. Information is set.

  Further, at the end of the variable effect, that is, in the case where the continuous announcement effect is performed by displaying the “jellyfish” image on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the stop display of the third symbol, each of the prefetch information pieces 1 to 4 For each continuous determination information storage area of the area, the continuous determination information of the area corresponding to the variable effect immediately preceding the area corresponding to the look-ahead command that triggered the execution determination of the continuous preview effect is set to “1”. From the area to the area corresponding to the fluctuating effect reserved earlier (that is, in the direction in which the area number decreases in the first to fourth areas of the prefetch information). Is increased by one, the continuous determination information is set by the number of variable effects (ie, the number of continuous notices) for executing the continuous notice effect.

  In this way, when the corresponding variable effect performs a continuous announcement effect on the continuous determination information storage area of each of the prefetch information 1st to 4th areas, the remaining variable effects including the variable effect are performed for the remaining several times. It is possible to store continuation determination information indicating whether to set the execution of the continuous announcement effect.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 executes the prefetching process based on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the time of the start winning prize, prior to the timing of starting the execution of the variable effect, and the jackpot lottery. And the result of determination of the fluctuation pattern is predicted. Then, these prediction results are notified to the audio ramp control device 113 by the prefetch command, and the audio ramp control device 113 grasps the number of the variable effects suspended first from the prefetch suspension frequency included in the prefetch command. From the jackpot lottery notified by the look-ahead command, it is determined whether or not to perform the continuous announcement effect for the pending fluctuation effect, and to determine the number of continuous announcements that is the number of the fluctuation effect to execute the continuous announcement effect. . Then, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set for the determined variable number of continuous announcements, including the variation effect in which the prediction result is notified by the look-ahead command that has triggered the execution of the continuous announcement effect. . Thereby, the process in the main control device 110 can be concentrated on the most important process of the pachinko machine 10, that is, the lottery process for randomly selecting a game state to be transitioned based on the start winning, while the sound lamp control device 113 If the MPU 221 having a high processing capability is used, the mode of the continuous announcement effect, the execution condition, and the like can be set in various modes.

  Here, as described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, even if a single-shot announcement effect is performed in order to expect development to a continuous announcement effect, the timing at which the start winning is established and the timing at which the single-shot announcement effect is displayed. In view of the above, there is a possibility that the player may easily guess that the image of the single announcement effect cannot be an image displayed as the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's sense of expectation for the one-off notice effect may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, each time a continuous announcement effect is determined, the number of the variable effects (the number of continuous announcements) in which the continuous announcement effect is determined is determined, and the look-ahead command that triggers the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined. By setting the execution of the continuous preview effect for the determined number of variable effects, including the variable effect in which the prediction result by the pre-reading is notified, the execution of the continuous preview effect is determined according to the detection of the start winning. Also, there may be a case where the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous announcement effect is not displayed from the fluctuation effect immediately after the start winning. Therefore, even if the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous announcement effect is not displayed from the fluctuation effect immediately after the start winning prize, and the “jellyfish” image is displayed in the subsequent fluctuation effect, it is an image related to the single-shot announcement effect. Instead, the player can expect that the image is related to the continuous announcement effect, so that the sense of expectation for the single announcement effect is further increased, and the interest of the player can be further enhanced.

  When the number of times of prefetching suspension is 1, if the execution of the continuous preview effect is determined as it is, the variable effect in which the execution of the continuous preview effect is set is only the variable effect in which the prefetch process is performed to generate the prefetch command. Therefore, the “jellyfish” image that is the image of the continuous announcement effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variation effect. Therefore, in this case, there is a case where “15R probability change jackpot” is obtained after one “jellyfish” image is displayed, and the expectation of the player for the continuous announcement effect for the “jellyfish” image is diluted. There is a risk.

  On the other hand, when the one-time announcement execution flag 223f is on, it means that the execution of the one-time announcement effect is set in the fluctuation effect that is started or being executed at that time, or in the fluctuation effect executed last. I do. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the number of times of prefetching suspension is one, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, and if the single announcement execution flag 223f at that time is on, the process of S1052 is executed. By storing “1” in the continuous determination information storage area of the first look-ahead suspension first area, a “jellyfish” image in a single announcement notice effect is displayed in the first variable effect among two consecutive variable effects, and A "jellyfish" image in the continuous announcement effect can be displayed in the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the continuous announcement effect has been performed over two continuous variable effects, and to give the player a sense of expectation that the 15R certainty big hit will be achieved.

  On the other hand, even if the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined when the number of times of the reading suspension is one, if the single-shot announcement execution flag 223f at that time is off, the process of S1052 is skipped, and the first look-ahead suspension first area is skipped. By not storing “1” in the continuous determination information storage area, it is possible to suppress a case where the continuous announcement effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the continuous announcement effect that the player has on the “jellyfish” image from being diluted.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set only when the one-time announcement execution flag 223f is ON when the number of times of pre-reading is 1 in the continuous announcement determination process (S1040) -1042). On the other hand, the processes of S1040 and S1041 are omitted, and even if the number of times of prefetching suspension is 1, the continuous announcement is performed based on only the lottery result of the continuous announcement effect execution in S1051, regardless of the state of the single announcement announcement execution flag 223f. The execution of the effect may be set. Further, when the number of times of pre-reading is one, the execution of a continuous announcement effect in which the number of continuous announcements is always one may be set.

  This often results in “15R probable jackpot” after one “jellyfish” image is displayed, and diminishes the player's expectation of the continuous announcement effect on the “jellyfish” image. On the other hand, if the player visually recognizes the “jellyfish” image that has not been displayed for the previous variable effect in a certain variable effect, the player It is possible to have a strong sense of expectation that the 15R probable jackpot will be achieved with the “jellyfish” image. Therefore, various expectations can be given by the appearance of the “jellyfish” image, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  Next, the details of the variable display processing according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the variable display processing (S912) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. This fluctuation display processing (S912) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, similarly to the first embodiment, and the fluctuation received from the main control device 110. A process of generating a display variation pattern command based on the pattern command, a process of performing a command destruction determination on the received variation pattern command, and a variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the generated display variation pattern command A process of determining whether or not to execute a continuous announcement effect or a single announcement effect for an effect is performed.

  In the variable display processing, the processing of S1101 to S1113, S1115, and S1121 is the same as the processing of S1101 to S1113, S1115, and S1121 of the variable display processing in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the special variation flag is ON as a result of the process of S1110 (S1110: Yes), the process of S1121 performed in the first embodiment is skipped without performing the process of S1120. Move on to processing. Here, the reason that the process of S1120 in the first embodiment is not performed is that the continuation determination information storage area is provided in the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas in the second embodiment, but is provided in the first embodiment. This is because the continuous notice execution counter 223e is not provided.

  In the second embodiment, the execution of the one-time announcement effect is determined by the process of S1111, and according to the result, the one-time announcement execution flag 223f is set to on by the process of S1112, or the one-time announcement effect is performed by the process of S1113. After the notice execution flag 223f is set to off, the flow shifts to S1131.

  In the processing of S1131, it is determined whether or not the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information 0 area is off (S1131). As a result, if it is on instead of off (S1131: No), the subsequent process is skipped and the process returns to the main process. As a result, the process of S1115 is also skipped, so that the continuous announcement execution flag is not set to ON, and accordingly, the variation effect (hereinafter, “this variation”) in which the execution is started by the variation pattern command for display set in the process of S1106. In this case, execution of a continuous announcement effect or a single announcement effect is not set.

  As described above, in the variable effect performed immediately before, the continuous announcement effect performed for the last variable effect among the continuous announcement effects performed over one or more variable effects until then was set. In this case, when the execution of the next fluctuation effect (that is, the current fluctuation effect) is started, the continuous avoidance flag in the prefetch information 0 area is always turned on. Therefore, when the continuous announcement effect performed for the last variation effect among the continuous announcement effects performed over one or more variation effects until then is set, in the next variation effect (this variation effect) Therefore, the execution of the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect is avoided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the continuous announcement effect from being executed continuously or the single announcement effect from being executed continuously from the continuous announcement effect.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as described above, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set, the continuous announcement execution counter is set to the number of the variable announcements in which the continuous announcement effect is performed, and the continuous announcement is performed when the variable announcement is executed. If the execution counter is greater than 0, the continuous announcement effect is performed over the initially set number of variation effects by subtracting 1 from the value of the continuous announcement execution counter while performing the continuous announcement effect in the variation effect. It is configured. In the case of such a configuration, after the one continuous announcement effect ends, the continuous announcement effect may start again, that is, the continuous announcement effect may occur continuously.

  As a result, for example, if the last variable production in the first continuous preview production is out of order in the special reach, and the last variable production in the subsequent second continuous production production is out of front and back in the normal reach, the player: You will have the thought of. That is, the special reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the first continuous announcement effect is displayed over a plurality of variable effects, so that the player can play the game with an expectation that the 15R probability will be a big hit. continue. Then, if the result of the special reach is a back and forth, the player will be disappointed once, but the second consecutive announcement effect will be displayed continuously, so that the player will have a stronger expectation of a 15R probability change big hit Become. However, as a result, if the front and rear sides are shifted in the normal reach, the player may be strongly given a feeling of being downgraded compared to the front and rear separation in the special reach displayed earlier.

  Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, after the last variable effect in the first continuous preview effect is out of order, a single-shot advance effect may be performed in the subsequent variable effect. In this case, as a result of the first continuous announcement effect, the player is displaced before and after and is disappointed. Although there is a possibility that the image for the continuous announcement effect is not displayed thereafter, there is a possibility that the betrayal of the player's feeling may be consequently betrayed. In this way, with the configuration described above, there is a possibility that the expectation of the continuous announcement effect held by the player is eventually reduced.

  Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, as described above, for example, a new starting prize (entering the first entrance 64) occurs during the variable effect, and the variable effect accompanying the starting prize is suspended. Assume the case. When a pre-reading process is performed for this start winning prize and a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a continuous announcement effect, and a determination is made not to perform the continuous announcement effect, and the continuous announcement effect is not performed in the next variable effect. Further, even if a single announcement notice effect is performed in the next variable effect, if the image of the continuous notice effect is not displayed in the first variable effect performed after the detection of the start winning, a new start winning effect is not detected thereafter. As long as it is, there is a possibility that the player may easily guess that the image of the single announcement effect displayed in the subsequent variable effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's sense of expectation for the one-off notice effect may also be reduced.

  On the other hand, by configuring as in the second embodiment, it is possible to avoid setting the execution of the continuous announcement effect or the single-shot announcement effect in one variation effect after the continuous announcement effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in expectation of the continuous announcement effect held by the player, which is caused by the continuous announcement effect or the single announcement effect being performed continuously.

  In addition, after the continuous announcement effect is completed, the start is performed by setting the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect in accordance with the rule that the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variation effect. Even if the image of the continuous announcement effect, that is, the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first variable effect performed after the detection of the winning, the “jellyfish” image is the third symbol in the next variable effect. With the display device 81, the player can have a sense of expectation that the image is a “jellyfish” image displayed as a continuous announcement effect.

  Thus, by configuring the continuous announcement execution counter 223e as in the present embodiment, the player can continue the game while enjoying the continuous announcement effect.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S1131, if the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information 0 area is off (S1131: Yes), then the information (value) of the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area is greater than 1. It is determined whether it is larger (S1132). As a result, when the value is larger than 1 (S1132: Yes), the process proceeds to S1115, and the continuous announcement execution flag is turned on (S1115). Then, the process returns to the main processing.

  Also, as a result of the processing in S1132, if the information (value) of the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area is 1 or less (S1132: No), furthermore, the continuity determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area It is determined whether or not the information (value) is 1 (S1133). As a result, if the information (value) of the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area is 1 (S1133: Yes), the continuity avoidance flag of the prefetch information 1 area is set to ON (S1134). Then, the process proceeds to the process of S1115, and the continuous announcement execution flag is set to ON (S1115). Then, the process returns to the main processing.

  As described above, when the information (value) of the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area is 1 or more, the continuation notice execution flag is set to ON by the processing of S1115. Thereby, when a stop type command is received thereafter, control is performed so as to transmit a continuous announcement command to the display control device 113, and a “jellyfish” image, which is an image of a single announcement announcement effect with respect to the fluctuation effect, is displayed. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, in the process of S1052 of the continuous preview determination process (FIG. 54), the prefetch that has triggered the execution of the continuous preview effect is performed for each of the continuous determination information storage areas of the prefetch information first to fourth areas. While the continuity determination information of the area corresponding to the command is set to “1”, from that area toward the area corresponding to the fluctuating effect held earlier (that is, in the pre-read information first to fourth areas, The continuity determination information is set by the number of the variable effects that execute the continuous announcement effect (that is, the number of consecutive announcements) so that the value sequentially increases by 1 in the direction of decreasing the area number (in the direction of decreasing the area number).

  Therefore, in this fluctuation display processing, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received (that is, each time the fluctuation start flag is turned on), while the data in the prefetch information storage area is being shifted, it is determined whether the prefetch information 0 area is continuous. When the information (value) in the information storage area is 1 or more, by turning on the continuous notice execution flag, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the continuous notice determination processing, the continuous notice determined together is performed. The “jellyfish” image related to the continuous announcement effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over the variable effects for the number of times.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the prefetch command, the execution is suspended before the variable effect in which the prediction result by the prefetch is notified by the prefetch command. Instead of performing the continuous announcement effect over all the variable effects, the continuous announcement effect is performed over the variable announcements for the number of continuous announcements determined in conjunction with the determination of the execution of the continuous announcement effect.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as described above, the following problem may occur. For example, it is assumed that a new starting prize (ball entry into the first entrance 64) occurs during the variable effect, and the variable effect associated with the starting prize is suspended. When a pre-reading process is performed for this start winning prize and a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a continuous announcement effect, and a determination is made not to perform the continuous announcement effect, and the continuous announcement effect is not performed in the next variable effect. Further, even if a single announcement notice effect is performed in the next variable effect, if the image of the continuous notice effect is not displayed in the first variable effect performed after the detection of the start winning, a new start winning effect is not detected thereafter. As long as it is, there is a possibility that the player may easily guess that the image of the single announcement effect displayed in the subsequent variable effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's sense of expectation for the one-off notice effect may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, each time a continuous announcement effect is determined, the number of the variable effects (the number of continuous announcements) in which the continuous announcement effect is determined is determined, and the look-ahead command that triggers the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined. By setting the execution of the continuous preview effect for the determined number of variable effects, including the variable effect in which the prediction result by the pre-reading is notified, the execution of the continuous preview effect is determined according to the detection of the start winning. Also, there may be a case where the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous announcement effect is not displayed from the fluctuation effect immediately after the start winning. Therefore, even if the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous announcement effect is not displayed from the fluctuation effect immediately after the start winning prize, and the “jellyfish” image is displayed in the subsequent fluctuation effect, it is an image related to the single-shot announcement effect. Instead, the player can expect that the image is related to the continuous announcement effect, so that the sense of expectation for the single announcement effect is further increased, and the interest of the player can be further enhanced.

  If the information (value) of the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area is 1, the continuation avoidance flag of the prefetch information first area is set to ON by the processing of S1134. Here, when the information (value) in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area is 1, the line is executed for the last variable effect among the continuous announcement effects performed over one or more variable effects. This means that the continuous announcement effect is set for the current fluctuation effect. In this embodiment, in such a situation, the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information first area is set to on by the processing of S1134, so that when the next variation pattern command is received, the prefetch information storage area 223g is stored. By performing the shift processing on the other hand, the continuous avoidance flag in the prefetch information 0 area is set to ON. Therefore, for the fluctuation effect for the next fluctuation pattern command, the continuous announcement execution flag is not always set to ON by the process of S1131. Therefore, as described above, the continuous avoidance flag in the first area of the pre-reading information is set to ON so that the continuous announcement effect is executed continuously or the single announcement effect is executed continuously after the continuous announcement effect. It can be easily suppressed only.

  As a result of the process of S1133, if the information (value) of the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area is not 1 (ie, if it is determined that it is 0 (S1133: No)), Since the execution of the continuous announcement effect has not been set, it is next determined whether or not the single announcement execution flag is ON (S1135). As a result, if the one-time announcement execution flag is on (S1135: Yes), the execution of the one-time announcement effect is set for the current variable effect, so the process proceeds to S1115, and the continuous announcement execution flag is turned on. Is set to (S1115). Then, the process returns to the main processing.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1135, if the single-shot announcement execution flag is not on but is off (S1135: No), execution of the single-shot announcement effect is not set for the current variable effect, so the process of S1115 is performed. Skip and return to the main processing.

  Thereby, even if the setting of the execution of the continuous announcement effect is not made, the “jellyfish” image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one shot for one variable effect. Here, paying attention to the one variable effect, the jellyfish image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the variable effect in both the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect. Thereby, when the “jellyfish” image that was not displayed in the at least one previous variable effect is displayed in the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is displayed in the continuous announcement effect. It is possible for the player to continue the game while thinking about whether the image is a "jellyfish" image displayed by a single announcement effect. Then, when the “jellyfish” image is displayed again in the next fluctuation effect, it is possible to strongly make the player recognize that it is a continuous announcement effect, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game. .

  The image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the single announcement effect is the same “jellyfish” image as in the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, it is only necessary to instruct the display control device 114 to display the “jellyfish” image for the variable effect without distinguishing between the single effect effect and the continuous effect effect. Also in the case of setting the continuous preliminary effect, the continuous preview execution flag is set to ON in this variation display process. Thus, after the continuous announcement execution flag is turned on, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are set whether the execution of the single announcement effect or the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set. In the same processing flow, a “jellyfish” image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the variable effect. Therefore, the programs in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be simplified.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that one or both of the pre-read command and the variation pattern command are destroyed (S1105: No), the special variation flag is turned on (S1107), and the special variation flag is set. Is ON (S1110: Yes), the process of setting the continuous announcement execution flag to ON is not executed regardless of the contents of the single announcement lottery counter 223d and the content of the continuous determination information storage area in the prefetch information 0 area. It was configured so that the setting of the notice effect was not performed. Alternatively, if it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the variation pattern command are destroyed (S1105: No), the special variation flag is set to ON and the prefetch information 0 is set. By setting the continuous avoidance flag of the area to ON, the process of setting the continuous advance execution flag to ON is not executed regardless of the contents of the single-shot advance notice lottery counter 223d and the content of the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area. It may be. If the special avoidance flag is set to ON and the continuous avoidance flag in the prefetch information 0 area is set to ON, the change display process is terminated without setting the continuous advance execution flag according to the determination in S1131. Can be. In this case, the process of S1110 may be omitted.

  In addition, when it is determined that one or both of the pre-reading command and the variation pattern command are destroyed, in addition to being configured not to perform the continuous announcement effect, the current setting is not set. The execution of all the continuous announcement effects may be cleared. For example, a process of setting the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e to 0 may be performed before and after the process of S1107 executed in a state where it is determined that the command is destroyed.

  If you do not set the continuous announcement command only for the variable production where the destruction of the command is determined, the situation in which the “jellyfish” image temporarily disappears during the continuous production production will occur, A player who understands that the effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects may be suspicious of whether the jackpot lottery is correctly performed. Therefore, if it is determined that the command has been destroyed and the execution of the currently set continuous announcement effect is cleared, the "jellyfish" image will not be displayed temporarily during the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the one-time announcement effect is determined each time the variation pattern command is received. Instead, the execution of the one-time announcement effect is determined each time the prefetch command is received. May be configured. For example, in the command determination process (FIG. 53), when it is determined that the prefetch command has been received (S1018: Yes), if the value of the single announcement lottery counter 223d is, for example, 10, the prefetch indicated by the prefetch command is performed. May be set to the execution of a single announcement effect with respect to the variable effect performed. In this case, in each of the pre-read information 0th to 4th areas, a single-shot notice execution flag indicating that a single-shot notice effect is to be executed when the information is on is provided. If the execution of the one-time announcement effect is set as an initial value in the one-time announcement execution flag, and the execution of the one-time announcement effect is set, the one-shot advance of the area corresponding to the number of times of the pre-reading of the pre-reading command among the pre-reading information Nos. 0 to 4 is performed. Set the notice execution flag to ON. Then, in the variable display processing, the shift processing is performed between the prefetch information 0th to the 4th areas including the one-time notice execution flag by the processing of S1103, and the one-time notice of the 0th area of the prefetch information is performed in the processing of S1135. It is determined whether or not the execution flag is on. Also, in the process of S1041 of the continuous announcement determination process (FIG. 54), it is also determined whether or not the one-time announcement execution flag in the prefetch information 0 area is on. In the shift processing of S1103, the one-time announcement execution flag of the prefetched information fourth area that has become empty is set to off. In this case, the processing of S1111 to S1113 and the processing of S1121 in the variable display processing can be omitted.

  In this way, by determining the execution of the one-time announcement effect each time the pre-read command is received, the determination of the execution of the continuous announcement effect also performed each time the pre-fetch command is received is also determined. It can be considered whether or not the effect execution is set. For example, when the execution of the single announcement effect is set for the pending fluctuation effect, it is possible to determine that the execution of the continuous announcement effect is not set. By making such a determination, the one-time announcement effect is more likely to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, when the “jellyfish” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is determined by the one-time announcement effect. It is possible to make the player more strongly consider whether the event is due to a continuous announcement effect. As described above, in determining the execution of the continuous announcement effect performed each time the prefetch command is received, by considering whether or not the execution of the single announcement effect is set for the pending fluctuation effect, more Since the execution of the effect can be determined in consideration of the conditions, the interest for the player can be further improved.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined from the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the prefetch command, the prediction result by the prefetch is determined by the prefetch command. Instead of performing a continuous preview effect over all the variable productions that were suspended before the notified variable production, the continuous preview production was performed over the number of continuous previews determined in conjunction with the decision to execute the continuous preview production. Is configured to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, when a new starting prize (ball entry to the first entrance 64) occurs during the variable effect, and the variable effect accompanying the starting prize is suspended. Is assumed. When a pre-reading process is performed for this start winning prize and a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a continuous announcement effect, and a determination is made not to perform the continuous announcement effect, and the continuous announcement effect is not performed in the next variable effect. Further, even if a single announcement notice effect is performed in the next variable effect, if the image of the continuous notice effect is not displayed in the first variable effect performed after the detection of the start winning, a new start winning effect is not detected thereafter. As long as it is, there is a possibility that the player may easily guess that the image of the single announcement effect displayed in the subsequent variable effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's sense of expectation for the one-off notice effect may also be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, each time a continuous announcement effect is determined, the number of variable effects (the number of continuous announcements) for performing the continuous announcement effect is determined, and the read-ahead information of the first to fourth areas is determined accordingly. Since the continuity determination information is stored in the continuity determination information storage area, even if the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the “jellyfish” image relating to the continuous announcement effect may not be displayed from the fluctuation effect immediately after the determination. Therefore, even if the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous announcement effect is not displayed from the fluctuation effect immediately after the start winning prize, and the “jellyfish” image is displayed in the subsequent fluctuation effect, it is an image related to the single-shot announcement effect. Instead, the player can expect that the image is related to the continuous announcement effect, so that the sense of expectation for the single announcement effect is further increased, and the interest of the player can be further enhanced.

  When the setting of the execution of the continuous announcement effect is performed by the continuous announcement execution counter as in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, any of the fluctuation effects among the pending fluctuation effects is determined. It cannot be specified until a continuous notice effect is set. Therefore, in this case, even if the number of the variable effects (the number of continuous announcements) for performing the continuous announcement effect is determined each time the continuous announcement effect is determined, the variable effect that has triggered the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined. The execution of the continuous announcement effect cannot be set for the variable announcement for the number of continuous announcement times including the above. In this way, after determining the number of the variable productions that perform the continuous announcement production each time the continuous announcement production is determined, the number of the variable productions that includes the continuous production production is determined. The execution of the continuous notice effect can be set for the variable effect of the continuous notice number of times because the continuous determination information storage area is provided in the pre-read information 0th to fourth areas as in the present embodiment. . In other words, with such a configuration, the execution of the continuous announcement effect can be set individually for each of the pending fluctuation effects, so that the continuous announcement effect is determined each time the continuous announcement effect is determined. After determining the number of fluctuating effects (number of continuous notices) to be performed, the execution of the continuous notice effect is performed for the fluctuating effects for the number of continuous notices including the variable effect that triggered the execution decision of the continuous notice effect. Can be set.

  In the second embodiment, when the information (value) of the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area is 1, the continuation avoidance flag of the prefetch information 1 area is set to ON. Here, when the information (value) in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area is 1, the line is executed for the last variable effect among the continuous announcement effects performed over one or more variable effects. This means that the continuous announcement effect is set for the current fluctuation effect. In this embodiment, in such a situation, the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information first area is set to ON, so that the shift processing is performed on the prefetch information storage area 223g when the next variation pattern command is received. Is performed, the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information 0 area is set to ON. Therefore, the continuous announcement execution flag is not always set to ON for the fluctuation effect for the next fluctuation pattern command. Therefore, by simply setting the continuous avoidance flag in the first look-ahead information area to indicate that the continuous announcement effect is executed continuously or the single announcement effect is executed consecutively to the continuous announcement effect, it is easily performed. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment can achieve the same operation and effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and second embodiments described above, the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e are provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, and the counters C1 to C3 acquired at the timing of the start winning prize. , CS1 are stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e separately from the reserved ball storage area 203b, and then stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e. The case where the value of each counter is pre-read and the pre-read process for predicting the result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination is executed has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j at the timing of the starting prize are changed before the start timing of the execution of the variable effect. A read-ahead process is performed to directly read out and pre-read from the reserved ball storage area 203j and predict the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and second embodiments in that the main control device 110 is provided with a RAM 203 instead of the RAM 203. In addition, the fluctuation process (S109) and the start winning process (S110) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the prefetch process (S703) in the main process (see FIG. 25). ) Are different from those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device Various processes executed by the 114 MPU 231 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the configuration of the RAM 203 is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the first or second embodiment. The RAM 203 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed, like the RAM 203 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. It has at least a reserved sphere storage area 203j and a prefetch pending count storage area 203k that are not in the RAM 203 of the embodiment or the second embodiment. On the other hand, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment has at least a reserved ball number counter 203a, a reserved ball execution area 203c, a look-ahead probable change flag 203h, and a predicted state change flag 203i having the same configuration and function as the first embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 56, the sound lamp control device 113 has the same configuration as the sound lamp control device 113 according to the first embodiment. However, the same configuration as the sound lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment may be adopted. Good.

  The reserved ball storage area 203j, like the reserved ball storage area 203b in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, stores a first random number counter C1 obtained from a counter buffer (see FIG. 57) upon detection of a start winning. , A first hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1.

  Here, the details of the reserved ball storage area 203j will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a relationship among various counters provided in the RAM 203, a reserved ball storage area 203j, and a reserved ball execution area 203c. The first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second random number counter C4, the second random number counter C1, which are various counters provided in the RAM 203. The 2 initial value random number counter CINI2 has the same configuration and function as the counters C1 to C3, CS1, CINI1, C4, and CINI2 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, and is a counter of one area of the RAM 203. Is stored in the buffer. These counters are updated in the timer interrupt processing or the main processing in the same manner as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. When a start winning is detected, a first random number counter C1 used for a jackpot lottery, a first symbol counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type, and a stop symbol when the player loses the game are detected. A stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine a change pattern to be stopped and a change type counter CS1 used to determine a change pattern to stop a stop symbol at the time of a big hit are read from the counter buffer and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j. Is stored.

  As with the reserved ball storage area 203b in the first or second embodiment, the reserved ball storage area 203j stores data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to one start winning prize up to four times. There are four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) so that data can be stored (reserved) up to this point. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won (starts winning) the first ball entrance 64 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19), the MPU 201 reads the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer. Among the vacant areas among the four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) provided in the reserved sphere storage area 203j, the areas having the smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are sequentially assigned, The obtained counter value is stored.

  Each of the four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) stores a first random number counter storage area 203j1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and a second random number counter storage area 203j1 for storing the value of the first random counter C2. A per-type counter storage area 203j2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203j3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203j4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided. These counter storage areas 203j1 to 203j4 are the first random number counter storage area 203b1, the first type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variation type in the first or second embodiment, respectively. It has the same configuration and function as the counter storage area 203b4.

  In this embodiment, the first hit random number counter storage area 203j1, the first hit type counter storage area 203j2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203j3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203j4 are stored in one holding ball storage area. Although provided in 203j, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and four areas 203j1, 203j2, 203j3, and 203j4 may be provided in any of the reserved ball storage areas.

  When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the MPU 201 determines whether or not the first to fourth areas of the reserved sphere storage area 203j and the reserved sphere execution area 203c are different from those of the first or second embodiment. The same shift processing is performed. Thus, the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in each of the counter storage areas 203j1 to 203j4 of the first reserved area of the reserved sphere storage area 203b is stored in each of the counters of the reserved sphere execution area 203c. The areas are shifted to areas 203c1 to 203c4, respectively. Then, the MPU 201 refers to the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 22), performs a jackpot lottery based on the reference data, and changes the fluctuation corresponding to the lottery result. Determine the pattern and stop type. In the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a variation effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  The reserved ball storage area 203j is different from the reserved ball storage area 203b in the first or second embodiment in that each reserved area (reserved first to fourth areas) is provided with a prefetch execution flag 203j5. That is the point. The prefetch execution flag 203j5 is a flag indicating whether or not the prefetching process has been executed in the reserved area where the prefetching execution flag 203j5 is provided. Indicates that the prefetch processing has not been executed.

  The prefetch execution flag 203j5 is initialized to off in a RAM initialization process (see S613 in FIG. 24) executed when the power is turned on. Further, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the timing when the ball entry (start winning prize) to the first entrance 64 is detected are stored in one of the reserved ball storage areas 203j, The prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the one reserved area storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is set to off. This indicates that the prefetch processing has not been executed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved area. On the other hand, when the pre-reading process of pre-reading the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the one reserved area and predicting the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination is executed, the pre-reading execution flag 203j5 of the one reserved area is set. This is set to ON, indicating that the prefetch processing has been executed.

  When the shift processing is performed between the reserved first to fourth areas, the values set in the prefetch execution flags 203j5 of the reserved second to fourth areas are stored in the other counter storage areas 203j1 to 203j4. The value is shifted to the prefetch execution flag 203j of the area (the first to third areas) having the smaller area number together with the value thus set. That is, the value of the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the reserved second area is shifted to the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the reserved first area, and the value of the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the reserved third area is shifted to the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the reserved second area. Then, the value of the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the reserved fourth area is shifted to the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the reserved third area. As described above, by shifting the value of the prefetch execution flag 203j together with the value of each counter, the prefetch processing is performed on each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each holding area by the value of the prefetch execution flag 203j. Can be accurately indicated.

  The value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is being used for a jackpot lottery or the like with the execution start timing of the variable effect, or has already been used for the jackpot lottery or the like. Since the value is used, the pre-reading process is not performed on each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. Thus, the prefetch execution flag is not provided for the reserved ball execution area 203c. Therefore, when shifting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the reserved first area to the reserved ball execution area 203c, the value of the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c. Is not performed.

  The MPU 201 repeatedly executes a prefetch process described later with reference to FIG. 61 in the main process (see FIG. 25), and in this prefetch process, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held. Reference is made to the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the reserved area. If there is a pending area for which prefetching has not been performed, the reserved area in which each counter value is retained first among the unexecuted reserved areas, that is, the area number of the area number among the reserved areas for which prefetching has not been performed. A look-ahead command that pre-reads the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the small holding area, predicts the results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the prediction results (FIG. 8) Execute the pre-reading process for setting (see). Until it is confirmed that the prefetch processing has been executed for all the reserved areas in which the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved, the MPU 201 determines whether the prefetch processing has not been executed. The prefetching process is continued for the reserved area in which each counter value is retained first. Thereby, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j are pre-read according to the order in which they are reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203j, and the results of the jackpot lottery and the change pattern determination are sequentially determined. Predictive look-ahead processing can be executed.

  When the MPU 201 executes the prefetching process in the one reserved area, as described above, the MPU 201 sets the prefetching execution flag of the one reserved area to ON, indicating that the prefetching process has been executed in the reserved area. As a result, it is possible to prevent the prefetch processing from being executed again for the reserved area.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held by the prefetching process (see FIGS. 25 and 61) repeatedly executed by the MPU 201 in the main process. Referring to the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the pending area being read, and if there is a pending area that has not been prefetched, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the unexecuted pending area are prefetched for each reserved area. Then, a look-ahead process for predicting the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination is executed. Further, in the third embodiment, similar to the first embodiment, the jackpot lottery performed at the start of the execution of the variable effect is one of the timer interrupt processes executed prior to the main process. It is executed in a certain fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22).

  Here, apart from the jackpot lottery performed at the start of the execution of the variable production, the pachinko machine is configured to perform a look-ahead process for prefetching each counter value acquired and held at the time of starting winning and predicting the result of the jackpot lottery. When configured, the jackpot lottery needs to compare the counter value obtained by the starting prize with each individual winning value one by one, and also in the pre-reading process, separately from the jackpot lottery, It is necessary to compare each hit value one by one. Thereby, especially when the pachinko machine is in the high probability state, the comparison process between the counter value and the individual hit value is performed in both the jackpot lottery and the pre-reading process, for example, when the number of hit values in the high probability state is 30 or more. For example, it must be repeated up to 30 times. Therefore, it takes a long time to perform the comparison processing between the counter value and the winning value performed in each of the jackpot lottery and the prefetching process.

  In such a situation, as in the conventional gaming machine, at the start of the variable effect, each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the start prize detected after the start prize corresponding to the variable effect. If the pre-reading process is used, the result of the jackpot lottery associated with the pre-reading at the time of starting winning is predicted around the time when the jackpot lottery at the start of execution of the variable effect is performed, and the most in the game There is a possibility that the completion of the jackpot lottery, which is an important process, is delayed, thereby affecting the game.

  In the timer interrupt process, a process of determining a start of a variable effect and executing a jackpot lottery, and detecting a start winning to acquire the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and executing a look-ahead process. In the case where the processing is included, the jackpot lottery process and the prefetching process may be performed together in one timer interrupt process based on the determination of the start of the variable effect and the detection of the start winning. . As described above, since each process may require a long processing time, in this case, all the processes included in the timer interrupt process may not be completed before the next timer interrupt process is started. Can occur. Therefore, various controls required for the game are delayed, which may affect the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, as described above, while performing the pre-reading process in the main process, the jackpot lottery performed at the start of the execution of the variable effect is performed by the timer interrupt. It is configured to be executed in a fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22) which is one of the processes. Thus, even if the pre-reading process is being executed in the main process, the timer interrupt process is executed with priority, so that the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect. On the other hand, even if the timer interrupt processing is executed during the prefetch processing, the prefetch processing can be surely completed because the timer interrupt processing is executed continuously after the end of the timer interrupt processing. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the prefetching process is executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired when the start winning is detected, and the result of the jackpot lottery or the like is predicted. In addition, since the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect, the game can be controlled normally.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j at the timing of the start winning prize are directly read out from the reserved ball storage area 203j and prefetched, and the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern are performed. It is configured to execute a look-ahead process for predicting the result of the determination. Thereby, the execution start timing of the variable effect is reached during the prefetching process, and when the shift process is performed between the respective reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved sphere storage area 203j, the reserved area being prefetched is shifted. However, the increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e are provided as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment.

  Returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. The prefetch suspension count storage area 203k stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the suspension area in which the prefetch processing is being executed among the suspension first to fourth areas provided in the suspension sphere storage area 203j. This is an area for storing the number of times of suspension that is kept suspended as the number of times of prefetching suspension. That is, if the reserved area in which the pre-reading process is being executed is the reserved first area, the number of times that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area are kept reserved is one. Therefore, “1” is stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203k as the prefetch suspension frequency.

  Similarly, if the reserved area in which the prefetching process is being executed is the second reserved area, “2” is stored in the prefetched pending count storage area 203k, and the reserved area in which the prefetching process is being executed is the third reserved area. For example, "3" is stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203k, and if the suspension area in which the prefetch processing is being executed is the suspension fourth area, "4" is stored as the prefetch suspension count in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203k. Is stored.

  The look-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k is included in the look-ahead command generated as a result of the look-ahead processing, and is used together with the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern to determine whether the voice lamp control device 113 is notified. Accordingly, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the prefetch command can grasp the number of suspensions of the fluctuation effect executed according to the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination obtained by the prefetch processing.

  Also, the number of times of prefetching reservation stored in the number of times of prefetching reservation 203k is referred to when the MPU 201 executes the prefetching process, and the number of times of prefetching suspension stored in the number of times of prefetching reservation storage area 203k is The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read and pre-read to predict the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination.

  Here, the setting of the prefetch suspension count storage area 203k is performed when the prefetching of each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in one suspension area is started in the prefetch processing. This is performed by storing the stored counts of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 as the prefetch reservation count in the prefetch reservation count storage area 203k (see S787 in FIG. 61). In accordance with the execution start timing of the variable effect, the shift processing is performed between the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203j, and the number of prefetch reserved times stored in the number of prefetch reserved times storage area 203k. Is subtracted by 1 (see S321 in FIG. 59).

  Here, when the shift processing is performed between the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved sphere storage area 203j, the reserved area in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch processing are stored becomes the area number of the reserved area. Move to one smaller area. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, since the number of times of prefetching reservation of the number of times of prefetching reservation storage area 203k is decremented by one in accordance with the shift processing, the number of times of prefetching of the number of times of prefetching reservation storage area 203k is: Even in the case where the shift process is performed during the pre-reading process at the execution start timing of the variable effect, the number of suspensions of each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the pre-reading process and the counter value are stored. The holding area can be accurately indicated.

  Therefore, by including the number of times of prefetching reservation stored in the number of prefetching reservations storage area 203k in the prefetching command, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the prefetching command predicts the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination obtained by the prefetching process. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of suspensions of the variable effect executed according to the result.

  Also, when executing the prefetching process, the MPU 201 refers to the prefetching suspension count storage area 203k, and from the suspension area corresponding to the prefetching suspension count stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203k, reads the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Is prefetched, even if the shift process is performed in the reserved ball storage area 203j during the prefetching process as the execution start timing of the variable effect, there is no problem after the shift process. Each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetching process can be prefetched. Therefore, since it is not necessary to recognize whether or not the shift processing has been performed in the reserved sphere storage area 203j during the pre-reading processing, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved sphere storage area 203j are directly read. Even in the case of pre-reading, it is possible to suppress the processing from becoming complicated.

  As described above, the look-ahead likelihood change flag 203h has the same configuration and function as the look-ahead likelihood change flag 203h in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, but in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the first look-ahead variable flag has the first structure. While the MPU 201 refers to the case where the prefetch processing is executed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, in the third embodiment, The prefetch processing is executed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved area indicated by the prefetch reserved number of times storage area 203k among the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Referenced by the MPU 201 in some cases.

  If the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is off, the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 predicted when an actual jackpot lottery is performed based on the counter value stored in the reserved area of the look-ahead target is in the low probability state. , The winning value is set to “7,307,582”, and the result of the jackpot lottery is predicted.

  On the other hand, if the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is on, the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 which is predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on the counter value stored in the reserved area of the look-ahead target is a high probability state. (Probable change state), the hit value is set to “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 826, 866, 892, and the result of the jackpot lottery is predicted (see S787 in FIG. 61).

  In the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the setting of the prefetch certainty change flag 203h is performed by prefetching the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. Although performed in accordance with the predicted result of the predicted jackpot lottery, in the third embodiment, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved area indicated by the prefetch reserved count storage area 203k are read in advance. This is performed according to the predicted result of the predicted jackpot lottery. That is, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery performed by the process of S787 of the look-ahead process of FIG. 61 is a 15R probability change jackpot or a 2R probability change jackpot, the gaming state becomes a high probability state (probability change state) after the actual jackpot lottery is performed. ) Is predicted, so that the look-ahead certainty change flag 203h is set to ON (see S790 in FIG. 61). If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is other jackpots, that is, 15R regular jackpot, it is predicted that the gaming state will shift to the low probability state after the actual jackpot lottery is performed, so the look-ahead probability change flag 203h Is set to off (S792 in FIG. 61). Also, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of the range, it is predicted that the gaming state is maintained as it is, so the value of the prefetch certainty change flag 203h is maintained as it is (S791: Yes branch in FIG. 61).

  However, also in the third embodiment, the look-ahead process is not necessarily performed on the counter values corresponding to all the fluctuation effects, so the value of the look-ahead probable change flag 203h is determined based on only the prediction result of the jackpot type determination in the process of S787. Is set, there is a possibility that the prediction of the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed may be greatly shifted. Therefore, in the third embodiment, similarly to the first or second embodiment, the value of the look-ahead probable change flag 203h is set in consideration of the result of the original jackpot lottery, and the original jackpot lottery is performed. The possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 at the time is predicted (S404 to S408 in FIG. 60). Thereby, even when the pre-reading process is not necessarily executed for the counter values corresponding to all the fluctuation effects, the prediction of the gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed has higher accuracy. Can be done with

  Further, in the third embodiment, the setting of the prediction state change flag 203i is performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In other words, when the original jackpot lottery result is “15R probable jackpot” or “2R probable jackpot” and the game state shifts to the high probability state (probable change state), the look-ahead probable change flag 203h is turned off. When the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to ON, or when the original jackpot lottery result is another jackpot (15R normal jackpot) and the gaming state shifts to the low probability state, the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is turned on. Because of this, when the prefetch certainty change flag 203h is set to off, the prediction state change flag 203i is set to on (see S409 in FIG. 60).

  When the result of the original jackpot lottery is “15R probable jackpot” or “2R probable jackpot” and the game state shifts to the high probability state (probable change state), the look-ahead probable change flag 203h is turned off, When the flag 203h is set to ON, or when the result of the original jackpot lottery is another jackpot (15R normal jackpot) and the gaming state shifts to the low probability state, the look-ahead probable change flag 203h is ON. When the prefetch probability change flag 203h is set to off, it means that the prefetch process has not been executed for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in which the original jackpot lottery has been performed. , There is a high possibility that the look-ahead probability change flag 203h indicates an incorrect prediction state. Therefore, the prediction result based on the look-ahead performed earlier, including the look-ahead being executed in the main process, is based on the prediction of the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed. It is likely that it was done.

  Therefore, in the third embodiment as well, in such a case, by setting the prediction state change flag 203i to ON (see S409 in FIG. 60), the prefetching performed previously, including the prefetching currently performed, is incorrect. It can be shown that there is a high possibility that the prediction is performed based on the value of the look-ahead probable change flag 203h.

  In the first or second embodiment, the MPU 201 is stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e in the prefetch processing (see FIG. 26) executed in the main processing. When it is detected that the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON while the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are being prefetched, the prefetching is stopped (S758: Yes, FIG. 26). S768: Yes), in the third embodiment, in the prefetching process (see FIG. 61) executed in the main process, the MPU 201 executes the counter stored in the reservation area indicated by the prefetch reservation count storage area 203k. While the values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are read ahead, the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON. When it is detected that, to suspend the prefetching (S794 of FIG. 61: Yes). Thereby, it is possible to suppress the prefetching from being performed based on the incorrect value of the prefetching certainty change flag 203h.

  Further, in the third embodiment, when the MPU 201 detects that the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON in the pre-reading process (see FIG. 61) executed in the main process, the first embodiment or the second embodiment As in the embodiment, a prediction state change command is set (S799 in FIG. 61) and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, when receiving the prediction state change command, the sound lamp control device 113 invalidates all prediction results by the prefetching process stored in the prefetching information storage area 223b at that time. Thus, it is possible to prevent various controls based on prefetching from being performed based on an incorrect prediction result. For example, by performing the command destruction determination based on the incorrect prediction result, it is possible to suppress the determination that the command is destroyed in the command destruction determination even though the command is not destroyed.

  Further, in the third embodiment, when the MPU 201 detects that the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON in the prefetching process (see FIG. 61) executed in the main process, the MPU 201 stores the predicted state change flag 203i in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Using the held counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the prefetching process is executed again based on the correct state that the pachinko machine 10 can take.

  Here, in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 of the one reserved area in which various counter values are reserved among the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b. The value is transcribed to the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e, respectively, and stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203d5 or the look-ahead hold count storage area 203e5 with the hold count corresponding to the hold area as the look-ahead hold count. Then, by setting the first pre-reading processing flag 203f or the second pre-reading processing flag 203g to ON, re-reading is performed on the transcribed counters C1 to C3 and CS1. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the prefetch execution flags 203j5 of all the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203j are set to off, and the prefetch is performed in all the reserved first to fourth areas. By indicating that the processing has not been executed, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved sphere storage area 203j are prefetched again (see FIG. 61). See S2701).

  Thereby, based on the value of the correct look-ahead probable change flag 203h, that is, the correct game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take, with respect to the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j, Is executed, and the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination can be notified to the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, the audio ramp control device 113 can execute more versatile control using more prediction results.

  In the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the prediction state change flag 203i sets the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for performing prefetching again in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. Later, it was set off. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when the MPU 201 detects that the prediction state change flag 203i is on during the pre-read processing, the MPU 201 sets the prediction state change flag to off (see S2702 in FIG. 61).

  In the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the predicted state change flag 203i is included in the start winning process (see FIG. 20) which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 19) executed by the MPU 201. If the predicted state change flag 203i is ON when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by detecting and detecting the start winning are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b, they are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are not stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the first prefetch processing flag 203e or the second prefetch processing flag 203f is set to ON. Although the processing is not executed, such a configuration is not necessarily required in the third embodiment. Because, in the third embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved sphere storage area 203b are directly read out and the pre-reading process is executed, so as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, Before storing the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for performing the prefetching again in the first prefetching execution area 203d or the second prefetching execution area 203e, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning prize are stored in the first prefetching execution area 203d. Alternatively, it is not necessary to suppress storage in the second prefetch execution area 203e.

  Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. The start winning process is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) executed every 4 milliseconds prior to the main process (FIG. 25) (S110), and the first entrance port It is determined whether or not there is a ball (start winning) in the ball 64, and if there is a starting winning, a process of storing (holding) the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the holding ball storage area 203b is executed. It is.

  In each of the processes of S201 to S205 of the start winning process, the same processes as those of S201 to S205 of the start winning process in the first embodiment or the second embodiment are respectively executed. When the process of S205 is completed, in the start winning process in the third embodiment, the process of S221 is executed instead of the processes of S206 to S214 of the start winning process in the first embodiment or the second embodiment.

  In the processing of S221, the prefetch execution flag 203j5 provided in the holding area (one of the holding first to fourth areas) in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored by the processing of S205 is set to off. . Then, after the process of S221, the start winning process is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  As described above, the prefetch execution flag 203j5 provided in the holding area (any of the holding first to fourth areas) in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored by the processing of S205 is set to OFF. Thus, it is possible to indicate that the pre-reading process has not been executed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 newly stored in one of the holding areas of the holding ball storage area 203j following the start winning. As a result, the MPU 201 performs prefetching on the newly stored values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the prefetching process (see FIG. 61), and predicts the results of the jackpot lottery and the change pattern determination. I do.

  Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. This variation process is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) executed every 4 milliseconds prior to the main process (FIG. 25) (S109), and the first symbol display device 37 And a variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, the processes in S301 to S305, S310, and S312 to S317 are the same as the processes in S301 to S305, S310, and S312 to S317 in the first or second embodiment, respectively. You. Further, the variation start process in S311 is obtained by omitting a part of the variation start process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. On the other hand, in the variation process of the third embodiment, when the process of S305 is completed, the process of S321 is executed instead of the processes of S306 to S309 of the variation process of the first embodiment or the second embodiment.

  In other words, as a result of the determination in S304, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved ball number N) is not 0 (S304: Yes), and it is determined that the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect is determined. When the value (the number of reserved balls N) is subtracted by 1 (S305), the value of the number of times of prefetch suspension stored in the number of prefetch suspension times storage area 203k is subtracted by 1 (S321), and the process proceeds to S310. Thereafter, in the process of S310, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j is shifted, and the first symbol display device 37 is operated based on the values of the various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the shift process. Then, a change start process for the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S311), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  As described above, in the process of S321, in accordance with the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, the shift processing is performed between the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved sphere storage area 203j, and the number of prefetch reservation times storage area 203k Is decremented by one from the number of times of pre-reading suspension stored in.

  As described above, when the shift processing is performed between the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved sphere storage area 203j, the reserved areas storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch processing are changed to the area. Move to the area one number smaller. On the other hand, in the process of S321, the number of prefetch reservations in the prefetch reservation frequency storage area 203k is decremented by one at the same time as the shift processing is performed. Even when the shift process is performed during the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, the number of times each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is held during the pre-reading process and the holding area in which the counter value is stored. Can be shown exactly.

  Therefore, by including the number of times of prefetching reservation stored in the number of prefetching reservations storage area 203k in the prefetching command, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the prefetching command predicts the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination obtained by the prefetching process. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of suspensions of the variable effect executed according to the result.

  Also, when executing the prefetching process, the MPU 201 refers to the prefetching suspension count storage area 203k, and from the suspension area corresponding to the prefetching suspension count stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203k, reads the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Is prefetched, even if the shift process is performed in the reserved ball storage area 203j during the prefetching process as the execution start timing of the variable effect, there is no problem after the shift process. Each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetching process can be prefetched. Therefore, since it is not necessary to recognize whether or not the shift processing has been performed in the reserved sphere storage area 203j during the pre-reading processing, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved sphere storage area 203j are directly read. Even in the case of pre-reading, it is possible to suppress the processing from becoming complicated.

  Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating a change start process (S311) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. As described above, this change start processing is one of the change processing, and based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, a lottery of "big hit" or "missing" (big hit lottery). Is performed, and the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The change start processing according to the third embodiment includes, from the change start processing according to the first embodiment or the second embodiment, processing for setting the first prefetching processing flag 203f to off (S410) and processing for the second prefetching. The processing of setting the middle flag 203g to off (S411) is omitted. That is, in the fluctuation start processing in the third embodiment, after setting the prediction state change flag 203i to ON in the processing of S409, the processing shifts to the processing of S414. In the third embodiment, since the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b are directly read out and the pre-reading process is executed, the third embodiment is similar to the first or second embodiment. Neither the first prefetch execution area 203d nor the second prefetch execution area 203e is provided, and therefore, neither the first prefetching processing flag 203f nor the second prefetching processing flag 203g is provided. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the process of turning off these flags is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating the prefetching process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. This look-ahead process is a process that is repeatedly executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (FIG. 25) (S701). In addition, before referring to a jackpot lottery or the like performed at the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, the result is pre-read and the result of the jackpot lottery and the determination result of the fluctuation pattern are predicted in advance.

  In this pre-reading process, first, the pre-reading execution flag 203j5 of each of the reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are retained in the reserved sphere storing area 203j is referred to. Then, from among the reserved areas in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved, a reserved area for which prefetching has not been executed is extracted (S785). The reserved area in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved is determined from the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a. That is, when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is “1”, it is determined that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved only in the reserved first area, and the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is “1”. When the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is "3", it is determined that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the reserved first and second areas. It is determined that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the first to third areas, and when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is “4”, the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the reserved first to fourth areas. It is determined that the values of C3 and CS1 are reserved. Then, in the processing of S785, the reservation area in which the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of each reservation area is off is determined as the reservation area in which the prefetch has not been performed.

  Next, based on the result of the processing in S785, it is determined whether or not there is a reserved area for which prefetching has not been executed (S786). The number of hold times of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold area held first in the execution hold areas, that is, the hold area with the smallest area number among the hold areas in which the look-ahead has not been executed, is pre-read hold. The count is set in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203k as the number of times (S787).

  As a result, the subsequent prefetching of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold areas corresponding to the number of prefetch hold times stored in the prefetch hold number storage area 203k. That is, if the number of times of prefetch suspension stored in the prefetch suspension times storage area 203k is “1”, prefetching is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first suspension area, and the number of times of prefetch suspension times is stored. If the number of times of prefetching reservation stored in 203k is “2”, prefetching is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second preservation area, and the prefetching reservation stored in the number of prefetch reservation times storage area 203k is performed. If the number is "3", pre-reading is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved third area, and the pre-reading reserved number stored in the pre-read reserved number storage area 203k is "4". For example, prefetching is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved fourth area.

  Here, in the process of S787, the number of times of holding of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding area that has been held first among the holding areas where the prefetching has not been executed is set as the number of times of prefetch holding in the number of times of prefetching hold area 203k. Since the setting is performed, the prefetching is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the preliminarily held preservation area among the preservation areas that have not been prefetched. Thereby, in the pre-reading process, the pre-reading can be performed in the reserved order, and the pre-reading can be performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 having the shortest time until the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed. . Therefore, it is possible to pre-read many counters C1 to C3 and CS1 before the original jackpot lottery is performed.

  During the prefetching process, if the timer interruption process is executed and the value of the number of prefetching reservations in the prefetching reservation count storage area 203k is decremented by 1 as the execution start timing of the variable effect, the prefetching reservation count after the subtraction is subtracted. Will be prefetched for the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold area corresponding to. As described above, when the shift processing is performed between the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved sphere storage area 203j, the reserved areas storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch processing are changed to the area. Move to the area one number smaller. On the other hand, in the prefetching process, the prefetching is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding areas corresponding to the number of times of the prefetching hold after the subtraction. Even when the shift processing is performed in the reserved ball storage area 203j, it is possible to prefetch the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch processing without any problem after the shift processing.

  Next, the value of the prefetch certainty change flag 203h and the first per-random number counter storage area 203j1 of the reserved area corresponding to the number of prefetch reservations in the prefetch reserved count storage area 203k (hereinafter referred to as “prefetch target reserved area”) are stored. The result of the jackpot lottery is predicted from the value of the random number counter C1 per one (S788). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 of the prefetch target holding area matches a random number value (hit value) that is a big hit, and if it matches one of the hit values, it is predicted that the big hit has occurred. I do. If all the hit values do not match, it is predicted to be out of range.

  At this time, the winning value is determined by the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery (the jackpot lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variable effect) is performed based on the pre-read counter value indicated by the look-ahead probability change flag 203h. The setting is made according to the possible gaming state (mode). That is, the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is off, and the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the look-ahead counter value is predicted to be a normal low probability state. In this case, the winning value is set to “7, 307, 582”. On the other hand, when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is on and the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the counter value to be read ahead is predicted to be in the high probability state Indicates that the hit value is "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 826, 866, 892 ".

  Further, in the process of S788, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is predicted to be a jackpot, the first hit type counter C2 stored in the prefetch target holding area is further prefetched to predict the result of the jackpot type determination. I do. The prediction of the jackpot type determination result is performed by specifying the jackpot type associated with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 of the prefetch target reservation area according to the jackpot type table shown in FIG. 7A.

  Then, in the process of S788, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is finally classified into four patterns of “outside”, “15R normal jackpot”, “15R certain variable jackpot”, and “2R certain variable jackpot” including the prediction result of the jackpot type determination. .

  In the subsequent process of S789, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch target holding area are prefetched, and the result of the fluctuation pattern determination is predicted (S789). Specifically, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the processing of S788 is a jackpot, based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 7B, various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, various types of special reach, and premiums From the reach A to C and the 2R fluctuations A to C, the prediction result of the jackpot type determination predicted by the processing of S788 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 of the prefetch target hold area And predicts the variation pattern associated with.

  In addition, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the process of S788 is out of order, first, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the prefetch target reservation area. The type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is predicted from reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, and complete out of reach. At this time, similar to the process of S412 of the variation start process (see FIG. 22), the original jackpot lottery (the execution of the variation effect) is performed based on whether the prefetch certainty change flag 203h is off or on, that is, based on the prefetched counter value. A stop pattern corresponding to each stop type according to whether the possible state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the jackpot lottery performed at the start timing is performed is a low probability state or a high probability state. A table having a different range of the value of the selection counter C3 is set.

  Then, based on the predicted stop type, a deviation (normal) shown in FIG. 7C according to a possible state of the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the original jackpot lottery indicated by the look-ahead probable change flag 203h is performed. The determination result of the variation pattern is predicted based on either the variation pattern table for deviation or the deviation pattern table for deviation (probable variation) shown in FIG. That is, when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is off and the gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted to be a normal low probability state excluding the time saving state, FIG. Based on the variation pattern table for deviation (normal) shown in c), from the short deviation, long deviation, deviation normal reach various, deviation super reach various, deviation special reach various, the predicted stop type and the fluctuation of the pre-fetch target holding area are changed. The variation pattern at the time of disconnection associated with the variation type counter CS1 stored in the type counter storage area 203d5 is predicted.

  FIG. 7 (d) shows a case where the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is on and the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted to be a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probability variation. Based on the fluctuation pattern table for deviation (probable variation) shown in), from the short deviation, long deviation, deviation normal reach various, deviation super reach various, deviation special reach various, the predicted stop type and the fluctuation type of the prefetch target hold area The variation pattern at the time of disconnection associated with the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter storage area 203d5 is predicted.

  In the process of S789, finally, as a prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the pattern is classified into six patterns of “outside”, “normal reach”, “super reach”, “special reach”, “premier reach”, and “2R certain change”. In other words, if the predicted variation pattern is “short off” or “long off”, it is classified as “off”. If the predicted fluctuation pattern is “various normal reach” or “variable normal reach”, it is classified as “normal reach”. If the predicted fluctuation pattern is “various super reach” or “various super reach”, it is classified as “super reach”. If the predicted variation pattern is “various special reach” or “various special reach”, it is classified as “special reach”. If the predicted fluctuation patterns are “Premier reach A” to “Premier reach C”, they are classified as “Premier reach”. If the predicted variation pattern is “2R variation A” to “2R variation C”, it is classified as “2R variation”.

  In the subsequent processing of S790, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery by the processing of S788 is a probability change jackpot (S790). Here, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a 15R certain-change big hit or a 2R certain-change big hit, it is determined that the large-change big hit is a positive change big hit. If it is a probability change jackpot (S790: Yes), the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to ON (S791), and the process shifts to S794. As a result, in the prefetching process performed thereafter, the game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as the high probability state.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S790, when it is determined that the jackpot is not a probability change jackpot (S790: No), it is then determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery by the processing of S788 is out of place (S792). If it is not out of the range (S792: Yes), the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is the 15R normal jackpot, so the prefetch certainty change flag 203h is set to off (S793), and the process shifts to S794. As a result, in the prefetching process performed thereafter, the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of performing the original jackpot lottery is predicted as the low probability state. If it is determined as a result of the processing in S792 that the connection is out of the range (S792: Yes), the process directly proceeds to the processing in S794. As a result, the value of the prefetch certainty change flag 203h is maintained.

  In the process of S794, it is determined whether or not the predicted state change flag 203i is ON (S794). As a result, if the prediction state change flag 203i is on, it means that there is a high possibility that the previous look-ahead including the current look-ahead is performed based on the value of the wrong look-ahead probability change flag 203h. I do. That is, at the time when the process of S794 is executed, the look-ahead performed on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the look-ahead target holding area is performed by the pachinko machine at the time when the original jackpot lottery is performed. It also means that it is highly likely that the game has been performed after erroneously recognizing the 10 possible game states. Therefore, in this case, the prefetching currently being performed is stopped (S794: Yes), and the process proceeds to S799. By canceling the prefetching that is currently being performed, prefetching is performed based on the value of the erroneous prefetching probability change flag 203h, and it is possible to prevent the prediction result from being notified to the sound lamp control device 113. The process of S799 will be described later.

  The determination of whether or not the prediction state change flag 203i is on may be made at any time in the processing of S787 to S793 as well as the processing of S794. If the prediction state change flag 203i is on, the process may be stopped at that stage, and the process may proceed to S799. By performing the determination at any time, when the prefetching is performed based on the value of the erroneous prefetching probability change flag 203h, the prefetching can be stopped earlier. Further, it is possible to prevent the processing from being uselessly advanced based on the value of the erroneous prefetching certainty change flag 203h.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S794, if the prediction state change flag 203i is not on, that is, is off (S794: No), the process shifts to the process of S795, and the jackpot lottery prediction result predicted by the process of S788. The pre-read command shown in FIG. 8 for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern prediction predicted by the processing of S789 and the pre-read suspension count stored in the pre-read suspension count storage area 203k. (S795). The pre-read command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and the pre-read command is transmitted to the voice lamp control in the processing of S101 of the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 19). It is transmitted to the device 113.

  In the process of S795, when the number of prefetch suspensions stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203k indicates 0 or a negative value, the process proceeds to S786 without setting the prefetch command. As described above, this look-ahead process is performed in the main process regardless of the execution interval of the timer interrupt process. As a result, the timer interrupt process is executed at an interval of 4 milliseconds even while one prefetch process is being executed. Then, in the variation process (FIG. 59), which is one process of the timer interrupt process, when the execution start timing of the variation effect is detected, regardless of whether or not the prefetch process is being executed, the suspended 1 Is started. Therefore, there may be a case where the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed before the completion of the prefetching process based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 performing the prefetching process.

  Here, when the execution timing of the variation effect is detected, in the variation process described above, a process of subtracting 1 from the number of times of prefetch suspension is executed (S321). Therefore, if the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 performing the prefetching process before the prefetching process is completed, the prefetching suspension count is 0 or a negative value. Will be shown. On the other hand, if the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed before the pre-reading processing, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot perform the setting of the continuous announcement effect and the destruction determination of the command that can be performed by the pre-reading. There is no need to transmit to the lamp control means 113.

  Therefore, in the processing of S795, when the number of times of prefetching reservation stored in the number of times of prefetching reservation storage area 203k indicates 0 or a negative value, the setting of the prefetching command is not performed, and the processing of S796 described later is also skipped. Then, by shifting to the process of S797, it is possible to prevent the prefetch command from being unnecessarily transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113, and wasteful communication between the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 is prevented. Communication can be suppressed. Further, since it is not necessary for the sound ramp control device 113 to process the result of the pre-reading process for the one in which the variable effect has already been started, it is possible to suppress imposing an excessive processing load on the sound ramp control device 113.

  It should be noted that whether or not the number of prefetch suspensions stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203k indicates 0 or a negative value is determined not only in S795 but also in S787 to S795 as needed. Is also good. Then, when the number of times of prefetch suspension indicates 0 or a negative value, the process may be stopped at that stage, and the process may proceed to S797.

  In the subsequent processing of S796, the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the reserved area (prefetch target reserved area) corresponding to the number of prefetch reservations in the prefetch reserved count storage area 203k is set to ON, and the counters C1 to C1 stored in the prefetch target reserved area are set. This indicates that the values of C3 and CS1 are pre-read and the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination are predicted (S796). As a result, it is possible to prevent the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from which the prefetching has been performed from being prefetched again.

  After the processing of S796, it is determined whether or not the prediction state change flag 203i is ON (S797). This process is a process for detecting a case where the predicted state change flag 203i is set to ON by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) after the process of S794. If the prediction state change flag 203i is ON (S797: Yes), there is a possibility that the prefetch performed before, including the prefetch currently performed, is performed based on the value of the incorrect prefetch certainty change flag 203h. Since it means high, the process proceeds to S799, where the setting of the predicted state change command, the setting of turning on the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of all the reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), and the like are executed.

  On the other hand, if the prediction state change flag 203i is off as a result of the processing of S797 (S797: No), the process returns to the processing of S785, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are again set in the reserved ball storage area 203j. A prefetched unexecuted reserved area is extracted from each reserved area (S785), and it is determined whether there is a prefetched unexecuted reserved area (S786). Then, in each of the reserved areas in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved, the processing of S785 to S797 is repeatedly executed until there is no reserved area for which prefetching has not been executed.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S786, if it is determined that there is no pending area in which the pre-reading has not been performed in each of the reserved areas in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved (S786: No), the processing of S785 to S797 is repeated. After exiting from the repetitive processing, the process moves to the processing of S798. In the processing of S798, it is determined whether or not the prediction state change flag 203i is on (S797). This processing is performed when the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON by the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) after the processing of the last performed S797, or immediately after the execution of the prefetch processing (S701). This is a process for detecting a case where the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON in a situation where the prefetching (the process of S787 to S797) is not performed because there is no reserved area where the prefetching has not been executed.

  If the prediction state change flag 203i is not on but off (S798: No), the pre-reading process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if the prediction state change flag 203i is on (S798: Yes), as described above, the prefetch performed earlier including the currently performed prefetch is performed based on the value of the erroneous lookahead probability change flag 203h. It means that the possibility is high, so the processing shifts to S799.

  In the processing of S799, the prediction state change command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission (S799). The prediction state change command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S101) when the timer interrupt process is next executed. Upon receiving the prediction state change command, the sound ramp control device 113 invalidates all prediction results by the prefetching process stored in the prefetching information storage area 223b at that time. Thus, it is possible to prevent various controls based on prefetching from being performed based on an incorrect prediction result. For example, by performing the command destruction determination based on the incorrect prediction result, it is possible to suppress the determination that the command is destroyed in the command destruction determination even though the command is not destroyed.

  In the processing of S797 and S798, if it is detected that the prediction state change flag 203i has been set to ON by the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) after the processing of S795, the processing of S795 is incorrectly predicted. Since the prediction result based on the pre-reading based on the game state that is likely to be performed is set as the pre-reading command, the pre-reading command that is likely to indicate the incorrect prediction result is transmitted to the voice ramp control device 213. Will be. However, even if the look-ahead command is transmitted, the prediction state change command is set by the processing of S799 after the look-ahead command. A state change command can be sent to the audio lamp controller 213. Therefore, the prediction result stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reliably invalidated based on the prefetch command that is likely to indicate an incorrect prediction result.

  Next, the prefetch execution flags 203j5 of all the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203j are set to off (S2701). This indicates that the pre-reading process has not been executed in all the reserved first to fourth areas. Therefore, in the pre-reading process to be executed next, the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j. Pre-reading can be performed again for the value of CS1.

  Therefore, for the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j, the look-ahead processing is performed based on the value of the correct look-ahead probability change flag 203h, that is, the correct game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take. When executed, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination can be notified to the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, the audio ramp control device 113 can execute more various controls using more prediction results.

  After ending the processing of S2701, the prediction state change flag 203i is set to off (S2702), the prefetch processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the prefetching process (S701) is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 has been described. Similar to the embodiment or the second embodiment, in the main processing, the prefetch processing is executed within the remaining time until the next timing at which the processing to be executed every 4 milliseconds is to be executed. Good. That is, the pre-reading process may be performed at any timing after a negative determination is made in the processing of S703 of the main processing, through the processing of S704, S705, and S702, and before returning to the processing of S703 again. . By executing the pre-reading process within the remaining period, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired along with the detection of the start winning are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j in the starting winning process (see FIG. 20). This can be determined earlier in the main processing. Therefore, since the prediction of the result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination by the prefetching process can be performed earlier, it is less likely that the actual lottery is performed first based on each counter value of the prefetching target during the prefetching process. can do.

  If the pre-reading process is not executed every 4 milliseconds and if there is no process to be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process, the main process is executed in the same manner as in the first or second embodiment. The processing of S703 may be omitted, and the processing of S701 to S705 may be repeatedly executed. In this case, the concept of the remaining time disappears, but the execution time of the pre-reading process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the timer interrupt process in which the first random number counter C1 and the second random number counter C2 are updated is performed. The execution time of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated with respect to the execution interval (4 milliseconds in this embodiment). Therefore, in this case as well, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using the fluctuation time, whereby the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 are updated. The value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random. it can.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the time when the winning start is detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j. In the main processing (see FIG. 25), this prefetch processing is executed irrespective of the time interval at which the timer interruption processing is executed. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a change start process (see FIG. 22), which is one of the timer interrupt processes executed prior to the main process, such as a jackpot lottery performed at the start of execution of the change effect. ).

  Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, at the start of the variable production, the look-ahead is performed using the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the start prize detected after the start prize corresponding to the variable production. When the process is performed, the prediction of the result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the look-ahead at the time of the start winning prize is performed immediately before and after the jackpot lottery at the start of the execution of the variable effect, as described above, , There is a possibility that the completion of the jackpot lottery, which is the most important process, may be delayed, thereby affecting the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the pre-reading process is executed in the main process, while the jackpot lottery performed at the start of the execution of the variable effect is performed by one process of the timer interrupt process. It is configured to be executed in a certain fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22). Thus, even if the pre-reading process is being executed in the main process, the timer interrupt process is executed with priority, so that the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect. On the other hand, since the prefetching process is continuously executed after the end of the timer interrupt process, the prefetching process can be surely completed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the pre-reading process is performed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired when the start winning at the first entrance 64 is detected. The jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect while executing and predicting the result of the jackpot lottery and the like, so that the game can be controlled normally.

  In this pre-reading process, in one pre-reading process, the pre-reading is executed for all the reserved areas where the pre-reading has not been executed among the reserved areas in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved. , The results of the jackpot lottery and the change pattern determination are predicted. As a result, prefetching can be performed earlier than in a case where prefetching is performed on any one of the reserved areas in one prefetching process. Therefore, prefetching can be executed for more values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 before the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j at the timing of the start winning prize are directly read out from the reserved ball storage area 203j and prefetched, and the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern are performed. It is configured to execute a look-ahead process for predicting the result of the determination. Thereby, the execution start timing of the variable effect is reached during the prefetching process, and when the shift process is performed between the respective reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved sphere storage area 203j, the reserved area being prefetched is shifted. However, the increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e are provided as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first or second embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first or second embodiment. Action and effect can be obtained.

  In the prefetching process according to the third embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are prefetched for one holding area in order from the earliest holding area among the non-executed holding areas. (S787 to S796), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are prefetched simultaneously and in parallel from all non-prefetched reserved areas extracted by the processing of S785, and S787 to S796 are executed. May be executed.

  In this case, in the process of S787, the number of holds (the number of times of prefetch hold) of all the hold areas for which the prefetch has not been executed may be stored in the number-of-prefetch hold times storage area 203k for each hold area. For example, when prefetching has not been executed for the second hold area and the third hold area, the values “2” and “3” may be stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k.

  In the process of S796, the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the reserved area may be set to ON for the reserved areas corresponding to all the reserved read counts stored in the reserved read count storage area 203k. For example, if the values of “2” and “3” are stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203k, the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the suspension second area and the suspension third area may be set to ON.

  When a plurality of values are stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203k, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in all the suspension areas corresponding to the plurality of values are prefetched simultaneously and in parallel. Is also good. For example, when the values of “2” and “3” are stored in the prefetch suspension count storage area 203k, the prefetch of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the suspension second area and the suspension third area And the pre-reading of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the.

  In this case, for example, the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter storage area 203j1 of the second reserved area and the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number storage area 203j1 of the third reserved area. The random number counter C1 is read in advance (that is, the first random number counter C1 stored in all the reserved areas for which prefetching has not been executed), and then the processing of reading the hit value of 1 from the ROM 202 and the readout are performed. The process of comparing the winning value with the value of the first random number counter C1 of each holding area is repeatedly executed until it is determined that the first random number counter C1 of at least one holding area is a big hit. You may do so.

  Further, the change type counter CS1 stored in the change type counter storage area 203j4 of the reserved second area and the change type counter CS1 stored in the change type counter storage area 203j4 of the reserved third area (that is, the pre-reading is not performed). A process of reading in advance the variation type counters CS1 stored in all the reserved areas, and then reading a determination value for determining a variation pattern from the variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 7B to 7D; The process of comparing the read determination value with the value of the variation type counter CS1 of each reserved area is repeatedly executed until the variation type is determined for at least one variation type counter CS1 of the reserved area. It may be.

  Further, in the prediction of the determination by other pre-reading, for example, in the prediction of the determination of the jackpot type, and in the prediction of the determination of the stop type at the time of departure, similarly to the determination of the variation pattern, from the all reserved areas where pre-reading has not been executed The process of reading the corresponding counter value in advance and then reading the judgment value and the process of comparing the read judgment value with the counter value of each holding area are performed by at least one counter value of the holding area. May be repeatedly executed until the prediction of the determination is completed.

  Accordingly, it is not necessary to separately read out the hit value and the judgment value each time the prefetching is performed on the non-executed reserved areas one by one to predict the jackpot lottery or the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the number of times of reading the hit value and the determination value can be reduced, and the speed of the prefetch process can be increased.

  In this case, for example, after it is determined that the first random number counter C1 of at least one reserved area is a big hit, only the first random number counter C1 of the remaining reserved areas that are not determined to be a big hit is determined. Alternatively, the jackpot lottery prediction process may be continuously executed. Similarly, after the prediction of one determination is completed for the counter value of at least one reserved area, only the counter value of the remaining reserved area for which the prediction of the determination is not completed is determined by the one determination. May be executed continuously. As a result, the counter value for which the prediction of the jackpot lottery or the determination has been completed is not compared with the winning value or the determination value, so that the waste of the processing can be omitted, and the speed of the prefetching processing can be further increased. Can be.

  On the other hand, for example, even after it is determined that the first hit random number counter C1 of at least one holding area is a big hit, the first hit random number counter C1 of all the holding areas for which the pre-reading has not been executed is: The jackpot lottery prediction process may be continuously executed. Similarly, even after the prediction of one determination has been completed for the counter value of at least one reserved area, the counter value of all the reserved areas for which the pre-reading has not been executed is determined by the one determination. The prediction process may be continuously performed. Thus, although there is a possibility that the processing may be wasted, it is not necessary to determine whether the prediction of the jackpot lottery or the prediction of the determination has been completed for any of the reserved areas and change the reserved area used for the prediction. Therefore, the processing can be simplified. Therefore, an increase in the capacity related to the control program caused by performing the prefetching process can be suppressed to a small value.

  Further, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are prefetched simultaneously and in parallel from all the non-executed preservation areas, the value of the prefetch probable change flag 203h is set according to the prefetching execution area. Among them, the look-ahead probable change flag may be set in order from the reserved area having the smallest area number in consideration of the jackpot lottery result predicted by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved area. Good.

  At this time, the setting of the look-ahead probable change flag 203h is changed from off to on based on the jackpot lottery result predicted by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding area having the smaller area number among the plurality of holding areas. If the value is changed or changed from OFF to ON, the look-ahead of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved area having the larger area number than that of the reserved area is based on the erroneous look-ahead flag 203h. It will be done. Therefore, in such a case, based on the value of the newly set look-ahead probable change flag 203h, the data is stored in a reserved area having a larger area number than that of the reserved area where the setting of the look-ahead probable change flag 203h is changed. The prefetching of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 may be executed again. Thus, even when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are prefetched simultaneously and in parallel from all the non-executed reservation areas, the counters C1 to C3 stored in all the reservation areas are read. Prefetching of the value of CS1 can be performed correctly.

  Note that the “third symbol” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “identification information” described in the claims, and the “big hit” described in the above embodiments is a “predetermined game” described in the claims. "Variation pattern command" and "stop type command" described in the embodiment correspond to "effect control signal" described in the claims, and "main processing" described in the embodiment. Corresponds to the “first processing” described in the claims, the “timer interrupt processing” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “second processing”, and the “main processing” and the “timer interrupt processing” The MPU 201 that performs the “correspondence” corresponds to the “first processing means” and the “second processing means” described in the claims, and the “fluctuation pattern” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “fluctuation pattern” described in the claims. Dynamic display mode of effect ". Also, the “reserved first to fourth areas” described in the above embodiment correspond to the “storage area” described in the claims, and the “prefetch information 0th to fourth area” described in the above embodiment. The “read-ahead information valid flag” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “valid information storage area” described in the claims. In addition, the “continuous announcement effect” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “suggested effect” described in the claims, and the “single-announcement effect” described in the embodiment is defined as the “first announcement effect” in the claims. 2 suggestive effect ".

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  For example, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

  In this case, the determination as to whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is performed by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (ie, in use). ) May be provided in the image controller 237 so that the MPU 231 checks the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination video RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and the state of the resident Whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused may be confirmed. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when ending the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the scanning is performed during a blank period (by scanning on a blank region which is a scanning region other than the display region provided in the third symbol display device 81). The MPU 231 checks the driving state of the image controller 237 or recognizes it by a notification from the image controller 237, and when the scanning state is in the blank period, the video RAMs 235 and 236 It may be determined that it is not being used. Thus, only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 of the image controller 237 is checked to determine whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is unused, so that the determination can be made easily.

  In this case, if transfer data information other than Null data exists at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f, the MPU 231 operates in accordance with the character data 234 according to the transfer data information. , The process of reading image data from and transferring the image data to the normal video RAM 236 may be started. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the image data is specified in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the display control device 114 does not perform important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed prior to the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing, and Can be executed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 231 does not manage the respective video RAMs using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but shares the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 in common. In the address system used, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM, and each video RAM may be managed. In this manner, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when specifying the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The configuration of the instruction for performing the designation can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination, the configuration of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the bus line 240 connected to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may connect and provide. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM may be provided, and the character ROM 234 may be connected to the bus line 240 or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit.

  By providing this bridge circuit, a character constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a can be used as it is by using an existing image controller 237 or bus line 240 designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM. A ROM 234 can be connected. Note that, even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this case. It may be configured. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low readout speed. However, by using the configuration described in each of the above embodiments, the display control device 114 can display an image at a desired time without any problem. Can be done.

  In the above embodiments, when the display controller 114 starts the main processing, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the bus line 240 is designated as “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b stores the address in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read out from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 has been described. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then sets the boot program in the ROM controller 234b. When detecting that the address of the bus line 240 is designated as “0000H”, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. . In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” for the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is already set in the buffer RAM 234c, or is being set. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the case has been described where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and the boot program to be executed first after power-on is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. It is not something that can be done. For example, a small-capacity ROM may be built in the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, and a boot program to be executed first after power-on may be stored in the ROM. In this case, when detecting that the address of the bus line 240 is designated as “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the built-in ROM in the buffer RAM 234c, and responds to the designated address. The data (instruction code) to be read may be read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. When detecting that the power has been turned on from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the built-in ROM in the buffer RAM 234c, and then sets the address of the bus line 240 to " When it is detected that "0000H" is specified, data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240.

  Here, since the connection wiring of the built-in ROM can be generally shortened, the parasitic capacitance applied to the wiring can be reduced. Accordingly, a wiring delay that occurs in signal propagation can be reduced, so that a data read time can be shortened. In addition, the built-in ROM allows the data bus width to be freely designed according to the individual hardware specifications, so if the data bus width is set wider, more data can be read at once. It is. Therefore, if the boot program is stored in such a built-in ROM, the boot program executed first after the power is turned on in the MPU 231 is read from the built-in ROM at a high speed, and set in the buffer RAM 634c. , Data (instruction code) corresponding to the address specified on the bus line 240 can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Further, instead of storing the boot program to be executed first after power-on in the NOR type ROM 234d in the character ROM 234 or the built-in ROM of the ROM controller 234b, the boot program is provided outside the character ROM 234 and connected to the bus line 240. An extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) NOR type ROM may store a boot program to be executed first after the power is turned on. In this case, in the NOR type ROM outside the character ROM 234 connected to the bus line 240, the address specified on the bus line 240 by the MPU 231 corresponds to a part of the boot program to be executed first after the MPU 231 releases the system reset. When the address (for example, “0000H” to “0400H”) is detected, data (instruction code) corresponding to the address is read from the first program storage area 735 a and output to the MPU 231. You may. The ROM controller 234b may be configured such that the data output of the character ROM 734 at this time is in a high impedance state.

  Here, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, it is provided outside the character ROM 234 and is connected to the bus line 240 and has a very small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes). The MPU 231 stores a part of the boot program to be executed first after the system reset is released, so that the part of the boot program is read from the NOR ROM at a high speed and output to the MPU 231. be able to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can immediately fetch the instruction code of the boot program that is read at high speed, so that the main processing can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately. In this case, since the NOR type ROM is connected to the bus line 240, the number of components is increased as compared with the above embodiments. However, the NOR type ROM requires the MPU 231 to execute the first boot after the system reset is released. This is provided to store a part of the program, and as described above, an extremely small capacity can be used. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the NOR-type ROM can be reduced.

  In this case, as a memory which is provided outside the character RAM 234 and is connected to the bus line 240 and stores a boot program to be executed first after the power is turned on, instead of the NOR ROM, the memory is faster than the NAND flash memory 234a. Alternatively, a memory constituted by a nonvolatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation may be used. For example, as such a memory, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like may be used.

  After the power is turned on, all control programs including the boot program to be executed are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a in the character ROM 234, and the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115. Then, after turning on the power stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the boot program to be executed is first set in the buffer RAM 234c, and then it is detected by the ROM controller 234b that the address of the bus line 240 is designated as "0000H". Then, data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240.

  Thus, at the stage where the address “0000H” is specified to the bus line 240 by the MPU 231, the process of reading a part of the boot program from the NAND flash memory 234 a has been started or the part of the boot program has already been started. Is set in the buffer RAM 534c. Therefore, if a part of the boot program has already been set in the buffer RAM 234c at the stage where the MPU 231 has specified the address “0000H” on the bus line 240 with the release of the system reset, the character ROM 234 stores the data (command ) Can be immediately read from the buffer RAM 234c. Also, at the stage where the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” on the bus line 240, even if a part of the boot program is not set in the buffer RAM 234c, the part of the boot program is already read from the NAND flash memory 234a. The reading process has been started. Therefore, the MPU 231 assigns the address “0000H” to the bus line 240 as compared with the case where the reading of a part of the boot program from the NAND flash memory 234a is started in response to the designation of the address “0000H” to the bus line 240. , The character ROM 234 sets a part of the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c, and shortens the time from outputting data (instruction code) of the specified address to the MPU 231 from the buffer RAM 234c. Can be. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 214 constituted by the NAND flash memory 214a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b directly specifies the address from the first program storage area 234d1. Data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read and output to the MPU 181 via the bus line 240. Thus, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 634c may not be performed. Thus, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 181 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A first program storage area is provided in a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium that can perform a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234d1, and the MPU 234 stores the first program storage area in the memory. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored. For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be directly connected. When the character ROM 234 is connected to the bus line 240 or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the display control of the resident video RAM 235 can be performed even if the existing image controller 237 or the bus line 240 is not configured to directly connect the resident video RAM 235. The device 114 can be easily provided.

  In the above embodiments, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described. However, the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, May be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes or the like may be resident in each of them, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. A port type RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. For example, the image data is read from the character ROM 234 while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn. The process of writing the image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the possibility that drawing processing is delayed due to writing of image data can be suppressed.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. And the same content as each of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write processing. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in each of the above embodiments is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Good. In this case, in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other external input, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is made resident. Preferably, it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and resident, but all image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. It may be transferred. In this case, since there is no image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten during power-on and the contents of the resident video RAM 235 are maintained is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated on a predetermined occasion such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from the 113. Is also good. In this case, while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept stored in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave. Also, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and reads the read image data into the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed during the unused period (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer instruction). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and is transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not being used (that is, during a period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it.

  When updating the resident video RAM 235, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three symbol display device 81. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 receiving the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read out image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 189 while the transition image is being displayed, the resident video RAM 189 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In each of the above embodiments, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal at the time of power failure is stored. In the main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, before the transfer of the main image data at the time of power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the RAM judgment value is checked, and the RAM judgment is made. If the value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. You may comprise. In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may not be executed by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of the momentary power failure and the execution of the main processing is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. Can prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and can reduce the time required to recover from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modified example, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to an instantaneous stop or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be reduced, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and may be configured to be directly connected to the bus line 240. When the character ROM 234 is connected to the bus line 240 or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the bus line 240 is frequently influenced by data signals. The transfer can be performed efficiently without the need.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. For example, during the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period (blank period) during which a blank area, which is a scanning area other than the display area where an actual image is displayed, is scanned (blank period). The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of the image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. Thus, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiments, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. You may comprise. Further, the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM, and while one area stores the image data read from the character ROM 234, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. And the time required for the processing can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are turned on from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Although the case of transfer has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on. As a result, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the power-on image from the character ROM 234 while displaying the power-on image. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiments, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area of the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a via the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image. Although the case of transferring the image data to the 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 434 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image. Image data corresponding to the main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. . Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and stored in the normal video RAM 236. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image, the resident video RAM 235 is used. , The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or the frame image command. A case has been described where the back image or the super-reach effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed based on the button operation command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound ramp control device 113 grasps the game state of the pachinko machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, in accordance with a change in the game state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thus, the display control device 114 can change the effect of the rear image or the super reach in accordance with the game state based on the rear image change command or the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and change the back image or the super-reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the rules of the display data table, the transfer data table, and the additional data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change may be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the transfer data table. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred based on the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, a new sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is added. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that a proper rear image is stored, or may be specified in an area different from the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The output signal of the vibration sensor 228 is input to the main control device 110, Main controller 110 may detect a vibration error, and transmit an error command notifying the error from main controller 110 to either sound lamp controller 113 or display controller 114. When an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command and transmits an error command for notifying the error to the display control device 114. You may.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is on in the display setting process (see FIG. 42). The warning image setting process (see FIG. 44 (b)) may be executed when determining that the warning image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. In this case, since the transmission and reception of the error command from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 are not required, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213 has been described. However, instead of the vibration sensor 228, or together with the vibration sensor 228, the magnet sensor is mounted on the back surface of the game board 213. It may be attached to. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the ball from being changed by the magnetic field of the magnet and intentionally entering the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 213 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 213 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command for notifying an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 310, when the display control device 114 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 213 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 May turn on an error occurrence flag and set on an error type flag corresponding to a magnetic field error. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. When an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113, or when the occurrence of a magnetic field error is grasped based on an output signal from the magnet sensor (ie, an error occurrence flag Is set to ON and the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error is set to ON), the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Accordingly, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is the third symbol. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the error message image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to immediately notify the magnetic field error. Can be deterred.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which, as the additional data table, a drawing content for adding and displaying a continuous preview effect that is not normally displayed in the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is set. The additional data table is not limited to the one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110, and may be various types of data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The rendering content for rendering the effect may be defined. Further, in the additional data table, with respect to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110, the drawing content necessary for adding and displaying an image which is not normally displayed is added. Instead of or in addition to specifying such drawing contents, the drawing contents necessary to change the color tone of some or all of the one production, and the display in one production The drawing content necessary for changing and displaying the image to be displayed may be predetermined.

  When the drawing content necessary to change a part or all of the color tone in one effect is defined by an additional data table, an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the additional data table. In correspondence with an address expressed in units of time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment), a type of a sprite whose color tone is to be changed and color information for specifying a changed color tone in the sprite at that time. It may be specified. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of the sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional drawing content specified in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e, and the changed color tone in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is added. The drawing list may be created in place of the color information specified by the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  When the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying an image displayed in one effect is defined by an additional data table, the additional data table includes an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed in correspondence with an address expressed as a unit (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds), and at that time, a sprite type to be replaced, a sprite type to be newly displayed, and a new sprite type to be displayed. The drawing information of the sprite to be displayed may be defined. Then, in the additional drawing content specified in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 sets, at the address indicated by the pointer 233g, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list instead of the sprite to be replaced. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  In each of the above embodiments, in addition to the display data table that defines the drawing contents of the base effect (for example, the variable effect), the display control device 314 additionally displays the effect (for example, the continuous announcement effect). A case has been described in which an additional data table that defines the drawing content is set and the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233g is acquired from each data table. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when it is determined that an effect (for example, a continuous announcement effect) to be additionally displayed for the variable effect is determined, an additional display is performed on the display data table corresponding to the effect as the base. The drawing contents of the additional data table corresponding to the effect to be displayed are added for each address indicating the display time, and a new display data table is added. It generates, on the basis of the new display data tables, may be acquired drawing content of the image. This makes it possible to easily display an effect that is additionally displayed for the base effect. In addition, for each type of base effect, a display data table that defines the drawing content of only the base effect, and display data that defines the image content in which the effect displayed in addition to the base effect is superimposed. Since there is no need to have a table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of data tables. Further, since the drawing content can be specified using only the newly created display data table, the processing required for specifying the drawing content can be compared with the case where the drawing content is specified from the display data table and the additional data table. Can be lightened.

  When it is determined that the effect to be additionally displayed for the base effect is determined, the display data table corresponding to the base effect is used as it is to acquire the drawing contents of the image. You may.

  Further, in the display data table, in addition to the drawing contents of the base effect (for example, the fluctuation effect), the drawing contents of the effect (for example, the continuous announcement effect) to be additionally displayed are additionally displayed. If you want to display the effect that is added and displayed, it is added and displayed along with the base effect drawing content. If the rendered contents of the effect are specified from the display data table and the additionally displayed effect is hidden, the rendered contents of the additionally displayed effect are discarded, and the base effect is rendered. May be specified from the display data table. This eliminates the need for an additional data table that defines the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed, so that control of the additional data table is not required and the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the transfer data table is prepared corresponding to each display data table has been described. In addition, an additional transfer data table which is a transfer data table corresponding to each additional data table is prepared. May be. In this additional transfer data table, a sprite that is used in the corresponding additional data table in correspondence with the address specified in the additional data table (or the display data table) and whose transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address is specified. Transfer data information of image data may be described.

  In this case, for example, in each of the above-described embodiments, an additional transfer data table buffer is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 281, and when one additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the display data table Apart from the corresponding transfer data table, an additional transfer data table corresponding to the one additional data table may be set in the additional transfer data table buffer. If the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional transfer data table set in the additional transfer data table buffer, the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to the drawing list. It may be. Thus, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used by the additional data table to the normal video RAM 236 before using the image data in accordance with the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the effect specified by the additional data table can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data table corresponding to the additional data table, it is possible to transfer necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing drawing of an image based on the additional data table. Drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional data table. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 114 prepares a transfer data table that defines transfer data information of image data corresponding to a sprite used in the display data table, and A case has been described where the transfer data table corresponding to the predetermined display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f in accordance with the setting of the data table in the display data table buffer 233d. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. In the case where a predetermined display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, transfer data information defined by the corresponding transfer data table is added to the display data table for each address indicating the display time. New display data It generates Buru, based on the new display data tables, may be acquired and drawing contents and transfer data information of the image simultaneously. Thereby, since the drawing content and the transfer data information can be specified using the display data table, the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified respectively from the display data table and the transfer data table. The processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  When the above-mentioned additional transfer data table, which is a transfer data table corresponding to each additional data table, is prepared, when a predetermined additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the additional data table is stored in the additional data table. On the other hand, transfer data information defined by the corresponding additional transfer data table is added for each address indicating the display time, a new additional data table is generated, and an image is generated based on the new additional data table. May be obtained at the same time. With this, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed by using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition can be specified. As compared with the case where the drawing contents and the transfer data information are specified, the load of the processing required for the specification can be reduced.

  In addition, when a display of an effect (for example, a continuous announcement effect) to be additionally displayed with respect to a base effect (for example, a variable effect) is determined, a display data table corresponding to the base effect is displayed. On the other hand, the drawing contents of the additional data table corresponding to the additionally displayed effect are added for each address indicating the display time, a new display data table is generated, and based on the new display data table, In the case of acquiring the drawing content of an image, the transfer data information defined by the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is further added to the display data table for each address indicating the display time, Transfer data information specified by the additional transfer data table corresponding to the additional data table is added for each address indicating the display time Te, may generate a new display data table. Thus, using the display data table, it is possible to specify the drawing contents of the base effect, the drawing contents of the effect to be added, and the transfer data information of the images necessary for the drawing. As compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are respectively specified from the table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table for addition, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  Further, the transfer data information may be described in advance in the display data table. In this way, since the drawing content and the transfer data information can be specified using the display data table, compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the display data table and the transfer data table, respectively, The processing load required for the specification can be reduced. In addition, in the display data table, in addition to the drawing contents of the base effect (for example, the fluctuation effect), the drawing contents of the effect (for example, the continuous announcement effect) to be additionally displayed are additionally displayed. In the case of describing in a format that clearly expresses the rendering contents of the effect, the display data table is used not only for the transfer data information used in the base effect, but also for the rendering of the effect that is additionally displayed. The transfer data information of the image is described in a format that clearly indicates that it is the transfer data information of the effect to be additionally displayed, and when the effect to be additionally displayed is displayed, it becomes a base. The drawing contents of the effect and the transfer data information and the drawing contents of the effect and the transfer data information to be additionally displayed are specified from the display data table, and added. If the indicated performance is not displayed, the drawing content of the additionally displayed performance and the transfer data information thereof are discarded, and only the drawing content of the base performance and the transfer data information thereof are displayed in the display data table. May be specified. Thus, using the display data table, it is possible to specify the drawing contents and the transfer data information of the base effect and the drawing contents and the transfer data information of the effect to be added. As compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are respectively specified from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select the super reach, drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, The case where only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by the user was specified was described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and it is considered that it is an effect to add and display each super reach, and it corresponds to each super reach May be prepared, and the additional data table corresponding to the super reach selected by the player may be set in the additional data table buffer 233e. Further, the drawing contents defined in the additional data table corresponding to the selected super reach may be additionally written in the display data table. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in data size of the display data table.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , "Fluctuation start-up", "Fast variation", "Announcement effect", "Normal reach", "Super reach" After specifying the elements required for the fluctuation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets required for the specified fluctuation effect are combined into one, and a final regular display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may make it. In many cases, a display common to each of the fluctuation patterns is performed for “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like. Thus, by making the variable effects into elements and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233g to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233g. A pointer may be prepared for each data table.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of one frame of image at which the drawing process is completed (in each of the above embodiments, every 20 milliseconds) However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display one frame of image. The driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that the image for one frame is always displayed at the same time interval (20 millisecond interval). Therefore, the V interrupt signal is displayed every time the image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, the time interval can be maintained accurately without timing.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer on which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231 and also has the image developed first from the other frame buffer. The case where the information is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list, The buffer may be alternately selected, and the image information previously developed may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits one frame of image information to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller 237 outputs a frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed and the image information to the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In each of the above embodiments, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main controller 110 is controlled via the sound lamp controller 113 until the finalized display effect is completed. When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. However, this may be set again in the display data table buffer 233d with the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect. Further, in this case, until one of the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) and the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113, the final display effect is performed. Each time the process is completed, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to continue to display the final display effect until a variation pattern command or a demo command is received from the main control device 110.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a third symbol consisting of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In each of the above embodiments, after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 first stores the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power supply. After the transfer, the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control device 114, after the power is turned on, only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. Can be immediately confirmed that the operation has been started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command , A simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is desirably performed immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the fluctuation display using the power-on fluctuation image can be performed more quickly.

  In each of the above embodiments, the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, The case where the information of the image data to be transferred at the time (transferred data information) is specified has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 becomes 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display content at intervals of 1/30 seconds.

  In addition, in the display data table and the additional data table, instead of indicating the sprite type itself as the sprite type to be drawn defined at predetermined time intervals, image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. The address of the character ROM 234 may be defined. The display control device 114 reads out from the character ROM 234 the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manage the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Therefore, it is not necessary to manage both the information specifying the character string and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the stored image determination flag 233j is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233 instead. In this case, when instructing to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and It is determined whether or not is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When a transfer instruction for image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiments, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 437 based on the stored image determination flag 233j. It is described whether the MPU 231 performs a process of not executing the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image determination flag 233j is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is stored. May be. The sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is necessary, the MPU 231 sends the image data to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which only the image data corresponding to “back A” among the plurality of back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, but is not necessarily limited thereto. Alternatively, image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in a part or all of the super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the rear image of the super reach having high or expected appearance frequency resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. Times can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the transfer data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233g, and the MPU 231 is instructed by the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to transfer necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. It may be. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally read from the character ROM 234 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the image data to the video RAM 236.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back surface C which is the rear image of the “island stage”, but the color tone of the entire image changes with time. Is also good. In addition, as the back image, not only the one that scrolls and the color tone changes with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears over time instead of such a back image is displayed. It may move or change its size or shape.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the continuous announcement effect is also executed by the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. By providing a fourth symbol display device different from the above, and displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, a continuous announcement effect is executed. Is also good. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, a continuous announcement effect may be executed by providing an accessory that operates according to various effects in the pachinko machine 10 and operating the accessory in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect. In addition, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113, the continuous announcement effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous announcement effect from the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 The continuous announcement effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

  Thus, every time the variable effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), symbols are continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory is operated in a predetermined mode. By playing the sound, outputting sound from the sound output device 226, or lighting or blinking the illuminations 29 to 33, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of a big hit. In addition, the player normally continues the game while watching the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed, but the display of symbols by a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is performed. The continuous announcement effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, so that an unusual effect is performed on the player. Can be easily recognized. Further, the continuous announcement effect can be easily and continuously performed by a simple control such as display of a symbol by the fourth symbol display device, actuation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, or lighting / flashing of the illumination portions 29 to 33. A preview effect can be made.

  Further, if the continuous announcement effect is performed by audio output from the audio output device 226 or by lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous announcement effect is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113. In the pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 performs a lottery process at the time of start / stop judgment and the start of change, a continuous announcement effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113, and a change effect is performed by the display control device 114. When performing a notice effect, each control device can share each process. Therefore, the load can be prevented from being concentrated on one control device, and the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be reduced.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous announcement effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous announcement effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the audio output device 226. The continuous announcement effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling them in conjunction with each other. Thereby, it is possible to execute a variety of continuous announcement effects. In addition, the method of executing the continuous announcement effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33) , Or a combination thereof) to prepare a plurality of continuous announcement production modes that are selected in accordance with the game state (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R regular jackpot, departure) after the end of the continuous announcement effect. Is also good.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the continuous announcement effect is performed, the case where the image for the continuous announcement effect different from the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the continuous announcement effect may be performed by displaying a so-called “chance eye” which is a combination of predetermined symbols, as a stop symbol displayed when the variable effect is completed. In this case, in the continuous notice command processing (see FIG. 40A) of the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 113, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance is turned on, and the other symbols are turned on. The stop symbol determination flag may be set to off. In the command determination process, the continuous notice command process is executed after the stop identification command process, so that the chance symbol is set as the stop symbol instead of the stop symbol set by the reception of the display stop identification command. Therefore, the chance eyes can be definitely displayed when the fluctuation stops. Then, if the third symbol display device 81 continuously displays a chance as a stop symbol for each variable effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained.

  In the above embodiment, the “jellyfish” image is always displayed as the image of the continuous announcement effect, but a plurality of images may be prepared as the image of the continuous announcement effect. In this case, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, it may be determined which image is to be used to execute the continuous announcement effect. Further, according to each of the images, the probability of the big hit may be changed when the continuous announcement effect on the image is performed. For example, a "bubble" image and a "jellyfish" image are prepared as images of the continuous announcement effect, and the probability of a big hit when the continuous announcement effect is performed by the "jellyfish" image is higher than the continuous announcement effect by the "bubble" image. The continuous announcement determination probability in the continuous announcement determination table may be defined so as to be higher than the probability of a jackpot when an effect is performed.

  In the case where a plurality of images are prepared as images of the continuous announcement effect, the image of the single announcement effect may be selected and displayed from all or a part of the plurality of images. Alternatively, only one image of the plurality of images may be displayed as the image of the single announcement effect.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the continuous announcement effect displays a single image (“jellyfish” image) over a plurality of variable effects. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a different image may be displayed. It is preferable that the different images have relevance to each other. For example, in the continuous announcement effect, “Egg” is displayed for the first variation effect among a plurality of variation effects for which the continuous announcement effect is set, and “chick” is displayed for the second variation effect. "Chicken" may be displayed for the third fluctuation effect, and "chicken group" may be displayed for the fourth fluctuation effect (the last fluctuation effect in which the continuous announcement effect is set). . If the number of variable productions for which the continuous announcement production is set is three or less, even if the variable production is the second or third variation production after the start of the continuous announcement production, it is the continuous announcement production. If it is the last fluctuating effect that is set, “chicken group” may be displayed.

  Alternatively, in the continuous announcement effect, in a plurality of fluctuation effects in which the continuous announcement effect is set, while displaying the “jellyfish” image, for each of the fluctuation effects, the remaining number of fluctuations until the continuous announcement effect ends. A display indicating whether an effect is performed may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As a result, the symbol displayed by the continuous announcement effect is gradually changed (stepped up) every time the variable effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player gradually changes the symbol. In the variable production, the chicken group was displayed, and the display indicating that the number of the variable productions to be executed until the end of the continuous announcement production was "0" together with the "jellyfish" image was displayed. In such a case, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to be a big hit in the fluctuation effect.

  In the above embodiment, the number of times of the continuous announcement effect is managed by the continuous announcement execution counter 223e and the continuous determination information stored in the continuous determination information storage area provided in the pre-read information 0th to 4th areas. , Each time a fluctuating effect set to execute a continuous notice effect is executed, how many times the fluctuate effect has been performed since the start of the continuous notice effect, and how many remaining fluctuate effects until the end of the continuous notice effect Can be easily grasped. Therefore, even if the continuous announcement effect is composed of different images, it is possible to easily grasp which image should be displayed in each of the variable effects.

  When the continuous announcement effect displays different images over a plurality of fluctuation effects, one of the different images is used as an image of the single announcement effect (for example, an image that is always displayed at the beginning of the continuous announcement effect). Or an image that is always displayed at the end of the continuous announcement effect), or may be selected from all or some of the different images and displayed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the main control device 110 performs the continuous announcement production based on the information about the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the pre-reading command, with one condition that the information is a 15R probability variable jackpot or out of order. Has been determined, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the execution of the continuous announcement effect may be determined not only in the case of the 15R probability change jackpot, but also in the case where the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is 15R normal jackpot, as well as in the case of the 15R regular jackpot. Also, in the information on the jackpot lottery prediction result, the information indicating that the prediction result is out of place before and after the reach other than the back and forth is included. You may decide. In addition, in addition to or in place of the 15R probability change jackpot, the execution of the continuous announcement effect may be determined in the case of the 2R probability change jackpot. In addition, the execution of the continuous announcement effect may be determined in consideration of the information on the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination included in the prefetch command. For example, the execution of the continuous announcement effect may be determined only when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination included in the prefetch command is a super reach or a special reach. In addition, when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern is the special reach, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined only when the result of the jackpot lottery is the 15R probability variable jackpot, and the continuous announcement effect is executed. In the case where the last variable effect in which is set has been developed into a special reach, a 15R probability change jackpot may be set with a 100% probability. As described above, the conditions for determining the execution of the continuous announcement effect may be appropriately set in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 10.

  In each of the above embodiments, after the continuous announcement effect has been completed, the image relating to the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect in one variation effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. After the end of the effect, the images related to the continuous announcement effect or the single announcement effect are not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variable effect for a predetermined number of consecutive times (for example, twice, three times, etc.). You may comprise. Thereby, the interval at which the continuous announcement effect is executed can be widened, so that the value of the continuous announcement effect held by the player can be increased as compared with the case where the continuous announcement effect occurs continuously.

  In the first embodiment, in a case where after the continuous announcement effect is completed, an image relating to the continuous announcement effect or the single announcement effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the X consecutive fluctuation effects. When the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, in the process of S1042 (see FIG. 32), a value obtained by adding X to the number of variable effects for executing the continuous announcement effect is set in the continuous announcement execution counter 223e. It may be. Then, when starting the variable effect, in the process of S1114 (see FIG. 33), it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement execution counter 223e is larger than X, and if the value is larger than X, the continuous announcement execution flag is turned on. Then, the continuous announcement effect counter 223e may be further decremented by one. Further, in the processing of S1117 (see FIG. 33), it is determined whether or not the continuous notice execution counter 223e is in the range of 1 or more and X or less, and if the value is in the range of 1 or more and X or less, the continuous notice execution flag is set. May not be turned on, and the value of the continuous announcement execution counter 223e may be decremented by one. In this way, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, if the value obtained by adding X to the number of the variable effects for executing the continuous announcement effect is set in the continuous announcement execution counter 223e, the continuous announcement effect can be easily performed. After the end, it is possible to configure so that the images related to the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect are not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the X consecutive fluctuation effects.

  Further, in the first embodiment, after the continuous announcement effect is completed, images relating to the continuous announcement effect and the single-shot announcement effect in the fluctuating effect for X consecutive times (in this case, any of X = 1 to 4). Is configured not to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the information (value) of the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0 area is 1, if the last variable effect of the continuous announcement effect is Thus, when the setting of the execution of the continuous announcement effect is performed, in the process of S1134 (see FIG. 55), all the continuous avoidance flags of the prefetch information first area to the prefetch information X area may be set to ON. . This makes it possible to easily prevent the images related to the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the continuous fluctuation effect for X times after the continuous announcement effect is completed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the main controller 110 pre-reads the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to predict the result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination, and then obtains information on the number of times of prefetch suspension and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery. A case has been described in which a look-ahead command including information regarding the information on the fluctuation pattern determination and information regarding the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in addition to the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination, or other determination in place of at least one of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination, for example, predicting the result of the stop type determination, and at least information on the number of pre-reading suspension and A look-ahead command including information on the prediction result may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 may set the execution of the continuous announcement effect based on the information on the prediction result included in the prefetch command. Further, the prediction result included in the prefetch command is stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b, and the prefetch information is shifted between the prefetch information 0 to the fourth area of the prefetch information storage area 223b each time the variation pattern command is received. It is determined whether or not the prediction result by the pre-reading stored in the information 0 area matches the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type indicated by the stop type command, and the destruction of the command is determined. Is also good. As described above, by appropriately setting the prediction result to be included in the prefetch command, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform various controls based on the prefetch.

  In addition, the main control device 110 may include the value prefetched for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 as it is in the prefetch command together with the information regarding the number of times of prefetch suspension, and transmit the same to the audio ramp control device 113. In addition, the type of counter included in the prefetch pending command may be a part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include other counters. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 stores various tables used in the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination of the main control device 110 in the ROM 222, and when a prefetch command is received, based on the various tables, the jackpot lottery is performed. The result or the result of the variation pattern determination may be predicted. Then, the execution of the continuous announcement effect may be set based on the prediction result. Further, the prediction result is stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b, and every time a variation pattern command is received, the shift processing is performed between the prefetch information 0th to the 4th areas of the prefetch information storage area 223b. The destruction determination of the command may be performed by determining whether or not the prediction result based on the pre-reading stored in the command matches the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type indicated by the stop type command. Also, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the prefetch pending command are stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b as they are, and each time a variation pattern command is received, the prefetch information 0 to 4 areas of the prefetch information storage area 223b are received. , The result of the jackpot lottery and the result of the fluctuation pattern determination may be predicted from the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch information 0 area. Then, the destruction determination of the command may be performed by determining whether or not the prediction result matches the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type indicated by the stop type command. By including the values of various counters in the pre-read command, the sound ramp control device 113 can predict the results of various determinations made by the main control device 110 from the values of the counters. On the other hand, the degree of freedom of control based on prefetching can be increased.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the continuous announcement command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the display control device 114 corresponds to the continuous announcement image type indicated by the continuous announcement command. A case has been described in which a transfer instruction is issued to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. However, the continuous preview image type indicated by the continuous preview command constitutes a continuous preview effect of the same rendering type. In this case, after the image data corresponding to the continuous preview image type indicated by the continuous preview command is once transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, it is not overwritten by other image data until the continuous preview effect ends. May be controlled as follows. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the same image data from being repeatedly transferred.

  If the continuous preview image type indicated by the continuous preview command constitutes a step-up continuous preview effect, not only the image data corresponding to the continuous preview image type indicated by the continuous preview command but also the step The transfer instruction may be such that image data corresponding to all the continuous preview image types used in the up-type continuous preview effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Also in this case, the image data corresponding to these continuous preview image types once transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is controlled so as not to be overwritten by other image data until the continuous preview effect ends. Is also good. This makes it possible to reliably store the image data in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data corresponding to the continuous preview image type is used in the continuous preview effect. Further, it is possible to prevent the same image data from being repeatedly transferred.

  In the sound lamp control device 113, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined by the continuous announcement determination process (S1020) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 31), and the continuous announcement effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the execution of the continuous announcement effect and the continuous announcement effect mode may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 sets a transmission instruction to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image type used in the continuous preview mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in response to the reception of this command. Is also good. Thus, the transfer of the image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be started before the variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is started. Before the image data corresponding to the continuous preview image type is used in the continuous preview effect, the image data can be reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  In addition, the display control device 114 may store the image data used in the continuous announcement effect in a sub-area dedicated to the continuous announcement effect image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the image data used in the continuous preview effect can be prevented from being overwritten by other image data. Therefore, the image data corresponding to the desired continuous preview image type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. Probability can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous announcement effect from being repeatedly transferred.

  In addition, the continuous notice command transmitted from the display control device 114 may include a signal notifying that it is the last continuous notice effect in which the variable effect is set. As a result, the display control device 114 can recognize that the display of the continuous announcement effect is the last, so that while the continuous announcement effect is being performed, the display control device 114 is stored in the normal video RAM 236 used in the continuous announcement effect. When the control is performed so that the image data is not overwritten, the overwriting control can be easily released.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the continuous announcement effect and the continuous announcement image type are notified from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 by the continuous announcement command has been described. It may be included in the pattern command. That is, in the variation display process (see FIG. 33) executed by the audio lamp control device 113, when a variation pattern command for display is generated (S1106), it is determined whether or not to perform the continuous announcement effect, and When a notice effect is performed, information on the execution and the continuous notice image type may be included in the display variation pattern command. Then, in the display control device 114, when the received display variation pattern command includes information on the execution of the continuous preview effect and the continuous preview image type, the display ROM 114 reads the character ROM 234 of the image data corresponding to the continuous preview image type. A transfer instruction to the normal video RAM 236 is issued, an additional data table corresponding to the continuous preview image type is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, and a variation display corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is performed. The contents of the additional data table may be added to the data table, a new display data table may be generated, and the new display data table may be set in the display data table buffer 233d. Alternatively, when additional drawing information for a plurality of continuous preview image types is described in advance in the display data table for variation, a display variation pattern command including information on the execution of the continuous preview effect and the continuous preview image type is received. Then, the additional data flag corresponding to the continuous preview image type is set from the display data table corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command by setting the additional data flag corresponding to the continuous preview image type to ON. The content may be specified. As a result, the number of commands is reduced, so that the processing can be simplified.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the display variation pattern command includes information on the execution of the continuous preview effect and the continuous preview image type, a display data table that does not correspond to the continuous preview image for each variation pattern, A display data table corresponding to each preview image type is prepared, and the display control device 114 stores the corresponding display data table in accordance with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command and the continuous preview image type in the display data table buffer. 233d. That is, the display data table may include both the drawing content corresponding to one variation pattern and the drawing content of the continuous preview effect corresponding to one continuous preview image type. In this case, it is not necessary to set an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice type. Therefore, the number of data tables to be set can be reduced, so that an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In this case, the transfer instruction of the image data corresponding to the continuous preview image type may be performed in accordance with the reception of the display variation pattern command. Thus, it is sufficient to prepare one transfer data table for each variation pattern, so that an increase in the number of data tables can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the stop symbol of the variable effect in which the continuous announcement effect is performed is based on the sound symbol control based on the stop symbol (reach out of front and back, reach other than back and forth, reach completely out of reach) determined by the main controller 110. Although the case where the setting is set by the device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the sound lamp control device 113, the stop symbol of the last fluctuating effect that has been suspended is set. Is not a jackpot, the stop symbol of the last variable effect may be replaced with the stop symbol in the front-rear reach mode instead of the stop symbol determined by the main control device 110 and set. As a result, the stop symbol of the last variable effect in which the continuous announcement effect is performed is not a stop symbol determined by the main control device 110, but always reaches the front and rear, so that the player has a high expectation. be able to.

  In each of the above embodiments, when performing a continuous announcement effect together with all of the suspended variable effects, each variable effect is performed in an effect mode based on a lottery result performed at the start of each change. In this case, it may be configured such that the effect mode of the variable effect other than the last variable effect that has been suspended is changed to the variable effect. In addition, by performing a process of generating a display variation pattern command in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1106 in FIG. 33), the variation pattern is changed according to the setting state of the continuous announcement effect and the number of times of execution of the continuous announcement effect. You may. In the case where the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the fluctuation effect is not updated, and the effect mode of the fluctuation effect is displayed as it is based on the fluctuation pattern determined by the main control device 110. You may. Here, even if the continuous announcement effect is performed continuously, if a situation in which the jackpot does not appear as a result despite the corresponding variable effect mode being, for example, a super-reach variable effect, the player's expectation May be retreated, but the continuous announcement effect is performed continuously, and the variable effects other than the last performed variable effect are continuously performed in the variable effect, so that it is executed last. It is possible to give the player a higher sense of expectation for the fluctuation effect.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the continuous announcement effect is always executed on the third symbol display device 81 when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. When the player has pressed the frame button 22 in a situation where the execution of the preview effect has been determined, the continuous preview effect may be executed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In each of the above embodiments, when performing the fluctuation effect, a case was described in which the high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 were scrolled so fast that the player could not visually recognize it was used. Thus, all of the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to be invisible, or all of the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which one first ball entry port 64 at which a jackpot lottery is started when a ball is entered is provided in the game board 13, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. A plurality of (for example, two) first entrance ports from which an entrance ball is detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started may be arranged on the game board 13. In this case, when there is a hold at each of the first entrances, the reserved ball count command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113 indicates which first entrance is being held. Information may be included. Also, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113 when starting the fluctuation may include information indicating the fluctuation effect held by any of the first entrances. Good. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance port, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the first entered ball indicated in the reserved ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the reserved ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance indicated in the variation pattern command is reduced by 1, the first entrance is changed. The number of reserved balls can be counted every time.

  When a plurality of first entrances are provided on the game board 13, pre-reading may be performed on the counter value held at each first entrance. In this case, the look-ahead command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113 may include information indicating which of the first entrances is the look-ahead for holding by the first entrance. Also, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113 when starting the fluctuation may include information indicating the fluctuation effect held by any of the first entrances. Good. Further, in the sound lamp control device 113, a prefetch information storage area may be prepared for each first entrance. Thus, every time the variation pattern command is received, the shift processing is performed on the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the first entrance where the starting prize which has triggered the execution of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command is detected. By doing so, it is possible to easily determine the correspondence between the fluctuation effect and the jackpot lottery predicted by the pre-reading and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern for the fluctuation effect. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine the destruction of the command.

  When a plurality of first entrances are provided, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the start of the continuous announcement effect when a pre-read command is received, and determines that the first entrance has a start winning prize. Regardless, a continuous announcement effect may be executed over all the variable effects (reserved balls) that are being held at that time. Also, a plurality of first entrances are provided, and a variable effect for winning a prize at one first entrance is preferentially executed over a variable effect for winning a prize at another first entrance. In the pachinko machine, the start of the continuous announcement effect may be determined only from the pre-reading result of the counter value obtained for the winning in the first entrance where the variable effect is preferentially executed. . As a result, it is not determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning in the first entrance with a low priority, and the continuous announcement effect is not started for this variable effect. . If a continuous announcement effect is started for a variable effect corresponding to a prize at the first entrance with a low priority, and a variable effect is continuously suspended at the first entrance with a high priority, There is a possibility that a continuous announcement effect may not be completed easily. On the other hand, in the present variation, it is not determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the first entrance with a low priority. Since the continuous announcement effect is not started, such a situation can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the value of the pending ball number counter 223a is reduced by 1 (see S1108 in FIG. 33) when the sound ramp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the number of retained balls of the main control device 110 is subtracted according to the setting of the variation pattern command by the variation start process (S311). The main control unit 110 sets the reserved ball count command so that the value (N) of the counter 203a is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio ramp control unit 113 (see S305 in FIG. 21). The command may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 together with the transmission of the command. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of balls retained in the main control device 110. In this case, S1108 in FIG. 33 is omitted.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a look-ahead command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the number of variable effects previously held from the number of look-ahead reservations included in the look-ahead command, and then notifies the voice-reading command by the look-ahead command. From the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination to be performed, a case has been described in which it is determined whether or not to perform the continuous announcement production for all the fluctuation productions held earlier, but it is not necessarily limited to this. When the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined, it may be determined whether or not to execute the continuous advance effect in each of the variable effects suspended earlier. As a result, the continuous announcement effect may or may not appear for each variable effect, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous announcement effect, and perform an effect that does not tire the player. Can be. In this case, the counter is updated each time the variable display process (see FIG. 33) is executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and a counter is provided for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect in each individual variable effect. You may. Then, in the variable display process, when the continuous announcement effect is performed (S1110: Yes), the value of the counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect in each individual variable effect is limited to a predetermined value. A continuous notice command may be set (S1111). In this case, the number (range) of predetermined values of the counter that sets the continuous announcement effect execution for the corresponding variable effect may be changed according to the conditions. As this condition, for example, the value of the number of times of pre-reading included in the pre-reading command when determining whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect, the number of executions of the remaining continuous announcement effect, whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect For example, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or the variation pattern determination included in the look-ahead command at the time of the determination, the variation pattern of each variation effect in which the continuous announcement effect is executed, or a combination of two or more of them. Accordingly, the probability that the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined in each variable effect is changed according to the condition, so that the player can pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous advance effect in each variable effect. .

  In each of the above embodiments, when the pre-read command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set based on the pre-read command, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the pre-read command is determined. Each time the variation pattern command is stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b, the above-described shift processing is executed between the prefetch information 0th to fourth areas of the prefetch information storage area 223b, and the 0th prefetch information area A case has been described in which various controls such as command destruction discrimination are executed based on various prediction results based on prefetching stored in the prefetch. On the other hand, a part or all of the various kinds of control based on the pre-reading may be performed by the display control device 114 instead of the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, for example, upon receiving the pre-read command, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display pre-read command including a part or all of the information included in the pre-read command, and transmits the display pre-read command to the display control device 114. Is also good. Further, main controller 110 may directly transmit a prefetch command to display controller 114. Further, the prefetch command or the display prefetch command transmitted to the display control device 114 may include various counter values instead of the prediction results of various determinations.

  On the other hand, in the display control device 114, based on the information included in the look-ahead command or the look-ahead command for display, based on the number of fluctuating effects previously held from the number of times of the look-ahead hold, from the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the like, It may be determined whether or not to perform the continuous announcement effect for all the variable effects suspended earlier. In this case, a continuous notice determination table 222a provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is provided in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and a continuous notice lottery counter 223c provided in the RAM 223. By providing those corresponding to the single announcement lottery counter 223d, the continuous announcement execution counter 223e, and the single announcement execution flag 223f in the work RAM 233, the display control device 114 sets the execution of the continuous announcement effect and the single announcement effect. You may do so. Alternatively, a continuous announcement determination table 222b provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is provided in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and a continuous announcement lottery counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 is provided. By providing the work RAM 233 with a counterpart of the preview lottery counter 223d, the one-time preview execution flag 223f, and the look-ahead information storage area 223g, the display control device 114 sets the execution of the continuous preview effect and the setting of the one-time preview effect. It may be. When the pre-read command or the pre-read command for display contains various counter values, the main controller 110 stores tables used for the jackpot lottery and various determinations in the ROM or the like of the display controller 114 and then stores the table in the display controller 114. At 114, the results of the jackpot lottery and various determinations may be predicted from various counter values included in the prefetch command or the display prefetch command. And when performing a continuous announcement effect, the display control apparatus 114 may determine the mode of the continuous announcement effect. Here, when the mode of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the transfer data information may be included in the drawing list so that the image data of the continuous announcement effect of the aspect is stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thereafter, each time the display variation pattern command is received, the additional data table corresponding to the continuous announcement effect in the set mode is added to the additional data table so that the continuous announcement effect is performed for the variation effect for the number of times of pre-reading suspension. You may make it set to buffer 233e.

  In the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, an equivalent to the prefetch information storage area 223b (see FIG. 9) is provided, and when a prefetch command or a display prefetch command is received, the prefetch information provided in the prefetch information storage area is provided. In the information first to fourth areas, various prediction results such as jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern determination or various counter values included in the prefetch command may be stored in an area corresponding to the number of times of prefetching of the prefetch command. Each time the display variation pattern command is received, a shift process similar to the shift process performed by the audio ramp control device 113 is executed between the prefetch information 0th to the 4th area, and the prefetch information 0th area. Various controls may be executed in accordance with various prediction results or various counter values based on prefetching stored in. For example, various prediction results based on prefetching stored in the prefetch information 0 area, or prediction results such as jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern discrimination predicted from various counter values based on prefetch stored in the prefetch information 0 area. Alternatively, the command destruction determination may be performed by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern indicated by the received display fluctuation pattern command or the stop type indicated by the received display stop type command matches. When the pre-read command or the pre-read command for display contains various counter values, the main controller 110 stores tables used for the jackpot lottery and various determinations in the ROM or the like of the display controller 114 and then stores the table in the display controller 114. At 114, the results of the jackpot lottery and various determinations may be predicted from various counter values included in the prefetch command or the display prefetch command.

  In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and a display instruction is given from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. A command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp from the display control device may be transmitted to the audio lamp control device. Further, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of components can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

  When the voice lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, when the one control device receives a pre-read command, it executes a continuous announcement effect based on information included in the pre-read command. May be set. In this case, one corresponding to the continuous announcement determination table 222a is provided in the ROM of one control device, and the continuous announcement lottery counter 223c, the single announcement lottery counter 223d, the continuous announcement execution counter 223e, By providing the one corresponding to the single announcement notice execution flag 223f, the setting of the execution of the continuous announcement effect and the setting of the single announcement effect may be performed by the one control device. Alternatively, a ROM corresponding to the continuous announcement determination table 222b may be provided in a ROM of one controller, and a continuous announcement lottery counter 223c, a single announcement lottery counter 223d, a single announcement execution flag 223f, and a prefetch may be provided in a RAM of the one controller. By providing a storage corresponding to the information storage area 223g, the setting of the execution of the continuous announcement effect and the setting of the single announcement effect may be performed by the one control device. Further, a RAM corresponding to the prefetch information storage area 223b (see FIG. 9) is provided in the RAM of the one control device, and when a prefetch command is received, the prefetch information first to first information provided in the prefetch information storage area is provided. In the fourth area, various prediction results such as a jackpot lottery and a change pattern determination or various counter values included in the prefetch command may be stored in an area corresponding to the number of times of prefetching of the prefetch command. Each time a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, the same shift processing as in the above embodiments is executed between the prefetch information 0th to fourth areas, and the prefetch stored in the prefetch information 0th area. Various controls may be executed in accordance with various prediction results or various counter values based on. For example, various prediction results based on prefetching stored in the prefetch information 0 area, or prediction results such as jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern discrimination predicted from various counter values based on prefetch stored in the prefetch information 0 area. Alternatively, the command destruction determination may be performed by determining whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command or the stop type indicated by the received stop type command matches.

  When the sound lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, instead of a command generated by the sound lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice command or an error occurrence command, Various flags such as a continuous notice flag and an error occurrence flag are generated, and based on the flags, the display data table, the transfer data table, and the additional data table are displayed in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table buffer 233f, the additional data table buffer 233e or The image data may be set in the composite data table buffer 451d, various image data such as a warning image may be generated, or a necessary image data transfer instruction may be set.

  In each of the above embodiments, the winning in the first entrance 64 and the passing of the second entrance 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. The number of times may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is changed by a number in the part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four by the reserved ball number. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern). A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be configured.

  Further, as described in the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display that is performed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

  Main control means for performing main control of the game, sub-control means for performing control based on a control signal from the main control means, and a fluctuating effect accompanying dynamic display of identification information are performed by the control of the sub-control means. A display means for providing a predetermined game value to a player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in a variable effect performed by the display means. Means for detecting the establishment of the start condition, and starting information acquired with the establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means, by a predetermined number until a lottery based on the start information is performed. And a lottery means for performing a lottery based on one piece of start information acquired first and stored in the storage means when the variable effect is started by the display means, and the lottery. Generating means for generating an effect control signal based on the lottery result by the stage, first output means for outputting the effect control signal generated by the generating means to the sub-control means, and effect control signal by the first output means Before the is output, a judging means for judging the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal based on the start information used for the lottery, and information on the judgment of the lottery content by the judging means And a second output means for outputting to the sub-control means, the sub-control means controls the display means to perform a variable effect based on the effect control signal output from the first output means, The main control means repeatedly executes the first processing after turning on the power, based on the information on the determination of the lottery content outputted from the second output means. And a second processing means for periodically executing a second processing at a predetermined time interval in preference to the first processing by interruption. The gaming machine A1 is performed in a first process executed by a first processing unit, and the lottery performed by the lottery unit is performed in a second process executed by the second processing unit.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the main control unit detects the establishment of the start condition by the detection unit, the start information acquired along with the establishment of the start condition is changed until the lottery based on the start information is performed. During this period, a predetermined number is stored in the storage means as an upper limit. Then, when the variable effect is started by the display device, the lottery device performs the lottery based on the one start information acquired first and stored in the storage device, and the effect control signal is generated based on the lottery result. The effect control signal generated by the generating means is output to the sub-control means by the first output means. Also, before the effect control signal is output by the first output means, the content of the lottery by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal is determined by the determination means based on the start information used for the lottery, Information about the determination of the lottery content is output to the sub-control means by the second output means. The sub-control means controls the display means to perform a variable effect based on the effect control signal output from the first output means, and performs various controls based on the information on the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means. Execute Here, the main control means includes a first processing means for repeatedly executing the first processing after the power is turned on, and a second processing means for periodically executing the second processing at predetermined time intervals prior to the first processing by interruption. Two processing means are provided, and the determination of the content of the lottery by the determination means is performed in the first processing executed by the first processing means, and the lottery by the lottery means is executed by the second processing means. It is configured to be performed in the second processing. Thus, even if the determination of the lottery content used to generate one effect control signal is being performed in the first process, the second process is performed in preference to the first process after a predetermined time has elapsed. This is executed by interruption, and in the second process, when the variable effect is started by the display means, a lottery for generating another effect control signal can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem that a lottery for displaying a variable effect that can be a trigger for giving a predetermined game value to a player on the display means is delayed due to the determination of the lottery content. On the other hand, since the determination of the lottery content is performed again in the first process after the completion of the second process, it is necessary to generate another effect control signal during the determination of the lottery content used for generating one effect control signal. Even if the lottery is performed, the determination of the lottery content can be completed without any problem. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of performing the main control of the game normally while performing various controls by judging the content of the lottery.

  In the gaming machine A1, when the main control means outputs information on the determination of the lottery content to the sub-control means, the main control means performs the determination by the lottery means based on the start information used for the determination of the lottery content by the determination means. The apparatus further includes a standby count acquisition unit configured to acquire a standby count until a lottery is performed, and the second output unit determines a standby count acquired by the standby count acquisition unit together with information on determination of the lottery content by the determination unit. A gaming machine A2 for outputting to the sub-control means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, when the main control means outputs information on the determination of the lottery content to the sub-control means, the number of waits until the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the start information used for the determination of the lottery content by the determination means. Is obtained by the number-of-times-of-waiting obtaining means, and the number of times of waiting obtained by the number-of-times-of-waiting obtaining means is output to the sub-control means by the second output means, together with information on the determination of the lottery content by the determining means. With this, the sub-control means actually performs the lottery based on the start information on which the determination of the lottery content has been made, and also sets the number of standby times until the effect control signal is generated and output based on the lottery result. Considering this, various controls can be executed. Therefore, more various controls can be performed in the sub-control means.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the main control means determines whether or not the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means is low in reliability. A gaming machine A3 comprising: a notification unit that notifies the sub-control unit when it is determined that the reliability of the result of the lottery content determined by the determination unit is low.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the main control means, the reliability determining means determines that the reliability of the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determining means is low. Is notified to the sub-control means by the notifying means, and after receiving the notification, the sub-control means performs various controls based on the information regarding the determination of the low-reliability lottery content. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the frequent execution of various controls based on the determination of the erroneous lottery content, thereby providing more reliable control to the player.

  In the gaming machine A3, when the lottery probability of obtaining a predetermined result set with respect to the lottery by the lottery means is changed, the reliability determining means changes the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determining means. Gaming machine A4 characterized by determining that the reliability of the gaming machine is low.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A3, when the lottery probability of obtaining a predetermined result set for the lottery by the lottery means is changed, the reliability judgment means previously determines the lottery probability. Since the reliability of the result of the lottery content determined by the means is determined to be low, even if the determination means cannot correctly determine that the lottery probability set for the lottery by the lottery means will be changed, Based on the determination of the lottery content, it is possible to suppress the frequent execution of various controls. Therefore, more reliable control can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, when the reliability determination unit determines that the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination unit is low in reliability, the determination unit determines that the reliability is low. The gaming machine A5, wherein the result of the lottery content is determined again.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3 or A4, the determining means determines that the reliability of the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determining means is low. Is configured to judge again the result of the lottery content determined to be low in reliability, so that the sub-control means executes more versatile control using the judgment result of more lottery content. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the determining means determines whether or not the effect is determined by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. It is characterized in that, based on the start information used for the lottery, the content of the lottery of whether or not to give a predetermined game value to the player after the variable effect performed based on the control signal is stopped and displayed. Gaming machine A6.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5. That is, before the effect control signal is output by the first output means, after the variable effect performed based on the effect control signal is stopped and displayed as the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal, The content of the lottery for giving the player a predetermined game value is determined by the determining means based on the start information used for the lottery. Thereby, the sub-control means can execute various controls in consideration of whether or not a predetermined game value is given after the variable effect is displayed based on the effect control signal output later. Therefore, more various controls can be performed in the sub-control means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the determining means determines whether or not the effect is determined by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. A gaming machine A7 for determining, based on start information used for a lottery, a lottery content relating to a dynamic display mode of a variable effect performed based on a control signal.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6. That is, before the effect control signal is output by the first output means, the dynamic display mode of the variable effect performed based on the effect control signal as the content of the lottery by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal. The content of the lottery is determined by the determining means based on the start information used for the lottery. Thus, the sub-control unit can execute various controls in consideration of the dynamic display mode of the variable effect performed based on the effect control signal output later. Therefore, more various controls can be performed in the sub-control means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the sub-control unit is configured to perform a part of performing a variable effect based on the information on the determination of the lottery content output from the second output unit. Alternatively, a gaming machine A8 comprising an effect setting means for setting the same or related effects for all the variable effects.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7. That is, in the sub-control means, based on the information on the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means, for a part or all of the variable effects until the variable effect in which the determination is performed, The same or related effects are set by the effect setting means. Thereby, when the same or related effects are performed over a plurality of variable effects, it is possible to suggest to the player the content of the lottery performed for the variable effects performed after the effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that some game value will be given.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the sub-control unit may be configured to execute the lottery means based on the information about the determination of the lottery content output from the second output unit and the start information used for the determination of the lottery content. And a corresponding determination means for determining whether the contents of the effect control signal generated by the generation means based on the result of the lottery and output from the first output means are appropriate. If the information on the determination of the lottery content and the content of the effect control signal are determined to be inappropriate, the dynamic display mode of the variable effect performed based on the effect control signal is specially determined. A game machine A9 comprising: a mode changing means for changing to a mode.

  According to the gaming machine A9, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8. That is, in the sub-control means, a lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the information on the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means and the start information used in the determination of the lottery content, and based on the result of the lottery. The content of the effect control signal generated by the generation means and output from the first output means is determined by the corresponding determination means as to whether the content is appropriate. If it is determined that they are not suitable, the dynamic display mode of the variable effect performed based on the effect control signal is changed to a special mode by the mode changing unit. Here, the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the information on the determination of the lottery content and the start information used for the determination of the lottery content, and the content of the effect control signal generated by the generator based on the lottery result. If these are not appropriate, it is possible that the sub-control unit may not be able to correctly receive various signals from the main control unit. In such a state, if a variable effect is performed in accordance with the effect control signal, there is a possibility that a game result different from the expectation held by the player due to the variable effect may be given to the player, and as a result, There is a risk of distrust. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A9, in such a case, the fluctuation effect is performed in a special mode, so that it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of expectation different from the actual lottery result, Can continue playing with peace of mind.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the main control unit stores start information acquired in accordance with establishment of a start condition detected by the detection unit and stored in the storage unit, separately from the storage unit. A second storage unit that performs a lottery process by using the lottery content by the lottery unit used for generating the production control signal before the production control signal is output by the first output unit. A game machine B1 for making a determination based on the start information stored in the second storage means as the start information to be obtained.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines A1 to A9. That is, in the main control unit, the start information acquired and stored in the storage unit when the start condition detected by the detection unit is satisfied is also stored in the second storage unit separately from the storage unit. Then, before the effect control signal is output by the first output means, the determination means stores the content of the lottery by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal in the second storage means as start information used for the lottery. It is configured to make a determination based on the start information that has been input. Thereby, even if the storage state of the one or more pieces of start information stored in the storage unit is changed based on the fact that the lottery unit performs the lottery, for example, with the lottery performed by the lottery unit, Even when the storage areas of the start information are respectively changed, the determination unit can determine the lottery content using the start information stored in the second storage unit. Therefore, even if a lottery for generating another effect control signal is performed during the determination of the content of the lottery used for generating one effect control signal, the start information used for the determination of the content of the lottery can be easily read. .

  In the gaming machine B1, the main control means includes a second storage state instructing means for indicating whether or not start information indicating that the determination of the lottery content by the determination means has not been completed is stored in the second storage means. And storing the start information acquired with the establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means in the second storage means and stored in the storage means. State setting means for setting the stored state of the start information in the second storage means to a state in which the start information for which the determination of the lottery content has not been completed by the determination means is stored, wherein the determination means comprises: The storage state of the start information in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state instruction means is a state in which the start information for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is not completed is stored. In this case, based on the starting information stored in the second storage means, before the effect control signal is output by the first output means, the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal is determined. A gaming machine B2 characterized by making a judgment.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, in the main control means, the state of whether or not the start information indicating that the determination of the lottery content is not completed by the determination means is stored in the second storage means is indicated by the second storage state instruction means. Further, when the start information acquired and stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied is stored in the second storage means, the state setting means causes the second storage state instruction means to store the start information. The storage state of the start information in the second storage means is set to a state in which the start information in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is not completed is stored. Then, when the storage state of the start information in the second storage unit indicated by the second storage state instruction unit is a state in which the start information for which the determination of the lottery content is not completed by the determination unit is stored, Based on the start information stored in the second storage means, before the effect control signal is output by the first output means, the content of the lottery by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal is determined by the determination means. You. Thus, when the start information is stored in the second storage means, the determination means determines that the storage state in the second storage means is a state in which the start information for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means has not been completed is stored. It is possible to easily determine that there is something, and to reliably start the determination of the lottery content based on the start information for which the determination of the lottery content is not completed.

  In the gaming machine B2, the main control means may determine that the storage state of the start information in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state instruction means is a start information indicating that the determination of the lottery content by the determination means has not been completed. Is stored, the start information newly acquired and stored in the storage unit when the start condition detected by the detection unit is satisfied is not stored in the second storage unit. A gaming machine B3 comprising second storage control means.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B2. That is, in the main control means, the storage state of the start information in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state instruction means is a state in which the start information in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is not completed is stored. In some cases, the start information newly acquired and stored in the storage unit when the start condition detected by the detection unit is satisfied is not stored in the second storage unit by the second storage control unit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the start information, for which the determination of the lottery content already stored in the second storage means is not completed, from being overwritten by the newly acquired start information. In particular, by being prevented from being overwritten by newly acquired start information during the determination of the lottery content, it is possible to prevent the determination of the lottery content from being performed erroneously.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the main control unit stores start information acquired in accordance with establishment of a start condition detected by the detection unit and stored in the storage unit in the second storage unit. In the case of performing, when the lottery by the lottery means is performed, the number of standby times storage means to store the number of standby until the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the start information stored in the storage means, A standby count subtracting unit for subtracting 1 from the standby count stored in the standby count storage unit; and information on the determination of the lottery content performed by the lottery unit based on the start information stored in the second storage unit. When outputting to the sub-control means, the number-of-waits acquisition means for acquiring the number of waits stored in the number-of-times-of-waiting storage means; Gaming machine B4, characterized by outputting the standby number acquired by the standby number obtaining unit along with information about the determination of volume to the secondary control unit.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3. That is, when the main control means stores start information acquired in accordance with establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means and stored in the storage means also in the second storage means, the start information stored in the storage means is stored. The number of standbys until the lottery is performed by the lottery unit based on the information is stored in the standby number storage unit. Then, when a lottery is performed by the lottery means, the number of times of waiting stored in the number-of-times-of-waiting storage means is decremented by one by the number-of-times-of-waiting number subtracting means. As a result, the lottery by the lottery means is performed, and the fact that the number of times of standby is reduced by one is accurately reflected, so that the same start information as the start information stored in the second storage means among the start information stored in the storage means. , The number of standbys until the lottery is performed by the lottery means can always be accurately stored in the standby number storage means. When outputting to the sub-control means information relating to the determination of the lottery content performed by the lottery means based on the start information stored in the second storage means, the number of standbys stored in the number-of-times-of-waiting storage means is set to The second output unit is configured to output the number of times of waiting acquired by the number-of-times-of-waiting acquiring unit to the sub-control unit, together with information on the determination of the lottery content by the determining unit. Thereby, even when the determination of the lottery content is made based on the start information stored in the second storage means, the sub control means is stored together with the information on the determination of the lottery content. Based on the same start information as the start information used for determining the content of the lottery among the start information stored in the means, it is possible to accurately notify the number of waits until the lottery is performed by the lottery means. Therefore, in the sub-control means, the lottery is actually performed based on the start information on which the determination of the lottery content has been performed, and the number of standby times until an effect control signal is generated and output based on the lottery result is accurately determined. Various controls can be executed while grasping. Therefore, the sub-control means can perform more precise control.

  In the gaming machine B4, the main control unit includes a standby count determining unit that determines whether the standby count stored in the standby count storage unit is 0 or less, and the second output unit is configured to determine whether the standby count is determined by the standby count determination unit. The gaming machine B5, wherein when it is determined that the number of times of waiting stored in the number-of-times-of-waiting storage means is 0 or less, information relating to the determination of the lottery content by the determining means is not output to the sub control means. .

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B4. That is, the number-of-times-of-waiting determination means determines whether the number of times of standby stored in the number-of-times-of-waiting storage means is 0 or less. The fact that the number of times of waiting stored in the number-of-times-of-waiting storage means becomes 0 or less means that the lottery means based on the same starting information as the starting information stored in the second storing means among the starting information stored in the storing means. The number of standbys before the lottery is performed is 0 or less, that is, the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the start information. Therefore, the standby count determining unit determines whether the standby count stored in the standby count storage unit is equal to or less than 0, and determines whether the start information stored in the second storage unit is equal to the start information stored in the storage unit. It can be determined that the lottery has been performed by the lottery means based on the same start information. Here, before the information relating to the determination of the lottery content based on the start information stored in the second storage means is output to the sub-control means, the determination of the content of the lottery among the start information stored in the storage means is performed. If a lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the same start information as the start information to be used, and the lottery result is output to the sub-control means, then it is meaningful to output information relating to the determination of the lottery content to the sub-control means. In some cases. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B5, when the number of standbys stored in the number-of-times-of-waiting storage unit is determined to be 0 or less by the number-of-times-of-waiting determination unit, the second output unit determines whether the lottery content is The information about the determination is not output to the sub control means. Thus, before the information on the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is output to the sub-control means, based on the same start information as the start information used for the determination of the lottery content, out of the start information stored in the storage means. When the lottery is performed by the lottery means, it is possible to prevent the result regarding the determination of the lottery content for the lottery from being output to the sub-control means unnecessarily after the lottery result is output to the sub-control means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the main control unit stores start information acquired in accordance with establishment of a start condition detected by the detection unit and stored in the storage unit, separately from the storage unit. The second storage means and the third storage means, and when the start condition is detected by the detection means, the determination of the lottery content by the determination means among the second storage means and the third storage means is performed. Storage means for storing start information acquired in response to establishment of the start condition, in one of the storage sections in which the incomplete start information is not stored; and the determination means includes a lottery content by the determination means. The first output means outputs an effect control signal based on at least one of the start information of the second storage means and the third storage means in which the start winning which has not been determined is stored. Gaming machine C1 to before being force, characterized in that to determine the drawing contents by said selecting means to be used in generating 該演 output control signal.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the main control means includes a second storage means and a third storage means for storing, separately from the storage means, start information acquired in accordance with establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means and stored in the storage means. Is provided. Then, when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition, one of the second storage means and the third storage means which does not store a start winning prize for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is not completed. The start information acquired with the establishment of the start condition is stored by the storage control means. Here, since the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is performed in the first processing, the second processing is periodically performed at predetermined time intervals prior to the first processing. Therefore, the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is often interrupted with the execution of the second processing. Therefore, it may take time to determine the content of the lottery. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, when the establishment of the start condition is detected, even if the start winning a prize in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is not completed is stored in the second memory means, Since the newly obtained start information can be stored in the third storage means, more start information can be stored in the second storage means or the third storage means. Then, the judging means outputs an effect control signal from the first output means based on at least one of the start information of the second storage means and the third storage means in which the start winning in which the determination of the lottery content is not completed is stored. Before the game, the content of the lottery by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal is determined. Therefore, the lottery content is determined for more start information, so that a variety of controls can be executed in the sub-control means.

  In the gaming machine C1, the determination means may include: if both the second storage means and the third storage means store a starting winning in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means has not been completed. Based on the start information stored in the start information stored in the second storage means and the start information stored in the start information stored in the third storage means, the first A gaming machine C2 for judging the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal before the effect control signal is output by the output means.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1. That is, in the case where a start winning prize for which the determination of the lottery content has not been completed is stored in both the second storage unit and the third storage unit, the start information stored in the second storage unit is stored. For each of the stored start information and the start information stored in the start information stored in the third storage unit, before the effect control signal is output by the first output unit based on the start information, The content of the lottery by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal is determined by the determination means. Accordingly, if two pieces of start information for which the determination of the lottery content is not completed are stored in the second storage means and the third storage means, the determination of the lottery content is performed for each of the two start winnings. Can be. Therefore, the determination of the lottery content can be executed earlier for more start information.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the main control means stores a second storage state indicating whether or not start information indicating that the determination of the lottery content by the determination means has not been completed is stored in the second storage means. Instruction means; third storage state instruction means for indicating whether or not start information indicating that the determination of the lottery content has not been completed by the determination means is stored in the third storage means; and the second storage means The second storage means indicated by the second storage state instructing means when the start information acquired in accordance with establishment of the starting condition detected by the detection means and stored in the storage means is stored. The second storage state setting means for setting the storage state of the start information in the state in which the start information for which the determination of the lottery content has not been completed by the determination means is stored, and the detection of the third storage means hand The storage state of the start information in the third storage means indicated by the third storage state instructing means when the start information acquired in accordance with establishment of the start condition and stored in the storage means is stored. And a third state setting means for setting a state in which start information indicating that the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is not completed is stored, wherein the determination means includes the second storage state instruction means and the second storage state instruction means. 3 Based on the state indicated by the storage state instruction means, the storage state of the start information in at least one of the second storage means and the third storage means is determined by the start information for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is not completed. In the case of the stored state, based on the start information that the determination of the lottery content is not completed, before the effect control signal is output by the first output means, Gaming machine C3, characterized in that is to determine lottery contents by said selecting means to be used in generating output control signals.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1 or C2. That is, in the main control means, the state of whether or not the start information for which the determination of the lottery content has not been completed by the determination means is stored in the second storage means is indicated by the second storage state instruction means. The state of whether or not the start information for which the determination of the lottery content is not completed is stored in the third storage means is indicated by the third storage state instruction means. Further, when the start information acquired and stored in the storage means is stored in the second storage means in response to establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means, the second storage state instruction means indicates The storage state of the start information in the storage unit is set by the second storage state setting unit to a state in which the start information for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination unit is not completed is stored. Further, when the start information acquired and stored in the storage means is stored in the third storage means in response to establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means, the third storage state instruction means indicates the third storage state instruction means. The storage state of the start information in the storage unit is set by the third storage state setting unit to a state in which the start information for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination unit is not completed is stored. The storage state of the start information in at least one of the second storage unit and the third storage unit is determined by the determination unit based on the state indicated by the second storage state instruction unit and the third storage state instruction unit. Is in a state in which the start information that is not completed is stored, an effect control signal is output by the first output unit by the determination unit based on the start information that the determination of the lottery content is not completed. First, the content of the lottery by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal is determined. Thus, when the start information is stored in the second storage unit or the third storage unit, the determination unit determines that the storage state in the second storage unit or the third storage unit is not completed by the determination unit. It is possible to easily determine that a certain start information is stored, and to reliably start the determination of the lottery content based on the start information for which the determination of the lottery content is not completed.

  In the gaming machine C3, the storage control unit may determine that the storage state of the start information in the second storage unit indicated by the second storage state instruction unit is a start information indicating that the determination of the lottery content by the determination unit is not completed. Is stored, the start information newly acquired and stored in the storage unit along with establishment of the start condition detected by the detection unit is not stored in the second storage unit, When the storage state of the start information in the third storage unit indicated by the third storage state instruction unit is a state in which the start information for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination unit is not completed is stored, A gaming machine C4 characterized in that start information newly acquired in accordance with establishment of a start condition detected by the detection means and stored in the storage means is not stored in the third storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C3. That is, if the storage state of the start information in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state instruction means is a state in which the start information for which the determination of the lottery content has not been completed by the determination means is stored, the storage is performed. By the control means, the start information newly acquired in accordance with establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means and stored in the storage means is not stored in the second storage means. If the storage state of the start information in the third storage unit indicated by the third storage state instruction unit is a state in which the start information for which the determination of the lottery content has not been completed by the determination unit is stored, the storage is performed. The start information newly acquired and stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied is not stored in the third storage means by the control means. Thus, it is possible to prevent the start information for which the determination of the lottery content has not been completed by the determination means already stored in the second storage means or the third storage means from being overwritten by the newly acquired start information. In particular, by being prevented from being overwritten by newly acquired start information during the determination of the lottery content, it is possible to prevent the determination of the lottery content from being performed erroneously.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the main control unit stores start information acquired in accordance with establishment of a start condition detected by the detection unit and stored in the storage unit in the second storage unit. The second standby number storage means for storing the number of standby times until the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the start information stored in the storage means, and establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means. When the start information acquired and stored in the storage means is also stored in the third storage means, the standby is performed until the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the start information stored in the storage means. A third number-of-waits storage means for storing the number of times, and when the lottery is performed by the lottery means, the number of times of standby stored in the second number-of-waits storage means and the third number-of-times-standby storage means A step of subtracting 1 from the number of times of waiting, and a step of outputting to the sub-control means information relating to the determination of the lottery content performed by the lottery means based on the start information stored in the second storage means. Acquiring the number of times of waiting stored in the second number-of-times-of-waiting storage means, and sub-controlling information on the determination of the lottery content performed by the lottery means based on the start information stored in the third storage means. Means for obtaining the number of times of waiting stored in the third number-of-times-of-waiting storage means when outputting to the means, wherein the second output means combines with information on the determination of the lottery content by the determining means. A game machine C5 that outputs the number of times of standby acquired by the number-of-times-of-waiting acquisition means to the sub control means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the main control means stores start information acquired in accordance with establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means and stored in the storage means also in the second storage means, the start information stored in the storage means is stored. The number of standbys until the lottery is performed by the lottery unit based on the information is stored in the second standby number storage unit. Further, when the start information acquired and stored in the storage means is stored in the third storage means along with establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means, the lottery is performed based on the start information stored in the storage means. The number of standbys until the lottery is performed by the means is stored in the third standby number storage means. Then, when a lottery is performed by the lottery means, the standby number stored in the second standby number storage means and the third standby number storage means is decremented by one by the standby number subtraction means. As a result, the lottery by the lottery means is performed, and the fact that the number of times of standby is reduced by 1 is accurately reflected. Therefore, the start information stored in the second storage means or the third storage means among the start information stored in the storage means. The number of standbys until the lottery is performed by the lottery unit based on the same start information as the information can always be accurately stored in the second standby number storage unit and the third standby number storage unit. When outputting to the sub-control means information relating to the determination of the lottery content performed by the lottery means based on the start information stored in the second storage means, the number of standbys stored in the second number-of-waits storage means is When outputting to the sub-control means information relating to the determination of the lottery content obtained by the lottery means based on the start information stored in the third storage means, which is obtained by the standby number obtaining means, the third standby number storage means The stored number of times of waiting is acquired by the number-of-times-of-waiting acquiring means. The second output means is configured to output the number of times of waiting acquired by the number-of-times-of-waiting-acquisition means to the sub-control means, together with information on the judgment of the lottery content by the judgment means. Accordingly, even when the lottery content is determined based on the start information stored in the second storage means or the third storage means, the sub-control means is informed of the information on the determination of the lottery content. In addition, it is possible to accurately notify the number of waiting times until the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the same start information as the start information used for the determination of the lottery content among the start information stored in the storage means. it can. Therefore, in the sub-control means, the lottery is actually performed based on the start information on which the determination of the lottery content has been performed, and the number of standby times until an effect control signal is generated and output based on the lottery result is accurately determined. Various controls can be executed while grasping. Therefore, the sub-control means can perform more precise control.

  In the gaming machine C5, the main control unit includes a standby number determination unit that determines whether the standby number stored in the second standby number storage unit or the third standby number storage unit is 0 or less, and the second output unit When the number of standby times stored in the second number of standby times storage means is determined to be 0 or less by the number of standby times determination means, the determination is made based on the start information stored in the second storage means. If the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is not output to the sub-control means, and if the number of standbys stored in the third number-of-waits storage means is determined to be 0 or less by the number-of-times-of-waiting determination means, The gaming machine C6, wherein information relating to the determination of the lottery content by the determination means performed based on the start information stored in the third storage means is not output to the sub control means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C5. That is, the standby count determining unit determines whether the standby count stored in the second standby count storage unit or the third standby count storage unit is 0 or less. The fact that the standby count stored in the second standby count storage unit or the third standby count storage unit has become 0 or less means that the start information stored in the storage unit is stored in the second storage unit or the third storage unit. The number of standbys until the lottery is performed by the lottery unit based on the same start information as the start information is 0 or less, that is, the lottery is performed by the lottery unit based on the start information. . Therefore, the standby count determining means determines whether the standby count stored in the second standby count storage means or the third standby count storage means is equal to or less than 0, and thereby determines the second of the start information stored in the storage means. Based on the same start information as the start information stored in the storage unit or the third storage unit, it can be determined that the lottery unit has performed the lottery. Here, before the information relating to the determination of the lottery content is output to the sub-control means based on the start information stored in the second storage means or the third storage means, the start information stored in the storage means includes The lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the same start information as the start information used for the determination of the lottery content, and if the result of the lottery is output to the sub-control means, then the information about the determination of the lottery content is sent to the sub-control means. Sometimes output doesn't make sense. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C6, the second output means outputs the second storage means when the standby number stored in the second standby number storage means is determined to be 0 or less by the standby number determination means. The information relating to the determination of the lottery content by the determination means performed based on the start information stored in the third control means is not output to the sub-control means. When it is determined that there is, the information relating to the determination of the lottery content by the determination means performed based on the start information stored in the third storage means is not output to the sub control means. Thus, before the information on the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is output to the sub-control means, based on the same start information as the start information used for the determination of the lottery content, out of the start information stored in the storage means. When the lottery is performed by the lottery means, it is possible to prevent the result regarding the determination of the lottery content for the lottery from being output to the sub-control means unnecessarily after the lottery result is output to the sub-control means.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the main control means stores information indicating a state of whether or not the lottery content has been determined by the determination means for each start information stored in the storage means. A determination state storage unit that determines a lottery content from the start information stored in the storage unit based on the information stored in the determination state storage unit. And determining, based on the start information, the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. A gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, for each piece of start information stored in the storage means, information indicating whether or not the lottery content has been determined by the determination means is stored in the determination state storage means. Then, the judging means judges, based on the information stored in the judgment state storage means, start information for which the judgment means has not determined the lottery content among the start information stored in the storage means. Is configured to determine the content of the lottery by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. This makes it possible to easily start, from among the start information stored in the storage means, the start information for which the determination of the lottery content has not been made, without providing a separate storage means from the storage means for performing the determination of the lottery content. It is possible to specify and determine the content of the lottery. Therefore, an increase in cost due to an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1, based on the information stored in the determination state storage means, the determination means may determine, based on the information stored in the storage means, all of the start information stored in the storage means for which the determination means has not determined the lottery content. Determining start information and determining, based on each start information, the content of the lottery by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal before the effect control signal is output by the first output means; A gaming machine D2, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. That is, based on the information stored in the determination state storage means, the start information stored in the storage means is used by the determination means to determine all the start information for which the determination means has not determined the content of the lottery. Before each of the effect control signals is output by the first output means, the content of the lottery by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal is determined based on the start information. Accordingly, if a plurality of pieces of start information for which the determination of the lottery content has not been completed is stored in the storage means, the determination of the lottery content can be performed for each of the plurality of start winnings. Therefore, the determination of the lottery content can be executed earlier for more start information.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the storage unit has a plurality of storage areas provided for each number of standby times until the lottery is performed by the lottery unit, and the storage area is associated with the storage area. The main control means stores start information for waiting for a lottery by the lottery means by the number of times of waiting, based on one start information stored in one storage area of the storage means by the determination means. A gaming machine D3 comprising: a standby count storage unit that stores a standby count associated with the one storage area when a lottery content is determined.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the storage means is provided with a plurality of storage areas provided for each number of standbys until the lottery is performed by the lottery means, and each storage area is provided with the number of standbys associated with the storage area. The start information for waiting for the lottery by is stored. Here, in the main control unit, when the determination unit determines the lottery content based on one start information stored in one storage area of the storage unit, the determination unit is associated with the one storage area. The number of times of waiting is stored in the number-of-times-of-waiting storage means. Thus, when the lottery content is determined by the determination means, it is possible to easily determine which storage area to use for the determination based on the start information stored in the standby number storage means. it can. Therefore, even when the lottery content is determined using the start information stored in the storage unit, the processing related to the determination can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine D3, the main control unit includes a standby number subtraction unit that subtracts 1 from the standby number stored in the standby number storage unit when a lottery is performed by the lottery unit. Machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D3. That is, in the main control means, when the lottery is performed by the lottery means, the number of times of waiting stored in the number-of-times-of-waiting storage means is decremented by one by the number-of-times-of-waiting number subtracting means. Here, when the lottery is performed by the lottery means, the storage area in which the start information for determining the content of the lottery is stored is also changed to the storage area corresponding to the smaller number of standby times. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D4, when the lottery is performed by the lottery means, the number of standbys stored in the number-of-times-of-waiting storage means is decremented by one. It is possible to accurately indicate the storage area in which the start information used for determining the content is stored. Thereby, even if a lottery is performed by the lottery means during the determination of the lottery content, the start information used for the determination of the lottery content is stored according to the number of standby times stored in the number-of-times-of-waiting storage means. The determined storage area can be easily determined. Therefore, even when the lottery content is determined using the start information stored in the storage means, the processing related to the determination can be further simplified.

  In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second output unit outputs the number of standby times stored in the number-of-waiting-times storage unit to the sub-control unit together with information on the determination of the lottery content by the determination unit. Gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second output means also stores the number of times of waiting stored in the number-of-times-of-waiting storage means together with information on the determination of the lottery content by the determining means. Since it is configured to output to the control means, the sub-control means, together with the information on the determination of the lottery content, until the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the start information used for the determination. The number of waiting times can be accurately notified. Therefore, in the sub-control means, the lottery is actually performed based on the start information on which the determination of the lottery content has been performed, and the number of standby times until an effect control signal is generated and output based on the lottery result is accurately determined. Various controls can be executed while grasping. Therefore, the sub-control means can perform more precise control.

  In any of the gaming machines D3 to D5, the main control unit includes a standby number determination unit configured to determine whether a standby number stored in the standby number storage unit is 0 or less, and the second output unit includes the standby unit. When the number-of-times determining means determines that the number of times of standby stored in the number-of-times-of-waiting storage means is 0 or less, information relating to the determination of the lottery content by the determining means is not output to the sub-control means. Gaming machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines D3 to D5. That is, the number-of-times-of-waiting determination means determines whether the number of times of standby stored in the number-of-times-of-waiting storage means is 0 or less. The fact that the number of times of waiting stored in the number-of-times-of-waiting storage means has become 0 or less means that the number of times of waiting until a lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the start information used for the determination of the lottery content has become 0 or less. That is, it means that the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the start information. Therefore, the number-of-times-of-standby determining means determines whether the number of times of standby stored in the number-of-times-of-waiting storage means is 0 or less, and the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the start information used for the determination of the content of the lottery. You can judge that. Here, before the information on the determination of the lottery content is output to the sub-control means based on the start information stored in the storage means, a lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the start information, and the lottery result is If the information is output to the control means, then it may not be meaningful to output information about the determination of the lottery content to the sub-control means. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D6, when the number of standbys stored in the number-of-times-of-waiting storage unit is determined to be 0 or less by the number-of-times-of-waiting determining unit, the second output unit determines whether or not the lottery content is determined by the determining unit. The information about the determination is not output to the sub control means. Accordingly, if the lottery is performed based on the start information used in the determination before the information about the determination of the content of the lottery by the determiner is output to the sub-controller, the result of the lottery is determined. After being output to the sub-control means, it is possible to prevent the result regarding the determination of the lottery content for the lottery from being output to the sub-control means unnecessarily.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2, B4, B5, C5, C6, and D5, the sub-control unit outputs the information on the determination of the lottery content output from the second output unit together with the information and outputs the standby information. A gaming machine E1 comprising a judgment information storage means for storing the information in association with the number of times.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2, B4, B5, C5, C6, and D5, the sub-control unit outputs information on the determination of the lottery content output from the second output unit. The sub-control means stores the information on the determination of the lottery content stored in the judgment information storage means by the main control means, in association with the number of standby times output together with the information and stored in the judgment information storage means. Various controls can be executed after waiting for the number of times of waiting in accordance with the lottery. Thus, the sub-control unit can execute various controls based on the information on the determination of the lottery content and the result of the actual lottery.

  In the gaming machine E1, the main control means determines whether or not the reliability of the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means is low, and the reliability determination means has previously determined the reliability by the determination means. Notification means for notifying the sub-control means when it is determined that the reliability of the result of the lottery content is low, and the sub-control means, upon receiving the notification by the notification means, to the judgment information storage means A gaming machine E2 comprising a determination information invalidating means for invalidating all information on determination of lottery contents stored therein.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1. That is, in the main control means, when the reliability judgment means judges that the reliability of the result of the lottery content previously judged by the judgment means is low, the sub-control means is notified to that effect by the notification means. You. When the sub-control unit receives the notification from the notification unit, the information on the determination of the lottery content stored in the determination information storage unit is invalidated by the determination information invalidating unit. Thus, after receiving the notification, the sub-control unit can suppress the various controls from being performed based on the information regarding the determination of the low-reliability lottery content. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the frequent execution of various controls based on the determination of the erroneous lottery content, thereby providing more reliable control to the player.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the judgment information storage means includes a plurality of judgment storage areas provided for each number of times of waiting until a lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the start information used for judging the lottery content. A valid information storage area for storing information indicating whether or not the information on the determination of the lottery content stored in the determination storage area is valid for each of the determination storage areas; (2) The information on the determination of the lottery content output from the output means is stored in the determination storage area of the determination information storage means corresponding to the number of standby times output together with the information, and further corresponding to the determination storage area. A gaming machine E3 comprising a determination information storage control means for setting information in a valid information storage area to valid.

  According to the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2. That is, the judgment information storage means includes a plurality of judgment storage areas provided for each number of times of waiting until the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the start information used for judging the lottery contents, and A valid information storage area for storing information indicating whether or not the information on the determination of the lottery content stored in the determination storage area is valid. Then, in the sub-control means, the judgment information storage control means causes the information on the judgment of the lottery content output from the second output means to be determined by the judgment information storage means corresponding to the number of standby times output together with the information. The information is stored in the storage area, and the information in the valid information storage area corresponding to the determination storage area is set to be valid. In this way, in the sub-control means, when the information relating to the lottery content is stored in the determination information storage means, the information relating to the determination of the lottery content can be easily associated with the number of times the information has been on standby. Further, the sub-control means can easily determine whether or not the information on the determination of the valid lottery content is stored in the determination storage area provided for each number of standbys based on the information of the valid information storage area. it can. Therefore, when the sub-control unit executes various controls based on the information on the determination of the lottery content, the load related to the processing can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E3, the main control means determines whether or not the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means has low reliability. Notification means for notifying the sub-control means when it is determined that the reliability of the result of the lottery content determined by the sub-control means is low. A gaming machine (E4) comprising a judgment information invalidating means for invalidating information in a valid information storage area corresponding to all judgment storage areas provided in the means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E3. That is, in the main control means, when the reliability judgment means judges that the reliability of the result of the lottery content previously judged by the judgment means is low, the sub-control means is notified to that effect by the notification means. You. When the sub-control means receives the notification from the notification means, the information in the valid information storage area corresponding to all the judgment storage areas provided in the judgment information storage means is set invalid by the judgment information invalidating means. Thereby, all the information on the determination of the lottery content stored in the determination information storage means is easily invalidated. Thus, after receiving the notification, the sub-control unit can easily suppress the various controls from being performed based on the information regarding the determination of the low-reliability lottery content. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the frequent execution of various controls based on the determination of the wrong lottery content, and it is possible to easily provide the player with more reliable control.

  Main control means for performing main control of the game, sub-control means for performing control based on a control signal from the main control means, and a fluctuating effect accompanying dynamic display of identification information are performed by the control of the sub-control means. A display means for providing a predetermined game value to a player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in a variable effect performed by the display means. Means for detecting the establishment of the start condition, and starting information acquired with the establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means, by a predetermined number until a lottery based on the start information is performed. And a lottery means for performing a lottery based on one piece of start information acquired first and stored in the storage means when the variable effect is started by the display means, and the lottery. Generating means for generating an effect control signal based on the lottery result by the stage, first output means for outputting the effect control signal generated by the generating means to the sub-control means, and effect control signal by the first output means Before the is output, the determination means for determining the content of the lottery by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal based on the start information used for the lottery, and the content of the lottery determined by the determination means Second output means for outputting information to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means controls a fluctuation effect by the display means based on the effect control signal output from the first output means. And, based on the information about the lottery content output from the second output means, whether or not to execute a suggestion effect indicating the lottery content over a plurality of variable effects. Determining means for determining, and, when the determining means determines to execute the suggestion effect, the suggestion control for controlling the variable effect control means to perform the suggestion effect over the plurality of variable effects performed by the display means. Means, after a suggestion effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects by the control of the suggestion control device, at least the first variation effect performed by the control of the variation control device is suggested by the control of the suggestion control device. A gaming machine F1 comprising: avoiding means for avoiding an effect.

  According to the gaming machine F1, when the main control unit detects the establishment of the start condition by the detection unit, the start information acquired along with the establishment of the start condition is changed until the lottery based on the start information is performed. During this period, a predetermined number is stored in the storage means as an upper limit. Then, when the variable effect is started by the display device, the lottery device performs the lottery based on the one start information acquired first and stored in the storage device, and the effect control signal is generated based on the lottery result. The effect control signal generated by the generating means is output to the sub-control means by the first output means. With this, in the sub-control means, a fluctuation effect is performed on the display means under the control of the fluctuation control means based on the effect control signal output from the first output means. When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in the variable effect, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, since the variable effect is performed by the effect control signal based on the lottery result, a predetermined game value is given to the player according to the result of the lottery performed based on the start information. On the other hand, in the main control means, before the effect control signal is output by the first output means, the content of the lottery by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal is determined based on the start information used in the lottery. And information on the content of the lottery is output to the sub-control means by the second output means. Then, based on the information about the lottery content output from the second output means, the sub-control means determines that the suggestion effect suggesting the lottery content is to be executed over a plurality of variation effects, and the variation control is performed. The suggestion effect is performed by the control of the suggestion control means over a plurality of variable effects performed by the display means under the control of the means. Therefore, when this suggested effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects, the player can infer the lottery content by this suggested effect, and can play a game while expecting a predetermined game value to be given. it can. Here, when the suggestion effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects by the control of the suggestion control device, the sub-control device performs the suggestion effect by the control of the suggestion control device for at least the first variation effect. This is avoided by the avoidance means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the expectation of the suggested effect in the player by performing two or more suggested effects in succession. Therefore, a highly entertaining suggested effect can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine F1, the sub-control unit determines whether or not to execute a second suggestion effect performed with the same content as the suggestion effect without being based on the information on the lottery content output from the second output unit. When it is determined that the second suggestion effect is to be performed by the second determination unit and the second determination unit, the one variation effect performed by the display unit under the control of the variation control unit is determined by the second determination unit. A second suggestion control means for performing control so that the second suggestion effect is performed, wherein the avoidance means performs the suggestion effect over a plurality of variation effects under the control of the suggestion control means, This is to prevent not only the suggestion effect but also the second suggestion effect from being performed by the control of the second suggestion control means for at least the first variation effect performed by the control. Gaming machine F2, characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved in the gaming machine F1. That is, it is determined by the second determination unit whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect performed with the same content as the suggestion effect without being based on the information regarding the lottery content output from the second output unit. If it is determined by the determination means that the second suggestion effect is to be executed, the second suggestion effect is performed by the control of the second suggestion control device for one variation effect performed by the display device under the control of the variation control device. Will be On the other hand, after the suggestion effect has been performed over a plurality of variable effects by the control of the suggestion control means, at least the first variation effect performed by the control of the variation control means is controlled by the avoidance means. The second suggestion effect is also prevented from being performed by the control of the second suggestion control means. Thereby, even when the second suggestion effect is performed with the same content as the suggestion effect for one variation effect, after the suggestion effect is performed over a plurality of variation effects by the control of the suggestion control means, Subsequently, the execution of the second suggestion effect is avoided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the expectation of the suggested effect by performing the second suggested effect performed with the same content following the suggested effect. Therefore, a highly entertaining suggested effect can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, when the determination unit determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the determination unit includes a determination unit that determines the number of variable effects for performing the suggestion effect. Each time a suggestion effect is performed for the effect, the control device includes a counting unit that counts the number of variable effects that have caused the suggestion effect, and the avoidance unit is configured to perform the change that performs the suggestion effect determined by the determination unit. On the basis of the number of effects and the number of variable effects counted by the counting means, and the number of variable effects performed by the suggestion control means under the control of the suggestion control means, the suggestion effect is performed over the number of variable effects determined by the determination means. Detecting means for detecting that the suggestion effect has been performed by the detecting means. For at least the first variation effect that by pressure, the gaming machine and wherein the suggested effect the control of the suggested control means is to avoid being performed F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determining means determines that the suggested effect is to be performed, the determining means determines the number of variable effects for performing the suggested effect. Further, when the suggestion effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects by the control of the suggestion control means, each time the suggestion effect is performed on the variable effect, the number of the variable effects that caused the suggestion effect to be performed is counted by the counting means. Counted by. Here, the determining means based on the number of the variable effects for performing the suggestion effect determined by the determining device and the number of the variable effects for which the suggestion effect is performed by the control of the suggestion control device, counted by the counting device. The detection means detects that the suggestion effect has been performed over the number of variable effects determined by the above. Then, when the detection means detects that the suggestion effect has been completed, thereafter, the suggestion effect may be performed by the control of the suggestion control device for at least the first variation effect performed by the control of the variation control device. Be avoided. Thus, it can be easily determined that the suggestion effect has been performed under the control of the suggestion control device for a plurality of variable effects by the number of the variable effects for performing the suggestion effect determined by the determination means, and the suggestion effect is performed. After the change, it is possible to easily avoid performing the suggestion effect at least for the variable effect performed first.

  In the gaming machine F3, when the determination unit determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the sub control unit determines that the number of variable effects for performing the suggestion effect determined by the determination unit is one. A variable effect number storage means for storing the added value, wherein the count means subtracts one from the value stored in the variable effect number storage means each time a suggestion effect is performed for the variable effect. The detection means counts the number of variable effects that have caused the suggestion effect to be performed, and the detection means is stored in the variable effect number storage means when the suggestion effect is being performed under the control of the suggestion control means. If the calculated value is 1, the completion of the suggested effect is detected over the number of variable effects determined by the determining means, and the avoiding means completes the suggested effect by the detecting means. After that, while the value stored in the variable effect number storage means is 1, the variable effect performed by the control of the variable control means is not influenced by the suggestion effect by the control of the suggestion control means. A gaming machine F4 characterized by avoiding being performed.

  According to the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F3. That is, when the determination unit determines that the suggested effect is to be executed, a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of variable effects for performing the suggested effect determined by the determination unit is stored in the variable effect number storage unit, Each time a suggestion effect is performed on the variable effect, the value stored in the variable effect number storage unit is subtracted by one by the counting means, so that the number of the variable effects on which the suggestion effect is performed is counted. If the value stored in the variable effect number storage means is 1 while the suggestion effect is being performed by the control of the suggestion control means, the suggestion effect has been completed over the number of variable effects determined by the determination means. This is detected by the detecting means. After the detection, while the value stored in the variable effect number storage means is 1, the avoidance means avoids the suggestion effect by the suggestion control means for the variable effect performed by the control of the fluctuation control means. Is done. Thus, the value obtained by adding 1 to the number of variable effects for performing the suggested effect determined by the determining means is stored in the variable effect number storage means, and each time the variable effect is performed, the variable effect number By simply subtracting one from the value stored in the storage means, it is possible to easily control the detection of the completion of the suggested effect and the avoidance of the suggested effect after the detection. Therefore, after the suggestion effect is completed, if a process for avoiding that the suggestion effect is performed at least for the first time in the variable effect is implemented in the sub-control means, a program for performing the process can be easily constructed. It is possible to suppress the overall program from being complicated by implementation.

  In the gaming machine F4, after the sub-control means detects that the suggestion effect has been completed by the detection means, the control unit controls the change control means to perform a fluctuation effect by the display means. A gaming machine F5 comprising updating means for setting a value stored in the game device to 0.

  According to the gaming machine F5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F4. That is, when the sub-control means detects that the suggestion effect has been completed by the detection means and performs a fluctuation effect by the display means under the control of the fluctuation control means, the value stored in the fluctuation effect number storage means is updated by the update means. Is set to 0 by Here, when the value stored in the variable effect number storage unit is 1, the avoiding unit is for avoiding the suggestion effect for the variable effect. Therefore, the suggestion effect is avoided for one variation effect performed after the suggestion effect is performed, and thereafter, the value stored in the variation effect number storage unit is set to 0, so that the suggestion control unit is again activated. Can be set to a state in which a suggestion effect can be performed by the control of. Therefore, the appearance frequency of the suggested effect can be increased, so that a more entertaining suggested effect can be provided to the player.

  In any of the gaming machines F3 to F5, the sub-control unit uses the start information stored in the storage unit of the main control unit when the determination unit determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed. And determining means for determining the number of pieces of starting information obtained before the starting information based on which the determining means executes the suggestion effect, and the determining means specifies the number of pieces of starting information obtained by the determining means. A gaming machine F6, wherein the number of variable effects for performing the suggestion effect is determined according to the number of the start information.

  According to the gaming machine F6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved in any of the gaming machines F3 to F5. That is, when the determination unit determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed by the determination unit, the identification unit is the start information stored in the storage unit of the main control unit, and the determination unit executes the suggestion effect. The number of pieces of start information obtained before the start information based on which the determination is made is specified. Then, in accordance with the number of start information specified by the specifying means, the number of variable effects for performing the suggested effect is determined by the determining means. With this, when it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be performed, the start information stored in the storage unit and the start information acquired before the start information that triggered the suggestion effect is obtained. When a lottery is performed and a fluctuating effect is performed, control can be performed such that a suggestive effect is performed on the fluctuating effect. Then, with the configurations shown in the gaming machines F3 to F5, a program for performing such control can be easily constructed, and the implementation can prevent the overall program from becoming complicated.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the sub-control unit includes a lottery content storage unit that stores the lottery content output from the second output unit, and obtains an effect control signal output from the first output unit. In this case, the lottery content extracting means for extracting the lottery content determined based on the starting information derived from the lottery result that is the basis of the production of the effect control signal from the lottery content storage means, and an output from the first output means. The rendered effect control signal and the lottery content extracted by the lottery content extraction means are provided with corresponding determination means for determining whether or not the content is appropriate, and the suggestion control means includes a corresponding determination means, When it is determined that the effect control means and the content of the lottery are not appropriate, the gaming machine F7 controls so that the suggested effect is not executed.

  According to the gaming machine F7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved in any of the gaming machines F1 to F6. That is, in the sub-control means, a lottery content storage means for storing the lottery content output from the second output means is provided, and when the effect control signal output from the first output means is obtained, the effect control The lottery content determined based on the start information from which the lottery result that is the basis of the signal generation is derived is extracted from the lottery content storage unit by the lottery content extraction unit. Then, the effect control signal output from the first output means and the lottery content extracted by the lottery content extraction means are judged by the corresponding determination means as to whether they are appropriate, and the effect control means and the lottery content are determined. If it is determined that the suggestion effect is not appropriate, the suggestion control unit controls the suggestion effect to be not executed. If the effect control signal and the lottery content are not appropriate, the effect control signal or the content of the lottery may be destroyed, and performing a suggestive effect in such a case may mislead the player. Although there is a possibility, in the present embodiment, a suggestion effect is not performed in such a case, so that it is possible to suppress giving a misunderstanding to the player.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the sub control means includes avoidance information storage means capable of storing avoidance information for instructing avoidance of execution of the suggestion effect, and the suggestion control means includes a suggestion effect over a predetermined number of fluctuation effects. Is performed, the avoidance information storage unit includes an avoidance information writing unit that writes the avoidance information. The avoidance unit is configured to control the change control unit when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage unit. The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that a suggestion effect is prevented from being performed by the control of the suggestion control means at least for a variable effect performed at least first by the control of (1).

  According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the sub-control means is provided with avoidance information storage means capable of storing avoidance information for instructing avoidance of execution of the suggestion effect, and the suggestion effect is controlled by the suggestion control means over a predetermined number of fluctuation effects. When performed, the avoidance information is written into the avoidance information storage means by the avoidance information writing means. Then, the avoidance means, when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means, indicates that the suggestion effect is performed by the control of the suggestion control means with respect to at least the first variation effect performed by the control of the variation control means. To avoid. In this way, when a suggestion effect is performed over a predetermined number of variable effects, simply writing avoidance information in the avoidance information storage means can easily prevent the suggestion effect from being performed thereafter.

  In the gaming machine G1, when the determination unit determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the determination unit includes a determination unit for determining the number of variable effects for performing the suggestion effect. The gaming machine G2, wherein the avoidance information is written in the avoidance information storage means when the suggestion effect is performed for the number of variable effects determined by the means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1. That is, when the determining means determines that the suggested effect is to be performed, the determining means determines the number of variable effects for performing the suggested effect. Then, when a suggestion effect is performed for the number of variable effects determined by the determination unit, the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage unit by the avoidance information writing unit. Thereby, after the suggestion effect has been performed for the number of variable effects determined by the determination means, simply writing the avoidance information in the avoidance information storage means can easily and reliably ensure that the suggestion effect is performed thereafter. Can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine G2, when the sub-control unit determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed by the determination unit, the sub-control unit is the start information stored in the storage unit of the main control unit. Means for specifying the number of pieces of start information obtained before the start information based on which the suggestion effect is determined to be executed by the means, wherein the determination means includes the number of pieces of the start information specified by the specifying means. A game machine G3 for determining the number of variable effects for performing the suggestion effect in accordance with the following.

  According to the gaming machine G3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G2. That is, when the determination unit determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed by the determination unit, the identification unit is the start information stored in the storage unit of the main control unit, and the determination unit executes the suggestion effect. The number of pieces of start information obtained before the start information based on which the determination is made is specified. Then, in accordance with the number of start information specified by the specifying means, the number of variable effects for performing the suggested effect is determined by the determining means. With this, when it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be performed, the start information stored in the storage unit and the start information acquired before the start information that triggered the suggestion effect is obtained. When a lottery is performed and a fluctuating effect is performed, control can be performed such that a suggestive effect is performed on the fluctuating effect. Then, with the configuration shown in the gaming machine G2, after the suggestion effect is performed for the variable effect corresponding to the start information acquired before the start information that triggered the suggestion effect, the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means. By simply writing, it is possible to easily and reliably avoid the suggestion effect being performed thereafter.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means, the sub-control means performs a fluctuation effect by the display means under the control of the fluctuation control means. A gaming machine G4 comprising means for clearing the avoidance information stored in the avoidance information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved in any of the gaming machines G1 to G3. That is, in the sub-control means, when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means, and when the fluctuation display is performed by the display means under the control of the fluctuation control means, the avoidance information stored in the avoidance information storage means is cleared. Is done. Here, the avoidance means is for avoiding the suggestion effect for the variable effect when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means. Therefore, while the suggestion effect is avoided for one variation effect performed after the suggestion effect is performed, the avoidance information is cleared thereafter, so that the suggestion effect by the control of the suggestion control means can be performed again. can do. Therefore, the appearance frequency of the suggested effect can be increased, so that a more entertaining suggested effect can be provided to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the avoidance information storage means correlates with one or more pieces of start information stored in the storage means and executes a suggestion effect with respect to a variable effect performed by the start information. Is configured to be able to store avoidance information instructing the avoidance of, when the variable effect is performed under the control of the variable control means, the avoidance means is associated with the start information used for the lottery of the variable effect, If the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means, it is to avoid that a suggestion effect is performed by the control of the suggestion control means for the fluctuation effect, and the avoidance information writing means, When the suggestion effect is performed over the number of variable effects determined by the determining means, starting from the next variable effect to the predetermined number of variable effects, Gaming machine G5 in association with the broadcast, each said avoidance information and writes the avoidance information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine G5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved in any of the gaming machines G1 to G4. That is, the avoidance information storage means can store, in association with one or more pieces of start information stored in the storage means, avoidance information for instructing the avoidance of the suggested effect to be performed for the variable effect performed by the start information. The avoidance means is configured such that, when the fluctuation effect is performed under the control of the fluctuation control means, the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means in association with the start information used for the lottery of the fluctuation effect. It is configured to prevent the suggestion effect from being performed by the control of the suggestion control means with respect to the variable effect. On the other hand, when the avoidance information writing means causes the suggestion effect to be performed over the number of variable effects determined by the determination means, the avoidance information writing means is used in the lottery for a predetermined number of variable effects from the next variable effect to be executed. The avoidance information is written into the avoidance information storage means in association with the start information. This makes it possible to easily prevent the suggestion effect from being performed for a predetermined number of change effects from the next change effect performed.

  In the gaming machine G5, when the avoidance information writing means causes the suggestion effect to be performed over the number of variable effects determined by the determining means, the starting information used in the lottery only for the next variable effect to be executed. A gaming machine G6 wherein the avoidance information is written in the avoidance information storage means in association with information.

  According to the gaming machine G6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G5. That is, when the avoidance information writing unit performs the suggestion effect over the number of variable effects determined by the determination unit, only the next variable effect to be executed is associated with the start information used in the lottery. Then, the avoidance information is written into the avoidance information storage means. Therefore, the suggestion effect is avoided only for one variation effect performed after the suggestion effect has been performed, so that the suggestion effect by the control of the suggestion control unit can be again performed. Therefore, the appearance frequency of the suggested effect can be increased, so that a more entertaining suggested effect can be provided to the player.

  Main control means for performing main control of the game, sub-control means for performing control based on a control signal from the main control means, and a fluctuating effect accompanying dynamic display of identification information are performed by the control of the sub-control means. A display means for providing a predetermined game value to a player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in a variable effect performed by the display means. Means for detecting the establishment of the start condition, and starting information acquired with the establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means, by a predetermined number until a lottery based on the start information is performed. And a lottery means for performing a lottery based on one piece of start information acquired first and stored in the storage means when the variable effect is started by the display means, and the lottery. Generating means for generating an effect control signal based on the lottery result by the stage, first output means for outputting the effect control signal generated by the generating means to the sub-control means, and effect control signal by the first output means Before the is output, the determination means for determining the content of the lottery by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal based on the start information used for the lottery, and the content of the lottery determined by the determination means Second output means for outputting information to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means controls a fluctuation effect by the display means based on the effect control signal output from the first output means. And, based on the information about the lottery content output from the second output means, whether or not to execute a suggestion effect indicating the lottery content over a plurality of variable effects. The start information stored in the storage means of the main control means when the determination means determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed, and the suggestion effect is determined by the determination means. A specifying means for specifying the number of pieces of start information acquired before the start information based on which the determination is made, and a variable effect for performing the suggestion effect in the suggestion effect performed based on the determination by the determination means. The number of the start information specified by the specifying means is determined to be equal to or less than the number of the start information, and if the determination means determines that the suggestion effect is to be performed, the change of the number determined by the determination means A gaming machine H1 comprising: suggestion control means for controlling a suggestion effect to be performed throughout the effect.

  According to the gaming machine H1, when the main control unit detects the establishment of the start condition by the detection unit, the start information acquired along with the establishment of the start condition is changed until the lottery based on the start information is performed. During this period, a predetermined number is stored in the storage means as an upper limit. Then, when the variable effect is started by the display device, the lottery device performs the lottery based on the one start information acquired first and stored in the storage device, and the effect control signal is generated based on the lottery result. The effect control signal generated by the generating means is output to the sub-control means by the first output means. With this, in the sub-control means, a fluctuation effect is performed on the display means under the control of the fluctuation control means based on the effect control signal output from the first output means. When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in the variable effect, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, since the variable effect is performed by the effect control signal based on the lottery result, a predetermined game value is given to the player according to the result of the lottery performed based on the start information. On the other hand, in the main control means, before the effect control signal is output by the first output means, the content of the lottery by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal is determined based on the start information used in the lottery. And information on the content of the lottery is output to the sub-control means by the second output means. Then, based on the information on the lottery content output from the second output means, the sub control means determines that the suggestion effect suggesting the lottery content is to be executed over a plurality of variable effects by the determining means. The start information stored in the storage means of the means, the number of pieces of start information obtained before the start information based on which the determination means is to perform the suggestion effect is identified by the identification means, and the suggestion effect is determined. Is determined by the determining means within a range not more than the number of start information specified by the specifying means. When the determining means determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the suggestion control means controls the suggestion effect so that the suggestion effect is performed over the number of variable effects determined by the determining means. That is, the suggestion effect is not necessarily performed for all the variable effects corresponding to the start information acquired before the start information based on which the determination of the execution of the suggestion effect is made, and a part of the start effect is performed. It is to be performed for a variable effect corresponding to the information. Therefore, when the suggestion effect is started, the suggestion effect is not necessarily performed over the variable effect corresponding to all the start information stored in the storage means at that time. It is difficult for the player to understand whether the game is likely to be performed. Therefore, since the player can continue the game while guessing it, it is possible to provide the player with a highly interesting suggestive effect.

  In the gaming machine H1, in the suggestion effect executed based on the determination by the determination unit, the determination unit sets the number of the variable effects to be 1 or more and the number of the start information specified by the identification unit. A gaming machine H2 which is selected and determined each time from a range.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, in the suggestion effect executed based on the determination by the determination unit, the number of variable effects for performing the suggestion effect is one or more and specified by the identification unit. Since it is selected and determined each time by the determining means from a range that is equal to or less than the number of start information, the number of variable effects in which the suggested effect is performed can be changed each time. Thus, it becomes more difficult for the player to understand which start information is likely to be given a predetermined game value, and the player can continue the game by guessing while enjoying it more. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a suggestive effect that is more interesting.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the sub control unit determines whether or not to execute a second suggestion effect performed with the same content as the suggestion effect without being based on the information regarding the lottery content output from the second output unit. A second determining means for determining whether the second suggestion effect is to be executed by the second determining means, and a variation effect performed by the display means under the control of the variation control means. And a second suggestion control means for controlling the second suggestion effect to be performed.

  According to the gaming machine H3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2. That is, it is determined by the second determination unit whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect performed with the same content as the suggestion effect without being based on the information regarding the lottery content output from the second output unit. If it is determined by the determination means that the second suggestion effect is to be executed, the second suggestion effect is performed by the control of the second suggestion control device for one variation effect performed by the display device under the control of the variation control device. Will be Here, when the suggestion effect is performed, it is difficult for the gaming machine H3 to recognize which starting information is likely to be given a predetermined game value in the start information, and the gaming machine H3 has the same contents as the suggestion effect. When the second suggestion effect to be performed is performed, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the effect is the suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect. Therefore, the player can continue the game while guessing whether the effect is a suggestion effect or a second suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a suggestive effect that is more interesting.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the sub-control unit performs a suggestion effect for a variable effect performed by the start information in association with one or more pieces of start information stored in the storage unit. The suggestion instruction information storage means capable of storing the suggestion instruction information indicating the instruction, and when it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be performed by the determination means, based on the number of variable effects for performing the suggestion effect determined by the determination means. A suggestion instruction information storage unit that stores the suggestion instruction information in the suggestion instruction information storage unit, in association with the start information used for the lottery of the variable production that causes the suggestion effect to be performed. Upon receiving the effect control signal output from the first output means, the start information used for the lottery of the variable effect executed based on the effect control signal is generated. Gaming machine H4 to attach response, wherein the suggested instruction information if it is stored in the suggested instruction information storage means, and controls so as suggested effect is made to the variation effect.

  According to the gaming machine H4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved in any of the gaming machines H1 to H3. That is, in association with one or more pieces of start information stored in the storage means, a suggestion instruction information storage means capable of storing suggestion instruction information for instructing to perform a suggestion effect for a variable effect performed by the start information. Is provided in the sub-control means, and when it is determined by the determining means to execute the suggested effect, the variable effect of performing the suggested effect is performed based on the number of variable effects for performing the suggested effect determined by the determining means. The suggestion instruction information is stored in the suggestion instruction information storage means by the suggestion instruction information storage means in association with the start information used for the lottery. Then, the suggestion control means, in response to receiving the effect control signal output from the first output means, in association with the start information used for the lottery of the variable effect executed based on the effect control signal, When the suggestion instruction information is stored in the suggestion instruction information storage means, control is performed such that the suggestion effect is performed for the variable effect. Thereby, in the case where the suggestion effect is configured to be performed on the variable effect corresponding to a part of the start information acquired before the start information based on which the determination of the execution of the suggestion effect is made, Even so, a suggestion effect can be easily performed for a part of the fluctuation effect, and a program related to the control can be simplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the sub-control unit may include a lottery content storage unit that stores the lottery content output from the second output unit, and an acquisition of an effect control signal output from the first output unit. In this case, the lottery content extracting means for extracting the lottery content determined based on the starting information derived from the lottery result that is the basis of the production of the effect control signal from the lottery content storage means, and an output from the first output means. The rendered effect control signal and the lottery content extracted by the lottery content extraction means are provided with corresponding determination means for determining whether or not the content is appropriate, and the suggestion control means includes a corresponding determination means, The gaming machine H5, wherein when it is determined that the effect control means and the content of the lottery are not appropriate, the gaming machine H5 controls so that the suggested effect is not executed.

  According to the gaming machine H5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved in any of the gaming machines H1 to H4. That is, in the sub-control means, a lottery content storage means for storing the lottery content output from the second output means is provided, and when the effect control signal output from the first output means is obtained, the effect control The lottery content determined based on the start information from which the lottery result that is the basis of the signal generation is derived is extracted from the lottery content storage unit by the lottery content extraction unit. Then, the effect control signal output from the first output means and the lottery content extracted by the lottery content extraction means are judged by the corresponding determination means as to whether they are appropriate, and the effect control means and the lottery content are determined. If it is determined that the suggestion effect is not appropriate, the suggestion control unit controls the suggestion effect to be not executed. If the effect control signal and the lottery content are not appropriate, the effect control signal or the content of the lottery may be destroyed, and performing a suggestive effect in such a case may mislead the player. Although there is a possibility, in the present embodiment, a suggestion effect is not performed in such a case, so that it is possible to suppress giving a misunderstanding to the player.

  In the gaming machines H1 to H5, the sub-control means performs at least the first time under the control of the suggestion control means, after performing the suggestion effect over the number of variation effects determined by the determination means, under the control of the suggestion control means. The gaming machine I1 further comprising: avoiding means for avoiding performing a suggestion effect under the control of the suggestion control means with respect to the variable effect performed on the game machine I1.

  According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the following effects are provided. That is, when the suggestion effect is performed by the control of the suggestion control device over the number of variation effects determined by the determination device, the sub-control device controls the suggestion control device for at least the first variation effect. Is avoided by the avoiding means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the expectation of the suggested effect in the player by performing two or more suggested effects in succession. Therefore, a highly entertaining suggested effect can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine I1, the sub-control means includes avoidance information storage means capable of storing avoidance information for instructing avoidance of execution of the suggestion effect, and the suggestion control means includes a variable effect of the number determined by the determination means. When the suggestion effect is performed over, the avoidance information storage unit includes an avoidance information writing unit that writes the avoidance information, and the avoidance unit is configured to store the avoidance information when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage unit. A gaming machine I2 characterized in that a suggestion effect is prevented from being performed under the control of the suggestion control means for at least the first variation effect performed by the control of the variation control means.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1. That is, the sub-control means is provided with avoidance information storage means capable of storing avoidance information for instructing avoidance of the execution of the suggestion effect. Is performed, the avoidance information is written into the avoidance information storage means by the avoidance information writing means. Then, the avoidance means, when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means, indicates that the suggestion effect is performed by the control of the suggestion control means with respect to at least the first variation effect performed by the control of the variation control means. To avoid. As described above, when the suggestion effect is performed over the number of variable effects determined by the determination unit, simply writing the avoidance information in the avoidance information storage unit can easily prevent the suggestion effect from being performed thereafter. Can be.

  In the gaming machine I2, the avoidance information storage unit instructs, in association with one or more pieces of start information stored in the storage unit, an avoidance of the execution of the suggested effect with respect to the variable effect executed by the start information. The avoidance means is configured to be able to store the avoidance information, and when the fluctuation effect is performed under the control of the fluctuation control means, the avoidance information is associated with the start information used for the lottery of the fluctuation effect. If it is stored in the information storage means, it is to prevent the suggestion effect from being performed under the control of the suggestion control means for the fluctuating effect, and the avoidance information writing means is determined by the determination means. When a suggested effect is performed over the given number of variable effects, a predetermined number of variable effects from the next variable effect are associated with the start information used in the lottery. Gaming machine I3 respectively the avoidance information and writes the avoidance information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine I3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I2. That is, the avoidance information storage means can store, in association with one or more pieces of start information stored in the storage means, avoidance information for instructing the avoidance of the suggested effect to be performed for the variable effect performed by the start information. The avoidance means is configured such that, when the fluctuation effect is performed under the control of the fluctuation control means, the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means in association with the start information used for the lottery of the fluctuation effect. It is configured to prevent the suggestion effect from being performed by the control of the suggestion control means with respect to the variable effect. On the other hand, when the avoidance information writing means causes the suggestion effect to be performed over the number of variable effects determined by the determination means, the avoidance information writing means is used in the lottery for a predetermined number of variable effects from the next variable effect to be executed. The avoidance information is written into the avoidance information storage means in association with the start information. This makes it possible to easily prevent the suggestion effect from being performed for a predetermined number of change effects from the next change effect performed.

  In the gaming machine I2, when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means, when the variation effect is performed by the display means under the control of the variation control means, the sub-control means stores the avoidance information. A gaming machine I4 comprising means for clearing the avoidance information stored in the means.

  According to the gaming machine I4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I2. That is, in the sub-control means, when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means, and when the fluctuation display is performed by the display means under the control of the fluctuation control means, the avoidance information stored in the avoidance information storage means is cleared. Is done. Here, the avoidance means is for avoiding the suggestion effect for the variable effect when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means. Therefore, while the suggestion effect is avoided for one variation effect performed after the suggestion effect is performed, the avoidance information is cleared thereafter, so that the suggestion effect by the control of the suggestion control means can be performed again. can do. Therefore, the appearance frequency of the suggested effect can be increased, so that a more entertaining suggested effect can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine I3, when the avoidance information writing unit causes the suggestion effect to be performed over the number of variable effects determined by the determining unit, the starting information used in the lottery only for the next variable effect to be executed. A gaming machine I5 wherein the avoidance information is written in the avoidance information storage means in association with information.

  According to the gaming machine I5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I3. That is, when the avoidance information writing unit performs the suggestion effect over the number of variable effects determined by the determination unit, only the next variable effect to be executed is associated with the start information used in the lottery. Then, the avoidance information is written into the avoidance information storage means. Therefore, the suggestion effect is avoided only for one variation effect performed after the suggestion effect has been performed, so that the suggestion effect by the control of the suggestion control unit can be again performed. Therefore, the appearance frequency of the suggested effect can be increased, so that a more entertaining suggested effect can be provided to the player.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H5, and I1 to I5, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine J1 characterized in that: Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is a case where the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable a ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H5, and I1 to I5, the gaming machines are slot machines. A gaming machine J2, characterized in that: Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H5, I1 to I5, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine J3 characterized by being integrated with a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effect images such as fluctuation effects are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device in order to improve the interest of the game. The fluctuating effect is an effect that is started when a ball enters (a starting prize) a ball at an entrance (starting opening). A total of nine symbols and the like are displayed, the symbols and the like displayed based on predetermined game conditions are scrolled, and when the scrolling is stopped, the stopped symbols become a predetermined combination at a predetermined stop position. If you have a jackpot.
In addition, during scrolling of symbols or the like, an entertainment effect (for example, an effect by a reach display, etc.) which suggests in advance that a game state (for example, a jackpot) advantageous to the player is obtained with a higher probability than usual. Has been performed, and a device has been devised to give the player a sense of expectation for an advantageous game.
As one type of the entertainment effect, a suggestion effect that continuously suggests a transition to an advantageous game state over a plurality of variable effects is known (Patent Document 1: Japanese Utility Model Laid-Open No. 7-24383). By this suggestive effect, it is possible to give a player an expectation of a gaming state that is advantageous not only for one variable effect but for a plurality of variable effects, thereby improving the interest of the game.
However, in the above-described suggested effects in a conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that the expectation for the suggested effects may be diminished because no consideration is given to the manner in which the suggested effects are caused to appear.
For example, immediately after the completion of one suggestion effect, another suggestion effect is executed continuously, so that the expectation for each suggestion effect is diminished, or the timing of the start winning prize and the execution of the suggestion effect start. Depending on the relationship with the timing to be performed, it is easy for the player to infer that the degree of expectation for the started suggested effect is zero, and there is a possibility that the player may lose interest in the suggested effect.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of providing a highly entertaining suggested effect to a player.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
110 Main control device (main control means)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of sub-control means)
114 Display control device (part of sub-control means)
203b, 203j Reserved ball storage area (storage means)
203b5 Prefetch execution flag (judgment state storage means)
203d first prefetch execution area (second storage means)
203d5 Prefetch suspension count storage area (standby count storage unit, second standby count storage unit)
203e second prefetch execution area (third storage means)
203e5 Prefetch pending count storage area (standby count storage unit, third standby count storage unit)
203f First prefetching processing flag (second storage state indicating means)
203g Second prefetching processing flag (third storage state indicating means)
203k prefetch pending count storage area (standby count storage means)
223b Prefetch information storage area (judgment information storage means, lottery content storage means)
223e Continuous notice execution counter (variable effect number storage means)
223g prefetch information storage area (judgment information storage means, lottery content storage means, avoidance information storage means, suggestion instruction information storage means)
C1 First random number counter (part of start information)
C2 First contact type counter (part of start information)
C3 Stop pattern selection counter (part of start information)
CS1 fluctuation type counter (part of start information)
S101 (first output means, second output means)
S201 (Detection means)
S207, S211 (second storage control means, storage control means)
S208 (state setting means, second storage state setting means)
S208 (state setting means, third storage state setting means)
S306 to S308 (waiting number subtraction means)
S321 (wait count reduction means)
S401 to S413 (lottery means)
S414, S415 (generation means)
S701 Look-ahead processing (judgment means)
S759 (waiting number acquisition means)
S769 (waiting number acquisition means)
S795 (waiting number acquisition means)
S1007, S1008 (Mode changing means)
S1005: No, S1010 (part of suggestion control means)
S1009 (part of corresponding judgment means, lottery content extraction means, suggestion control means)
S1015 Continuous notice determination processing (effect setting means)
S1019 (judgment information storage control means)
S1020 Continuous notice determination processing (determination means)
S1037 (Specifying means)
S1042 (determination means)
S1051 (determination means)
S1052 (Suggestion instruction information storage means)
S1102 to S1109 (variation control means)
S1105 (part of corresponding judgment means, lottery content extraction means, suggestion control means)
S1111 to S1113 (second determination means)
S1114 to S1117 (part of suggestion control means)
S1116 (counting means, updating means)
S1117: No (Avoidance means, detection means)
S1118, S1119 (second suggestion control means)
S1131 (Avoidance means)
S1132 to S1134 (part of suggestion control means)
S1134 (Avoidance information writing means)
S1135 (second suggestion control means)

Claims (1)

Main control means for performing main control of the game, sub-control means operating based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and image display means for displaying an image based on control by the sub-control means Gaming machine
The sub-control means,
Image drawing means for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means;
First image storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of image information used for drawing an image by the image drawing means;
First display specifying means for specifying, from a plurality of display modes, a predetermined display mode for dynamically displaying identification information on the image display unit in response to a predetermined command received from the main control unit;
First defining information storage means for storing first defining information defining rendering information indicating information necessary for rendering in each display mode for each screen;
First specifying means for specifying the first prescribed information corresponding to the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means;
Updating means updated every predetermined time,
Each time the updating unit is updated, drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing unit to draw an image for one screen based on the updated drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updating unit. Drawing instruction information generating means for generating
Measuring means capable of measuring time,
The image drawing means draws an image for one screen using image information based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means,
The display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the image display means is determined in advance for each of the display modes, the time required from the start of the dynamic display to the end thereof,
The sub-control means,
When the required time has elapsed since the display was started in the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying unit, the first specified information to be continuously displayed and used for the dynamic continuation display of the identification information is specified. A second specifying means,
When the command transmitted from the main control unit is the predetermined command, the sub-control unit that has received the predetermined command executes dynamic display of identification information of a time corresponding to the predetermined command in a specific display mode. To do
There are a plurality of times corresponding to the predetermined command,
The display mode of the dynamic continuation display of the identification information that is continuously displayed when the required time has elapsed, regardless of the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying unit is the display mode of any required time. Is the same display mode in which the identification information repeats a predetermined movement,
The sub-control means,
Predetermined display execution means for performing a predetermined display on the image display means when the operation means operable by the player is operated,
When a predetermined command is received from the main control unit during the dynamic continuation display period of the identification information, the final display of the dynamic display of the identification information executed before the dynamic continuation display of the identification information is performed. Dynamic display control means for starting the dynamic display of identification information based on the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means in response to the received predetermined command, by the image display means,
A gaming machine wherein the predetermined display by the predetermined display executing means is not executed at least during a period in which the dynamic display of the identification information is performed on the image display means.

Images